THE LIBRARY
OF
THE UNIVERSITY
OF CALIFORNIA
LOS ANGELES
THE
*
HOLOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
BY
IOU OF "A SYSTEM OF PHOXOSCRIPT AND PHOXOTYPY," ETC.
CHICAGO:
THE MORRELL VE.
1901.
Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1901, by
CHARLES MORRELL,
In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington, D. C.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
CONTENTS.
PAGE
PREFACE 5
I NTRODUCTION 11
PROLOGUE 23
THE ELEMENTARY STYLE.
CHAPTER
I. The Consonants and Breathings 29
II. The Vowels, Semivowels, Etc 39
III. Circles and Loops. Initials of Proper Names. Punctuation
and Other Murks 60
IV. Hooks, Etc 79
V. Downward and Upward R, L and Sh 98
VI. The Halving and Lengthening Principles 102
VII. Prefixes, Affixes, Etc 116
Elementary Style Reading Lessons and Exercises 133
Elementary Style Writing Lessons and Exercises 171
THE REPORTING STYLE.
VIII. Omission of Vowels and Diphthongs. The Vowel Scale and
Position. Logographs and Seinigraphs 207
IX. Words Other than Logographs and Semigraphs. Homographs,
Variagraphs. Voeagraphs, Brevigraphs and Vocabulary 230
X. Phraseography 344
XI. Various Expedients 419
XII. Significant Marks, Etc. Reporting Trials, Hearings, Etc 434
Reporting Exercises 441
Reporting Style Reading Exercises 443
Reporting Style Writing Exercises 463
Directions for Attaining Speed 484
Stenotypic Connected Matter 485
Index 487
3
PREFACE.
The new work on phonography here presented is the
result of recent discoveries in phonetics. When the
author first began the study of Greek, he was im-
pressed with the peculiarity of the representation of
the spiritus or breathings. He also observed that
while the aspirate or rough breathing (spiritus asper,
Trvevfjia Saa-v) was stated to be equivalent in pronunci-
ation to the English II, either no explanation of the
other, the lene or smooth breathing (spiritus lenis,
Trveu/j-a i/rtXoV) was given or a very indefinite one. In
the early part of the year 1884 he began the prepara-
tion of a system of connective vowel phonography
which was in due course published in the year 1890
under the title of "A System of Phonic Writing. "
' O
While engaged on this work and in the study of phonet-
ics in its application to the practice of phonography
he made the discovery of the nature of the lene and
aspirate and their relation to each other. At once the
beauty and philosophy of the Greek representation of
the breathings became apparent and the mystery per-
taining to them which had hitherto baffled modern
scholarship was solved and a means obtained by which
all the ancient alphabets might be interpreted. The
author believes he is the first to make this discovery,
w T hich is explained hereafter and was first published in
the "System of Phonic Writing" above mentioned.
In this work also was published the pairing of the
vowel sounds as short and long according to the Eng-
lish instead of the continental method which up to that
time had been followed by all works on phonetics.
(3 PREFACE.
The author has since adhered to this method although
for a long time he had no authority for so doing except
his disbelief in the scientific correctness of the other.
Eventually, however, while perfecting the "System of
Phonoscript and Phonotypy" mentioned in the Intro-
duction following, he made the discovery, explained
in that treatise, of the positions of vowel approx-
imation and thus was enabled to demonstrate the cor-
rectness of his pairing of the vowel sounds by the
physiological method. The English method is accord-
ingly considered as phonetically established and is
therefore also followed in the present volume and will
be found to lend additional legibility to phonography
besides rendering it more acceptable and easy of ac-
quisition by English writers and readers.
In the present work the vowels are represented by
small semicircles and dashes instead of dots and dashes
as in other works on phonography which method was
inaugurated to a certain extent in the "System of
Phonic Writing" above mentioned. In consequence
each vowel has a different form and therefore does not
depend upon its position either to the line of writing
or to the stem letter to distinguish it, but may be
written anywhere in respect to either. Vowel repre-
sentation and vocalization are thus rendered simple
instead of complex. Again, the discovery of the
nature of the breathings led also to the discovery of
that of the consonants and vowels as smooth and rough
while the method of representing the vowels by small
semicircles and dashes made it possible to dispense
altogether with stem letters for the lene and aspirate-
analogously to the (latter) Greek representation and
to indicate them respectively by leaving unshaded or
by shading the initial parts of vowels when the latter
occur alone and in other cases by light and heavy dots
and dashes, as explained hereafter in the text, thus
PREFACE. 7
solving the aspirate problem of phonography and at
the same time increasing its speed. Another feature
of the present work which adds to the legibility of
phonography is that downward li and L are never em-
ployed initially or when they would be the first stems
in words, but if used at all are written only medially
or finally. They thus never conflict with the same
forms for W and Y when the latter are the first stems
in words. Furthermore, the small semicircles for AY
and Y are abolished, being employed for vowels as
explained above. In lieu of them are substituted the
small angular characters hitherto mostly used for diph-
thongs, thus practically adding four new letters to
phonography and thereby still further increasing its
power and legibility.
There are many other improvements of phonography
in the following pages besides the above which are
original with the author but which need not be here
specified. The system of stenotypy also is an improve-
ment and believed to be the best thus far published.
By the use of this art much engraving of phono-
graphic characters for illustrative purposes in the body
of text books can be dispensed with. It is also much
more preferable for dictionaries than the engraved
forms since the latter sometimes become blurred or
are otherwise faulty. Finally, the arrangement of the
various subjects of the book, each complete in a
separate chapter, presents advantages for easily and
thoroughly mastering phonography not previously
attained.
Much has been said, pro and con, on the phono-
graphic vowel scales known as the ' ' old " and the
"new.'* When phonography was first published by
Isnno Pitman, in 1837, he took the scale of vowel
sounds from Walker's "Principles of Pronunciation"
prefixed to his dictionary. This scale, called the old,
was used in phonography up till 1858. In March of
PREFACE.
that year the order of the first and third place vowels
r- and ;i was inverted thus bringing into existence the
new vowel scale, which was then adopted by Mr. Pit-
man and has since been used in his works. Most
phonographers and phonographic authors, however,
refused, and still refuse, to adopt the new scale. The
following groupings represent the scales in contrast
with each other. It will be observed that the new
differs from the old only in the transposition of the
first and third place vowels e and ii.
OLD SCALE. NEW SCALE.'
u
The old is preferred in this work for the reason
that in it more words are written in the first position
than in either the second or third and consequently a
higher degree of speed can be attained than in the new
scale where many more words are written in the third
position than in either of the other two. Another
reason for preferring the old scale is that in the new
or inverted one, too many words of allied sound are
written in the same position. This requires them to
be so frequently distinguished by vocalization as to
seriously retard the speed of the writing. On the
other hand in the old scale a greater number of unlike,
that is, unallied, sounds are placed in the same position
and thus vocalization is generally rendered unnecessary.
In preparing this work the author has examined all
the English and American books and periodicals access-
ible, both stenographic and phonographic, many of
which are out of print. A few of these, as "The
Phonographic Class Book," by Andrews and Boyle, and
"The Phonographic Instructor, " by James C. Booth,
have, in some respects, never been surpassed Among
other works and treatises on phonetics, consulted or
PREFACE.
read in full, the following are worthy of special men-
tion: "A Hand Book of the English Language" and
"A Defense of Phonetic Spelling," by Dr. K. G.
Latham. Also the General Introduction to Storrs and
Smaliey's "American Phonetic Dictionary," by Dr. A.
J. Ellis, and numerous tracts and pamphlets published
by Mr. Isaac Pitman.
INTRODUCTION.
THE SPIR1TI, OR BREATHINGS.
The sounds, whether whispered or vocal, of every
language are produced by the breath passing through
the sounding, vowel and articulating organisms, situ-
ated in the throat and mouth. A sound can not be
made without breath. The breath is of two degrees,
either light or heavy, and is called smooth or rough.
These are also called Spiriti,* or Breathings. The
Romans called the one Spiritus Lenis, which means
soft or smooth breath, and the other Spiritus Asper,
which means rough breath. The light or smooth
breath, spiritus lenis, is the breath we breathe every
instant of our lives, sleeping or waking, and which is
necessary for our existence. The heavy or rough breath,
spiritus asper, is the smooth breath, spiritus lenis,
made heavy or rough. Sounds are also of two
degrees or kinds, either smooth or rough. A smooth
sound is produced by the smooth and a rough sound by
the rough breath passing through the sounding
organism.
The Greeks, in their latest alphabet, had no letter
to represent either of these breathings, but indicated
them by two different marks, one of which was placed
over every vowel letter that began a word. The
*The term "spiriti'' is used to indicate the plural in prefer-
ence to the classical one "spiritus. '
. ., INTRODUCTION'.
Romans had no marks for these breathings, hut rep-
resented one of them, the spiritus asper, or rough
breath, b,' the letter h. The other the spiritus lenis,
they left" out of their alphabet altogether. In the
Latin lanrua:ro it had no mark or letter of any
kind to indicate its existence, the vowel letter itself
without a mark standing for the sound produced
by the smooth breathing. The Moderns adopted
the alphabet of the Romans, and, accordingly, we
have only one breath letter, that of the spiritus
r, or rough breath, which is the letter h, and
nothing to indicate the existence of the other, it.-:
corresponding smooth breath. This has been the
cause of great confusion, for the letter h has thus
been . considered a consonant, which it is not.
Neither is it a vowel or sonant; it simply stands
for the rough breath. The Greeks, therefore,
considered the vowel letters as representing the differ-
ent sounds, and the smooth and the rough marks a-;
representing the breath, both smooth and rough which
created those sounds. The Romans considered the
vowel letters as representing the different sounds, and
the letter h not as creating, but as simply making the
sound rough. The Greek alphabet was, perhaps, the
more philosophic of the two, though the Roman was
the more practicable and legible.
This rough or smooth ?jreathtng is the connecting
link, or power, between the consonants and sonants,
for the consonants could not accompany the sonants if
there was no breath. Again, no language can bo
properly represented that does not have a sign for
each of these spiriti, or breathings. Also, botlrshould
bo 1-3 presented or both not. The smooth breathing is
a* much of an existence as thorough. To represent
one and not the other is liable to lead to errors in
language and in the interpretation of alphabets, or
else prevent them from being understood,; for wo can
IXTUOD17CTIOM. };;
not understand any alphabet unless we can perceive
the reason of its formation.
Were the alphabet to be represented in a manner
similar to that of the Greeks (which should not
be done), tho spiritin lenis, or smooth breathing
before the first letter "a" in the word "aha",
would have a sign or letter to represent it as the
spiritus asper or rough breathing before the third
letter "a" has a sign to represent it, which is the
letter "h". The Greeks held, and they were
correct from their standpoint and also as far as
they went, that the breathing, either smooth or
rough, and not the vowel commenced the word
and accordingly should be represented. That no
word, strictly speaking, commenced with a vowel and
could not, but that every word began with either a
breathing smooth or rough or a consonant. Hence
the mirks for the smooth and rough breathings over
the first vowels of all words that did not commence
with a consonant.
Although the smooth breathing exists, it is not
ordinarily noticeable to the ear in vocal speech any
more than is the wind which makes the voice through
a trumpet. We know that the wind or breath makes
the voice, but we hear the voice, not the breath. The
same reasoning applies to a steam whistle. This wind,
breath or steam that we do not hear in the voice of
this class of instruments corresponds to the 'spiritus
lenis or smooth breath that makes the smooth voice
through the human sonant organism and the latter
corresponds to the trumpet, whistle or other instru-
ment.
In the system of phonography in this book the
breathing and vowel sounding organism are practically
considered together and unseparated, because one can
not exist in speech without the other. The smooth or
light sounds produced, therefore, are represented by
14 IN'THOin-OTlON.
smooth or light characters, and the rough or heavy
sounds by rough or heavy characters.
The name of the smooth breath letter -f- is Aitch
(that is to say -f- aitch); that of the rough breath letter
H is Haitch. The sound of the former is a smooth
breath .sound only,* that of the latter is a rough breath
sound only, neither of which is sonant.
PHONOGRAPHY.
Phonography is a system of shorthand based strictly
on the sounds of language and intended to attain the
swiftness of rapid speech. Accordingly, the letters of
its alphabet are written with the simplest characters
possible. These are obtained from geometry and con-
sist fundamentally of a straight and a curved line and
a dot, each of which is formed with only a single motion
of the pen. The manner in which they are used is
explained in the following.
There are only two primary courses by which we can
go from a first point to a second one ; namely, by a
straight line and a curve. The straight line we can not
vary, but we can the curve, by starting from the first
point and proceeding on either side of the straight line
to the second point. This gives us three ways only of
going from a first to a second point ; namely, by
a straight line and two curves. The same is the case
in writing. Now each of these lines can be made only
in five different directions to or from the same point,
practicable for the hand in writing. We thus have
fifteen directions in all, and as each form and direction
can be readily distinguished apart and accordingly used
*The smooth breathing is not silent. It can be heard by
lengthening it out before it strikes the whispering or vocal
sonant organism, the same as in pronouncing the syllable
"ha", the "h" can be lengthened out before it strikes the
whispered or vocal "a". Both breathings may also be distinctly
heard by pronouncing the syllables "+ a" and "ha" and drawing
the breath inwardlj'.
INTRODUCTION* J5
for a letter we thus have fifteen letters, which are
known as the light stem letters of phonography.
The different directions in which the three strokes
above described are written are obtained from the
angles at which they stand in the following diagrams.
It will be seen that the straight strokes are radii and
the curved ones portions of circumferences of the
circle.
In the first diagram the circumference of the circle
is divided by two diameters into four equal parts. Each
of the latter is, therefore, called a quadrant or quarter
circumference, or, loosely, a quarter circle. Every
pair of semi-diameters encloses an angle of ninety de-
grees from the horizontal, consequently the quadrants
slope at an angle of forty-five degrees from it. In the
second diagram the diameters are made at a different
angle from those of the first, namely, forty-five degrees
from the horizontal, consequently the quadrants are
either horizontal or perpendicular. In the third dia-
gram only the halves of the diameters for convenience
the first halves are used. The second halves are not
needed since they are simply continuations of the first
ones. In practical writing the quadrants are reduced
in length till they become arcs of the chords repre-
sented by the similarly inclined radii or halved diam-
eters.
in the fourth diagram only one diameter is used, but
at an angle different from any of the others ; namely,
thirty degrees from the horizontal. By measuring
up or down from the horizontal fifteen degrees (or
from the diameter forty-five degrees) and drawing
through these points two lines parallel with the dia-
meter, two more quadrants of the circumference are
n;
INTRODUCTION.
obtained which, when reduced in practical writing, be-
come arcs of the chord represented by one-half the
diameter. These with the radius, or one-half the
diameter for convenience the last half slope, of
course, the same as the whole diameter ; namely, at
thirty degrees from the horizontal.
The first three diagrams contain twelve and the last
diagram three stems, or fifteen altogether, which are
all the light ones that are used in phonography. Each
of these may be shaded, making thirty. In the present
system, however, two of the upward stems are left
unshaded ; namely, the upper curve and the straight
stroke in the last diagram.
It will be observed that tne strokes in the third dia-
gram all end at the same point. If the circumference
were to be divided into more than four equal parts
for instance by using four diameters, thus creating eight
radii and their corresponding arcs the letters would
be at so nearly the same angle as not to be readily
distinguishable from one another, as will be evident if
an additional stroke is put between the horizontal and
perpendicular ones, all four strokes being placed at
equal distances apart. It has been found, however,
from experience that the stems inclined downward to
the left and upward to the right may be thus arranged
and still be legible. This happens because the former
are usually written at an angle of sixty and the latter
frequently at one of thirty degrees, thus presenting a
strong contrast to each other and also because they are
traced in different directions, so that when joined to
other stems their identity is apparent without regard
to their inclination.
The breathings are represented by dots, while the
vowels are indicated by dashes and small semicircles on
the same principle as the stem letters. All are ex-
hibited in the phonographic alphabet, or peebeta,
following.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
17
From the precc.Ung the learner will percoivo that
the difference between shorthand and script or print
arises from the fact that script or printed letters can
all he made at the same angle because they are differ-
ent in form; whereas shorthand letters must be made
at different angles because they are similar in form.
T
I)
K
G
S
z
It
L
w
Y
THE PHONOGRAPHIC ALPHABET.
CONSONANTS.
SMOOTH.
ROUGH.
\ as in peep
F V.
as in fief
" babe /
V ^
' ' valve
1 " taught
Th (
" thirtieth
' deed
Dh (
" thither
" kick
Ch /
. " church
" idff
o O
J /
" judge
) ' ' sauce
sh y
. " she
) " /ones
Zh J
" vision
^-- " mum
- " nun
^s " rinjr
O
up " roar
UP " lull
A " we
f C . v /i
18 IXTHOULCnoX.
BREATHINGS.
as in 4-0 j H . as in he
VOWELS.
mon.
is c ell u Uz
eyes c eel u ooze
LOW.
\ ask _ at i odd
v art ate I ode
DIPHTHONGS.
h out / oil y Cruickshank
REMARKS OX THE ALPHABET.
The learner should first endeavor to understand the
alphabet (or peebeta) before he v proceeds to learn it by
heart or write it. Most of the sounds of human speech
are very much alike; thus, P is like B, T is like D, etc.,
except that B is a heavier sound than P, and D heavier
than T. Now,, these and all other sounds in language
which are alike, are paired and represented by signs
which are alike and paired, as will be seen in the pre-
ceding alphabet. There are eight pairs of consonants,
four smooth and four rough, commencing with P B
and ending w r ith Sh Zh. These consonant pairs are so
similar in sound that frequently one sound can be used
for the other in speaking, without mistaking which
was intended. Therefore, in the phonographic alpha-
bet a similar sign has been chosen for each, the light
stroke representing the light and the heavy stroke the
heavy sound, either of which strokes, like their
sounds, as said above, can frequently be used for the
other and in swift writing it often happens that the
light stroke alone is used, for the reason that the hand
does not always take time to shade the heavy letters;
but no mistake thereby arises, because the letters rep-
INTRODUCTION. 19
resent sounds that are almost identical. This is the
case also with the breathings. Consequently, all the
writing could be made with light strokes and yet be
almost as legible as when both light and shaded ones
are used. It would also remain legible if shaded let-
ters were used throughout. The learner is instructed,
however, to use both the light and the shaded strokes,
but if he makes either exclusively, he should employ
the light rather than the shaded ones, because the
former are much more swiftly made than the latter.
Again, sounds which are allied are mostly made in the
same direction; thus F takes the direction of P, Th
that of T, N of M, etc. Also each letter of each group
is placed in the order of its utterance from the lips to
the throat in what is termed the phonetic order. This
can be very plainly seen in the case of the rough let-
ters beginning with F and ending with Zh. The learner
is also informed that each letter of the above alphabet
stands for one sound and no more.
As to the vowels it will be observed that they are
divided into two groups of High and Low, the upper
line of each representing what are usually known as
the short, and the lower one the long vowels. The
upper and lower lines of each group are also arranged
in phonetic order. Furthermore, the short vowels are
represented by light characters and the long vowels by
similar ones shaded at the end. Also the high vowels
are represented by semicircles and the low ones by
dashes. The diphthongs are simply combinations of
the vowels of which they are composed as will be here-
after more fully explained.
ORGANIC CLASSIFICATION OF THE SOUNDS
OF THE ALPHABET.
The sounds of the alphabet arc classified according
to the organs which form them, as follows:
I'll INTKODrCTIOX.
1. Explodente. P, 13, T, D, K, G, Ch, J are called
explodents because they are produced by exploding
the breath through the organs of speech previously ia
total contact; and being quicker, more direct and
abrupt than the other sounds of the alphabet, are best
represented by straight lines whoso formation is of the
same nature. All the other sounds being more flow-
ing in their utterance are best represented by curved
or flowing lines, except R which has assigned to it the
remaining straight upward letter.
2. Continuants. F, V, Th, Dh, S, Z, Sh, Zh are
called continuants since their sounds may be continued
any length of time. They are produced by bringing
one organ of speech close to another but not in con-
tact with it and then emitting the breath between
them.
3. Nasals. M, X and Ng are called nasals since they
are produced by sending the breath through the nose,
the organs of speech previously being in total contact.
4. Liquids. R and L are called liquids from the
fact that they flow into or unite with the other sounds.
R, like the continuants, is produced by b ringing one
organ of speech close to another, but not in contact
with it and then omitting the breath between them. L
is produced by a partial contact of the organs of
speech and then, while this contact is maintained,
expelling the breath
a. The above are what are called the articulated
sounds of the alphabet, or consonants. Four more
sounds remain, two of w r hich, W and Y, are only par-
tially or semi articulated and hence are known as semi-
consonants. They are also known as semi vowels. The
other two sounds, -f- and its rough mate H, are not
articulated. Therefore these are called the unarticu-
lated or free breathings, or simply the breathings.
5. Coalescents. W and Y are used only before
vowels as in "we, ye." They are called coalescents
INTRODUCTIOX.
bec;!viS3 they closely coalesce with them. \V and Y
have a medial character between the consonants and
vo \vels; W consisting partly of a sound resembling
tho short vowel u and Y partly of one resembling the
short vowel i. Thus "way, you" are, as it were,
'u( w )ay, i(y)ou."' For this reason they are also called
semivowels. W and Y are thus always preceded by
either the smooth or the rough breathing, as in "way,
yon, whey, hue (hwey, hyue)," the theoretical spelling
of which is '<+ way [+u(w)ay], + you [ + i(y)ou], hwey
[hufwjeyj, hyue [hi(y)ue]." In practical spelling in
script and print the + or smooth breathing is omitted
the same as it is in words commencing with a vowel.
(3. Breathings. The smooth and rough breathings,
called the lene and aspirate, are not articulated and
have already been explained. (See page 11.)
7. Vowels. The vowels are produced by approx-
imations of the organs of speech and, like the breath-
ings, are not articulated.
The following arrangement exhibits the classifica-
tion of the sounds of the alphabet both according to
their nature or quality and mode of formation. It
will be observed that the latter consists of three di-
visions termed Labials, Linguals and Gutterals. F
V and Th Dh are also sometimes called Dentals, or if
great precision is desired, Labio-Dentals and Linguo-
Dentals. Furthermore, the linguals (except Th and
Dh i are often designated Palatals, the front and middle
ones being produced by the hard and the back ones by
the soft palate. Again, Ch and J are theoretically
considered as compound sounds composed respectively
of TSh and DZh, though practically they are deemed
single sounds and therefore represented with single
characters. For the theory of the vowel arrangement
the learner is referred to the author's "System of
Phonoscript and Phonotypy" mentioned on page 28
hereafter.
INTRODUCTION*.
Labi-
als.
Linguals.
Gut-
terals
Front
Middle
Buck
1. Explodents -i
', Heavy
P
B
T
D
Ch
J
K
Q
2. Continuants \ * e
; Heavy
F
V
Th S
Dh Z
Sh
Zh
3. Nasals
M
N
Kg
4. Liquids
L
R
5. Coalescents
W
Y
6. Breathings f^ en . e
j Aspirate
H
7. Vowels |? igh
i Low
i I
ii a
e e
a a
u u
PROLOGUE.
LESSONS AND EXERCISES.
The engraved lessons and exercises illustrating the
text of the Elementary Style begin after the latter on
page 133 and are followed by a printed key commenc-
ing on page 171. The former are called Reading
Lessons and Exercises and are intended to be read and
copied, while the latter are designated Writing Les-
sons and Exercises and are intended to be written from
memory. By having the engravings thus grouped
together they can be mastered and referred to, as a
whole, much better than if they were scattered
throughout the book. The figures and letters in heavy
face type at the beginning of the paragraphs of the
text refer to the corresponding characters of the
engravings. After the exercises of the Elementary
Style, the Reporting Style commences followed by
reading exercises and a key in the same manner as
those of the Elementary Style.
STENOSCRIPT AND STENOTYPY.
Stenoscript and Stenotypy are methods of repre-
senting phonography by ordinary script or printed
letters, one or more being employed for each phono-
graph. When thus used the names of the script or
printed character or combination and that of its cor-
responding phonograph are the same. All the conso-
nant stems and the two breath dots are represented by
large capitals or by these and body letters combined.
All other phonographic characters, as will hereafter
28
PRO:.;
appear, are usually represented by regular or italic
body letters and, occasionally by small capitals. The
following are the stenotypes or stenotypic combina-
tions for the phonographic stems. It will be seen that
with the exception of the fifth in the second line they
are the same as the characters already given in the
alphabet on page 17
P, B, T, D, K, G, S, Z, M, N, Ng, R, L, W, Y.
F,V,Th,Dh,C,J,Sh,Zh.
In stenoscript and stenotypy Ch is represented by C.
In this -system a phonograph is usually represented
by its stenoscript or stenotypic character or combina-
tion and not by its name; thus, T or Th and not Tee
or Thee.
As the name of each script or printed combination
is the same as its phonograph (see the first paragraph
above) the former when it occurs in stenoscript or
stenotypy, is read by its name and not by its compo-
nent parts. Thus Th or Dh is read Thee or Dhee and
not Tee Haitch or Dee Haitch.
In the following pages the phonographs and their
stenotypic representation are usually given together.
Also whatever remarks apply to stenotypy generally
apply to stenoscript.
MATERIALS FOR WRITING.
Shorthand, like longhand, should ordinarily be
written on ruled paper, though paper that is unruled
may be employed if the other is not at hand. The
paper, whether ruled or unruled, should generally
have a "margin on the left of about one-half to three-
fourths of an inch. If no marginal line exists the
learner may draw one either with a ruler or off-hand
or confine his writing to these limits, or legal cap,
cic., may be used. Notes or corrections in regard to
anything in the text may then be made or indicated in
PROLOGUE.
the margin opposite a short vertical line, if no mar-
ginal one exists, being drawn between the two. The
same course may be pursued if a note-book is em-
ployed.
The learner may use either a pen or pencil prefer-
ably a pen if convenient. If a pencil is employed the
lead should be of medium hardness and rather small
diameter so as to form the outlines clearly without too
much sharpening. In the case of a pen any one which
makes a fine mark without scratching is suitable. For
ordinary every day writing, however, a gold pen is
preferable to a steel one since it is more durable and
does not corrode, but for very fine writing a fine
pointed steel pen is the best. The ink used, if it can be
obtained conveniently, should be jet black when put
on the paper and flow freely. A purple or violet ink
may also be employed if preferred.
METHOD OF HOLDING THE PEN OR PENCIL.
>
The learner can hold the pen or pencil in whatever
way is most convenient consistent with accuracy, speed
and ease and change from one way to another if the
hand or wrist becomes fatigued, but he should always
hold it lightly so that (in the case of the pen) the nib
may be readily turned to strike the characters in any
direction that may be necessary. Finally neither the
pen nor pencil should be lifted up too high between
words, but only enough for convenience or to clear
the paper, otherwise much time will be unnecessarily
lost.
DIRECTIONS FOR LEARNING THE LESSONS
AND EXERCISES.
After the learner has read arid comprehended tho
first lesson as given in the text and engraving, he should
read tho latter and then proceed to copy it, making tho
2C PnOLOGL'E.
stems as nearly as possible of the same length ::> tho
engraved ones which throughout this book, is one-
eighth of an inch between the ends of simple perpendi-
cular stems. This size is the standard one for this
system. Some phonographers, however, employ a
larger size making the stems as above about five thirty-
seconds or three-sixteenths of an inch and a few much
larger. The shaded letters should not be made too heavy,
but simply heavy enough to distinguish them from the
light ones. The learner must not write very fast :il
first. Speed will come of itself when least expected.
The stems sloping downward to the right when
occurring alone or initially are written at an angle of
forty -five degrees from the horizontal and those down-
ward to the left at one of sixty degrees. Sometimes,
however, when they occur medially or finally the
former are written at thirty and the latter at forty-five
degrees. Of the stems sloping upward to the right
R and L when they occur alone are written at thirty
and in other cases usually at forty-five degrees, except
that R before M and after N, or L before R joined
to M is made at thirty degrees. Upward Sh, which
never occurs alone, as will be hereafter explained, is
usually written at forty-five degrees, except when it
occurs before R followed by M, when it is written at
thirty degrees. All the remaining letters are made
either perpendicularly or horizontally.
The above is the general rule for the angles of the
stems. Frequently, however, in rapid or careless writ-
ing they vary more or less from the true angles, but
not enough to affect their legibility.
If preferred the downward letters to the left may
always be written at sixty and the up ward ones at thirty
degrees, making the single length upward stems a little
longer than usual before single length downward ones
so that the latter may be made their full length and at
the same time rest on the line.
PROLOGUE. 27
When the learner has mastered the letters of the first
engraved lesson as directed above he may write them
from memory, using the printed lesson or key of the
Writing Exercises. He should first write and re-write
the latter until the phonographic characters can be
formed with accuracy and ease. He should then read
the shorthand thus made and carefully compare it with
the corresponding matter of the engraving.
After having mastered the first engraved and printed
lessons as above directed the learner should next master
in the same way the first engraved and printed exer-
cises which follow them. The same process should be
gone through with for every subsequent lesson and
exercise in the book; the lessons always being learned
first.
Finally the learner should be careful to note the
forms of the words in each lesson and exercise and fix
them thoroughly in his memory, since with but very
few exceptions (which will give him no trouble) they
are all employed in reporting.
IS^T" If he desires the learner may make a copy of
the engraved lessons with their marginal figures and
letters for speedy reference in review. For which
purpose either separate sheets of paper or a note-book
may be employed.
PHONETIC SPELLING.
In phonography most words are spelled phonetically,
that is according to sound. Thus each letter has one
sound and no more the same as the notes in music
and is never silent. Accordingly no more letters are
employed in a word than there are sounds. Words,
therefore, are spelled exactly as they are pronounced;
as, for example, "can" and "cent" which are spelled
"kan" and "sent."
The learner is recommended to procure the author's
PROLOGUE.
"System of Phonoscript and Phonotypy" containing
the phonoscript and phonotypic alphabets ^ which, as
they very closely resemble the ordinary ones (from the
fact that they contain nearly all of the old letters) will
enable him in a few hours to write and read phonetic-
ally with the same facility as in the ordinary script and
print. This accomplishment will greatly assist him in
mastering phonography, since the spelling in the latter
and in 'phonoscript and phonotypy is mostly the same.
THE LEGIBILITY OF PRINT, SCRIPT AND
PHONOGRAPHY.
When uncial, cursive and single line writing in
other words print, script and phonography are equally
well executed their legibility is in the order given; the
reason for which is that their speed is in the reverse
order While, therefore, phonography, considered as
a system of shorthand is very legible, it is not so much
so as script, and, consequently, as print.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
THE ELEMENTARY STYLE.
CHAPTER I.
THE CONSONANTS AND BREATHINGS.
LESSON 1.
THE CONSONANTS.
THE SMOOTH CONSONANTS.
1. There are fifteen articulated smooth breathings
or smooth consonants in the English language repre-
sented in roman print as follows ; namely, P, B, T, D,
K, G, S, Z, M, N, Ng, R, L, W, Y. They are repre-
sented in phonography by straight and curved lines
the latter being quarter circles- as in the engraving,
page 133, line 1 and in the alphabet, or peebeta, page
17. The names of the phonographs or stems are
respectively Pee, Bee, Tee, Dee, Kee, Gee (or Kay,
Gay), See (or Ess), Zee, Mee, Nee, Eeng (or Em, En,
Eng), Ilee, Lee, Wee, Yee. The characters for the
heavy sounds are shaded those for B, D and G through-
out and that for Z in the middle, tapering at each end."
The phonograph for the palatal nazal Ng is also shaded
in the middle the same as that for Z. The phono-
graphs for li and L are made upward.
.'JO THE PHONOGRAPH If MAXL'AT..
THK HOUGH CONSONANTS.
2. Each of the articulated smooth breathings, or con-
sonants, P, B, T, D, K, G, 8, Z, eight in number, has
its corresponding articulated rough breathing or con-
sonant ; namely, F, V, Th, Dh, Ch, J, Sh, Zh, repre-
sented as in the engraving, line 2, and in the alphabet,
or peebeta. The names of the phonographs or stems
are respectively, Fee (or Ef), Vee, Thee, Dhee, Chee,
Jee (or Chay, Jay), Shee, Zhee. The character for the
heavy sound J is shaded throughout, but the characters
for V, Dh and Zh are shaded in the middle, tapering
at each end the same as that for Z. The two semi-
articulated smooth consonants W and Y have also their
corresponding semi-articulated rough breathings or
consonants HWand HY. The phonographs for the latter
are shaded from the beginning in order to represent
the aspirate sound and are named respectively Hwee
and Hyee. (See the last two phonographs in line 2).
3. In a stenoscript and stenotypy small cap H indi-
cates an initial shading of the phonograph of the letter
before which it is placed and is named Hotch, while
its sound is usually pronounced in the same syllable,
as in Hwee and Hvee (see sec. 2) which are stenotyped
nW and nY.
LESSOX 2.
STEMS STANDING ALONE OR JOINED.
4. When phonographic stems are written alone they
rest on the line, except K and G which are placed
slightly above so as not to be confused with it. (See
also lines 1 and 2).
5. In joining two or more stems the learner must
make one after the other without lifting the pen,
each following stem beginning where the preceding one
ends, no matter how far above or below the line the
writing may extend.
Till-: PHONOGRAPHIC M \\IA1. 3]
P>. Iii stenoscript and slenotvpy the letters usually
follow one another the same as in script and print with-
out anything between them. Sometimes, as will
eventually be explained, a hyphen is placed between
two letters to indicate some peculiarity of the phono-
graphic writing usually a joining of characters that
are ordinarily written disjoined.
7. When a straight letter follows another in the
same direction the two are joined together forming a
double length letter. When one of them is heavy the
double length is shaded at the end or beginning accord-
ing as the heavy letter follows or precedes the light
one. Downward double length letters are written with
the first half on the line and the second half below it.
Upward and horizontal double length letters are made
on the line. (See sec. 4).
8. A horizontal letter is written on the line when
it is followed by an upward one and (a) above the line
when followed by a downward one so that the latter
may rest on the line.
1. The learner will perceive in the course of his
progress that the stems sometimes vary in length or
curvature, or both, in order to keep them on the line
or to facilitate joining.
9. When one horizontal letter is followed by
another both rest on the line (except KX or NK where
only the N can be so written) unless (a) the second is
followed by a downward one, in which case both the
first and second are made above the line. The same
principle is followed when three or more horizontal
letters precede a downward stem.
1 0. When a downward letter commences a word or
combination of letters it rests upon the line, except
Avhen N is the second letter, in which case the latter
rests on the line. (a). When a heavy curved letter is
joined to a heavy straight one without an angle it is
;;_' THE PiioxoGUAPiiir MANTAL.
made heavy at the point of junction as well as in the
middle. (See the joinings BZ and VG).
LESSON 3.
W AND Y USED FOli K AND L.
11. W and Y being semivowels can never follow a
vowel in the same syllable; and being semiconsonants
can never follow another consonant at the end of a
syllable, they having no final utterance of their own.
Consequently, they can never end a syllable or word,
being in this respect different from both vowels and
consonants.
1 2. The above being true, their phonographic forms
can be used at the end of syllables and words for those
full consonants which are nearest to them in utterance,
namely R and L. When so employed they are named
either Downward Ar or El or simply Air and Ail,
their stenotypes being 7? and L. They are never writ-
ten alone or initially or as the first stems in words so
as not to conflict with W and Y.
13. The regular phonographic letters are indicated
in 'stenoscript and stenotypy by regular script and
print letters (see Prologue, page 23), but when they
have alternate forms the latter are usually indicated in
italics as in the last section.
14. If desired the strokes W and Y when they
occur in the final syllable of a word of two or more
syllables may be distinguished from the downward R
and L strokes by shading them in the middle tapering
at each end, but this will seldom be necessary. When
thus used, however, they are named "Way and Yay,
their stenotypes being W and Y.
Y AND UPWARD L.
16. Y and upward L thus have similar forms.
When alone the stems are known by their ditlc-rcncc of
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. ;>;>
inclination, the down stroke verging more toward the
perpendicular and the up one toward the horizontal,
the former being at an angle of sixty and the latter at
one of thirty degrees. When joined to other letters
they are distinguished by the direction they take to or
from the point of junction. (See Prologue, page 26.)
a. If preferred upward L may be written at thirty
degrees after N.
UPWARD AND DOWNWARD L.
16. L also thus has two similar forms made up or
down. When L is written alone the upward form is
always used. When joined to other letters either form
is distinguished by the direction it takes to or from
the point of junction. (See Prologue, page 26.)
CH AND UPWARD R.
17. Ch and upward R must not be mistaken for
each other. These two letters have a resemblance in
the same manner as do Y and upward L (see sec. 15);
Ch when alone being at an angle of sixty and R at one
of thirty degrees from the horizontal. When joined
to other letters, the distinction between them is appar-
ent from their course to or from thepointof junction.
(See Prologue, page 26.)
UPWARD AND DOWNWARD SH.
1 8. Sh also has two similar forms made up or down;
the downward form when alone or initial being written at
sixty degrees, which is also usually the case when it
occurs medially or finally. The upward character is
usually written at forty-five degrees and never occurs
alone. (See Prologue, page 26.) Upward Zh is sel-
dom employed. The upward stems are named Shay
and Zhay and are indicated in stenotypy by 8h and Zh.
a. If preferred upward Sh may be made at thirty
M THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXr.U..
degrees before M and after N, the same as upward R.
t^See page 20 and also sec. 15, a.)
b. If upward Sh were to be written alone it would
be made at thirty degrees the same as upward li and L.
19. Whatever observations apply to a light letter
in the pages of this book usually apply also to the cor-
responding heavy one. Thus, for example, the rules
in the first two sentences of the last section apply also
to the heavy letter Zh or Zh.
LESSON 4.
STRAIGHT AND CURVED STEMS JOINED AT RIGHT ANGLES.
20. When a straight and a curved stem are joined
at right angles to each other, if the angle is on the
inside of the curve, it should be distinctly defined.
There are twelve such junctions in phonography as in
the engraving.
a. It will be observed, in accordance with the
remarks in the Prologue, page 26, that Sh and Ch
after P and W are written at forty-five, while F and P
after Ch and Y are made at thirty degrees. (See also
Sh after Wj and F after Y in engraving 21, line 2.
STEMS JOINED WITHOUT ANGLES.
21. The three lines of engraving 21 contain all the
junctions without angles in phonography. They are
thirty in number. A straight line running into a
curve has no angle with that curve. When a straight
line will run into or form a curve or a curve will make
a half circle with another curve, or run into an opposite
one it is joined without an angle. Every other junction
of a straight line and a curve is made with an angle
greater or less.
a. Some of the junctions above, such as Y with
T and S with Ch would not be without angles if the
curves were strictly quarter circles, since Y andCh are
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. '],")
made at sixty instead of forty-five degrees. In such
cases the curves are slightly flattened so as to eliminate
the angle. Again the junction of N with M or the
reverse both being written on the line is effected by
slightly flattening both stems at or near the point of
junction. (See also sec. 8, 1.)
b. If the upward letters are always made at thirty
degrees (see page 26, last paragraph), upward L and
W and F and upward Sh would also be slightly flat-
tened at or near the point of junction in order to elim-
inate the angle.
22. As upward R is made before M and after N
at thirty degrees (See Prologue, page 20) it must
always be joined to them with an angle. Furthermore
it is also necessarily joined with an angle to every other
curved letter. The remarks above, therefore, in ref-
erence to straight lines running into or from curves do
not apply to upward li for the reason that in phono-
graphy the latter does not run into or from any curved
letter. (See also the last diagram on page 15 of the
Introduction. )
M SHADED FOR MP OR MB.
23. The letter M shaded in the middle stands for
Mp or Mb. If at any time there would be danger of
conflict between the two the latter may be written in
full with the stems M and B.
2-i. The name for M shaded as above, whether rep-
resenting Mp or Mb, is Meep (or Eemp) and its steno-
types are Mp.
a. If the learner prefers he may employ the
shaded M stem to represent Mp only and write Mb
with the two stems M and B.
FOREIGN CONSONANTS.
25. Any consonant peculiar to a foreign language
may be indicated by striking through the nearest cor-
36 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
responding English one at right angles to it a small
character like the Roman S. Such are the light and
heavy gutterals Kh, Ch and Ge or Gh heard in the
Russian, German and other languages; also the Welsh
LI, French N and Italian R, as in the following words:
Russian, Kharkov; German, ich, einige; Scotch, loch;
Irish, lough; Welsh, Llan; French, bonmot; Italian,
amor. They may be designated either by their for-
eign names or by their English ones as just given.
Their stenotypes are the nearest corresponding English
letters enclosed in quotation points; thus, "K," "G,"
"L," "N," "R" or "7?." The foreign consonant
mark is not always employed.
THE BREATHING.
26. As the learner has read in the Introduction
the sounds of speech are made by the breathings,
smooth or rough. The smooth breath or lene is
represented by a light dot and the rough breath or
aspirate by a heavy one. When used alone the dots
are written on the line The names of the dots are
Eetch and Heetch (or Aitch and Haitch) respectively,
and their stenotypes are -{- and H.
27. The rough breathing may also be represented
by two ticks one shaded throughout and made down-
ward in the direction of J and the other light and made
upward in that of R and named respectively Hetch and
Hutch; their stenotypes being h and k. They are used
only initially in connection with consonant stems and
never stand alone, the dot then being employed instead
as stated in section 26. The downward tick joins best
with M, Mp, W, S, downward Sh and upward L; the
upward one with the opposite curves N, Ng, F, Th, Y
and upward Sh. The latter, however, is seldom used,
and then never when upward Sh stands alone. On
straight stems the downward tick joins best with K
and upward R and the upward one with the downward
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 37
forms P, T and Ch. Both ticks are always pro-
nounced separately from the stems to which they are
attached; thus hM and AN and uttered Hetch Mee
and Hutch Nee.
a. The smooth breathing may also be represented,
if desired, by two light characters, the one a down-
ward tick in the direction of Ch and the other an up-
ward short quarter circle curve, called a curvet, in the
direction of Sh and of the same length between the
ends as the tick; but these are not usually necessary in
ordinary writing. Their names and stenotypes are
Etch, Utch ( +etch, +utch) and -f, -j-.
1. If preferred -j- may be represented by two light
ticks made downward and upward in the direction of
Ch and R, and H by two heavy ones in that of J and
K (See, however, par. b).
b. Upward + and II as in paragraph a are repres-
ented by light strokes and distinguished by" different
forms for stenographic convenience since it is usually
somewhat difficult to shade an upward letter. In all
other cases -f- and II have tho same forms, but are
distinguished by shading. Upward + and H are thus
distinguished according to the same principle as the
script and printed forms.
c. When the downward ticks occur before R. and
L standing alone the latter are written at an angle of
thirty degrees.
28. The H ticK on W and Y is never employed in
the same syllable with the latter. If extra distinction
is desired on nW or nY (see sec. 3), the aspirate dot
may be placed before the center in addition to the
initial shading of the stem. This, howerer, will not
often be necessary. The H tick is also never em-
ployed on downward R and L (See sec. 12).
29. The learner will understand in regard to "W
and Y as was explained in the Introduction, page 20,
paragraphs 4, a and 5, that the letter W stands for
452204
38 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
the sounds +W and the letter Y for the sounds -r Y;
that is ~\V and Y are semi-consonants uttered with the
smooth breathing. Consequently they can take the
rough breathing H. In other words the smooth
breathing can be changed into the rough; as in the
rough breath semi-consonant sounds HW and HY in
section 2 and line 2.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 39
CHAPTER II.
THE VOWELS, SEMIVOWELS, ETC.
LESSON 5.
THE VOWELS.
THE SMOOTH VOWELS.
SO. The English language contains six short,
smooth breath vowels as heard in the words "is, ell,
Uz, ask, at, odd." They are named by uttering them
alone, as follows: i, e, u, a, a, o; or if this is at first
found difficult, by attaching to them the letter t, as in
the following; namely, "it, et, ut, at, at, ot." It is
preferable, however, to sound them alone without any
consonant. Sounding them thus is naming them. The
sound should not be cut off, as it were, or stopped
suddenly, when uttered alone, but should be prolonged
to its full utterance the same as in the case of the long
vowels, which will presently be considered.
3 1 . From the engraving and alphabet, or peebeta,
(pages 133 and ITi, it will be seen that they are rep-
resented by small light half circles and ticks or dashes
(the former standing for the high and the latter for
the low vowels) each of which is always made in its
own proper direction; namely, that of the full sized
stem which corresponds or most nearly corresponds
to it in form. All the characters are usually made of
40 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
the same length and may be written alone or joined to
one another or to other letters, as will hereafter appear.
Their stenotypes are the small body letters above given,
a. If preferred the dashes may be made a little
longer than the semicircles when separated from the
latter by other letters.
32. Each of the vowel phonographs except e has
an alternative form which is employed >vhen the regular
one will not join conveniently, the stenotypes being in
italics as in the following. Thus i is made in the di-
rection of downward Sh, u in that of M, a downward
at an angle of thirty instead of forty- five degrees, a
upward in the direction of R and o downward in that
of Ch.
33. Each of the six short smooth vowels explained
in section 30 has its corresponding long smooth vowel.
These are represented like the others, except that the
characters are shaded at the end to indicate their long
sound, as heard in the words "eyes, eel, ooze, art, ate,
ode." They are named by uttering them alone, as
follows : I, e, u, a, a, 6. In the third vowel the
sound is given as in the word "ooze" and not as in the
verb "use," or the noun "union;" that is to say the
Y sound is omitted. They are represented in stenotypy
as above, the alternates being in italics.
a. The learner is informed that the terms Short
and Long as applied to the vowels above are merely
conventional ones and do not strictly express the rela-
tion between them, since they have no reference to
the duration of the sound. For example the vowel
e as in " ell " may be shortened or prolonged to the
same extent as that of e as in "eel." (See sec. 30).
Consequently all the vowels are of the same nature as
the notes on a piano, or other musical instrument,
which may be abbreviated or lengthened at will. In
the author's l ' System of Phonoscript and Phonotypy"
(see Prologue, page 28) the vowels are distinguished
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 41
according to the positions of their utterance (see Pre-
face, page 6), the short vowels being termed Fore and
the long ones Aft. And as they are also distinguished
as High and Low (see Introduction, table, page 22),
each one can be definitely located. Thus o as in "ell"
is the high-mid-fore and e as in "eel" the high-mid-aft
vowel, while o as in ' ' odd " is the low-back-fore and o
as in "ode," the low-back-aft vowel, and so on for the
others. It will thus be seen that while the short and
long (fore and aft) vowels of each locality have a
certain resemblance to each other it does not consist
in their being the short and long sounds of the same
vowel.
b. The long vowel u, as in paragraph 33, is first
drawn with the light form and then without lifting the
pen or pencil is shaded downward at the end. If,
preferred, however, it may be shaded in the middle.
34. There are three smooth diphthongs in the English
language as heard in the words "out, oil, Cruick shank"
or "good." A diphthong is the "union of two vowel
sounds in one syllable" and is produced by sounding
one vowel quickly after another. They are each repre-
sented by two letters, namely, ou, oi, ui, and are
named from their sounds alone. They are made in
phonography the same as in script and print by joining
the two letters of which they are composed. In the
case of ou the phonograph for u is reversed in the
direction of M. In that of oi the o is inclined in the
direction of Ch and the i made in the direction of up-
ward Sh, while in that of ui the i is written in the
direction of downward Sh. (See sec. 32). The steno-
types for the phonographs are on, oi, ui.
35. The learner is instructed that the proper repre-
sentation of on is with the long u as in ou ; but it is
represented in the present script and print for conven-
ience by the short u.
42 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
THE ROUGH VOWELS.
36. Each of the twelve smooth vowels and the three
smooth diphthongs above explained has its corresponding
rough vowel or diphthong. The latter are represented
like the former except that they are shaded at the be-
ginning to indicate their rough sound. In consequence
of this the rough long vowels are shaded their full
length.
37. The short rough vowels are hi, he, hu, ha, ha,
ho, and are heard in the words "his, head, hu/zy,
hasp, hat, hod. " The long rough vowels are hi, he,
hu, ha, ha, ho, as heard in the words "hies, heed,
whose, hart, hate, hoed. v The rough diphthongs are
hou, hoi, hui, as heard in the words "how, hoy,
hook." They are shaded only at the beginning of the
first letter. The stenotypes for the rough vowels and
diphthongs are the same as the smooth ones except
that the small capital H (see sec. 3) is placed before
them to represent the shading for the aspirate; thus,
HOW, noij urn.
38. In practical writing the rough vowels and
diphthongs, as well as the smooth long vowels, are
frequently left unshaded. In such cases the sense of
the writing usually distinguishes them apart. (See
also Prologue, page 26 and sec. 27, a and Remarks on
the Alphabet in the Introduction, page 18.)
THE ASPIRATE AND LONG VOWEL DOTS.
39. If at any time the initial or final shading for
the aspirate or long vowel should not be considered
sufficiently distinct either may bo additionally dis-
tinguished by writing before or above a vo\yel the
heavy dot for the aspirate and after or under it a heavy
dot for the long sound. This, however, will not often bo
necessary. The learner will observe that the dots are
made before or after perpendicular or inclined vowels
THE PHONOGRAPHIC .MANUAL. 43
and above or under horizontal ones, whether straight or
curved. They may be placed opposite either the be-
ginning, center or end of the characters. Usually,
however, when the vowels stand alone, they are writ-
ten opposite the center. The lene and the short vowel
may also be indicated by light dots in the same man-
ner, if desired, but these, the same as the -f- tick and
curvet (see sec. 27, a) are never necessary in ordinary
writing, except that the lene dot is sometimes used to
represent the substitution of the smooth for the rough
breath as in the dialecticisms "-t-e" and "+a" (indi-
cated in the present script and print by "V and
"'ay 1 ') for "he" and "hay." Usually, however, when
no error would be liable to occur, the smooth vowel
without the lene dot is then employed. (See the last
four examples in line 39.)
40. The stenotype for the long vowel dot is an
inverted period placed after the stenotype or stenotpyes
for the vowel, all enclosed in brackets; thus [a-], [Ha-].
a. The lene and aspirate dots are always pro-
nounced separately from the letters before which they
are placed; thus, -fe and He are uttered Eeetch Eee
and Heetch Eee.
JOINED VOWELS.
41. Two or more vowels may be joined together
the same as are the diphthongs 6r consonant stems,
(a). The dots for the aspirate and the long sound
the lene and short vowel dots never being necessary
in ordinary writing except as explained in section 39
may then be placed, when they occur outside the
angles, opposite the beginning, center or end of each
vowel. Usually, however, they are written opposite
the center. When they occur inside the angles they
are written opposite the beginning or end of each
vowel except in the case of the middle vowels when
they are placed opposite the center. In other
44 THE PHONOGRAP'S'lC MANUAL.
words the interior dots are always kept away
from the angles for if written within or near
them it is not always certain to which vowel
they belong. The learner will also observe that
the long vowel dot is always placed after the vowel.
Jt is thus distinguished from the aspirate dot which is
placed before it.
b. When the vowels ft or hi or the corresponding
long ones follow each other they are usually disjoined
and written close together. In the similar case of the
other tick vowels the alternative forms are usually
employed.
c. Any two or more vowels composing a word, or
the two vowels of a diphthong, may be disjoined and
written close together. In every case the aspirate and
long vowel dots may be inserted as usual.
d. Any two vowels whatever may be joined by
using the alternative forms. (See third line of
Reading Exercise, 30 to 48, and also paragraph e
below.
e. If two vowels would be liable to make an indis-
tinct joining in rapid writing as ft or ha and the alter-
nate for either (see par. b) or e and the upward alter-
native form for ' 'a, " it is usually better to write them
separately.
42. To indicate in stenotypy that two phonographs
are disjoined and written close together an inverted
semicolon is placed between them; thus, ftift
43. The learner will not have much occasion to join
the vowels, smooth or rough, together alone, since
there are not more than five or six words in English,
consisting of more than one syllable, that are composed
wholly of smooth vowels and they are of such rare
occurrence as to be used, even by the busiest speakers
and writers, on an average, perhaps hot more than
twice or thrice in a lifetime, if that of ten. There are
also very few words of more than one syllable coin-
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 45
posed wholly of rough vowels or of smooth and rough
ones combined.
44-. All the vowels and diphthongs above mentioned
both smooth and rough when written alone are invar-
iably placed upon or near the line of writing in the
same manner as are the stem letters. (See sec. 4.)
This is also the case with all words composed wholly
of vowels.
VOCALIZATION.
45. When the vowels or diphthongs occur in con-
nection with consonants they are written disjoined
beside the stems which process is termed Vocaliza-
tion and may be placed opposite the beginning, center
or end according to convenience. When so written
they are said to be in the first, second and third posi-
tions respectively. Usually, however, they are writ-
ten in the second position, that is opposite the centers
of the stems.
46. In stenotypy the position of a phonographic
vowel or diphthong as above is indicated by a small
superior figure 1 or 3 placed after its stenotype accord-
ing as it is in the first or third position. When no
figure appears it is understood to be in the second posi-
tion. Thus, Po 1 , Po 3 , Po.
47. When a vowel is placed on the left or upper
side of a stem it is read before it, when on the right or
under side it is read after it. Two or more vowels,
smooth or rough, coming together in a word are joined
or disjoined the same as when alone. When "a" fol-
lows e they may be joined without an angle if preferred.
This, however, should not be done when e and "a" 1
stand alone. When e and "a" are thus joined with-
out the angle it is seldom necessary to shade the e for
the long sound. The aspirate and long sound may in
all cases also be distinguished by the heavy dots if
necessary.
40 THE PHONOGRAPHIC .MANl'AI.
:i. . The letters T and K in engraving 47 are em-
ployed merely to show the manner of writing the vow-
els to the stems, whether the syllables thus formed
constitute regular words or not.
48. In words of two stems the second place or
position (see sec. 45) of the second stem will ordinar-
ily be more readily used than the second place
of the first one, because the pen will not have to go
back so far. In words of three or more stems the sec-
ond place of each should generally be employed.
When, however, there would not be sufficient room
between the stems for the vowels to be placed in the
second position, or when for any other reason it would
be inconvenient to do so, it is preferable to write some
or all of them in the third or even in the first position.
49. The leiie dot may be used when vocalizing to
represent the substitution of the smooth breath for the
rough one, or for any consonant, as in the dialecticisms
u +im <1 ' and "-hem"' for "him" and "them" in the
same manner as when the vowels stand alone. Usually,
however, only the smooth vowel is employed. (See
sec. 39.)
50. Occasionally when convenient a vowel may be
joined to a stem. In such cases in stenotypy, the junc-
tion is indicated by a hyphen between the letters; thus,
i-dea. (See sec. 6.) If a vowel occurs between the
joined one and the stem it is enclosed in brackets; thus,
I-[o]N. (See also sec. 40. )
5 1 . An intermediate vowel may be indicated between
M and P or M and B of the stem Mp or Mb by strik-
ing it through the latter. In the case of two or more
vowels they should be joined or all struck through the
stem and may then if necessary to secure legibility be
made somewhat larger than usual. The dash vowel
"a," which is made in the same direction as Mp, is
written with the alternative form. A vowel may be
written after the stem.
THE PTIOXOtiKAl'llir MANUAL. .J~
52. In stenotypy the striking of a phonographic
character through a preceding one is indicated by
placing a dagger between the stenotypes; thus, Mf#p,
Mfoap, Mfot^p, Mfopi.
53. The consonant Ng never commences a word
in English. Consequently when it stands alone or is
the first stem in a word it is known to be preceded by
a vowel smooth or rough. A vowel may be written
after the stem, in which case the sound of G is us-
ually included, as in "lingo."
54. Any observations that apply to the vowels in
this book, as for example, sections 47 to 51, usually
apply also to the diphthongs.
a. The sound of o in "odd" and that of "a" in "all"
are considered the same in this system of phonography.
Accordingly they are both written with the same
character; namely, the light perpendicular dash, or its
alternate.
55. The learner is informed that in speech a vowel
is always preceded by a breath in the same syllable
and a consonant followed by one; and that a breath
can then never follow a vowel or precede a consonant.
Also that a vowel is always smooth or rough according
as it is preceded by a smooth or rough consonant in
the same syllable. Thus the vowel in "pa" or "ba"
is a smooth one. In "fa" or "va" it is a rough one.
This comes from the fact that a vowel in the same
syllable as a preceding consonant is always uttered by
the same kind of a breath as the latter. Consequently
an aspirate dot is never placed before a vowel when
the latter is in the same syllable as a preceding con-
sonant, since the consonant itself in speech invariably
determines whether the vowel is smooth or rough.
FOREIGN VOWELS.
53. Any vowel peculiar to a foreign language may
be indicated by striking through the nearest cor re-
48 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
spending English one at right angles to it the small
character like the Roman S in the same manner as in
the case of the foreign consonants. (See sec. '2~>. i
Thus the German oe and ue are written as above with
long a and e and the French eu and u with short u and
long u respectively. Their stenotypes are the letters
for the long and short sounds just given, enclosed in
quotation points the same as are the stenotypes for the
foreign consonants; thus, "a," "e," "u," "a."
LESSON 6.
THE SEMIVOWELS OR SEMICONSONANTS W AND Y
57. W and Y being semivowels or semiconsonants
can be represented as either. They are the only con-
sonants that in phonographic writing can be omitted
when they begin a word and the only vowels that can
be inserted between a consonant and a following vowel
in the same syllable, as in "twit" or "beauty," and
the only vowels or consonants that can not end a syl-
lable. (See also sec. 11).
58. In speech AY consists partly of a sound resemb-
ling the short vowel u and Y partly of one resembling
the short vowel i, and the approximate construction
of each may be said to be as in the examples "u(w)arm,
i(y)ore," and "u(w)eed, i(y)ou." Thus the consonant
parts of W and Y are medial and are made between
say u or i and a following vowel or diphthong; W
being formed by the lips and Y by the tongue. By
beginning with say a brief short u or i and gliding
from either sound to that of any vowel or diphthong
and putting the accent on the latter the full sound of
W or Y will be produced as just explained. Any
vowel or diphthong, accordingly, can follow either u
or i in the same syllable. When a vowel in speech,
therefore, follows either of these vowels in the same
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 49
syllable in the manner mentioned it also of course fol-
lows W or Y.
59. The learner should remember that u and i are
the vowel sounds of W and Y and are always uttered
in the same syllable with them. The consonant sounds
are medial as just stated and are made between the u
or i and a following vowel or diphthong In uttering
W, u is first heard, then the lips take the position to
articulate (or semiarticulate) W, and the following
vowel is uttered after the W is articulated, as in the
examples above. The same occurs with Y. I is first
heard, then the tongue takes the position to articulate
(or semiarticulate) Y and the following vowel is
uttered after the Y is articulated. If this did not hap-
pen, that is, if the vowels u and i were not first briefly
uttered the articulations or semiarticulations of W
and Y could not exist and consequently be heard. This
is the reason the sounds and characters W and Y are
termed semivowels or semiconsonants and is also the
reason they can take the breathings smooth or rough
which are prefixed to the vowels u and i and not to
the consonants W and Y. W and Y thus have the
breathings both before and after them before as
O
vowels and after as consonants and are the only
sounds in language of this nature, which is the reason
they cannot be uttered at the end of syllables. (See
also see's. 29, 55 and 11, and the Introduction, page
20, par.'s 4, a and 5.)
THE SMALL ALTERNATIVE FORMS FOR W AND Y, ETC.
60. It is sometimes convenient to represent W and Y
at the beginning or in the body of stem words by small
acute-angle characters joined or disjoined as in the en-
graving instead of by their stems when the latter will
not make a good or sufficiently speedy junction; which in
the case of W isbeforeT, Ch, Th, S, Sh, and in that of
Y before P, T, F, Th, S; those opening to the right and
50 THE PHOXOGRAPHH MAVTAL.
left representing W and those upward and downward
standing for Y. When these characters are joined to
a following stem the vocalization of the latter is the
same as usual. When they are disjoined from the
stems they are joined to the vowel or diphthong im-
mediately following. The small W and Y may be
shaded initially for the aspirate. The aspirate dot
may also be employed if the initial shading is not
deemed sufficiently distinct. The H tick is seldom or
never prefixed. (See sec. 28.)
1 . The letter T in the first four lines of the engrav-
ing is employed merely to illustrate the manner of
joining the small AY and Y to the vowels both being
usually written in the second position to the stems.
(See also sec. and eng. 47, a. )
a. When small AY and Y are joined, whether to
stems or vowels, that form is chosen which in each
case makes the best junction. They are usually em-
ployed before Tand S only when the latter are followed
by a vowel, but are used before the other stems men-
tioned in paragraph 60 whether a vowel follows or
not.
b. In short words of very frequent occurrence,
such as "was, youth," etc., small W and Y are dis-
joined initially. These words are thus written in order
that they may be used with the greatest rapidity in
the Reporting Style (the method employed when writ-
ing connectedly) where also all the vowels both smooth
and rough are generally omitted.
c. W and Y may each be properly represented by
two ticks or characters because they are each com-
posed of two sounds as explained in sections 57 to 59
preceding. In other words, being compound sounds,
they may be represented by compound signs. On the
other- hand it is also proper to represent them by sim-
ple characters as in the case of the stems and as would
be the case if the alternates were represented by sin-
TUP] PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 51
gle ticks or half circles. The same principle is thus fol-
lowed with W and Y as with the vowels each of which
represents a breathing and the sonant organism, and
with Ch and J which consist respectively of TSh,
and DZh. (See Introduction, pages 13 and 21,
last paragraphs.) The reason, however, the small alter-
native forms are not presented with single signs is be
cause the stenographic material is so limited that it is
inconvenient to do so.
d. The proper size for the small W and Y charac-
ters is a little larger than that for the semicircles, the
angles being made sharp so as to additionally distin-
guish them from the latter.
e. If desired the W and Y angles opening to the
left and downward may be abolished and small W and
Y stems (quarter circles) a little longer than the ticks
or half circles; namely, about one-third the length of
a full sized curved stem, may be employed instead,
but joined only to vowels.
61. As Y and the long vowel n occur very fre-
quently together the sign for the former opening
downward is generally written alone for both, as in
the word "beauty." If at any time the a is desired
to be added (which is seldom or never necessary) the
reversed alternative half circle for the latter may be
employed; or the opposite characters written. Again,
the angular sign opening downward is sometimes
joined finally when thus representing both sounds, in
which case it is attached only to the four stems P, F,
M, K, and their heavy forms. (See par. 63 follow-
ing-)
a. If small Y, opening downward is abolished the
small Y stem, as explained in section 60, e, would be
employed instead in the same manner as in the last
paragraph except that it would not be joined finally to
F, K, etc.
62. The stenotypes for the small alternative W and
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXUAL.
Y forma are small cap roman and italic w, Y, and w t
r; the first two representing the characters opening
to the right and upward and the second two those
opening to the left and downward, their names being
respectively Wo, Yo and Woo, Yoo. Their stenotypy
is the same as for the vowels. (See see's. 47 and 50.)
a. If small Wand Y opening to the right and down-
ward are abolished, as explained in section 60, e, the
stenotypes remain unchanged.
Y BEFORE U EMPLOYED ONLY AFTER LABIALS AND BACK
LINGUALS.
63. In this system of phonography the sound of Y
before the long vowel u as in section 61 is indicated
only after P, B, F, V, M, K and G labials and back-
linguals as in the words "puny, repute, beauty,
few, view, mew, cube, skew" and " gubernatorial."
After all other consonants ; namely, front and middle
linguals (see Introduction, page 21, last paragraph and
table following) it is omitted, and the long vowel a
alone written as in the words "Tuesday, endue, sue,
resume." (See sees. 64 to 75 following).
64. The reasons for the above pronunciation are
given in the Introduction to the author's ' ' System of
Phonoscript and Phonotypy," page 9, et seq., and are,
briefly, that T, D, S, Z, etc., followed by Y and long
ft are liable to be changed into Ch, J, Sh, Zh, thus
causing words like "Tuesday, literature, duel, endue,
education, sue, ensue, zumic, resume," to be pro-
nounced "Chuesday, literachure, juel, enjue, edjuca-
tion, shue, enshue, zhumic, rezhume ;" with the result
that original words are entirely changed while derivative
ones lose their primitive forms. Consequently the Y
sound should be abolished.
65. Attention is also directed to the following ob-
servations by Dr. Latham in his ' ' Defence of Phonetic
THE PHONOGRAPHIC' MAXUAL. 53
Spelling."' section XXIV on the subject of T and D
followed by Y becoming Ch and J.
" tsh and dzh [Ch and J] can be developed out of t and
d as independent, roots. For instance;
"1. 1 'a, tya, tsha.
" 2. Da, dyn, dzha.
"Now we have tsh's and dzh's of both kinds in English, but
they are treated very differently iu our orthography. The
sound given to u. yoo and ew after t and d as in nature, verdure,
dew when pronounced natshur, verdzhur and dzfiew [nachur,
verjur, juj has already been noticed. That this is condemned
as a vulgarism I admit. I may also add that, according- to the
information of Mr. [Isaac] Pitman, who, from having exhibited
the so-called vulgarism phonetically, and subseqnentJy recog-
nized the ordinary pronunciation, is a good authority on the
matter, the practice of so sounding' the combination is on the
decrease perhaps passing away altogether. It may be so. It
is possible that with so many of us reading and writing and
cultivating our pronunciation, the influence of the orthoepisis
may succeed in checking- the tendency to change; and if they
do this they will, to some small extent, have succeeded in what
is called the fixation of some part of the language. I do not
care to prophecy upon this point. I only know that ta and da
at the beginning of the [above] series, and that tshd and dzha
[cha and ja] at the end, are, comparatively speaking, stable
combinations; and that ty and dy in the middle, are, compara-
tively speaking, remarkably ?t?istable ones. If then, I were to
prophecy at all, it would be in favor of the vulgar pronunciation
eventually winning."
a. The ordinary pronunciation of Ty and Dy as
recognized by Mr. Pitman is preferable to that of Ch
and J because it is more etymological ; butit isclear from
the remarks of Dr. Latham that it can not be retained.
We should, therefore, abolish the Y sound for the sake
of proper etymology. Accordingly in this system
words like the above are written and pronounced "Tus-
day, literatur, duel," etc., "natur, verdur, du," and
not according to the present standard ; namely, ' ' Tyues-
day, literatyure, dyuel," etc., "natyure, verdyure,
dyew." (Tyiisday, literatyur, dyfiel, etc., natynr,
verdyur, dyn). Nevertheless the learner may if he
prefers follow the latter.
66. The pronunciation recognized and adopted by
-,4 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
Mr. Pitman is that of Y followed by the long vowel n
and not by the short one, u. That is "nature" and
"verdure" are written by Mr. Pitman "natynr" and
"verdyor" and not "natyur" and "verdyur." Also
"thew, new, annual, annuity, penury" and "pen-
urious" are written "thn, nyn, anynal, anynity,
penyury" and "penyurious.'"' This is practically the
same pronunciation as that in Webster's "International
Dictionary" (copyright 1890) in which also "shew"
(obsolete) is written (practically) "shya." Mr. Pit-
man, however, writes "Jew, Jn" as also does the
dictionary just mentioned but with the alternative
"Jyn" They disagree, however, on "lieu," the
former writing it "la" and the latter (practically)
"lya." On the remaining letters of the phonetic
alphabet; namely, Ch, Sh, R as in "chew, sure, rue,"
they practically agree and write them, the former act-
ually and the latter substantially, "chn, shnr, rfi."
a. From the above it is evident that the past and
present pronunciation is practically the long vowel a.
It is therefore adopted in this system and the additional
words just given expressed "thu, nii, anaal, anility,
penury, penurious, shu, Ju, lu, chu, shiir, ru."
67. In addition to the preceding observations by Dr.
Latham the following on the same subject, except the
first paragraph, are made by Dr. A. J. Ellis in his
work "On Early English Pronunciation," Part I,
page 203.
" The pronunciation of P, B does not seem to have varied
in any respect.
" T, D have now a tendency, ignored by most orthoepists,
under particular circumstance to pass into ch, j ; thus lutture,
verdure are, perhaps most frequently, pronounced nachur, ver-
jur, the last word. being in that case identified with verger.
This alteration takes place generally through the action of a
palatal sound, originally ii then eu, yu so that the transition
was tiir, teur, tyur, tyur, chur. I have not found traces of the
change, however, but the pronunciation nfrtur or its equivalent
given by Jones seems to show an effort to avoid it by omitting
THE PHONOGRAPHIC 31AXUAL. "),",
the palatal element y. In the XVIIIth century Sheridan carried
this still further and allowed for such pronunciations as chu'tur
for tutor. The palatals e, y have always had a great effect
upon preceding- consonants of the dental and guttural class, as
they tend to materially alter the position of the tongue in order
to facilitate the transition to a following vowel. The languages
derived from the Latin are full of instances. It is a fashion in
modern English to resist, or to believe that we resist, this tend-
ency iu the especial case of ture and dure, but we have given
into it completely in tirm, where the t, hesitating in classical
times between c and t, underwent a change which gave seox in
French, whence English, first seun and then shun never, ex-
cept in orthoepical fancies, shon and in Italian produced
tseu'ne. A similar change is recognized in clous, cial. And it
is in vain to protest against ture, dure becomming chur, jur at a
time when even tyo5r, dyoor though far less pedantic than teur,
deur, have a singularly orthoepistic effect."
a. Xow if P, B have not varied in any respect there
is no reason why other sounds should do so (say T, D)
except from faulty pronunciation. Accordingly the
interpolated Y sound should be abolished.
68. Dr. Ellis states, it will be observed, that
"nature, verdure are, perhaps most frequently, pro-
nounced nfichur, verjur," that is with the short vowel
u in the termination; thus, "chur, jur." But it is
shown above (sec. 60) that the ordinary pronunciation
was and is with the long vowel; namely u. His obser-
vations, however, are fully as applicable to the one as
to the other.- He also states, in effect, that "natyu.r"
and " verdyur " are far less pedantic than "nateiir"
and "verdeur" (nate-ar and verde-nr.) This is true,
yet the latter are far more etymological being only
one degree removed from the (supposed) originals
"tur" and "diir." But then they are not so quickly
pronounced, since they are composed of two syllables,
which is the reason the Y was next adopted and now,
inchoately, the Ch and J. ''Tur " and "dtir, " how-
ever, (natur and verdur) are fully as quick as "chur"
and "jar" (nachur and verjnr) and are also strictly
etymological, which the latter are not, inasmuch as
they destroy the T and D. Consequently " nfitnr "
5(5 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANTAL.
and " verdiir " are preferable pronunciations to either
"natynr "and " verdynr "or " nfichnr "and "verjar"
and much nearer, if not actually, the original sounds,
since it is by no means certain that these were "tlir"
and " difr," though the latter were no doubt very close
approximations to the originals; particularly when
quickly pronounced. The dictionary above mentioned
has the following on this point, Guide to Pronuncia-
tion, page Ixiv, section 135, Note:
"The original sound of the letter u, as in the Latin and as
still retained in the Italian, Spanish and German was the
simple sound of oo (food) and o7> (foot) [u, ui]. In the time of
Chaucer, the pronunciation of this letter in the English which
was then substantially, if not absolutely, the same as in the
French may even then have fluctuated between the perfectly
simple sound now heard in the French and a sound more or less
decidedly diphthongal; as it appears to have done in England,
for the leading sound of the letter, down through the seven-
teenth and far into the eighteenth century. The y sound
made its way into the diphthong and gained prominence in it
by degrees, while the diphthong itself gradually gained a more
full development, with greater weight and a tongue position
farther back given to the terminal element.
a. All of which plainly means that the sound was
originally fl or ui and eventually became more or less
of a diphthong with a Y sound (either consonantal or
vowel, since Y is a semiconsonant or semivowel) pre-
ceding the latter. Now as ui (oo) in "foot" is a diph-
thong (see the author's "System of Phonoscript and
Phonotypy, " page 13) and not a simple sound, and as
the present pronunciation of u as shown in sections 65
and 66 is long Q it follows that the original sound was
also long 0, or practically so.
69. One, if not the principal reason, for the exist-
ence of the Y sound as above is that it came in mostly
from the French, which is a nasal language and there-
fore can easily employ the Y sound in such connec-
tions; which the English can not do, as it is not a nasal
tongue. Accordingly the tendency of English is either
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. .',7
to eliminate nasals altogether or to strictly limit them.
As a result any pronunciations by which they are
encouraged will eventually be abolished one way or
another. They consequently should be abolished
according to proper etymology, which is effected when
we say " natnr, verdar, " etc., as above, instead of
"nachnr, verjnr," etc.
70. The Y sound should also be abolished from
before other vowels than long n. (See the dictionary
above mentioned, Guide to Pronunciation, page Ixiii,
section 106). In other words, it should be abolished
whenever the resulting combination would be liable to
conflict with Ch, J, Sh, Zh, etc. As examples of this,
when te (ty), ti (ty) become Ch before "ous (us), on
(un)" and "an" as in "righteous, question, Christian,"
(richus, queschun, chrischan), the e (y), i (y) is omitted
in this system; thus, "rltus, questun, christan." The
learner, however, as in the case of long n (see last
sentence of sec. 65, a) may, if he prefers, insert the
Y sound; thus, "rltyus, questyun, christyan. "
71. Finally the Y sound in such connections,
namely after the front and middle linguals (see sec.
63) does not enrich the language, since it conveys no
additional meaning. Therefore it is a useless burden
on the tongue.
72. Again, Dr. Ellis in the quotation above (see
sec. 67) speaking of the tendency of the palatals e, y
to alter the position of the tongue says that "we have
given into it completely in tlon " which finally became
"shun never, except in orthoepical fancies, shon"
and that "A similar change is recognized in dous,
cial."
73. This is probably true as to "tion" (shun) and
is mostly so as to ''cious, cial" (shus, shal). The same
may be said as to "sion, cian, sian, cean," etc.,
and "tious, teous, ceous, seous, tial, zier," etc. (See
the dictionary above mentioned, pages Ixii and Ixiii,
58 THE PHOXOCRAPHIC MANUAL.
sections 97 and 106). Nevertheless these terminations
will perhaps eventually he pronounced without the o
or i (that is the Y) sound, thus abolishing the indirect
or corrupt derivative Sh (or Zh.) Accordingly such
words as "motion, notion, edition, mission, vision,
Milesian, musician, crustacean, facetious, gracious,
micaceous, nauseous, partial, facial, glazier" will then
be uttered ''motun, notun, editun, misun, vizun, Mllf-
zan, myazikan, krustasan, fasetus, grasus, mikasus,
nausue, partal, fasal, glfizer. "
74. From the above it will be perceived that
phonetic spelling is essentially etymological spelling
and that when it comes into general use there will be
many radical changes from our present pronunciation.
These, however, will be for the better, since they will
be strictly logical, while in addition the way will be
opened for enriching the language by the employment
of the displaced words with a different meaning.
75. At present, however, the only changes adopted
in this system are those mentioned in sections 65, a,
66, a and 70.
LESSON 7.
THE + TICK AND CURVET AND II TICKS.
THE + TICK AND CURVET.
76. The -f tick and curvet, as stated in section 27,
a, are not usually necessary in ordinary writing. If
desired, however, they may be inserted according to
the same principle as the lene dot in section 49.
THE H TICKS.
77- A vowel occurring before either H tick is
written disjoined before it, while one between it and
the stem is written before the latter.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXUAL. 59
78. The ticks should generally be inserted initially
in monosyllables and dissyllables.
79. In short words which occur very frequently,
however, they may be omitted and the initial rough
vowels, or the aspirate dot and rough vowels, used in-
stead after the manner of small W and Y explained in
section 60, b. The ticks may also occasionally be
omitted initially from long words whose forms are
sufficiently legible without them.
80. The ticks may frequently be omitted medially
from words of three syllables and over and also some-
times from compound words of two syllables. The
rough breathing or aspirate can then, if additional dis-
tinction is ever desired, be represented before the
rough vowels by the heavy dot.
OMISSION OF THE II TICKS.
81. If desired the H ticks may be omitted alto-
gether in ordinary writing the same as the -f- tick and
curvet and the rough vowels or the latter and the aspir-
ate dot inserted instead where necessary. It is usually
preferable, however, to insert them as above directed.
60 THE riioxoriRApHic MANUAL.
CHAPTER III.
CIRCLES AND LOOPS- INITIALS OP PROPER
NAMES. PUNCTUATION AND OTHER MARKS.
LESSON 8.
CIRCLES.
82. As Sand Z are very frequent sounds each is pro-
vided, in addition to the sign already given, with a
small circle; the one made light for S and the other
heavy on the most convenient side for Z. Both char-
acters are written initially, medially and finally. It is
not often necessary to shade the circle for Z when
medial or final, because the context will usually indi-
cate which sound is meant. When it occurs initially,
however, which is but seldom in writing English, and
then, as will hereafter be explained, only on double
consonants; as in "Zwolle," it is shaded, but usually
only slightly, or it may be written unshaded if pre-
ferred. (See sec. 38, etc.) These characters are
adopted for the sake of speed, the stems S and Z being
too large and cumbersome to be always made with suf-
ficient quickness.
83. The names of the small circles are Is and Iz
and their stenotypes are s and z.
THE INITIAL S CIRCLE.
84. The circle S (see sec. 19) is made initially on
the right or upper side of straight stems and on the
inner side of curved ones and is always read before
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANTAL. Gl
the stem. It is not used initially on downward R or
L. (See sec. 12).
THE FINAL S CIRCLE.
85. The circle S is made finally on the right or
upper side of straight stems and on the inner side of
curved ones. Initial and final S are thus made on the
same side of stems which stand alone.
THE MEDIAL S CIRCLE.
86. The circle S when written between two straight
stems struck in the same direction is made on the same
side as when final. When written between two
straight stems that form an argle it is made on the
outside of the angle and does not form a perfect circle.
87. When it occurs between a curve and a straight
stem it follows the direction of the curve, (a). Be-
tween too similar curves it is turned in the direction
of both. Between two opposite curves that do not form
an angle it is turned in the direction of the first. Be-
tween two opposite curves that form an angle, it is
turned in the direction of the second and does not
form a perfect circle, as in the last three examples in
the engraving. In such cases it is named Us or Uz
and stenotyped .v or z.
88. A circle is always equally divided between
two stems half on one and half on the other.
89. The circle S may be attached initially to small
W, but not usually to small Y to represent the con-
sonant S or Z, as will hereafter appear.
a. It may also be attached finally to a vowel or
diphthong standing alone or to a word composed
wholly of vowels to indicate the plural number or
possessive case. It is never attached initially as a
consonant to either as will hereafter appear.
b. The circle S when attached to the vowels and
G2 TIIK PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
diphthongs should be proportioned to the size of these
characters.
THE S DOUBLE CONSONANTS.
90. The consonant S when initial in addition to its
ordinary use as in the word "seek," frequently pre-
cedes and apparently unites with other consonants in
the same syllable as in Spe, Ste, Sle, Swe, Sye.
These consonants when so united are called the S
Double Consonants and never have a vowel between
them as such.
a.- The remarks above apply also to the Z double
consonants. The latter, however, seldom occur in-
itially in English. (See sec. 82).
91. When the S and Z double consonants happen
in connection with the cognates P, B, etc., and F, V,
etc., the initial S circle usually belongs on light stems
and the initial Z circle on heavy ones. Consequently
if a circle on such stems should happen to be unshaded
it is usually known to be S or Z according as the stem
is light or heavy. (See sec. 82).
92. The initial S circle may be employed to form
an S double consonant on any stem except S and Ng or
downward R and L. (See sec. 84). Usually, how-
ever, in English the S double consonants occur only
on the stems P, T, K, F, M, N, L, and W.
93. The circle S is always employed when the con-
sonant S begins a word except in cases mentioned
hereafter. When the consonant Z begins a word the
stem Z is always employed except occasionally in the
case of a double consonant as explained in see's. 82
and 90).
NOMENCLATURE AND STENOTYPY OF THE STEMS AND
CIRCLES WHEN JOINED TOGETHER.
94. A single stem and S or Z circle joined together
and standing alone are usually pronounced in one syl-
THE PHOXOCiUAPIlIC MANTAL. 63
lable the stems receiving the same names as when with-
out the circles; thus sP, Ps, sPs, Ps, sB, sV, zV, sSh,
sR, sN, sNg are named Spee, Spees, Pees, Sbee, Svee,
Zvee, Sshee, Sree, Snee, Seeng.
95. When a circle occurs between two stems it is
usually pronounced in the same syllable with the first,
thus, PsP, TsK, RsN, MsN, are uttered PeesPee,
Tees Kee, Rees Nee, Mees Nee.
96. When, however, it occurs between two oppo-
site curves and is made in the direction of the second
(see sec. and eng. 87, a) half on the back of the first
(see sec. 88) it is pronounced separately, thus, F.sLT
are spoken Fee Us Lee Tee.
97. In the stenotypic examples above, as well as in
those which follow, the spelling is phonetic. Conse-
quently they should be pronounced as written. Thus
Pees is uttered with the S and not with the Z sound.
VOCALIZATION OF STEMS HAVING THE 8 CIRCLE.
98. In the case of double consonants the vowels
are written after the stern.
99. In other cases a vowel between the circle and
sterm is written before the latter while one following
the stem is written after it. (See also sec. 100).
100. If the vowel or diphthong is a medial one,
that is one between two stems joined by a circle it is
written after the first stem or before the second ac-
cording as it precedes or follows the circle. In the
case of two or more vowels or diphthongs before or
after the circle the same rule is followed.
101. When a stem has a final circle it is vocalized
the same as when without it.
102. The circle S is never followed by a final
vowel. When a final vowel occurs after S the stem
form of the latter is always used.
(34 THE PHONOGRAPHH 1 MANUAL.
LESSON '..
THE INITIALS SIS OR SIZ, ETC., AND SI, ETC., SYLLABLES.
103. In words other than monosyllables when initial
S is followed by a vowel and S or Z, whether the sec-
ond S or Z belongs to the initial syllable or not, the
first S and the second S or Z are written either with a
large circle double the diameter of the small S circle
and in the same manner or with the small circle and S
stem, or vice versa, with the S stem and small circle,
as follows :
a. When the second S or Z is followed immediately
by a consonant, the large circle is used. It may be
shaded to represent the Z, but this is seldom necessary.
If desired the intervening vowel may be placed in the
circle as in the engraving.
1. The name of the initial large circle is Ses or Sez
and its stenotypic representation is ss, sz. It is always
pronounced as a separate word ; thus the combination
ssP is uttered Ses Pee.
2. The large circle by reason of its diameter being
twice the length of the diameter of the small one, is
often called the Double Size Circle although its area is
really four times that of the latter. If preferred it
may also be called the Double Diameter or Double
Width Circle.
b. When the second S or Z is followed immediately
by a vowel which is the end of the second syllable
whether this vowel is a syllable of itself or belongs to
the second S or Z the circle S and the stem S or Z
are employed.
C. When the second S or Z is followed immediately
by a vowel which is not the end of the second syllable,
the stem S and the circle are written.
EXCEPTIONS.
104. The above rules do not apply to derivative
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. (J-,
words whose primitive forms should be maintained ;
as in "schismatize" or "Sicilian," etc. (See eng. 199,
line 6.)
105. They also do not apply to compound words,
or to their plural or verbal forms; as in "sauce-box,
so-so, so-sos."
106. Rule b, however, applies to derivative words
having S or Z sounds only that have a different appli-
cation from their primitives; as "saucy, sizy," etc.,
or if not of different application, yet where much
greater speed is obtained by writing them thus than by
preserving their primitive forms as in "sauce, size,"
etc. (See sec. 116).
1 07. The learner is instructed that in phonography
it is a general rule that all derivative words should
maintain the form of their primitives. Sometimes,
however, this is not practicable when speed is neces-
sary. In such cases the rule is infringed, as in the
word "saucy," noticed above. It is also infringed for
the sake of speed in the case of the word "society"
which is written according to rule c as in the last form
but one in engraving 106. The learner may, however,
write it according to rule b if he chooses (see last ex-
ample in engraving 106) thus maintaining its primitive
form as in the Latin word "socius," the last example
in engraving 103, b.
108. The learner is furthermore instructed that it
is a general rule for writing all words in phonography
that those outlines should be chosen which are most
easily written. Sometimes, however, this rule also is
infringed either for stenographic reasons or for the
sake of extra legibility or uniformity as will appear in
the course of the exercises.
THE FINAL OR MEDIAL SIS OR SIZ, ETC., ZIS OR ZIZ, ETC.,
AND IS OR IZ, ETC., SYLLABLES.
1 09. Final or medial Ss or Sz and Zs or Zz with a
Gf THE PHOXOORAPHfC MAN I 'AT..
vowel between, whether the lirst 8 or Z belongs to this
vowel or not, are represented the sumo as initial Ss or Sz
by the large circle which if desired, may be shaded on
one side to indicate Z or shaded throughout to indicate
Zz. The shading, however, is not usually necessary.
The final or medial large circle may be vocalized by
placing the intervening vowel within it the same as
in the case of the initial one and is attached to stems
in the same manner as is the final or medial small circle.
110. It will thus be observed that in addition to
its use in the medial and final syllables Sis or Siz, etc.,
the large circle is employed to represent the final S or
Z of a primitive word together with the addition to it
of a complete syllable, usually Es or Ez, as in "pieces"
and "phazes "the derivatives of "piece" and "phaze. "
111. Final S or Z may be added to the final large
circle by a small imperfect circle light or shaded and
turned on the other side of the stem the latter
forming part of the circle. Its name and stenotype
are the same as for the other small circle.
112. The large circle may be written between two
opposite curves that form an angle. In which case it
is named by prefixing the short vowel U to the name
of the large circle ; thus, Uses, Usez, Uzes, Uzez and
stenotyped ss, sz, zs, zz in like manner with the similar
small circle.
113. The largo circle is never followed by a final
vowel. When a final vowel occurs after Ss, Sz, etc.,
one of the stem forms of S or Z is always used.
114. The large circle is never attached to small "VV
or Y. It is, however, sometimes attached to a vowel
or diphthong but never initially to represent the con-
sonants Ss or Sz, as will hereafter appear. (See also
par's. 89 and a).
a. The large circle when attached to the vowels and
diphthongs, should, like the circle S, be proportioned
to the size of these characters. (See sec. 89, b).
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXL'AL. 07
1 15. The final or me<lial large circle is pronounced
the same as when initial but as a syllable instead of a
word ; thus, Pss, Psss are uttered Peeses, Peeses Is.
WORDS HAVING S OR S AND Z CONSONANT SOUNDS ONLY.
116. Monosyllables containing only S or S and Z
consonant sounds that begin with S and end with S or
Z and similar dissyllables that are not compounds
are always written with the initial S stem and the
small or large final circle; as in "sauce, size, sauces,
sizes." (See sec. 106).
117. Likewise dissyllables and trissyllables that
begin with a voAvel and contain only S or S and Z
consonants are written with the S stem and small or
large circle; as in "asses, assize, assesses, assizes."
a. Words other than monosyllables and having
only S or S and Z consonants and which begin with S
and whose second vowel is the end of the second
syllable or are compounds are written as in engravings
103, b and 105.
LESSON 10.
WHEN TO USE THE S AND Z STEMS.
THE STEM S.
118. S is written with the stem:
a. After an initial vowel and before a final one.
b. Initially or finally before or after two vowels
or a diphthong and a vowel and also medially if con-
venient, but if not the circle is employed. (See
'miasma" and "museum," sec. and eng. 100 and
"siesta," Reading Exercise 84 to 132, line 9).
119. In all cases above derivative words usually
maintain the forms of their primitives. (See also
sec. 105.)
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
120. 8 is also written with the stem as explained
in sections 103, b, c and 110 and 117.
a. It is also written with the stem in the words
"cession" and "session." (See eng. 214, line 4.)
THE STEM '/..
121. The above rules apply also to Z except that
initially the stem is always used unless a / double
consonant occurs, in which case the circle is written.
(See sees. 82 and 90, a and 93).
LESSON 11.
LOOPS.
THE INITIAL ST LOOP.
122. The double consonant St (see sec. !) is
represented initially by a loop on the right or upper
side of straight stems and on the inner side of curved
ones. The loop is made half as long as the stem to
which it is attached. It is not used initially on down-
ward R or L. (See sec. 12.) Its name is Stay and
its stenotypes are st. When it occurs initially it is
always pronounced as a separate word ; thus, stP, stR
are spoken, Stay Pee, Stay Ree.
123. A vowel between the loop and stem is writ-
ten before the latter while one following the stem is
written after it, as in the similar case of the initial S
circle. Stems with the initial St loop never take an
initial vowel.
124. The St loop is used in all cases when the
double consonant St occurs initially except when it is
followed only by a vowel as in "stow" or as in the
derivatives "stower, stowage," in which cases the circle
S and stem T are employed. The latter are also always
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 69
employed when a vowel occurs between intitial S and a
following T, as in "site," (See eng. 99).
a. When the St loop is written initially, particu-
larly on the left curves F and N, it should be made of
the full length and proper form so as not to conflict
w r ith an initial S or Ss circle.
THE FINAL OR MEDIAL ST LOOP.
125. The St loop is made finally and sometimes
medially on the same side of the stems as described in
section 122 and may indicate either St or Zd. Stems
with the final or medial St loop are vocalized the same
as stems with the final circle; namely as if no loop
were attached.
a. If at any time extra distinction is desired in the
case of words of one stroke, the loop may be shaded to
represent Zd; or the S circle and stem D may be
employed.
126. The loop 11 St is not employed before a final
vowel. When the sounds St occur thus the circle S
and the stem T are alwa} r s written., The loop St is
also never attached to a vowel.
127- Final S or Z may be added to the final St
loop by the small imperfect circle light or shaded.
128. When the St loop is shaded to represent Zd
it is named Zday and stenotyped zd.
129. When the St or Zd loop occurs finally on a
stem it is usually pronounced in the same syllable with
the latter; thus, Pst, Fst, Psts, Fsts, Kzd are uttered
Peest, Feest (or Efst), Peests, Feests (or Efsts),
Eeezd.
THE FTNAL OR MEDIAL STR LOOP.
130. The three sounds Str, with a vowel, usually
short c, between the T and K the first two sounds
being the double consonant St are represented finally
and .sometimes medially by a loop two-thirds as long
70 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
as the stem to which it is attached and somewhat fuller
than the St loop and on the same side of the stems as
the latter. It is vocalized in the same manner. The
intermediate vowel may be indicated by striking it
through the loop just after the swell. This, however,
is seldom necessary.
131. The Str loop, the same as the St loop, is not
used before a final vowel. The manner of represent-
ing the sounds Str in such connection Avill appear
hereafter.
132. Final S or Z may be added to the final Sty
loop by the small imperfect circle light or shaded.
a. The Str loop is never written initially, or
attached to a vowel.
133. The name of the Str loop is Ster and its steii-
otypic representation is str. A stem Avith this attach-
ment is usually pronounced the same as without it,
simply the syllable for the loop being added; thus,
Pstr, Pstrs are named Peester, Peesters.
INITIALS OF PROPER NAMES.
134. The initials of proper names are written with
the phonographic characters on the line X with the
letter K and the final S circle except C and Q, which
are written, the first with the S circle on the line and
the second with K below and touching an imaginary
line half the length of a T stem below the ordinary one.
When thus employed as initials the consonant stems,
are not vocalized.
135. The initials of such names as Phillip, George,
Gerrit and Artemus are written with the shorthand
stems P, G and the tick "a" as in "at" and not with
the phonographs F, J and "a" as in "art;" while the
initials of Cecilia, Camilla and Uriah, are expressed
with the character C as in the last paragraph and the
short vowel u and not with S, K and Y. The initials
of Theodore, Sherwin and Charles are represented by
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANVAL. 71
Th, Sh and Ch or if preferred, by T, S and C, as
above. Likewise the heavy sounds of Th and Sh, if
used, would be expressed by the heavy letters Dh arid
Zh (or D and Z) just as the heavy sound of Ch is indi-
cated by J. The initials of Whistler and Hugh are
written with W and H and not with nW and HY.
a. By following the directions in the above para-
graphs the initial of every name will either receive the
same representation as in the ordinary spelling or be
thus unmistakably indicated. When phonetic spelling
is adopted in script and print, as well as in phono-
graphy, the initials of all proper names will of course
be represented invariably with the proper letters of
the phonographic, phonoscript and phonotypic alpha-
bets. (1). When the pronunciation of a proper name
is uncertain it should be written in the common long-
hand or in phonoscript preferably the latter if the
pronunciation is exceptional. (See Prologue, page 28).
b. If preferred, and time is had, all initials of
proper names may be written in script.
PUNCTUATION AND OTHER MARKS.
136. In reporting in this system of phonography it
is not customary to punctuate except to indicate the
period or the end of a sentence by a blank space about
as long as a triple length K which size Avill of course
vary according as the writer's phonographic charac-
ters are of the standard dimensions or larger. (See
Prologue, page 26.) If a sentence should finish near
the end of a line the next one should commence on the
following line with an indentation the length of the
period from the margin; the space left on the line
above not being considered. A paragraph should
commence on a new line with an indentation about
twice as long as that for the period. An indentation
thus always indicates a period, the end of a sentence or
a paragraph. Sometimes, however, evon in reporting
72 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
but particularly when writing for one's own private
use, or when the matter is to be read by others it is
necessary or convenient to employ both punctuation
and other marks and then they are written as in the
following table, some of which are modified from their
ordinary script or print forms so that they may not
be mistaken for shorthand characters. As a general
rule even when the punctuation marks are used the first
three; viz., the comma, semicolon and colon are omit-
ted, while the period, dash and parentheses are much
more frequently inserted than any of the remaining
forms and in the order named. Any other typo-
graphical marks employed in short hand than those in
the table are the same as usual.
a. The periods and paragraphs instead of being in-
dicated when reporting, by spacing and indentation as
explained above, may, if preferred, be written with
the strokes for the period and break given in the table.
b. As the length of a simple T stem is one-eighth of
an inch (see Prologue, page 26) that of a simple K
stem will average about five thirty-seconds of an inch.
Consequently the spacing and indentation for the per-
iod and paragraph in the engraved exercises of this
book are fifteen thirty-seconds and fifteen sixteenths of
an inch, respectively. The learner, however, need not
confine himself strictly to these sizes unless he prefers
to do so but may adopt longer ones as explained in
paragraph 136 above.
c. The spacing between words in the engravings
of this book average about three thirty-seconds of
an inch and is the standard for this system. But the
learner may adopt a longer one if he prefers as in the
case of the spaces mentioned in the last paragraph.
THE PHOXOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
137. TABLE.
PUNCTUATION MARKS.
73
Comma
Semicolon
Colon
Period
Interrogation (UP)
Dash
Doubt (up)
Exclamation or Wonder
Ironical Exclamation
Parentheses
Brackets
/
(/)
( )
ORTHOGRAPHICAL MARKS.
Quotations ** lf
Hyphen (up) //
Accent /
Apostrophe '
Roman ^
" Small Capitals =
" Large " =
Heavy Face Roman s /
Heavy Face Roman, )
Small Capitals \
Heavy Face Roman,
Large Capitals
Italic
*
" Small Capitals =z
' ' Large ' '
Heavy Face Italic /_
Heavy Face Italic,
Small Capitals
Heavy Face Italic,
Large Capitals
DIVISION MARKS.
Section
Paragraph
Caret
1
Break
INSERTION MARK.
/I
74 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAKUAL.
REFERENCE MARKS.
Asterisk
Dagger f
MATHEMATICAL MARKS.
Double Dagger
Equals
Minus
Into
Plus 4;
Times x
THE PUNCTUATION MARKS.
138. The punctuation marks are also called Gram-
matical Marks. The fir.st three; namely, the comma
semicolon and colon are the same as in script and print.
The period is formed like a double length Ch except
that it is somewhat longer and is termed the Stroke
Period in contradistinction to the space one. The in-
terrogation mark is made upward like a double length
R but somewhat longer and is struck through the lino
with about its first quarter below it. The horizontal
stroke for the dash is made about the length of the
stem K, the downward tick in the direction of Ch be-
ing struck through it near the end.
139. The parentheses are the same as in script and
print except that they are made longer than a double
length Th or S in order to distinguish them from tho
latter. The brackets are for distinction also made of
the same length as the parentheses. The punctuation
or grammatical marks are eleven in number.
THE ORTHOGRAPHICAL MARKS.
140. In short quotations the quotation marks are
written as in the engraving. In long ones, however,
they may, if desired, be enclosed in circles about twice
the size of the Ss circle so as to be more readily found.
The marks may also for extra distinction be written in
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
the margin. (See Prologue, page 24.") The joined
marks should always be written first and the disjoined
ones second, as in the table, so as to distinguish the
beginning and end of the quotation. Single quota-
tion marks are made the same as in script but are sel-
dom employed,
a. In this book quotation marks are usually em-
ployed only for quotations or distinction. ( See also
sec. 144, a and b.)
141. The hyphen is mostly employed in com-
pound words, but only when the component parts
will not join readily, as in "chain-gang." In other
cases, as in "day-book," it is omitted, the component
parts being joined.
142. - The accent mark is always made downward
in the direction of Ch, as in the list. It is used only
in connection with vowels or diphthongs and is placed
according to legibility either directly above or under-
neath them or partly higher or lower and a little to
one side after if higher and before if lower; but always
in such a manner that the end next the vowel points
directly toward it. It is never placed between a vowel
and stem. In the case of a vowel before a perpendicu-
lar stem it is written under, or under and before the
vowel so that it may not interfere with the aspirate
dot should it be necessary to write the latter.
143. The apostrophe is used to denote the omis-
sion of letters in a word and to indicate the possessive
case after the manner employed in script and print.
To denote omission it is placed in the first position to
the stem. To indicate the possessive case it is
placed in the third position above the stem on
horizontal and upward strokes and to the right of it
on downward ones. The apostrophe is not often
employed.
144. The remaining orthographical marks are em-
ployed to indicate roman and italic letters. The
7G THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
intersecting mark, which is called the Heavy Face Mark,
is written in the direction of Ch and is struck through
the horizontal one at or near the center, if the latter
is short, but if long, near the beginning. All the
characters are placed under or near one or more letters
according to convenience. The orthographical marks
are sixteen in number.'
a. In this book heavy face type is usually em-
ployed to represent letters, words and figures that are
to be distinguished from the rest of the text, but
which are not emphatic. When thus used they are
said to be for distinction. (See also par. b.)
b. Again, in this book italic is usually employed
(outside of its stenotyp'ic representation) only for em-
phasis. (See.also sec. 140, a.)
THE DIVISION MARKS.
145. In this system a section consists of one or
more paragraphs a paragraph, as usual, consisting of
a break in the writing or printing. The mark for the
section in the list should usually be made without lift-
ing the pen. The mark for the paragraph is the same
as in script and also like the one in print except that
the black or shaded part is left white or unshaded.
Both the marks for the section and paragraph may be
employed in connected writing if desired. Usually,
however, the mark for the break is used indiscrimin-
ately for either, since it is more swiftly written. The
sections and paragraphs are then arranged when tran-
scribing.
146. Sometimes an explanatory paragraph occurs
within a section. In such a case it is termed a Remark
and is distinguished differently from the other sul>-
paragraphs, namely, by a number. No division sign
is necessary for the remark. Again, unindented por-
tions of a section when lettered or numbered are
called Parts the letters or numbers usually being in
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 77
parentheses. Finally a subparagraph and a remark
together are termed a Subsection. The division signs
are three in number.
147. In this book the specific marks or names are
not employed at the beginning of the paragraphs, but
instead numbers or letters are used; the sections and
remarks being numbered and the other breaks which
are usually for convenience specified as paragraphs,
lettered. Thus "103, a, 1" or "118 b," is read "Sec-
tion 103, paragraph a, remark 1," or "Section 118,
paragraph b." Also "8, (a)" or "135, a (1)" is read
"Section 8, part a" or "Section 135, paragraph, a,
part 1." In each instance when the above notation is
employed the last member "1, b, (a)" or "(1)" is
specially referred to, the same as in book, chapter
and verse in scriptural references; or the method may
be reversed; thus "1, a. 103; b, 118; (a), 8," or "(1),
a, 135" when the first member is meant. When the
term ' 'subsection" is employed, it includes the remark
or remarks; thus "Section 103, subsection a," indi-
cates both paragraph a and the remark under it.
THE INSERTION MARK.
148. The caret is employed to show where inter-
lined words are introduced and is used mostly in
private composition. It should be made quite acute
and of sufficient length to be easily distinguished from
the short hand characters. It is written with its point
in the direction of the interlined matter which is
usually above the lino through which the caret points.
Sometimes, however, the interlineation is bel'ow the
line in which case the caret is made with its point
downward.
THE REFERENCE MARKS.
149. There are three reference marks; namely, the
asterisk, dagger and double dagger, to indicate foot or
78 THE PUo\or;i.'APHIC MANTAL.
marginal notes. They are mostly employed in private
composition. . If any more are required they may be
doubled or trebled. The better way, however, is to
use numbers or letters enclosed by circles after the
manner of the small figures or letters technically
called "superiors," employed in script and print. (See
also sec. 46).
THE MATHEMATICAL, MARKS.
150. The five fundamental mathematical marks,
being often useful in shorthand, are included in the
table. They should be made of the ordinary size.
THE PilONooKAPHIC JIAXITAL. 79
CHAPTER IV.
HOOKS, ETC.
LESSOX 12.
INITIAL HOOKS.
THE U AND L HOOKS.
151. If the circumference of a circle were to re-
volve around us it could do so only in two ways
either to the right or left. Therefore all arcs are por-
tions of circumferences traced either to the right or
left and called right or left arcs or curves.
152. When a letter, except upward R or L, is
made with a small initial right hook it indicates that R
is added to it; when, except N, Ng and upward R,
with a small left one, that L is added. A curved
stem written alone or initially can not receive a hook
on its convex side and be written quickly as it turns
more or less into an opposite curve with a hook on the
concave side. Accordingly as the double consonant
Sr or Zr with a vowel following it in the same syl-
lable does not exist initially in English and the phon-
ograph for it is thus not needed in writing, and as S or
Z with a vowel and R following is represented as ex-
yjlained in Chapter III, the stem S or Z with an initial
hook is used to represent Thr or Dhr; and as similar
rules govern \V, the latter, when it receives an initial
hook, becomes Fr and may be shaded for Vr. In the
case of M and N, however, which can not be so treated
for lack of stenographic material, the small hook on
SO THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
these letters represents R and a large one, twice its
size, L. The same is true of Mp or Mb and Ng,
which will presently be further considered, (a.)
Again, a double sized L hook is used on downward Sh
in addition to the small R hook, the same as on M and
N. Upward Shi, the same as upward Sh (see sec.
18,) is never written alone. Downward and upward
Shi are usually written initially before the same stems
as downward and upward Sh, as will be explained in
the next chapter.
153. A double sized left hook on upward R adds
L and a similar right one on upward L adds R. The
small hooks on these letters will be considered
presently.
154. The large hooks on upward Sh and on Y and
the large right one on upward R are not used.
155. Downward R and L do not receive initial
hooks in order that they may not conflict with Fr
and Yl.
a. An initial hook is never attached to a vowel.
156. From the preceding it will be seen that simi-
lar hooks, circles and loops are always placed on sim-
ilar curves. Also that the more frequently occur-
ring R sounds are represented with right hooks, which
are more easily written than the left ones because the
hand proceeds from left to right. Thus these hooks
are mostly made in the direction of the writing. If
we wrote from right to left the R sounds would be
represented with left hooks because then the latter
would be more easily written.
THE R AND L HOOKS ON MP OR MB AND NG.
157. When Mp or Mb (see sec. 24) receives an
initial hook R or L is added the same as to the other
letters, the combination becoming Mpr, Mbr, Mpl or
Mbl. (See sec. 152.)
158. When Ng receives an initial hook, however,
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXUAL.
not only is R or L added the same as to other letters
and to Mp or Mb, but also G is frequently repre-
sented, the combination becoming in the case of R
either Ngr or Nggr and in that of L either Ngl or
Nggl. (See see's. 152 and 53.)
a. If extra distinction is ev.^r desired in the case
of words containing the consonants in paragraphs 157
and 158 those ending in Br, Bl, Gr or Gl may be writ-
ten in full with the B or G 'hooked stems. This, how-
ever, will seldom be necessary.
b. From paragraph 158 it will be seen that K is
not represented in the combination of Ng with an in-
itial hook. Accordingly the combinations Nkr and
Nkl are written with the two stems NgKr and NgKl;
as in "inker, inkle, ranker" and "rankle." (See eng.
165.)
THE R AND L AND THE W AND Y DOUBLE CONSONANTS.
159. The consonants R, L, W and Y often follow
and apparently unite with other consonants at the be-
ginning of syllables and form a syllable with the fol-
lowing vowel as in Pre, Pie, Twe and Tye. These
consonants when so united are called the R and L and
the W and Y double consonants and never have a vowel
between them as such.
THE R AND L, DOUBLE CONSONANTS, ETC.
160. The R and L double consonants are formed
with the R and L hooks as above described mostly on
the stems P, T, K, F, Thand Sh (see sec. 19.) The L
hook on T is not usually employed in English words.
It is employed in foreign ones, however, as in
"Tlascala." (See eng. 164, line 6.)
161. The double consonant stems are, when more
convenient, also employed to represent the single con-
sonants; namely, the same sounds with a vowel be-
tween as in Per or Pel. This is usually the course
pursued with the stems Sh and Th standing alone.
82 THE PHOXOORAPIUC MANUAL.
a. Upward R with the largo L hook (see sec. 153)
is usually employed only as a single consonant stem ;
that is when a word occurs between the R and L as in
"oral, rule'' or "carol.'* (See eng's. 165, line 2 and
166, line 2).
b. When R or L without a following vowel occurs
after M and before Ch or Sh a's in "march, marcher,
merge, marsh,- milch " it is generally written with the
hook on the M stem.
102. The names of the R and L hooks are Ir and
11 and their stenotypes are r and 1.
NOMENCLATURE AND STENOTYPY OF THE R AND L
HOOKED STEMS.
163. The R and L hooked stems and their steno-
types, whether representing double or single consonants,
are named by uttering the vjowel after the hook, except
in the cases of C, J, M, X, R, L, Y, Mp and Ng, when
it is uttered before it ; thus Pr, PI, Tr, Tl, Cr, Cl,
Jr, Jl, Mr, Ml, Nr, Nl, Rl, Lr, Yl, Y\, Mpr, Mpl,
Xgr, Ngl, are named Pree, Plee, Tree, Tlee, Ceer,
Ceel, Jeer, Jeel, Meer, Meel, Neer, .Neel, Reel,
Leer, Yeel, Yayl, Meeper, Meepel, Eenger, Eengel (not
Eengger, Eenggel).
VOCALIZATION OF THE R AND L HOOKED STEMS.
164. Double consonant stems are vocalized the
same as if no hooks were attached ; namely, by writing
the vowels before or after them.
165. Single consonant stems are vocalized in the
same manner, except that the intermediate vowel, that
is the one between the stem and hook, is struck through
the former, as in the case of the Mp or Mb stem. (See
sec. .M).
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. JSlJ
a. If the intermediate vowel is a dash made in
the same direction as the stem it is written with its
alternative form as explained in section 32. In any
case if necessary for legibility the intermediate vowel
may be made somewhat larger than usual. (See also
sec. 51).
1. For the stenotypic vocalization of the single
consonant stems see section 52.
166. When the R and L hooked stems occur in un-
accented syllables they frequently denote Pr, PI, etc.,
with what is called the Protean Vowel between them.
This closely resembles short u, or a sound between it
and short e or i ; but, as its name indicates, it is not an
accurate or fixed, that is a regular, vowel, for it may
be slightly different in the same word at different times,
byt not to extent of being very noticeable in ordinary
speech. When inserted it is usually represented by
short e. (See the words ' ' upper, apple, temper, temple,
inker, inkle," etc., in eng. )
167. It is not always necessary .to write the inter-
mediate vowel, whether regular or protean (see last
paragraph) particularly the latter between the stem
and the R or L. When, therefore, it is omitted in the
course of the exercises, the learner will understand that
it is done intentionally.
METHOD OF WRITING WORDS CONTAINING THE MEDIAL
OR FINAL SOUNDS MR OR ML.
168. When the sounds MR or ML occur medially
or finally they are usually written with the Mr or
Ml hooked stem in the case of Sh after the upward
form.
a. If preferred the hooked stem may be employed
after downward Sh instead -of after the upward form,
or the M and R or L stems may be written if the hooked
stem is not thought to make a sufficiently convenient or
distinct joining. (See also sec. 169, 1).
rtl THI-: PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
METHOD OF WRITING WORDS CONTAINING THK SOfNlXS
MI' OR MB.
WHEN MP OR MB IS FOLLOWED BT K OR L.
169. The Mpr or Mpl hooked stem (see sec. 157)
is generally used when the accent is on the vowel pre-
ceding the MP or MB and a vowel and It. or L follows
the P or B ; as in "umpire, simper, temper, amber,
somber, lumber, ample " or "amble, assemble, sample ''
or "cymbal, rumple" or "rumble, jumper " Mpr,
sMpr, TMpr, Mpr, sMpr, LMpr, Mpl, SMpl, sAIpl,
RMpl, JMpr. (See paragraphs 1 and d).
1. The Mpr or Mpl .hooked stem, the same as the
Mr or Ml one (see sec. 168) is usually written after
upward Sh instead of after the downward form. If
preferred, however, it may be written after the lattdr
or the Mplt or MpL stems may be employed if the
hooked stem is not thought to make a sufficiently con-
venient and distinct joining.
a. The Mpr or'Mpl hooked stem is never used when
M is the initial sound in a word.
b. The Pr, PI or Br, Bl hooked stems are generally
used after M .when PR, PL, etc., occur as double con-
sonants and also as single consonants (the intervening
vowel being unaccented) after initial M, or when M is
followed by two vowels before PR, PL, etc., as in
"empress, ambrosia, employ, emblem, lamprey,
Bimbley, Mabley, May per, maple, mobile" or "ami-
able" MPrs, MBrZh, MP1, MB1M, LMPr, BMB1,
MB1, MPr, MP1, MB1.
1. The last paragraph, of course, does not apply
to derivative words, which are usually written with
the forms of their primitives ; thus, MpR, mobber.
c. In all other cases, that is when MPR, MPL,
etc., occur after an initial vowel the accent (except in
derivative words) being after MP or MB and before
R or L, the Mp and R or L stems are generally em-
THE PHONOGRAPHIC 5IAXUAL. 85
ployed, as in "impair, embark, embarras, impale,
embellish " MpR, MpRK, MpRs, MpL, MpLSh.
d. The Mp and R or L stems are also employed for
alternative forms for words having the same or similar
consonants in which the accented vowel precedes MP
or MB as in paragraph 169 above. Thus "symbol"
is written sMpL so as to distinguish it from sMpl ijpr
"cymbal," when the vowels are omitted in the Report-
ing Style. (See also sec. 60, b).
170. From the preceding it will be observed that
except after an initial vowel and when M is the initial
sound (see paragraphs 169 and a) the same rules
mostly govern the writing of Mpr and Mpl as Mr and
Ml. (See sec. 168).
WHEN MP OR MB IS NOT FOLLOWED BY R OR L.
171. The Mp stem (and not the stems M and P or
M and B) is generally used when R or L does not
follow MP or MB; as in "map, mob" or "imbue,
impeach, humbug, campana" Mp, MpC, hMpG,
KMpX.
a. From the last paragraph it will be perceived
that the P or B simple stem is seldom employed
after M.
THE W AND Y DOUBLE CONSONANTS.
THE LARGE W HOOK.
172. The W double consonants (see sec. 159) are
formed with a large initial left hook, twice the size of
a small one, on the straight stems P, T, Ch and K and
on the left curves F and Th and are vocalized the
same as the L double consonant stems. (See sec.
104).
a. The large initial W hook is not formed on
upward R or on the left curves N, Y and upward Sh,
since the two former already have a large L hook and the
8G THE PHOXOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
two latter do not take a large hook. (See sees. 152
to 154).
173. The W double consonant stems are not
employed to represent the single consonants; such
words as ' 'Kewaunee" being written with the stems K
and W.
.174. The W hook is not used in the middle of
words if inconvenient to join. In such cases it should
be omitted and the small W consonant stem and vowel
as in section 60 inserted, disjoined after the stem let-
ter instead. (See the word "esquire," the last in
eng. 174; and the word "frequency," the third from
the end of the first line of eng. 200).
175. The Y double consonants, which mostly occur
before the long vowel u, are written as in sections 00
and 62, the double sized initial right hook not being
employed.
176. The name of the large "W hook is Wi. (See
sec. 97).
177. The large W hooked stems and their steno-
types are named with the long vowel e after them in
the same syllable; thus, Pw, Bw, Tw, Dw are pro-
nounced Pwee, Bwee, Twee, Dwee.
THE SMALL W AND Y HOOKS.
178 A small initial left hook on upward R pre-
fixes W and a right one prefixes Y. Either hook may
be shaded initially for the aspirate sound. The stem
is vocalized the same as stems with the breath ticks or
initial S circle. In the case of such words as "aware"
and "oyer" the initial vowel is placed before the AV
hook or under the Y hook, but not before the begin-
ning of the stem.
179. A small initial right hook on upward L pre-
fixes W. It may be shaded to represent the aspirate.
The stem is vocalized the same as R with the initial Y
hook in the last paragraph.
THE PHOXOGRAPIirr MANUAL. S7
180. The small W or Y hook on R or the small W
hook on L is always employed except where two
vowels intervene between the W or Y and the R or L,
in which case the stems W and Y are used with the R
or L stem.
181. The names of the small W and Y hooks are
Weh and Yeh pronounced without the h; viz, We
and Ye and their stenotypes are w and y.
182. The small W and Y hooked steins and their
stenotypes are named with the long vowel e between
the hook and stem, thus, ??R, ?/R, ?/?L are uttered
Weer, Yeer, Weel.
IMPERFECT INITIAL HOOKS, ETC.
183. Sometimes when an initial hook is joined to
a preceding letter it can not be perfectly formed. In
such cases the hook is made w r ith a slight offset of the
pen, usually on the preceding stem; as in "taper,
trigger, trimmer, trammel, chimer, assnmer, color,
ripple, camel, chamber, jumble, assemble," in engrav-
ing 167 and "Rockwell" in engraving 179.
a. L with initial hooks or R with the initial right
hook is not usually written after T, S, Ch and clown-
ward Sh. In such cases the words are written with
the initial L hook stems, the R and L stems or with
one of the latter and the small disjoined W and Y
characters as explained in Section 60; or in the case of
Sh, with the upward form before the W hook on L
and the Y one on R. (See also sees. 168 and 169).
LESSON 13.
S PREFIXED TO INITIAL HOOKS.
184. A .small initial right circle on straight
stems (thus changing the It hook into a circle)
and on the hooks of right curves, prefixes S to the R
scries of hooked stems, to the Y hook on R, to the W
88 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
hook on. L and to the large 'L hooks on M, Mp
and Sh.
a. S is used on the Y hook only in the Reporting
Style.
185. A small initial left circle on the hooks of
straight stems and left curves prefixes S to the L and
W series of hooked stems, to the W hook on R and to
the small R hook on N and IS'g.
a. When the circle is written within the hook as
above, it is made smaller and more oval than usual.
186 The circle S as above is used to represent
initial S whether the latter is followed immediately 1 >y
a vowel or forms part of an S double consonant or
occurs as in section 188 hereafter. '
187. The double consonant Sw is written before R
or L according to the principle in section 163; that is it
is written with the circle and hook when one vowel
intervenes between the W and the R or L and with the
circle and stem when two vowels intervene. Sw is
also written with the circle antl stem when a vowel
intervenes between the S and W, as in "suwarrow" or
"Sewell. v The last observation applies also to Sy.
THE S TREBLE CONSONANTS, ETC.
188. The consonant S apparently unites with the
R, L and W and sometimes the Y double consonants,
as in the syllables Spre, Sple, Skwe, Spye. These are
called the S Treble consonants and never have a vowel
among them as such. They are usually formed in
English only on the straight stems P, T and K.
189. When occurring in the middle of a word the
R and L hooks should, if possible, be formed after the
circle S. Sometimes, however, they may be indicated
by making a loop on the previous stem, as in the
words "dispraise" and "explicit." Where it is not
convenient to plainly indicate the hook with the loop,
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 89
it should be omitted, as in the word "sensible." (a).
Again, the R hook on K, F and their heavy cognate
letters, when they occur after T or D maybe indicated
by making a left circle on the T or D. The R hook on
P or B likewise may be indicated by the left circle on
Ch or J, as in "jasper."
NOMENCLATURE AND STENOTYPY OF THE INITIAL HOOK
STEMS WITH S PREFIXED.
190. When the S circle is prefixed to an initial
hook stem standing alone the phonograph is usually
pronounced simply by prefixing the S sound to that of
the hooked stem; thus, sPr, sPl, sBr, sShr, sNr, sNl,
s'R, s.yR, sKw, -sMpr, sMpl, sNgr, sNgl are named
Spree, Splee,Sbree, Sshree, Sneer, Sneel, Sweer,Skwee,
Smeeper, Smeepel, Seenger, Seengel. (See eng. 184
to 186.)
191. When the S circle is made regularly within
an initial hook on a final or medial stem it is pro-
nounced in the same syllable with the stem which pre-
cedes; thus KsTr, DsPr, PrsKr, DsPl, KsPl are
spoken Kees Tree, Dees Pree, Prees Kree, Dees Plee,
Kees Plee, (see the words "extra, dispraise, prescribe,
display" and "explore" eng. 1S9.)
192. If, however, it is not made regularly within
the hook but half on the back of a preceding opposite
curve to that of the hook it is named and represented
in stenotypy the same as in section 96; thus VsPr,
V*Tr are pronounced Vee Us Pree, Vee Us Tree. (See
the words "vesper" and "vestry" in eng. 189 line 2.)
193. The same method is followed when the circle
is not made within the hook; thus D-s-Kr, D.s-Fr, JsPr
are uttered Dee Us Kree, Dee Us Free, Jee Us Pree.
(See the words "descry, decipher" and "jasper," eng.
l<s:->, a.)
90 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
SS AND ST PREFIXED TO THE R HOOK ON STRAIGHT
STEMS.
194. A large right Ss circle or a right St loop
may be prefixed to the R series of straight stems.
Neither character is ever made within the hook.
a. In the reporting style the right Ss circle is also
prefixed to the Y hook on R. The right St loop 4 , how-
ever, is not used. (See also see's. 154 and 175.)
SS PREFIXED TO THE L HOOK ON FINAL UPWARD R.
195. Ss may be prefixed by the large left circle to
the L hook on final upward R, half of the circle being
made on the hook and half on the preceding stem; as
NssRl, necessarily. (See also sec. 88.)
THE H TICKS JOINED TO ALL INITIAL HOOK STEMS.
196. The H ticks may be joined to all initial hook
stems, either the downward or upward form being em-
ployed according to convenience. The downward
form is used on all hooks except those on K, R, up-
ward Sh, M, L and the R hook on F, in which cases
the upward one is written. (See, also, paragraphs 27
and a and 76 to 81.)
a. These ticks are seldom joined to the hooked
stems when the latter occur medially or finally.
THE H TICKS AND THE SMALL W AND Y HOOKS.
197. The H ticks are never joined to the small W
and Y hooks in the same syllable with the latter on
upward R and L; these hooks being then usually
shaded initially instead. If extra distinction is de-
sired, however, the aspirate dot may be written before
the hook in addition. But this will seldom be neces-
sary. (See also sec. 28.)
THE PHONOGRAPAIC MANUAL. 91
OMISSION OF THE H TICKS.
198. The H ticks may be omitted altogether be-
fore the hooked stems if desired. (See also sec. 81.)
LESSON U.
FINAL HOOKS.
THE N HOOK.
199. A small final right hook on straight stems
adds N. On curved ones N is added by a small hook
on the concave side. The stems, like those with the
final S circle, are vocalized the same as if no hook
were attached.
200. The N hook is often used medially as well as
finally in a. word.
a. When two Ns with a vowel between occur
medially, the first is usually written with the hook and
the second with the stem if the accent precedes both
Ns, but if it precedes the second N the method is re-
versed. The latter method is also usually followed in
compound words. In all cases derivatives usually re-
tain the forms of their primitives. (See see's. 107
and 108.)
b. When N without a following vowel occurs be-
fore Ch after straight stems and right curves the
hook is used. When it occurs thus after left curves
the stem is employed. The hook is never used before
a final vowel; the stem then being written instead as
in the word "penny."
c. If the learner prefers he may write the stem
N in all cases when N occurs medially before Ch, ex-
cept after K and W.
d. When the word "stone," or one of similar
formation, occurs finally in a word it is usually writ-
ten with the S circle, the T stem and N hook; thus,
ShNsTn, Shcnstone, LMsTn, limestone. When it
;>_ THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
occurs alone or initially it is written with the initial
St loop and X stem as explained in section 124, thus,
stN, stone; stXPL, stone-pile; stXMsX, stone-mason.
201. The X hook on straight stems formed into a
circle represents Xs. The large circle so formed
represents Xss. The Xs and Xss circles are easily
distinguishable from the S and Ss circles since the
former are right circles and the latter left ones, and
are also on opposite sides of the stems.
202. The S circle may be added to the X' hook on
curves, but the Ss circle cannot be so added; the stem
X and the Ss circle always then being used. The S
circle may sometimes be added medially to the X'
hook, as in "ransom." An,S treble consonant may
also be written within the X hook, if there is room, to
indicate the K hook by lengthening the circle into a
loop, as in "minstrel."
203. Xst and Xstr may be added to straight stems
by making the N hook into a right St and Str loop.
When Xst and Xstr occur after curved letters they are
usually written with the N stem and St and Str loops.
204. The names of the X" hook, Xs and Xss circles,
Xst and Xstr loops are In, Ins, Insess, Inst and Instr
and their stenotypes are n, ns, nss, nst and nstr.
205. A stem with any of the above attachments is
usually pronounced the same as without it, simply the
syllable for the attachment being added; thus, Pn,
Prn, Pin, X'n, Xns, Nr, Ngn, Pns, Pnss, Pnst, Pnstr,
Pnsts, Pnstrs are spoken Peen, Preen, Pleen, Neen,
Xeens, Xeern, Eengeen, Peens, Peenses, Peenst,
Peenster, Peensts, Peensters.
a. When the S circle is made within the X hook
on a straight stem they are pronounced separately;
thus RnsM are uttered Keo In Iss Mee.
THI: F HOOK.
206. A small final left hook on straight sU-msadds
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 93
F or V. The stems are vocalized like those with the
N hook. (a). This hook is used medially as well as
finally (b), bat never before .a final vowel; the F or V
stem then being employed, (c). The circle S may be
written within the hook; but not the Ss circle. In
such cases the stem F or V is employed, (d). If de-
sired the hook may be shaded to indicate V; but this
is seldom necessary.
207. The name for the F hook is If or Iv and its
stenotype is f or v.
208. A stem with the hook, or hook and circle, is
pronounced as usual, simply, the sound for these being
added; thus, Pf, Prf, Prfs are uttered Peef, Preef,
Preefs.
a. When Fr occurs finally after a straight stem it
is usually written with the F hook and upward R stem
as in "coffer, puffer, tougher, devour, chaffer, river."
(KfR, PfR, TfR, DfR, CfR, RfR).
b. But when Fl thus occurs it is usually written
with the. Fl stem as in "cavil, bevel, trifle, jovial,
ruffle, revel," (KV1, BV1, TrFl, JV1, RF1, RV1).
LESSON 15.
THE TEE HOOK.
209. A large final right hook on all straight stems
adds Tr, Dr, Thr or Dhr (the context indicating which)
with a vowel between the T, D, Th or Dh and the R.
The stems are vocalized like those with the N and F
hooks. The hook, which is called the Ter hook, is
vocalized by striking the intermediate vowel or char-
acter through it just after the curve after the manner
of vocalizing the Str loop. This, however, is seldom
necessary. Stems with the Ter hook may be used in
connection with other stems as well as alo'ne.
a. If extra distinction is ever desired b'etween or
among words ending with the above syllables those in
(| (. THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
Dr, Thr or Dh.r may be written in full with the I>r,
Thr or Dhr hooked stems. But these distinctions will
seldom l>e needed.
b. The terminal sounds Thr with a vowel between
the Th and R as in "Arthur 1 ' seldom occur. Those
of Dhr, however, their heavy sounds as in "gather,"
happen very frequently.
210. S or Z is added to this hook by the small
circle.
211. When the Ter hook which is a right hook-
occurs on a stem that follows a right curved one with-
out an angle it is somewhat difficult to preserve the
straightness of the stem, since both the curve and hook
are on the same side of the latter. In such cases. a>
in the words "elector, selector" and "escheator" the
termination may be written with the R hooked stem
Tr instead of the Ter hook, if preferred, as in the last
three examples in the engraving.
a. It is not usually necessary to shade the hook to
indicate the heavy sound Dr or Dhr.
b. The Ter hook is never used before a final
vowel.
212. The stenotypes for the Ter hook are tr or dr,
the latter being employed if the hook is shaded.
213. A. stem with the Ter hook is usually named
by adding the syllable for the hook to that of the stem ;
thus, Dtr, sTter, Rtr, sRtr stRtr are pronounced
Deeter, Steeter, Reeter, Sreeter, Stay Reeter. The
same course is pursued if the hook is shaded for Dr
or Dhr.
LESSOX 16.
THE SHUN HOOK.
214. A large final left hook on straight stems and
a large final- one on curves adds Shn or Zhn with a
vowel between the Sh or /h and X. The hook, which
is called the Shun hook, may be used medially when
THE PHOXOfiRAPHrC MAXCAK <J5
convenient. The stems are vocalized like those with the
N, FandTer hooks. The Shun hook may be vocalized
the same as the Ter hook. This, however, is seldom
necessary as the intermediate vowel is usually short u.
S or Z is added to this hook by the small circle.
a. It is not usually necessary to shade the hook to
indicate the heavy sound Zh.
b. The Shun hook is never used before a final
vowel.
215. The stenotypes for the Shun hook are shn or
zhn, the latter being employed if the hook is shaded
216. A stem with the Shun hook is usually pro-
nounced the same as when without it, simply the syllable
for the hook being added ; thus Dshn is spoken
Deeshun. The same course is pursued if the Zhun
hook is added.
a. When upward R or L follows the Shun hook on
a perpendicular stem the junction is rendered some-
what easier by curving the end of the hook slightly
inward. (See engraving 214, line 6).
THE SHUN CURL Oil QUADRANT.
217. Shn or Zhn, with a vowel between the Sh or
Zh and the X, is added to a final S or Ns circle by con-
tinuing the latter through to the other side of the stem
and there forming a small curl or quarter circle. It
may also be occasionally added to a circle on a final
hook. The curl, which is called the Shun curl or Shun
quadrant, may be used medially as well as finally. The
vowel immediately following the circle is written before
or above the curl, whichever is most convenient. The
Shun curl may be vocalized after the manner of the
Shun hook by striking the intermediate vowel through
it. This, however, is seldom necessary as the vowel
is usually short u. S or Z is added to this curl by the
small circle.
<j(j TlfE PHONOGRAPHIC MANTAL.
218. The curl is written with its end at right
angles to that of its stem except on horizontal curves
when the end is brought around somewhat more than
at right angles. Sometimes, again, when the curl oc-
curs medially it is turned in whatever direction may l>e
convenient to form an angle with the following letter ;
as in "processionary."
a. It is not usually necessary to shade the curl to
indicate Zhun.
b. The Shun curl is never used before a final vowel.
219. The stenotypes for the Shun curl are tskn or
zJu'i. the latter being used if the curl is shaded.
220. A stem and circle with the Shun curl are
usually pronounced the same as when without it, simply
the name for the curl being added; thus Ps.s7//? are spoken
Peesshun. The same course is pursued if the Zhun
curl is added.
DOWNWARD K AND L AND FINAL HOOKS, ETC.
221. As downward R and L never stand alone
they can take a final hook or -curl only when occurring
after other stems.
222. The St or Str loop is never written within a
final hook.
223. A final hook or curl is never attached to a
vowel.
224. An attachment to a-stem is a circle, loop, hook
or curl.
225. In this book a stem is said to be simple when
it is without attachments and compound when it is
with them.
226. A prependage is an initial attachment and an
appendage is a final one.
227. Whatever applies to a simple stem usually
applies also to a compound one.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANt'AL 97
HOOKS <;I:NERALLY WRITTEN MEDIALLY WHEN
POSSIBLE.
228. In this system for the sake of uniformity a
hook is generally written medially when possible un-
less greater speed and legibility can be obtained by
using the stem or stems.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANTAT..
CHAPTER V.
DOWNWARD AND UPWARD R, L AND SH.
LESSON 17.
229. In the first chapter, sections 12 to 18, rules
were given for distinguishing downward and upward
R and L from W, Y and Ch and downward and
upward Sh from each other. In the present chapter,
rules will be given for writing either form of R, L
and Sh in connection with other letters.
DOWNWARD AND UPWARD R.
230. Downward R (as explained in Chapter I)
never stands alone in order that it may not conflict
with AV. For the same reason it is never used
initially or as the first stem in a word, but only medi-
ally or finally.
231. Downward R is generally employed after the
left curve F without appendages when R is the last
stem in a syllable or word and not followed by a vowel.
(See sec. 19).
232. In all other cases upward R is generally used.
It is also generally written medially after F to avoid
an awkward junction.
a. If the learner prefers he may, in addition to
writing downward R after F, write it also after the
four straight stems, P, T, Ch and K (see sec. 19) with-
out appendages the three first, with or without pre-
pendages and the last with or without left ones.
.o. **.**
.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. Of)
:XA5
UPWARD R AFTER FINAL HOOKS.
233. Upward R is usually written after final left
hooks. (See par. c below and also sec. 208, a).
a. After final right ones it is usually written only
in derivative words. In other cases the initial hook
stems are generally employed. In derivative words
after final right hooks on perpendicular stems and
those made downward to the left, it is either written
disjoined or the initial hook stems are employed usu-
ally the latter. (See par. c below).
b. If preferred, downward R joined may usually
be written in the case of derivative words mentioned
in the last sentence above.
c. Paragraphs 233 and a do not usually apply when
it is necessary to preserve a primitive form, as in
"diverse 15 or "renerve." In such cases the initial
hook stems are generally written; thus, DVrs, RNrV.
234. If preferred, upward R may be written after
final hooks only in derivative words and the initial
hook stems written in primitives or compounds..
DOWNWARD AND UPWARD L.
235. Downward L (as explained in Chapter I) never
stands alone in order that it may not conflict with Y.
For the same reason it is never used initially or as the
first stem in a word, but only medially or finally.
236. Downward L is generally used:
a. After the left curve F without appendages when
L is the final stem in a syllable or word and not fol-
lowed by a vowel.
b. After N without appendages.
C. After a final circle on a left curve.
d. After a left Shun curl.
237. In all other cases upward L is generally
employed. It is also generally employed medially to
avoid an awkward junction, or it may be written finally
to vary a form.
100 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXt'AI..
UPWARD L, AFTER FINAL HOOKS.
238. Upward L is not usually written after the
F hook. Instead the initial hook stem Fl is generally
employed. (See also sec. 208, b).
a. It is usually written after large final hooks
except after right ones on perpendicular stems and
those made downward to the left, when it is either
written disjoined or the initial hook stems are emplo} r ed
usually the latter.
1. After the N hook it is usually written only in
derivative words. In other cases the initial hook stem
M is generally employed. In derivative words after
the right N hooks where the exception in paragraph a
governs, it is written according to the same principle;
namely, either disjoined or with the initial Nl stem.
b. If preferred, downward L joined may usually
be written in the case of the right hooks in the excep-
tion/in paragraph a and the derivative words in the last
sentence of paragraph 1.
c. Paragraph 1 does not usually apply when it is
necessary to preserve a primitive form as in "re-enlist."
When this is the case the initial hook stem is gener-
ally written; thus, RNlst.
239. If preferred, upward L may be written only
in derivative words and the initial hook stems in
primitives or compounds.
LESSON 18.
i
DOWNWARD AND UPWARD SH.
240. Upward Sh (as explained in Chapter I) ia
never written alone. It is generally used :
a. Before M with initial hooks, L with the AY and
R with the Y hook.
b. After the left curve F without appendages.
c. After a final circle on a left curve.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 101
d. After final hooka on F, N and upward Sh and
final left ones on P, K and K.
241. The same rules govern upward Shi initially
as upward Sh. (See par. 240). It is also generally
used finally after P and the left curves F and N.
242. In all other cases than in the last two
sections downward Sh is generally employed. The
same is true of downward Shi. Downward Sh and
Shi are also generally employed medially to avoid an
awkward junction. Sometimes, however, upward Sh
may bo written, if preferred, as in ' 'Schiller, associa-
tion" or "rhetorician." (See also sees. 152, a and
183, a).
243. From the above it will be seen that downward
Shi, except after P and the left curves F -and N is
written according to the same rules as Shr, to which
the above rules, of course, do not apply, since it is
always made downward.
102 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
CHAPTER VI.
THE HALVING AND LENGTHENING PRINCIPLES.
LESSON 19.-
THE HALVING PRINCIPLE.
244. T or D is added indiscriminately the context
determining which to any single length stem, with or
without a tinal hook, whether alone or joined (except
W or Y which will presently be considered) by making
it half its ordinary length. This stem is vocalized the
same as a single length. A vowel character is never
halved.
a. It will be observed from the engraving that in
monosyllables, when the vowel precedes the halved
stem, T or D is added according as the stem is light or
shaded.
245. When a letter is halved the added T or D is
read after the vowel or consonant and in the same syl-
lable. The T or D is thus always the last sound in a
monosyllable or final syllable except only when the
circle S is appended in which case the latter is the
last sound as in the word "pits" in engraving 244.
246. A halved stem may have a final curl. In
which case it is vocalized like the similar single length
stem, the T or D always being the last sound except
when the circle S is added.
247. If at any time uncertainty might result from
halving for both T and D as above, it is avoided in the
case of stems without final hooks, by .halving for T
only and writing D with the stem and in that of stems
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 103
with final hooks or a curl by shading the latter. This
distinction, however, js only occasionally necessary in
the first case and seldom or never in the second.
a. From the above paragraph it will be seen that
T and D, when added indiscriminately, are added ac-
cording to the same principle as the circles S and Z.
(See sec. 82).
248- When two Ns with T or D and a vowel be-
tween occur medially the first N is usually written with
the hook, the stem of the latter being halved and the
second with the stem, if the accent precedes both Ns,
but if it precedes the second N the first one is also
written with the hook but on its full sized stem and
the second N with the hook on the full-sized T or D
stem. The latter method is also usually followed in
compound words. In all cases derivatives usually
retain the forms of their primitives. (See also sec.
200, a).
249. When two vowels occur between a consonant
and a following T or D the stem for the former is uot
usually halved, but instead its full outline and the
stem T or D is employed.
250. A halved letter is never used before a final
vowel. When a final vowel follows T or D the stem
for the latter is always employed.
MP HALVED.
251. When 'L' follows Mp as in ' 'stamped' ' (stampt)
or "tempt" the combination Mpt is written with the
Mp halved stem.
a. In this book the sound of P is not considered
as omitted between M and T as in "tempt" for the
reason that all three consonants M, P and T are uttered
one after the other the same as are Ng, K and T in
"ranked" and analogously, P and T in "tapped."
See also Webster's "International Dictionary" 215
which (although in the Vocabulary it pronounces term-
1(14 THE PHOXOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
inal Erapt as Emt) fully sustains this position when it
states among other observations of the same or greater
trend, that "In a word like exempt we have the first
part of a p * * and the last part 'of a t ; thus the
total combination empt will not be simply m followed
by#."
b. It will be observed that the rule in paragraph a
applies to derivative words whose primitive.-; end in'P. .
In derivatives like "dreamt" however, whose primi-
tives do not end in P, T only is added.
NG HALVED
252. When Ng is halved it does not include the
sound of K as in "inked" but only that of Ng or G
as in "hanged" or "angered." (See also sec. 158).
Words like" "inked" and "ranked," therefore, are
written with the full-sized stem Ng and halved K. (See
eng. 252).
a. The above does not preclude the employment of
Ng halved to indicate Ngt as in ' ' Wrington. ". (See also
the word "sanctioned" in sec. and engraving 348, b).
1. When the final syllables Ington are written as
in "Irvington, Lexington," etc., they are represented
by Ng halved and N full-sized as in "Wington" above,
except after Th, where the junction is not distinct, as
in ' ' Worthington, " when Ng and Tn are employed.
W AND Y HALVED.
253. The light halved strokes of W and Y without
hooks indicate the addition of T When shaded in the
middle they indicate that of D. Both the light and
the heavy strokes may be shaded initially for the
aspirate, or the aspirate dot may be employed if the
shading is not deemed sufficiently distinct.
1. Halved AV and Y are shaded as above for steno-
graphic convenience since in the cases mentioned in
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 105
section 236 the stem D is somewhat awkward to write
without an angle after the full W and Y forms. There-
fore an exception is made as to them so that the halved
light strokes always represent the addition of T and
the heavy ones that of D.
a. W and Y with hooks are halved without shading
to add T or D indiscriminately.
S HALVED AND WRITTEN UPWARD.
254. It is sometimes convenient to write St after
the Shun hook with S halved and made upward. The
vowel preceding the St is always short i unless some
peculiarity of pronunciation occurs. It is therefore
not necessary to vocalize the halved S except in such
cases. The circle. S may be added to it. Its name is
Aist (or Sayt).
STENOTYPY AND NOMENCLATURE OF THE HALVED STEMS.
255. A halved stem without an appendage is indi-
cated in stenotypy by the character or characters for
the full sized one with a body t after it or them for T
or D indiscriminately. When a hook is appended it
is stenotyped the same as after the full sized stem with
the body t or d added according as the appendage is
light or shaded. The same course is pursued if two
attachments are added, as a hook and circle or a circle
and curl. A halved stem is usually named by adding
the T sound (or the D one if the appendage is shaded)
to the name of the full sized stem. When the circle is
added finally it is pronounced after the halved stem,
Thus Pt, Bt, Mt, Ngt,~Wt, IFt, Prt, Nrt, sPrt, Prnt,
Pft, Pvd, Ptrt, Pshnt, P&shnt, Pts, Pfts, Ps*/m&, Ptss
are spoken Peet, Beet, Meet, Eengt, Weet, Wayt,
Preet, Neert, Spreet, Preent, Peeft, Peevd, Peetert,
Peeshunt, Peesshunt, Peets, Peefts, Peesshunts,
Peetses.
106 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
256. The name of the T or D indicated by halving
is It, except in the case of a shaded appendage when
the added D is named Id.
LESSON 20.
LONE OR INITIAL K AND L HALVED.
257. Upward, R and L without hooks or a final circle
or loop, when standing alone, are halved to represent
monosyllables. In which case if distinction is ever de-
sired between words ending in T and D, the rule in sec-
tion 247 should be followed, (a.) Dissyllables and
over which consist of the letters represented by the
forms just mentioned w r hether derivatives of the mon-
osyllables or not are usually written with the two
stems R or L and T or D. .
b. If preferred T may always be indicated in the
above words by halving and D by writing the stem D.
258. Upward R and L with hooks when standing
alone are halved to add T* or D indiscriminately the
same as the other letters except W and Y preceding.
259. The same rules for halving usually govern
R and L initially as when standing alone. Also deriva-
tive words in both cases generally retain the form of
their primitives, except those ending in Er, etc. , which
are written according, to sections 209 and 282.
FINAL OR MEDIAL R AND L HALVED.
260. Final or medial R and L, simple or compound,
are usually halved to add T or D in the same manner
as when alone or initial. Ther halved stems are then
generally written up or down according to the rules in
Chapter V, for the full sized ones. Derivative words
thus ordinarily retain the forms of their primatives.
261. The downward forms never stand alone l>eing
like their full sized stems always used to end syllables
and words except usually L halved after N and a circle
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 107
on a left curve. They are never shaded to add D.
a. Downward R and L halved never have a vowel
between the R or L and the T or D, except only L
halved after N or the circle on a left curve. (See the
last paragraph). This is because the vowel always oc-
c'urs before and never after the full sized stems in the
same syllable except only after L as stated in section
234. Consequently when a vowel is inserted after
either of these forms, whether single or half length,
it always, except sometimes in the case of L after N and
the circle as just remarked indicates that it is W or Y
(see also sec. 14) and in that case if the light halved Y
stem and downward L halved should conflict the former
may be distinguished from the latter by striking the
vowel through it. This, however, will seldom occur.
(See sec. 52.)
STENOTYPY AND NOMENCLATURE OF R AND L HALVED.
262. The Rand L halved stems, with or without ap-
pendages, are stenotyped and named in the manner ex-
plained in section 255; thus Rt, Rts, sRt, stRt, %'Rt,
swRt, Rft, Rnt, Lt, sLt, stLt, ^Lt, Lrt, Lnt, are
spoken Reet, Reets, Sreet, Stay Reet, Weert, Sweert,
Reeft, Reent, Leet, Sleet, Stay Leet, Weelt, Leert,
Leent.
LESSON 21.
DOWNWARD AND UPWARD SH HALVED.
263. Sh halved whether standing alone or joined
to other stems, is usually written up or down ac-
cording to the rules in Chapter V. After F, W and
Fr without appendages, hovrever, it is usually written
downward after the first and upward after the others.
a. Halved Sh is written downward after F and up-
ward after W and Fr because the opposite forms do not
make an angle with these stems, since the latter and full
sized downward and upward Sh form half circles.
108 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
b. Care should be taken to form a distinct angle
between M or upward Land downward Sh halved (see
eng. line 8) so that the outline may not be mistaken
for either of these forms with a Shun hook; to do
which all that is necessary is to write the halved stem
at its proper slope of sixty degrees as explained in page
26 and section 18 in' the case of the full sized one.
The halved stem should also not be made too short or
curved.
264. If preferred the upward halved form may be
written after T, M and upward L instead of the down-
ward one. Also after T and M, the two full sized stems,
downward Sh and T, and after upward L the same or up-
ward Sh and T may be used instead of either of the
halved Sh strokes; thus, TS/it, MSht, LSAt, TShT,
MShT, LShT or L#AT. -(See, however, sec. 266
following).
THE JUNCTION OF HALVED CURVED LETTERS WITHOUT
AMJLES, ETC.
265. Ordinarily a joined halved curved letter to be
recognized must make an angle. Sometimes, however,
it is necessary to join halved curves to other stems
without angles. When this happens they are gener-
ally written only in the case of opposite curves and
after straight stems as in the following section.
266. Any half length curve may run into or follow
an opposite half or full length or follow any straight
stem except upward R.
a. If upward R were written at forty-five degrees,
half length M could follow it without an angle, but as
it is made at thirty degrees, the angle must be formed
between them. The same remarks apply to upward
R and halved upward S. The latter however, is not
employed after upward R. Again, halved upward Sh
is not generally written after K. As to the right curve
after Ch it is not used since it is a backward N stem.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 109
b. It will be observed that only two curves can be
joined without angles that is at a, tangent to the
same straight stem and that they are always at right
angles to each other, except after upward R as above
explained.
c. If preferred such words as "defeat, devote," etc.,
may be written with the F hook and T or D stem as
in Exercise 199 to 206, line 17.
HALF LENGTHS NOT WRITTEN OR JOINED IN CERTAIN
CASES.
267. A half length curve is not usually employed
when it would run into or form a curve made in the
same circular direction, as in "Medusa" and "thanet; v
or into a straight stem, as in "viaduct;" nor is a
halved straight stem when it would run into or from a
curve, as in "Betsey" and "locked." In all such
cases, or in any case where the junction would not; be
quickly recognized, the full size stem T or D should
be written with the preceding or following full sized
stem, except where an alternative form is used when
.the latter may be halved as in "fished." (See see's, and
eng's. 263 and 264).
268. Two halved straight stems made in the same
direction cannot be joined but must be written sepa-
rately. Such stems usually occur in compound words,
as "chitchat, kitcat," etc.
269. A halved straight stem can not be joined to a
full sized one made in the same direction. Accord-
ingly when T or D follows two similar or cognate
sounds represented by straight stems all three charac-
ters are written in full; as in "popped, peebeta, cogged,
gagged." (See Reading Exercise, 5 to 10, line 5).
THE FINAL SYLLABLE ED.
270. The past tense and past participle of verbs
whoso present tense ends in T or^l) is formed by halv-
110 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
ing the stroke T or D for Ted or Dec! attached to a
preceding full sized stem It is not necessary to
vocalize the halved T or D. Participal adjectives are
formed in the same manner.
271. When the present tense contains only the
stem T or D with a breathing or initial circle or loop
the past tense is written by halving the stem.
272. When the present tense ends with an St loop
the past tense is indicated with the S circle and a half
length T.
273. When the halved T or D occurs after the
downward stems W, Fr, T or Y, where no angle can
be made, it may be written detached with its center
opposite the end of the main stem. It will thus be
distinguished from the vowel o should the latter
happen to be written near the end of the stem. (For
the indication of the disjunction in stenotypy, see
sec. 42).
a. The final syllable Ed of course never occurs in
monosyllables. Consequently when a word ends with
or contains a halved T or D stem, it is known not to be
a monosyllable except halved T or D standing alone
with or without attachments.
274. In connected writing the past tense of those
verbs ending in Ed whose present ends in a halved
stem without an appendage or with an N or F hook
that is in T, Nt or Ft or their heavy sounds is
usually written with the same form as the present,
except when extra distinction is desired in which case
the rule in section 270 is followed.
a. The reason the above method is pursued in con-
nected writing is because the form for the past tense
of such verbs is longer than that for the present.
THE FINAL ST AND NST LOOPS AND HALVED STEMS, ETC.
. 275. The loop St is added to halved stems with or
without prependages whether ending in T or D. If a
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 111
vowel occurs between the loop and the T or D repre-
sented by the halved stem' it may be indicated by
striking it through the part of the stem inclosed by
the loop. This, however is seldom necessary since the
vowel is usually short e.
276. The loop Nst may also be added to a halved
straight stem with or without prependages. It may
be vocalized in the same manner as the St loop above,
if desired.
277. When St occurs after a hook on a halved
curve the halved stem St is employed. It is seldom
necessary to vocalize the latter, since the vowel is usu-
ally short e.
a, When the positive degree ends in an S circle or
F or N hook on a full stem the superlative is written
with the large S circle and the stemT or with the stem
F or N and the St loop. (See the words "nicest,
wisest, choicest" and "basest," eng. 109, line 4, and
"finest, thinnest, keenest" and "toughest," eng. 125.
See also sees. 107 and 108).
2T8. The Str loop is never added to a halved stem.
. 279. The halved stems and St and Nst loops are
stenotyped and named as in the following; thus, Rtst,
Rntst, Ltst are spoken Reetest, Reentest, Leetest.
WORDS ENDING IN TIVE OR TIVELY.
280. When a word ends in Tive it is usually writ-
ten with a halved stem followed by the full length V
one when convenient, but if not, with the stem T and
F hook. The termination Tively is formed in the same
manner except that the VI stem is added when con-
venient and when not, the upward stem L is added to
the V stem.
WORDS ENDING IN TL OR DL.
281. Words ending in Tl or Dl preceded by a
vowel as in "petal, pedal, metal, medal" are written
112 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
with the halved stem and L, in which case the latter is
written according to the rules in Chapter V.
a. If extra distinction is ever desired between or
among words ending as above those in Dl may be writ-
ten in full w r ith the Dl hooked stem. This distinction,
however, will seldom be needed.
1. It will be observed that words ending in Tl and
Dl as above are of the same nature as those in Tr or
Dr in section 209. Consequently they are represented
according to the same principle, namely by one termina-
tion. If sufficient stenographic material existed Tl
and Dl could be represented by a hook the same as Tr
and Dr; but as this is not the case they are uniformly
indicated with the halved stem and L. (See also sec.
282 following).
LESSON 22.
THE LENGTHENING PRINCIPLE.
282. Tr, Dr, Thr or Dhr with a vowel between
the T, D, Th or Dh and the R are added to any curved
letter without appendages by making the stem twice
its ordinary length. The stems are vocalized the same
as the single and half length ones. A vowel character
is never lengthened or a double length curve halved.
a. If extra distinction is ever desired between or
among words ending with the above s} r llables those in
Dr, Thr or Dhr may be written in full with the Dr,
Thr or Dhr hooked stems. These distinctions, how-
ever, will seldom be needed. (See also sees. 209 a,
and 281, a and 1).
b. The terminal sounds Thr with a vowel between
the Th and R as in "ether" or "zither" seldom occur.
Those of Dhr, however, their heavy sounds as in
"either" or "neither" happen very frequently. (See
also sec. 209, b).
283. The sound of P is not considered as omitted
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 113
between M and T as in -"tempter" and "sumpter,"
though it is in "Sumter." (See sec. 251, a and b).
a. The sound of K is usually included in length-
ened Ng, as in "puncture." If, however, extra dis-
tinction is at any time desired for the termination con-
taining K it may be written with the Ng single length
stem and K with the Ter hook; thus, NgKtr. (See
also sees. 158 and 252).
284. A downward double length curved letter is
written through the line of writing, half above and
half below it. (See also sec. 7.)
285. The light forms of double length W and Y
indicate the addition of Tr or Thr. When shaded in
the middle they indicate that of Dr or Dhr. Double
length downward R and L are seldom used and then
only finally and are never shaded. If a vowel is
inserted after a light final or medial form it is usually
known to be W or Y. (See also pars. 261 and a).
286. Words ending in Ntr or Ndr are usually
written with the double length N after all stems, simple
or compound.
a. If the learner prefers, he may write words end-
ing in Ntr or Ndr after P, as "painter, ponder," etc.,
w r ith the halved stems, the N hook and upward R. In
which cases it is seldom necessary to insert the vowel
before the latter, since it is usually short e.
287. The past tense of words written with double
length curved strokes is usually made by adding to the
lengthened stems the letter D joined or disjoined. In
connected writing the form for the present tense gen-
erally stands for both. If, however, extra distinction
is desired the past tense may be written in full without
the lengthened forms; namely, with the halved Dr,
Thr or Dhr hooked stems. (See also sec. 282, a and
sec. 274).
288. The vowel may be indicated before the R in
any of the above terminations by striking it through
114 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
the stem near the end, according to the principle for
vocalizing explained in section 51. It is not usually
necessary to vocalize for the short vowel e, a.s most of
the terminations contain this letter.
289. When an appendage is added tq any of the
double length curves it is read after the Tr, Dr, etc.,
as in the words "northern, eastern, maternity,
moderation. "
290. Such words as "moderation" are vocalixed
by placing the vowel which occurs before the final hook
under or above it.
STENOTYPY AND NOMENCLATURE OF THE LENGTHENED
STEMS.
291. Lengthened stems with or without append-
ages are stenotyped and named after the manner ex-
plained in section 255 for halved ones, the body letters
tr standing for Tr, Dr, Thr, or Dhr indiscriminately,
thus Ftr, Vtr, Mtr, Mrtr, Mptr, Mprtr, Ngtr, Ltr,
Ztr, toLtr, Wtr, TFtr, Nrtrn, Ltrn, Mprtrn, Ltrshn
are uttered Feeter, Veeter, Meeter, Meerter, Empter,
Emperter, Eengter, Leeter, Layter, Weelter, Weeter,
Wayter, Neertern, Leetern, Empertern, Leetershun.
LONG AND SHORT OUTLINES.
292. In concluding this chapter on the halving and
lengthening principles the learner is informed that he
will soon ascertain by practice which a>re the best out-
lines to use. It is sometimes speedier to write a long
outline for a word than a short and cramped one.
When he meets with such forms, therefore, he will
know that they are given in preference to the shorter
ones. The learner should always be very careful to
preserve in his writing a marked distinction between
the full, half and double length letters so that they can
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 11 T)
l>e readily distinguished from one another. This
should be done as much as possible whether writing at
his swiftest or slowest speed, since it is upon this dis-
tinction and the average proper slope of the letters
that most of the legibility of his writing will depend.
THE PHOXOGRAPUIC MANUAL
CHAPTER VII.
PREFIXES, AFFIXES, ETC.
LESSON 23.
PREFIXES.
293. Cm, On, Km or Kn the context determ-
ining the m or n with any' vowel or dipthong be-
tween, are represented initially by a light dot, called
the Con dot, written before the beginning of the re-
mainder of the word. When the syllable immediately
following Cm or Km begins with M the latter is writ-
ten. The same is true when Cn or Kn is followed by
N. When a Cm, etc., syllable occurs medially it is
indicated by writing the part of the word following it
so that the end of the part before it shall stand in the
place of the Con dot. When a syllable occurs thus
medially it is not often necessary to vocalize the pre-
ceding one. When the latter is In, Un or Cir it may
be joined in the case of a few familiar words, as in ' 'in-
complete, unconcern" or "circumnavigate."
a. When Cm, etc. , are followed immediately by a
vowel the word is written in full except when the
vowel occurs before the stem S, as in "comestible''
(see eng., last word in line 2) when the dot is
employed.
b. From the preceding it will be perceived that the
dot or medial space is always written or left before a
consonant but not before a vowel, except when the
latter occurs before the S stem.
C. Cm, etc,, may at any time be vocalized, if de-
THE PHOXCKiKAPHIC MANUAL. 117
sired, by inserting the vowel or diphthong imme-
diately after the dot or medial space, as in the engrav-
ing. This, however, will seldom be necessary.
d. In connected writing the Con dot may /be omit-
ted from frequent words when the remaining outlines
are sufficiently suggestive; as for example, from
"compliment, concern, confidence, contrary, conven-
'lent, conversation, canvas" or "canvass."
e. The Con dot should usually be made first, but
care should be taken to place it high enough above
downward stems to permit the latter to be of the proper
length when resting on the line of writing.
f. Cm or Km with an initial vowel are indicated
the same as when without it. In which case the vowel
may at any time, if desired, be inserted before the
dot or medially after the preceding stem as in the en-
graving. But this will seldom be necessary.
g. The Con dot and juxtaposition are usually em-
ployed in all cases except monosyllables and their
plurals, or derivatives ending in Ng.
1. The course in the above paragraph is followed
for the sake of speed and uniformity in writing al-
though by so doing derivatives are occasionally varied
from the forms of their primitives. (See see's. 107
and 108).
294. Concom. "Concomitant" and its derivatives
are written with two Con dots side by side before the
remainder of the word after the manner of the
Con dot.
295. Contra, Contro, Counter, or Canter. The
prefix Contra, Contro, Counter or Canter is repre-
sented by the stem K halved for Kt with the first
stem of the remainder of the word written dis-
joined underneath or above it (the latter in the case of
upward stems) in such a manner that its beginning
shall bo at or near the middle of the prefix. It may
be omitted in "controversy" and its derivatives.
118 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
a. When Con or Com follows Counter as in ' 'coun-
terconnect" or "countercompony" the two prefixes are
written with the halved stem Kt and the Con dot
underneath; the latter before the beginning of the
remainder of the word.
b. In or Un is prefixed to the sign Contra or
Contro by the N stem joined.
296. " Contri. The word "contribute" and its
derivatives, with the exception of ' 'contribution'',
should be written with the Con dot. In the case of
"contribution" the accent being on the third instead
of the second syllable; that is to say after the contri,
changes the latter two syllables into a prefix of the
same nature as Contra, Contro, Counter and Canter,
which occur as prefixes only when the accent is on the
first or after the second syllable. "Contribution"
may, therefore, be written with Kt as a prefix for
Contri. If, however, uniformity in writing is desired
it should be written with the Con dot, the same as
are the other words of the series. It is here, how-
ever, written with Kt.
297. When Cog occurs initially it is written with
the stems K and G; but when it occurs medially it is
indicated by juxtaposition the same as Cm, etc., in
section 293.
a. If desired Cog, when it occurs medially, may
be indicated by striking the first part of the stem of
the remainder of the word through the first stem of
the word near the end.
298. En, In or Un is prefixed to the S circle on R
initial hooks, and on the L hook on downward Sh, and
on right curves by a small right curl.
a. Each syllable is also prefixed to the S circle on
left initial hooks by a small left curl.
b. The above curl, whether right or left, is called
the N curl. Its stenotype is n and its specific name
Jn; thus, nsTrMnt or nsPlt is spoken In Stree Meent
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 119
jr In sPleet. Either form may also be particularly
designated, if desired, as the right or left X curl.
c. If preferred the stem N may be employed on
the left hooks on K and upward R instead of the curl;
thus, NsKlt, XsKwrt, NswRft.
d. If desired the curl may be vocalized by placing
the vowel before or above it. But this will seldom be
necessary. (See also sec. 217).
e. When the circle occurs on left curves and
straight stems without initial hooks the stem N is
used; as in "unseen" and "insurgent."
299. Incon or Uncon is sometimes prefixed to the
S circle by the N curl; as in the word "inconsiderable"
or ' 'unconsidered. "
300. Enter, Inter, Intra or Intro is indicated by
Xt disjoined with its center above the beginning of
horizontal stems and its end before the center of all
others. In most words, however, the Nt may be
joined.
301. Trans is represented by Trs or Tr joined
when no error would be liable to occur, as in "trans-
act, transfigure'' and "transcript". When error
would be liable as in "transept" it is written in full
with the stem N; thus, TrNs. It is not necessary to
vocalize the prefix. Its stenotypes are Trs whether
Trs or Tr is written.
a. The above is used only when Trans occurs as a
prefix. When this is not the case, as in "transom",
the word is written in full with the stem X; thus,Tr-
XsM. Furthermore when Trans occurs before the
Shun curl as in "transition" the prefix is not employed
but instead the word is written in full with the Xs
circle; thus Trass///*- as in engraving 217.
302. Magna or Magni (from the Latin meaning
great) is indicated by M written with its center above
the beginning of all stems except half length hori-
120 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
zontal and upward ones when it is written with its end
above or before the center of the latter. It is used
only in words of three syllables and over.
303- MK (Me or Mac) may be indicated the same
as Magna or Magni above except when it is followed
by a vowel, C (with the K sound) or K or G (as in
gay) when the word is written with the stem K or G;
in which case it is not usually necessary to vocalize
the first syllable.
a. From the last paragraph it will be perceived
that the prefix MK is written only before consonants
except when another K or a G (as in gay) follows.
304. Self is made a prefix and represented by the
8 circle, as follows:
a- In its derivatives; namely, "selfish, selfishly,
selfishness", the circle being joined to the remainder
of the word, Un in ' 'unselfish", etc. , is then written
with the N curl. (See sec. 298).
b- In compounds composed of self and some other
word which does not contain initial Cm or Cn; in
which case the circle is usually written disjoined oppo-
site or near the middle of the first stem of the
remainder of the word. In a few frequent words,
however, it may be joined.
305. Self-con or Self-corn is represented by the S
circle written before the beginning of the first stem of
the remainder of the word after the manner of the
Con dot.
a- Self -con or Self-corn may also be written w r ith
the circle placed alongside the middle of the first stem
as in section 304, b; the Con dot being inserted in its
proper place before the beginning of the stem. In
frequent words the dot may usually be omitted. (See
sec. 293, d). The method in paragraph 305, however,
is the one usually followed in this system.
306. Self-contra, or Self-contro. Self, in Self-
contra or Self-contro, is represented by the S circle
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 121
disjoined above the prefix Kt for Contra or Contro
(See sec. 295).
307. A prefix never occurs in a word consisting
wholly of vowels.
STENOTYPY.
308. An inverted period before a stenotype indi-
cates the Con dot ; thus, ' Tnt. It is vocalized by
placing the vowel or diphthong after or before it ;
thus, 'aFr, 'owsL, a-MDt, a-iB, camphor, council or
counsel, accommodate, akimbo. (See sec. 293).
309. Two inverted periods before a stenotype indi-
cate the prefix Concom; thus, "Tnt. (See sec. 295).
310. An apostrophe between a preceding and a
following stenotype indicates juxtaposition by placing
the phonographs end to end or before one another, as
in medial Con, etc., and in Self -con ; thus, Ds'Tnt,
s'Trl. (See sections 293 and 305 and also sec. 40, a).
311. An inverted semicolon between two steno types
indicates any other kind of juxtaposition than the
above; thus, KttVn, Kt'.RTnt, Nt'.Mt, MtTt,
MtNt, siLf. (See sections 295, 300, 302, 303 and
304, b and also sections 42 and 273).
312. If an inverted period is placed after the semi-
colon it indicates that the Con dot is to be inserted before
the beginning of the second stem ; thus, Kt'. 'Kt, si 'Trl.
See see's. 295, a and 305, a).
313. For the stenotypic indication of intersection
as in paragraph 297, a, see section 52.
LESSON 24.
AFFIXES.
THE FINAL SYL.LAIJLE INC..
314. The final syllable Ing is represented by a
122 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
light dot, called the Ing dot, written after the end of
the preceding part of the word, or by the stroke Ng
joined to the preceding stem. For the plural Ings the
circle S in the place of the dot or the stroke Ng with
the circle S is used. It is not usually necessary in the
case of the stroke to insert the vowel i.
a. The Ing dot is represented in stenotypy with an
inverted period and the Ings circle with a similar circle
or degree mark placed after the character for the pre-
ceding stem ; thus, K', D.
315. This termination being a syllable of itself in
speech and not a word never occurs in monosyllabic
words. In writing, therefore, it can never be attached
to a vowel or consonant in the same syllable with itself.
Consequently, it should be so written that it may always
be known, Avhen the vowels are omitted (see sec. 60, b)
and thus the words in which it ends not be taken for
monosyllables ending with consonant Ng.
316. Monosyllables ending in Ng always consist of
one or two single length stems , namely :
a. Ng or Ngs with an initial breathing, circle or
loop.
b. Ng or Ngs preceded by any other stem without
appendages except one with an initial loop and upward
R and L with initial hooks.
317. Accordingly the stroke Ng for the termination
Ing is always omitted and the dot inserted at the
end of a vowel word and when the resulting word
would otherwise consist of two single length stems as
above. Consequently monosyllables ending in Ng and
words ending with the syllable Ing can not conflict.
318. In all other cases the stem is inserted for this
termination whenever convenient, namely :
a. After all stems without appendages (except
halved P, T, Th and Y) and after all stems with linal
hooks.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 123
b. After final circles except Xs circles and a circle
on a hook.
c. After final loops on Th, Y and upward L, left
ones on T and Ch and right ones on upward R.
d. When it is not convenient to write the stem,
that is in the exceptions in paragraphs a and b and after
the unspecified loops in paragraph c, the dot is inserted.
(See engraving a, b, c).
319. The learner will understand that Ing could be
written with the dot in all cases in section 318. But
the stem is the quicker of the two. Consequently the
dot is employed only when it is inconvenient to use the
stem.
320. In connected writing the stem and dot may
usually be omitted at the end of verbs (participles)
the context determining the meaning. Sometimes,
however, when a noun or adjective and a verb have
the same form, as "being" or "writing" (BNg, KtNg)
the outline for the former is used for both.
321. The stem and dot need not be written in com-
pound words, but instead the syllable Ing may be
indicated by juxtaposition after the manner of Con and
Com (see section 293) by writing the beginning of
the first stem of the following word in the place of
the Ing dot.
322. Ingly is represented by the hooked stem Ngl
after all stems without appendages and after the S circle
on P, T or Ch and on those left curves which are in-
clined in the same direction as the latter ; namely, F,
Th or Y. . In all other cases it is represented by the
stem NG and downward L joined or disjoined.
323. Ington may be represented by Ngt disjoined
with its center under the end of the preceding stem,
or it may be joined, if convenient, and no error would
be liable to occur. (See also sec. 252, a, 1).
Ili4 THE PHONCXJUAPIIIC MANUAL
LESSON 25.
AFFIXES, CONTINUED.
324. Ble or Ely is indicated by the stem B joined
when the hooked stern Bl can not be written except
in the latter case after downward and upward Sh
without appendages. Usually the vowel preceding the
termination may be omitted.
a. When this termination occurs after downward
Sh standing alone either simple or with an initial hook
it should be written with the Bl stem if error would be
liable to occur, which will usually be only in proper
names ; thus, ShrBl, Shruble.
325. Bleness is represented by Bns or Bins joined
to the preceding part of the word in the same manner
as Ble and Bly above.
326. Full or Fully is indicated by joining the
stem F when the hooked stem Fl can not be made.
327. Fulness is indicated by Fs struck beneath a
preceding stem in such a manner that its beginning
shall be under the middle of a horizontal or upward
stem and before the two-third's point' of a downward
one. Its beginning is thus after the former and before
the latter. When there is no preceding stem, as in
* 'awf ulness, " the word is written in full.
1. Fs as above is not always employed after a single
length straight stem without an appendage.
328. Iveness is indicated by Vs in the same man-
ner as Fulness in paragraph 327 and usually follows
the sounds T and S.
1. Vs as above is not usually employed after a
straight stem with a final loop.
239. Lessness is indicated by Ls struck through
the preceding stem.
THE PHON-OGUAPniC MANUAL. 125
LESSON 26.
AFFIXES, CONCLUDED.
330. Graph-y, and, usually, also graphic-al-ly,
may be indicated by the stem G joined to the preced-
ing part of the word. The loop St may be added to
the termination, as in "telegraphist."
1. If at any time words of two simple stems, as
the first three in the engraving, would be liable to
cause conflict, the F hook may be added; thus, BGf,
JGf, hlGf, or the words may be written in full.
Again, Graphy may at any time be distinguished from
Graph by placing the short vowel i after the stem
G, the same as if the latter were the stem F.
Finally the stem K or Kl, may be added whenever
desired to the G stem for graphic or graphical-ly.
But none of these cases will often happen.
a. Grapher may be represented by the hooked
stem Gr joine'd.
b. Gram may be designated by G struck through
the preceding stem, or, in the case of a preceding G,
above it, with its center opposite the end of the
latter.
C. In each instance above when only one vowel
precedes the termination it may usually be omitted.
331. Ncy. Any termination beginning with a qon-
sonant, with the accent before or after it, and ending
in Ncy, as in the words "potency, vacancy, vagrancy,
Montmorency, " etc., in the engraving may be indi-
cated by writing its first consonant stem simple or
with prependages fall length and placed close to the
preceding part of the word The termination is not
usually vocalized. When there is no preceding stem,
as in"sequency" or when the termination begins with
a vowel as is "truancy, buoyancy, fluency" the word
is written in full.
a. When writing this termination disjoined as
126 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
above, it should be placed with its center under or to
the right of the end of a preceding horizontal or down-
ward stem and its beginning under or to the right of
the center of an upward one. A downward termina-
tion, however, should never be Avritten with its begin-
ning under a horizontal stem or before a downward
one. (See the word "discrepancy" and the forms TiP
and JiV in the engraving, line 1, and also sees, and
engs. 327 and 328, where this method is followed.)
b. If preferred, this termination may usually be
represented as above with a final N hook, and joined to
the preceding part of the word. In which case if con-
flict should ever occur it may be disjoined according
to the rules in the last paragraph. This, however,
will seldom be necessary and then usually only in
words of two stems whose terminations are without
prependages.
332. Ity, Idity. Any halved stem, except one
ending in a circle or loop, ma3 r , if compound, be
attached to any previous stem, or if simple, placed
close to it and allowed to stand for any termination
beginning with the first of the consonants represented
by such halved stem and ending in Ity or Idity and
consisting of three or four syllables with the accent of
the word on the first or second syllable of the termina-
tion, as in the words "barbarity" to "validity" in the
engraving. The termination is not usually vocalized.
When an initial hook can not be conveniently formed,
as in "accountability, sensibility, accessibility" it -is
omitted. It is also omitted in the termination Bility
after downward or upward Sh, as in "sociability,
finishability." (See also sec. 324). This principle is
not applied to words having a Shun hook when the
remainder of the word after Shun contains only the con-
sonants E, or L and T, as in cautionarity, motionarity,
nationality, rationality." It is also not applied to
words ending in Tivity, whose primitives ending in
THE PI10NS-XIUAPIUC MANUAL. 127
*
Tive are written with a halved stem followed bv the
stem V, as explained in section 280 as in "activity,
receptivity." In all such cases the words are written
in full.
a. If at any time there would be danger of con-
flict between or among words ending as above, those
ending in Idity may be written in full or the termina-
tion vocalized with the accented vowel. Either, how-
ever, will seldom be necessary.
b. Again, if at any time, error should be liable to
occur in the case of the joined terminations they may
be disjoined. This again, however, will seldom be
necessary.
333. 'Sometimes a termination of similar nature to
those in sec. 332 may be written according to the sam3
principle; as "asafetida."
334. When writing the above terminations dis-
joined, the rules in sec. 331, a, forNcy should be fol-
lowed.
335. It will be observed that the above termina-
tions are always indicated by a simple or compound
halved stem and that the accent follows the first of the
consonants represented by the latter. When these
conditions cannot be fulfilled as in "integrity, ubi-
quity," the terminations are written in full.
336. The principle in section 332 is not usually
applied when the resulting word would consist of one
stem, which is the case when there is no stem preced-
ing the termination, the preceding part then consisting
only of a vowel, circle, loop, or curl and circle; as in
"agility, hilarity, solidity, civility, stability, stupid-
ity, insularity;" in all which cases the words are
written in full.
337. Section 332, as therein indicated does not
apply to terminations of three or four syllables begin-
ning with a vowel, as Ality; or containing only the
final syllable Ity. Words like "duality, mutuality,
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
materiality, reality" or "parity /'therefore, are written
in full. (See also "activity" and "receptivity," thu
l.-i-t two examples in eng. 332, line 2).
338. The principle in sec. 332 is not applied when
it would change a primitive form. It may, however,
be so applied if desired. Thus for example, "maturity,
paternity, mutuality, fatality, vitality, instrumental-
ity, activity, receptivity," may be written Mtrt, PTrnt,
MTlt, FTlt, VTlt, nsTrMTlt, KTft, RsPTft.
339. Words like "penalty," which end in Ty
without a vowel before the final T, should not be con-
founded with those in section 332 but be written in
full. (See "penality," and "penalty" in eng. 332 to
339.)
340. City, Sity or Xity. Any termination begin-
ning w r ith any consonant except S and ending in City,
Sity or Xity with the number of syllables and the
accent the same as in paragraph 332 as in the words
"sphericity, verbosity, duplicity, laxity," etc., in the
engraving may be indicated by writing its first conson-
ant stem simple or with prependages full length with a
final St loop and joined to the preceding part of the
word. Occasionally, in order to avoid an awkward
junction, the loop may be added to a lengthened stem,
as in "eccentricity." The termination is not usually
vocalized. When there is no preceding stem as in
"sagacity," or when the termination begins with a
vowel, as in "curiosity," or commences with S as in
"necessity," the word is written in full.
a. If at any time words written as above would be
liable to conflict with those ending in St they may be
written in full or the terminations disjoined, in which
case the rule in section 331, a, for Ncy should be fol-
lowed. Conflict, however, will seldom occur and then
usually only in words of two stems whose terminations
are without prependages. (See also sec. 331, b.)
341. Self or Selves is added, the former by a
TIIK PHONOGRAPH 1C MANUAL. 129
small and the latter by a large circle placed under or
after the middle of the preceding stem or it may be
joined.
342. Ship is added by the stroke Sh joined or dis-
joined in cases where ShP is not preferred.
343. In general, where a final or medial syllable
cannot be joined conveniently it may be disjoined as
in the words "friendly" and "winsomeness. " In such
cases it is not often necessary to vocalize it.
LESSON 27.
DERIVATIVES AND NEGATIVES.
344. Derivative words, as previously stated (see
sec. 107), should contain their primitive forms, except
where speed or legibility would suffer, in which case
the most facile outline should always be written with-
out regard to the exact primitive one.
a. Derivative words ending in Y, whose primitives
end in L as, "shrilly, facilely, are in this system of
phonography written with one L.
345. Negative words whose first consonants are
M, N, R, or L and whose positives begin with these
letters are written by prefixing the negative vowel to
the positive form, except those beginning with Un
which are written by doubling the first consonant;
namely, the letter N. (a) The same rules apply to words
of similar formation that are not negative in their
nature. (See also par. 293).
346. Although in pronunciation apparently but
one consonant is heard in words like those in the last
section the first gliding so readily into the second as
to give an impression of their being only one in
reality there are two consonants. The first part of
such negatives is thus composed of two syllables, the
final and initial consonants of which, for the sake
of euphony being the same, give the impression of
130 THE PHOXOfillAIMIK' MANl-AT-
there being but one consonant. This will immediately
be evident by considering the words "can" and "not"
which often appear in script and print joined together
in one phrase, "cannot.*' Here although only one
consonant is apparently heard yet we know there are
two and that it would be incorrect to write and print
them with one, as in "canot." Accordingly a correct
phonetic representation requires that all such words
should in script and print be represented with two con-
sonants. In shorthand, -however, where speed is neces-
sary, the first one is omitted as just explained. The
same observations apply to the words described in
paragraph 293, except that the second consonant,
namely the letter M or N is always written. (See also
sec 344, a).
a. If the learner prefers he may always write the
first consonant of negatives the same as when the
letter N (or Un) precedes, or as in section 293. The
method in section 345, however, is usually more
speedy.
347. Negative words whose first consonant is X
and whose positives begin with L are usually written
with the initial hooked stem Nl. Those whose positives
begin with R are usually written with the stems N and
R, thus avoiding conflict with the Nl series and also
preserving the positive form. The same rules apply
to similarly formed words that are not negative.
OMISSION OF MEDIAL T, K OR G, N AND W.
348. It is sometimes inconvenient on account of
the lengthy forms which would ensue to write the
above full sized stems medially. When this is the
case they may be omitted as follows:
a. After the circle S on a full sized stem a medial
T can usually be omitted before another consonant.
b. K. G. In some words K can be omitted after
Ng and before T, Sh and Shn; and G before Sh.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 1'.',]
e. N. The N stem or hook may be omitted medially
when it is inconvenient to write it and no error would
l>e liable to occur.
d. The W stem may, if desired, be omitted from
the word "swift" and its derivatives and the series
written with the small W instead. (See sec. 60). The
usual method, however, in this system, is to write it
with the light stem; thus sWFt, sWFtL, sWFtst,
sWFtr.
CONCLUSION OF THE ELEMENTARY STYLE.
349. Phonography has now been presented to the
learner complete, considered simply as a system of
writing. If he has carefully studied the preceding
pages he can represent in it any word in the English
language. There would, however, be but little advan-
tage in employing it thus in its elementary form since
it would be too slow to be practicable as a system of
shorthand. The remaining chapters, therefore, will
be devoted to the Reporting Style by means of which
phonography may be written with the swiftness of
rapid speech.
ELEMENTARY STYLE
READING LESSONS AND EXERCISES.
LKSSON 1. CONSONANTS.
1 \\ 1 I __ ) )~~ ~/ ^ ^
ft vv ( c . / / v.'ji A ir
EXERCISE, 1-2.
1 \\ \\ \\ \\ \\ '\\ \\
2 \\ ; i ; i 1 1 ii M it
*..)') ) ) M ) ) J ) ) ) ) >
5 v^ ^ v^ vv a v^ ^^
6 ( ( ( ( i ( ( ( i ( ( ( ( (
7
12 ,' / / / /
133
THE PHOXOCKAPHIC MAXT'AL.
13 r
r
15
4
7
8
( c ( ( f y / r c c
LESSON 2. CONSOXAXTS, CONTINUED.
\ I /
r
// \\
10
EXERCISE, 1-10.
\\ \\ I I I I // //
(( ( ( JJ JJ ) ) ))
r r
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
1 3.")
V
J I
<_-/ V - i
\ I
EXERCISE, CONTINUED, 5-10.
u
8
9
10
11
12
in
cy
L.
>
n_ ^ ^ n . ^
v. i
X \-^ i_
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
14
15 L.
IB r~
r
-T\
18
LESSON 3. W AND Y AND DOWNWARD R AND L, ETC
.14 ^ ^v^^r ^ Y v
15 ( r C^. ^ (L (
16
V
j j
n
EXERCISE, 12-18.
"r r w r /- v
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
137
V n
)
V
9 ^ r r
10 S~ / \ '
/ /
) )
EXERCISE, CONTINUED, 12-18.
.
/t
/r
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANTAL
20
21
26-7 . .
LESSON 4. RKiHT ANCJLES. ETC.
r
^
1 /. -\
EXEHCISK. -.MI -j;.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
139
>.M-V.*
LESSON 5. VOWELS AND VOCALIZATION.
30-5 3CV>_lcv- h ix^
36-7 5CI/V-13CUN-I V, * V
39 . -.c .\ .1. -t s> v v -r * ! > r-
A^ c'-ui^^^-N"^"!!. L.
41 3 c 1 v
- V ^V V: -\ -Tl-
I- -I
-iu- Sy ^j. tv *>
b \\
\\ \\ \\
140
T11K PHoNoGUAPiiK' MANUAL.
C 33 _ II lu ID v D 131 -CO A.\ I- -|- ^- -, iS.
47
J i. U '\
.S
50-6 r
EXERCISE, 30-48.
* > f; ^ V V V S \ 7 *
5 \ \ h l . K )\ At
6 /-
^ X
THE PHONOGRAPH K 1 MANUAL.
7 \ 'i I- ^ ^ ) (-
EXERCISE, CONTINUED, 48-53.
^ ' r \r -^
H2
THE iMi;>\<>. :KAPHIC MANUAL.
5 -=
-^ vri- i
--
18 ^K
LESSON 6. THE SMALL ALTERNATIVE FORMS FOR W AND Y, ETC.
60-r.l 3J *| e| <| I i| -J i| ?|
l <l
'-si
THK PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
143
" li It l
a-b > '7 '/ -/
-
fil
\
*>
/ /r
EXERCISE, 60-63.
,> 3 ^ .-j, ,> / jf V
x "/ 7
^ 1- 4 r* "^1
e ^*
U-ii
LESSON 7. THE H TICKS.
"1 -1 LL -1 I*
144
THE PHONOORAPHU- MANUAL.
1
79 -\ \ ^ *& *r\
80 ^ -NT _!T
EXERCISE, 77-80.
4 ' V 4 : /
j /
t / >
~\
7 \y
9
10
-v ^y 4, ^xf.
. _ )> ^ ^ >
X
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
145
84
LESSON 8. SMALL CIRCLES.
\ r , i / / >
I. r c r r
^ ) 1 ? ) r
>\o It S
o Vo X) (a o b
NO C 6
b fa
\o [, /
89-a I s acj
91-2 \ra_v<r
" \ f ^ ^.r
y
y i
L
1 Jt!
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
100-2
103, a
-^ o_o y <^> A I \
LESSON 9. LARGE CIRCLES, ETC.
PP /> / cx_ 0- O/
c ^d : )X <Li
f\ V v^
Y f
106-7 > <^ ^
109-13 -r> \> 1
>y^ eVr ^ ^
/ 4
^ ^ n
! / \* ^ \ l
/ C\^ X-J-0 )l
V V ^
^ A .
0^
9
], ]: J:
aV.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANTA1.. 14
** V
116 J' > > > & <}> ^ ^
117
LESSON 10. THE S AND Z STEMS.
-) 5
^ \ . ' S), ^ ^ << ^ /. n '
x L
~^V^ I I L>1\( \ /
-) -) N "1 <) >] -)
119 ~^ j c ^' i /^' i^, lip \^_ /
\* yf Y
121 fc ) J ) ^ ^ ^ \ I ~^ D ^ 3
LESSON 11. LOOPS.
122-4 <\ -P ^ y P y cf, ^ ^ \
/l /
125 \ \f _^* /" S? \* -^ ?
^^k ^
14S
,
127
130
132
|r (,;
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
xf, "% ^
/< X ^
EXERCISE, 84-132.
rv
5
6
7 \> -
9
10
12
" A
t'
JL
f
V
I -
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
149
15 -
Y
LESSON 12. INITIAL HOOKS, ETC.
152-3 NX 1 1
\\ rr
164 \- \
-V
v;
165-6 X'X -X f ? $ ?
1 v-- *^7 C^ v_< ^rx^
/
150
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL..
y // ^^' x/^^^ r j /**^^ ~
167
% (T~
4=,
172-4
"
178
179-80
v rr CL
v
EXERCISE, 152-180.
<V< N V^ V
>
^ ,/ * *
THE PHOXOGKAPIIIO MANUAL.
151
\ % >
9
10
11
12
13
r r
14 c f / Ci P>
15 ^ ^ ^
-
- rr
16
is A. rv_^ rT^r ^v r r
LESSON 13. S PREFIXED TO INITIAL HOOKS, ETC.
184 \ 1 ; a- s ^ Iv?^ <- <r- /
152
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
8
f -/
IBS N ^SS N V
1
\ (=
189
194-5
V -1 -/ J- K -1 -/ ^-
s, 1 / r p^ ^ x*' 1 ^x ^ r
LESSON 14. FINAL HOOKS. THE N AND F HOOKS.
199
\\ J J </ S
^^ (, (, 6 C
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
J ) J J r
153
v
200-a
201
V V
^ V
202^
203 \ h
206-
/
\>
r\
V J-
V
\x
V V V
l c ^ / x
^ I
17)4
THE PHOXOiiUAPHIC MANIAI-.
EXERCISE, 199-306.
1 V J" /?
2 u\- -j. ^
)*
^ /T
<C< -/r
- 3 1
V V ^
\ \ I
X s \ "J 1
4 V? l>, / -** -
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
* fr
V
3-
N: 1'
TIIK PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
155
18
w\^
LESSON 15. FINAL HOOKS, CONTINUED. THE TER HOOK.
209 -=3 V ^J J- </- ^= -=-s V V V V J c cA
210-11
LESSON 16. THE SHUN FINAL HOOK AND THE SHUN CURL.
214
^ Ur> -Lp -I cV^A
> / '/
k U M -lj aN o
156
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
X
-ir
217 ^ ^ 4' ^ ^e X<' K f=, i- W
4-
LESSON 17. DOWNWARD AND UPWARD R AND L.
231
" \X
IX ^C
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
157
236-d
237 /T
V" V' ^ f^
K /
LESSON 18. DOWNWARD AND UPWARD SH.
158
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANTAL.
y
241 "v v
4
1 1? -
LESSON i;. THE HALVING PRINCIPLE.
244-6 \- <' <\> N- <i- V N < \- \- V
*
-\ a. C / 6) O *. V c\ i C/
. \-
V \"
V V
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAM Al,
159
V "* -J -* 3= J- $9 p V
<? ff^ <J ^fj Li \f> -^ ^y ,
< ic i. c. is? v cy
;
" G, X- -+\.\- /{
"246-8 /** /^ %. \ 1 -;
V 3 v
249-50
251 -a ~
252-a , c
-\
1 \ \ ^1 \
H J <> k
T
25M-a V V "s 3 ^<- >-
/*> <r N^
LESSOX -Jd. THKHALVINC PRTNCIPLE, CONT'D. R AND L HALVED.
257 /i /- >" ^ f -r t^ i^ &- A \f> ?
100
THE PHONOGRAPHIC 1 MANUAL.
258
-A-AAAAA A A A A
i -/I YJJ n rt -ft fa fa n
259 A
c /?
260-1 ft fc, _i/c VX V^, -
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
1G1
LESSON 21. THE HALVING PRINCIPLE, CONCLUDED.
263 * Jo A y{ /J ^ A A ./-
!(>
266-8
V. ~\ "> ^v > J (
S V v v^ V ( )
270
i>^ v V" 1
271 -i - ,1 ^ ,1
272 ^ |f -/ "V
IG2
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANT.U..
273
275-7
280
281 ^
v
LESSOX 2-2. THE LENGTHEXIXO PRIXCIPLE.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
1C.3
285
287
288
289-90
LESSON 23. PREFIXES.
293 J- J* 1- y .k- V" L
" J' L 3 > r ^ r jc j^ 4 'V -^ c J
\- \ \ r \ N^- u x
104
THE PliOXcKiKAPHK' MANUAL.
.-P. .-IT? .rti,
--3^ '^ -? ^ -V-
y .^-^ -^
' X
_ \ \
; -a N^ v "--^ /ii X X'
Xj^- Vr Vo ^
f,294 '^ \ X^ -m- \ ""^ "*
/. r \ -.
7
^ o^ v (
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
105
95-6
297
I
a.e,299
-A
300
3-
302 -^_>h
303
166
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
304-b >
305-6
316-b >i
317
318-a
f ^ J- .o U
LESSON" ,'4. AFFIXES.
=^ V2*- Ni/
\l 1* (
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
L67
V *\
^ X-
322-3
^L 4^ -V -^ 4
LESSON ^'5. AFFIXES, COXT1NUEU.
324-5
326
327
328
329
,
168
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
LESSON 26. AFFIXES, CONCLUDED.
330 \-- Zl JT L. ^
a-b
/I.
>U.
-f
331-a \i >C_
/^- V
i i
7 '\
332-4
A
H A,
335-9 ^
340
r fa ^ -vq
J
^
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
160
341
342
343
344-a
345
LESSON 27. DERIVATIVES, NEGATIVES, ETC.
JTr -2s? T\* ~^ * & & &*-* *
"a, 347 -^ V '^X V -^
348-a '^TT = - y^ TP /o x>
v* -^.y Q^Z> Ih-' v*-?) (^
- r^ ) t P ^ "7 tv
ELEMENTARY STYLE
AVRITING LESSONS AND EXERCISES.
(KEY TO HEADING EXEKCISES.)
LESSON 1.
CONSONANTS.
1. P,B,T,D,K,G,S,Z,M,N,Ng,R,L,W,Y.
2. F,V,Th,Dh,C,J,Sh,Zh,HW,HY.
EXERCISE, 1-2.
1. P,B, P,B, P,B, P,B, P,B, P,B, P,B.
2. T,D, T,D, T,D, T,D, T,D, T,D, T,D.
3. K,G, K,G, K,G, K,G, K,G.
5. F,V, F,V, F,V, F,V, F,V, F,V, F,V.
6. Th,Dh, Th,Dh, Th,Dh, Th.Dh, Th,Dh, Th,Dh,
Th,Dh.
7 C T C J (^ J C J C J C J C J
8. Sh,Zh, 'sh,Zh, 'sh,Zh, Sh,'zh,' Sh,Zh, Sh,Zh,
Sh,Zh.
9. M,M,M,M,M,M,M,M,M,M.
10. N,N,N,N,N,N,N,N,N,N,
11. Ng,Ng,Ng,Ng,Ng,Ng,Ng,Ng,Ng,Ng.
12. R,R,R,R,R,R,R,R,R,R.
13. L, Lj Lj L, L, L, L, L, L, J_/.
1 4. W, \V, W, W, W, nW, nW, H W, nW,
15. Y,Y,Y,Y,Y,nY,nY,nY,nY,iiY.
171
172 THE PHOXOCJKAPH1C MANUAL.
LESSON 2.
CONSONANTS, CONTINUED.
4. K,N,M,P,T,C,Y,Sh,R,L.
7. PP, BB, TT, DD, KK, GG, CC, JJ, KR, PB,
BP.
8. KR, KL, MR, ML, NR, NL.
a. KP, KF, KSh, NB, NV, NSh, MP, MF, MSh.
9. KN, KM, NK, MK, NN, NM, MN, MM.
a. KNP, KMF, NKT, MKTH, NNS, NMC. MMC.
10. PK, WM, ThK, PN, FN, WN, TN, ThX, SN.
ChN, YN, ShN.
a. PT, BTh, BZ, VG, VD, FTh, VS, WT, DR, WL.
EXERCISE, 1-10.
1. P,B, P,B, T,D, T,D, C,J, C,J, K,G, K,G.
2. F,V, FV, Th.Dh, Th.Dh, Sh,Zh, Sh,Zh, S,Z,
S Z
3. M,M,M, N,N,Ng, R,R,R, L,L,L.
4. W,W,W, Y,Y,Y, HW.nW.nW, HY,HY,nY.
5. PB, TD, CJ, RR, KG, BP, DT, JC, GK.
> PK, PC, CK, TTh, BT, KF, BTh, PM, TN.
7. YT, MN, DNM, TXD, FTG, MThNg, NVGT.
8. KTK, TMNg, BKM, GTL, ShNTh, TMNT,
NMTK.
9. ThP, ThPK, ThNK, JMK, JKB, JLT, NVT.
EXERCISE, CONTINUED, 5-10.
1. ThM, ThC, YNff, PJ, CN, DhT, FP, MD, XF.
2. GD, DG, NT, ND, CP, JN, VN, SK, DhD.
3. BT, PD, WNg, JV, JSh, SN, GN, BM. JM.
4. SNg, JB, NG, NB, NJ, FJ, CM, FM, SM.
5. PPt, PBT, BBD, JJD, KKT, KGD, GGD,
RRD, KKX.
6. XBB, PTT, RJJ, XKG, MGG, KRR, TRR.
7. DKT. XVD, WMNg, YT, TNS, LBM, LZN,
RZX, YVP.
TIIK i'iio.\;x;i;Ai'Hir MANUAL. 173
8. LBX, FND, BFL, ThK, LMR, YTK, WG, TG.
9. LTN, RDNg, FT, JNT, LGN, ShNgG. ,
LKMNir.
10. ShKG, GLN, KNgKK, PR, KR, ShL, DPJ.
11. PMR, ZN, LDL, MRT. MDN, LM, TLD,
MM, RVX.
12. KKM, WBSh, NGL, W, TPKN, PDK,
LKNg.
13. RNK, ShNND, RNDLF, YNS, BNgKM, MRN,
RL.
14. PXgKX, SL, TLL, TNJP, GLD, WK, LPS.
15. DBK, KKK, MKN, LLN, KNSh, WKSh,
DLF.
16. ZRK, TPK, PGS, YM, MRPZ, WPT, TKM.
17. CRK, CKT, KKP, MRKP, CKS, SJ, PC,
ShShX, CXK.
18. NTR, MNTB, SNB, WPL, LThM, VKTR,
KND.
LESSON 3.
W AND Y AND DOWNWARD R AND L, ETC.
12-14. W, WF, FW or F^, VF, Y, YK, NY or
NZ, NF.
15. Y, L, YM, LM, YK, LK, YN, LN, YNgK.
16. L, LP, PL, BL, LT, KL, GL, FL, FZ.
17. C, R, CP, RP, PC, PR, MR, CM, FR.
18. Sh, ShP, ShPL, PSh, PSA, TSh, Zh, ZhR,
RZh.
" T?Sh, VM, ShF, ShTh, ShDh, LSh, ShSh,
RSh, ShL.
" ShS, SSh, ZSh, MSh, MZh, YS/i, ShY, ZhY,
YSh.
EXERCISE, 12-18.
1. WG, WN, WM, NTF, LTT, PW, TW,
M.
2, YK, YN, YNg, YM, PL, TL, CL, NZ, FZ.
174 THE PHONOGRAPHIC 1 MANTAL.
3. LV, LTh, LW, LVL, LKL, MNZ, MNDL.
4. PL, LL, KL, NgZ, SL, ML, DL, JL, FL.
5. OK, RK, MC, NC, LC, LR, DC, DR, BR.
6. FRTh, MRTh, MRL, MKN, LThNg, LM,
MLC, NLD.
7. SK, ShK, SN, ShN, ShD, ShW, ZhW, ShM,
STh, SDh.
s. WK, w^, WTT; H WM, YK, YTh, YZ,
nYM, YL, YLSh.
9. W,W, Y,Y, L,L, C,C, R,R, S,Z, Sh,Zh.
10. L, R, TZh, MpSh, NSh, ShC, ShLNg, ZhF,
ZhSh, RZhM.
EXERCISE, CONTINUED, 12-18.
1. WR, nWK, lAVF, nWN, H\VP, iiWK, nWG.
nWM, WGSh.
2. CW, JW, K\V. GW, CPW, RJW, F If, KR,
TR.
3. YD, YZ, YS, YMS, YG, YKR, YNgSh,
YKFL, YKLM.
4. F72L, BRL, NZL, KML, PKDL, MNPL.
5. VLM, KLK, KLP, MLK, FL72, FLS,
KJLR.
6. LFT, LFJ, LMNg, LNgK, LNGSh, LDXM,
LGT.
7. LFTL, LKT, LGJ, LLB, LNC, LSM, LRK.
8. BNZ, DNZ, VNZ, RNZ, LRL, BRL, SRL,
NTRL, FZNg.
9. CNT, CNB, CKR, CKD, CRP, CSG, CNS,
CKML, FNC.
10. RM, RDM, RNC, RFJ, RCL, RP7?, RMND.
11. RDL, RDT, RDS, RKSh, RTN, RTR, RTT,
RMD, -RNgK.
12. NTR, NTRT, PRS, PRK, KRT, JRX, KRND.
13. KMR, MMR, FLR, LMNTR, LFTR, FRR,
BRR.
THE PIIOXOr.UAPHIC MAXCAL. 175
14. ShR, ShKR, ShND, ShMNir, ShLL, ShLR,
ShLl), ShKSh, ZhRR.
15. FMSh, RDSh, RGSh, FLSh, LV/<, NVA,
IvShMR, LMZh.
1(>. J, M, K, S, TL, NV, RP, VN, MN. (Jehu,
Omaha, Kehoe, Soho, tallvho, Navajo, Arapahoe,
I vanhoe, Minnehaha. )
IT. P, T. K, S, F, Th, C, Sh.
18. M, N, Ng, R, L, W, Y, nW, nY.
LESSON 4.
RIGHT ANGLES, ETC.
20. PSh, PM, TX, KS, CF, RW, FR, ThK, YP,
ALT, WC, LP.
21. PS, PN,TSh,TF.KW,KM, CTh, FK, ThP, YT.
" SC, MP, LK, WT, MS, LW, AVSh, F*S'A,
ThN, YF.
' MX, WF, STh, ShY, LSh, NM, F7Z, ThS, YSh,
SKL.
22. RS, RSh, RW, RM, RL, FR, ThR, YR, NR.
23-5. Mp, LMp, KMp, TMp, DMp, MpG, MMp,
YMp, "N."
26-7. +, H, hM, hMp, hW, hS, hShhL, NhM, NhL.
" 7/X, 7>Xg, AF, ATh, AY, hK, hR, AP, AT, AC, +B.
EXERCISE, 20-27.
1. BSh, TNg, KZ, JV, VR, ThG, MD, WJ, LB.
2. GW, BNg, BN, PNff, BZ, DF, DSh.
3. MZ, MXg, MB, WV, SDh, SJ, ZJ.
4. V^A, F W, VG, YN, DhS, Dhp, ThB, YD.
5. RML, RS, RZ, RF, RV, RTh, RDh, RN, RL.
6. DML, TML, LML, FML, PML, NML, MML.
7. FMLR, FMLRL, MBL, YMS, LMXT, GMp.
8. H, AV, AB, AD, AJ, hG, hZL, hML, hLK.
U. //Th, AND, //XJ, AVN, AFSh ABB, AJPJ,
hLD, liSliSh, hSLR.
170 TIMO PHONOQRA-PfilC MANUAL.
'LESSON 5.
VOWELS AND VOCALIZATION.
30-5. i, e, n, a, a, o. 1, e, u, a, a, o, o*7, oi^ ui.
36-7. ni, He, HU, Ha, Ha, HO, HI, ne, im; Ha, Ha,
HO, HoiZ, Hoi, HIM.
39. Hni, Hne, HHU, Hna, Hna, HHO, [!], [6-], [a-],
[a-], [a-], [6-], Hno'iZ, Hfm-], H[na-], -f-e, +aore, a.
41. ii, ee, uu, iu, en, ue, aa, ao, aa, ao, oa, oa.
" ia, ia, ea, eo, ua, uo, eeu, mi, iue, iau, eoa, uao.
' ' au, ai, ia, oau, oio, otZa, oia, ui, anw, aoa, aao,
oao.
a. Hni[u-], Hne[u-], [1-jHnu, [e-jHnu, H[m-]-
H[HU-], H[Hu-]H[ne-], Hnafa-], [a-][o-], Hna[a-],
[a-]Hna, HaHo, H[Ha-]H[H5-].
" Hmwa, Hiioi'a, Hnuz'a, Ha[a-]Ha, Hna[a-][a-],
HHa[o-][a-], HHaH[Ho-]Ha, HHaHHaHno, H[Ha-]-
H[Ha-]H[HO-], [o-JHaHnu, [o-]H[m-][6-], aHnai.
b. aia, at a, aina, Haia, aina, Haina, aa,
H, O6>, OHO.
c. iii, a'.a, oto, o'.u, o'.i, uii, o'.i'.o,
47. iT, eT, uT, aT, aT, oT, IK, eK, nK, aK, aK,
oK.
" Ti, Te, Tu, Ta, Ta, To, Kl, Ke, Ka, Ka, Ka,
Ko.
" eTa, aTu, aTo, ouT, wT, u^T, eKa, aKu, aKo,
Ko?7, Koi, Ku^.
" iaT, Tia, eHuoT, TeHno, eaT, Tea, iaK, Kia,
eHnoK, KeHno, eaK, Kea.
' HiT, HniT, H[m-]T, [e-]T, HnaT, H[na-]T,
HiK, HmK, H[m-]K, [e-]K, HnaK, H[na-]K.
- Ti, T[i-], Te, T[e-], Ta, T[a-], Ki, K[I-], Ke,
K[e-], Ka, K[a-].
48-9 TeM, LaK, RaR, PeP, DiaNa, MiNenatna,
PinaHiRoTh (Pihahiroth), DlNaMo, aNDaLuSfia
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXUAL. 177
(Andalusia), Rw'aL, RiC, ShlLi, -+-1M, +eM or iM,
eM (Mm, 'em).
50-6. 1-Dea, I-[o]N, K-eno, Mfop, Mfap, Mfoap,
MfO'ap, Mfopi, TeMpO, BaMpu, HoNg, iNgaM,
LiNgo, G " a " Te. (Idea, Ion, Kehoe, mop or mob,
map or Mab, Moab, moppi or mobby, tempo, bamboo,
hong, Ingham, lingo, Goethe.
EXERCISE, 30-48.
1. i, I, e, e, u, u, a, a, a, a, o, 6, ow, oi, ui.
2. Hi, m, He, He, HU, HO, Ha, Ha, Ha, Ha, HO, HO,
3. aia, aa; a'. a, a; oio, oo\ aii, a*; eia, ea.
4. 10, la, ea, eea, ue, ai, Hai, anOa, ama,
, OHIO, HOIHO, 6aHii. (lo, la, Aea or Oea, Aeaea,
Ooi, ai, hai, Ahoah, Ahia, ahoy, Hai, Ohio, Hoaiho,
Oahu.)
5. Pee, Bee, Tee, Dee, Kee, Gee, See, Zee, Fee,
Vee, Thee, Dhee.
6. Chee, Jee, Shee, Zhee, Mee, Nee, Eeng, Ree,
Lee, Wee, Yee, Hwee, Hyee, Way, Yay.
7. Up, it, too, am, no, go, so, they, are.
8. Ashy, easy, Esau, any, essay, ally, away,
echo, obey, ivy.
9. Happy, hope, had, her, him, half, hath, have.
10. Iota, Iowa, Idaho, Isaiah, lago, bayou, via,
payee.
11. Dim, deem, limb or limn, lime, rim, rime or
rhyme, whim, deep, peal or peel.
12. Top, chop, rock or rok, lock, knock, mock,
walk, talk, shock.
13. Bake, beck, rake, wreck, tame, check, make,
neck, lake.
14. Dome, dumb, roam or Rome, rum, cope, cup,
sheaf, sheave, goal.
17>! TIIK PIIONOCJKAl'Hir MAM'AL.
15. Aerate, parry, cap, far, tap, balm, move, arid,
aright.
16. Back, tack, rack, knack, whack, yak, jack,
lack, lag.
17. Pious, dowel, Lowell, vowel, chaos, voyage,
rowel, vial, piety.
18. Kinnikinic, monogamy, cachexy, cacochymy,
cacochymic.
EXERCISE, CONTINUED, 48-53.
1. Loom, room, Fido, tarry, tool, pool, moor,
loop, tomb.
2. Pick, check, take, keg, pitch, peach, tip, talk,
tuck.
3. Type, teach, cheap, page, rage, rope, catch,
cage, rug.
4. Palm, path, both, tooth, faith, fang, lath,
laugh, leek or leak.
5. Among, shady, penny, ferry, many, shadow,
tallow, tabby, copy.
6. Tower, power, rowdy, vouch, couch, lower,
month, shower, cower.
7. Boil, toil, foil, coil, moil, boyish, decoy,
envoy, noisy.
8. Book, cook, rook, look, nook, took, pull,
push, shook.
9. Ruin, opium, ammonia, fiat, riot, idiot, being,
deity, deify.
10. Cheyenne, diet, Taos, laity, gaiety, rawish,
poet, poesy, poem.
11. Locate, timothy, tamely, luckily, luggage,
leakage, form, kodak, barilla.
12. Retire, verify, lively, admire, terrify, beneath,
thickish, gamely, parity.
13. Apothem, verity, bodily, boiler, gallop, de-
camp, pelf, baggage, chimney.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 179
14. Bonnet, readily, fairly, affinity, faulty, pigmy,
legatee, Ridge way, Laredo.
15. Emanate, elfish, Elmira, Allegheny, fathom,
Anthony, vanity, academic, emphatic.
16. Ferrying, marrying, rallying, copying, pity-
ing, palliate., caviat, period, orthoepy.
17. Variety, lineage, foliage, alleviate, fealty,
tapioca, egoism, bayonet, Antioch.
18. Mope, mopish, moper, Moabite, embellish,
embank, Eeng, ink, inky. V~
LESSON 6.
THE SMALL ALTERNATIVE FORMS FOR W AND Y, ETC.
60-r.l. wiT, weT, TpiiT, waT, w&T, woT, wowT,
wo-T, iFu/T.
" YiT, YeT, YuT, YaT, YaT, YoT, YoilT,
YoiT, YU-/T.
" HiFiT, HweT, mpuT, HnFFaT, HniFaT,
HnwoT, HYiT, HYeT, HYuT, HnYaT, HnYaT, HHYOT.
" TPFI, Twe, TPFU, Twa, T^a, Two, TYi,
TYO, TYU, TYa, TYa, TYO.
a-b. Witty, (w-[i]Ti), watch, wedge, wage, withe,
wheezy, wash, what, which, with, was, wish.
" Yap (Y-[a]P), Uba, Enbcea, Yattaw, Youatt,
Hewitt, uva, yeth, Euethe, Yassy, Yesso, Yazoo.
" YQTh, YfiS, YuZ, PYuNi, ByuTi, KYUB, PYU,
KYQ, aG-Yn, FYU, VYQ, MYH.
61. rTh, yS, rZ, PrNi, BrTi, KrB, P-r,
F-F, V-F, M-F, K-F, aG-F.
63. Tue, do, due or dew, duenna, duel, endue,
sue or Sioux, suet, ensue, zumic.
" Thew, Jew, lieu, luna, nubia or Nubia, avenue,
tuet, tufa, tucum.
180 THK PIION'OURAPHIC MANTAf..
EXERCISE, 00-63.
1. Wyatt, whitey, whitish, widow, weedy, woody,
witch, Washoe, bewitch.
2. Yap, Ubii, Yeddo, Utah, Youatt, lawyer,
month, manual, minuet, ingenuous.
3. Ubiety, Eudora, euphony, unique, unify,
unite, unity, immunity, mutiny.
4. Review, nephew, fewer, viewer, musa, Cuba,
pure, bureau, usurp.
5. Mule, puma, fury, fume, feud, curio, annual,
fuel, purity.
6. Utica, Utopia, usury, cubic, Dubuque, rebuke,
reviewer, cumuli.
7. Tube, tuba, dupe, duke, tissue, duty, duet,
duad, assume.
LESSON 7.
THE H TICK.
77. Ahem, Ahab, ahead, hut, hawk, hitch, Harry,
here, hero.
" Hire, harrow, hill, hall or haul, hul! 3 holy,
hulk, helm, unholy.
78. Hop, hod, heave, heavy, hush, hum, hump,
Hun, Hindoo.
" Harp, herb, hearth, hurl, harsh, Harvey,
hackney, Hallam, hank.
" Havana, hammock, humbug, hark, harm,
Harney, hearer, hurley.
79. Happy, hope, him, happily, help, handy,
hinge, Helvetia, homeopathic.
80. Unhappy, uphill, keyhole, unhitch, tom-
ahawk, Mohammed, unhealthy, unhandy, unhinge.
EXERCISE, 77-80.
1. Heap, hub, hat, heed, huff, hove, heath, hatch,
hodge.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 181
2. Hussy, hush, Hoang-Ho, honey, hong, hurry,
hail or hale, heave, Hiera.
3. Hodgely, hunch, hotly, Henley, hurried,
huffish, heavier, heavily, hoodlum.
4. Helve, Helena, hurrying, hailing, headache,
hatchway, hedgehog, hedgerow, hegira.
5. Homage, hiccough, harm, hominy, hectic, humi-
lity, herbage, Nehemiah, hallelujah, Himalaya.
<>. Hubbub, hearty, hardy, Herod, hallowed,
holliday, hecatamb, heritage, homogeneity.
7. Happier, homely, homily, health, healthier,
healthily, homelike, homelier, handier.
s . Jehovah, behemoth, Yokohama, inhale, upheave,
behoof, behoove, behave, behavior.
0. Sahara, re-hash, adhere, abhor, shanghai, Ne-
maha, Navajo, Howell, Hawaii.
1<>. Jehu, Omaha, Kehoe, Soho, Yahoo, Fohi,
Sheehy, Elihu, Mahew.
11. Tallyho, Arapahoe, Mohave, Tahiti, Thahash.
Sihor, Mohawk, sahib, Ivanhoe.
LESSON 8.
SMALL CIRCLES.
*4. sK, sG, sP, sB, sT, sD, sC, sJ, sK.
" sX, sNg, sF, sV, sTh, sDh, sY, sl r .
" sM, sMp, sW, s W, sS, sZ, sSh, sZh, sL.
85. Ks, Gs, Ps, Bs, Ts, Ds, Cs, Js, Rs.
" Ns, Ngs, Fs, Vs, Ths, Dhs, Ys, Ya.
" Ms, Mps, Ws, TTs, Ss, Zs. Shs, Zhs, Ls.
' ' sKs, sPs, sTs, sCs, sKs, sNs, sFs, sThs, sYs.
" sMs, sMps, sWs, sTJs, sSs, sZs, sShs, sZhs,
sLs.
M;. PsP. TsT, CsC, KsK, KsR GsP, BsT, TsK,
JsP, Rsk
^7. MsP, BsM, VsJ, MsJ KsM, MsK, NsT, RsN,
WsP, LsK.
182 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANVAL.
a. MsM, nWsL, SsW, NsN, FsZ, ThsZ, MsX,
NsM, FsLT, NsLT, L.sTh.
89-a. swT, swSh, is es, us, as, as, os, cms, 0zs,
u/s, ais.
91-2. sP, sT, sK, sF, sM, sMP, sN, sL, sW,
sTh, sC, sSh, sR, sY, sPR, sF^.
" zB, zD, zG, zV, zM, zMp, zN, zL, zAV, zDh,
zJ, zZH, zR, zY, zBR, zW?.
98. Spy, stay, sky, sphere, small, snow, slow,
sway, swoop, swamp, Sveer, Znaim.
99. Seep, site or cite, said, sage, seek, safe, saith
or Seth, such, sash, some or sum, simile, sun, sing,
sir, sell, sweaty, (sw-[e]Ti), swish(sw-[i]Sh.)
" Sag, sabbath, sodium, savage, sachem, sorry,
city, subdue, Saginaw, safety, Savannah, Seneca.
100-2 Task, phthisic, miasma, museum, rice or
rise, Kehoes, skies, snows, seeks, righteous (see sec.
70), Tasso, posy.
LESSON 9.
LARGE CIRCLES ETC.
103-a ssP, ssB, ssT, ^sD, ssC, ssJ, ssK, ssG, ssR.
" ssN, ssF, ssTh, ssY, ssM, ssMp, ssW, ssSh,
ssL.
" Sisbee, suspicious, suspiciously, systole,
sostenuto.
" Sisco, Susquehanna, suslik, seismic.
b. Saucy, Sousa, sisera, Cicero, caesura.
" Susurrus, Sesame, Sicily, Cecilia, syzygy,
Sisyphus, soeius.
c. Sausage, schism, season, Susan, Sassenach.
" Saucer, Caeser, caesarism, Cecil, sacerdos,
10i-5 Schismatize, secede, seceder, seceding, sauce-
box, so-so, seesaw, so-sos, seesaws.
106-7 Sauce, saucing, saucer, saucy, saucier,
saucilv, sauciness.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 183
" Size, sizy, Suzy, sis, sissy, society.
109-13 Kss, Pss, Tss, Css, Rss, Nss, Fss, Thss, Yss.
Mss, VVss, Sss, Shss, Lss, NssT, NssR,
MssP, KsRss.
" Insist, decisive, dissuasive, excessive, em-
phasis, desist, possessed, exist, resist, risest, possessive,
exhaust.
" Apotheosis, Texas, dispossess, discuses or
discusses, capsize, colossus, Anchises, successive, sur-
mises, enthusiast, nicest, wisest, choicest, closest.
" Exercise, exorcise, peace or piece, pieces,
phase, phases, rouses, poses or possess, Pss, KsRsss,
enthusiasm, abscissa.
116. Sauce, size, cease, souse, sauces, sizes, ceases,
souses.
117. Assess, assize, oasis, Isis, Isoeus, assesses,
assizes.
LESSON 10.
THE S AND / STEMS.
118-a. Ace, ice, asp, ask, assume, Assyria, aspire,
escape, asleep.
" Asa, icy, essay, sigh, see or sea, sue,
Sioux or Sue, say, saw so.
" Lucy, Bessie, Casy, fussy, lasso, basso, Jesse
or Jessie, massy, chasse, also.
b. Siam, Sahara, science, seance, scion or Sion,
sciatica, sower or sewer, sawer, lyceum.
" Chaos, bias, alias, dais, Taos, tortuous, theos,
pius, joyous.
119. Aces, ices, saws or sauce, asps, lassos, Siam-
ese, sciences, piously, joyously.
121. Ease, use, easy, Zoe, rosy, busy, dizzy, cozy,
noisy.
" Piazza, Boa/, zero, busily, dizzily, cozily,
noisily, easily, rosiness.
184 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
LESSON 11.
LOOPS.
122-4. Step, state, stake, stage, stout, stitch,
steady, store, story, stP.
" Still, stilly, stem, stone, staff, starch,
stork, stear, stearic, stow, stower, stowage.
125. Past, test, cast, chest, rest, fast, assist, zest,
finest, thinnest, keenest, toughest, testify, justify,
Fst.
" Post or posed, opposed, supposed, based,
abased, teased, dust, just, rust, roused, aroused,
gazed.
" Whizzed or whist, ceased or seized, least or
leased, amassed, amazed, faced or phazed, honest,
noized, reposed, revised, deposed, deputized.
126. Testy, tasty, dusty, rusty, vasty, misty,
Shasta, bestow, Tuesday.
127. Pests, tests, guests, chests, jests, rests, fasts,
mists, nests, Psts, Fsts.
130. Caster, master, Nestor, wester, faster, jester,
pastor, duster, disturb, Pstr.
132. Casters, masters, Nestors, westers, f asters,
jesters, pastors, dusters, rosters, Pstrs.
EXERCISE, 84-132.
1. Space, spare, scheme, sphericity, smoke, snare,
snail, slim, sweep, Sviaga, Zvornik, Zlatoosk.
2. Self, selves, salute, salad, sailor, salary, sal-
aried, select, saltish.
3. Simoom, Samuel, seemly, seeming, semi-annual,
sensate, censor, sanitary, sanitarium.
4. Safely, safer, savagery, severe, satiety, satire,
satiate, Saratoga, Sardinia.
5. Saxon, sagacity, Saracen, Samson, sophism,
sedulons, sageness, sagacious, saleratus.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 185
6. Seismal, sassaby, ciselure, schism, schisms, scis-
sors, sizzle, sizzles, sizzling.
7. Pauses or possess, adduces, incisive, announces,
peruses, dieresis or diereses, revises, advices or ad-
vises, coalesces.
8. Assuage, eschew, escheat, espouse, espousal,
Eskimo, Iscariot, Escurial, asphyxia.
9. Assassin, Essex, assegai, ossify, assignee, as-
aumpsit, esophagus, sienna, siesta.
10. Efficacy, legacy, policy, Nancy, lunacy, inti-
macy, galaxy.
11. Islam, Aztec, Israel, Ezra, Ezekiel, Ozark,
lazy, mazy, hazy.
12. Zouave, zeal, Zeno, zinc, Zachary, zodiac, Xer-
xes, zigzag, hazily.
13. Step, steam, Stacey, stager, steadiness, steal th-
iest, stammer, stammerer, stanch, stanza, stirrup.
14. Best, sauced, assist, assessed, sauciest, text,
saltest, reduced, thickest, meekest, weakest, zoologist.
15. Mistify, majestic, majestical, tasteful, artist,
artistic, theistic, elastic, statistics.
16. Dazed, devised, memorized, majesty, assists,
sophists, suggests, invests, texts.
17. Songster, sinister, roister, yougster, Munster,
dexter, Rochester, Lancaster, Chesterville.
18. Imposters, disasters, choristers, barristers, an-
cestors, ministers, monsters, gamesters, forresters.
LESSON 12.
INITIAL HOOKS, ETC.
152-3. Pr, Br, Tr, Dr, Kr, Gr, Cr, Jr, Fr, Vr,
Thr, Dhr, Shr, Zhr, Mr, Ml, Mpr, Mpl, Shi, Zhl.
PI, Bl, Tl, Dl, Kl, Gl, Cl, Jl, Fl, VI, Thl, Dhl,
Yl, PI, Nr, Nl, Ngr, Ngl, Rl, Lr.
164. Pray, brow., try, draw, ecru, gray, free,
through, shrew.
18C) THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
" Preach, drake, drum, frame, fresh, froth,
frank, thrive, thrush.
" Apprehend, Graham, droop, shrill, shriller,
shrillest, shroff, shrove, sassafras.
" Play, plow, blow, clay, claw, clew, flay,
flaw, Schley.
" Pluck, plash, bleach, flour, flitch, flash, flame,
fling, flange.
" Plead, pledge, globe, Vlissmaki, thlipsis, Tlas-
cala, Tlemcen, Tlumacz, Schleswig.
165-6. Per, upper, apple, till, chair, dear or deer,
Shelbyville, persevere, umpire, amber, ample or am-
ble, anger, angle.
' Turk, largess, soldier, recourse, engineer,
full, oral, rule, temper, temple, lumper or lumber,
rumple or rumble.
" Curious, Cornell, normal, north, moral, gur-
gle, gorgeous, Georgia, quality, ringer or wringer,
wrangle, inker, inkle, ranker, rankle.
" Sure, shawl, fisher, official, visual, visualize,
initial, shelf, sheriff.
167. Perceive, larghetto, paper, taper, or tapir,
teacher, meager, trigger, trimmer, trammel, chimer,
assumer, enamor, tanner, banner, Bangor, collar or
choler.
" Persist, bourgeois, ripple, tunnel, tingle,
carol, enamel, camel, chamber, jumble, assemble,
bushel, woeful, shovel, sacerdotal.
172-4. Pueblo, dwell, quell, guib, Cw, Jw, voya-
geur, thwack, Banquo, Kewaunee.
" Bois, etui, twice, twist, twig, Quay, quiz,
quizzical, queer, queery, untwist, esquire.
178. Wear or ware, weary, aware, where, warm,
beware, year, yarrow, oyer, yearly.
179-80. Wall, willow, while, awhile, Welsh, Wil-
bur, willful, welcome, William, Rockwell, "weigher,
Wyal, ewer, Ewell,
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 187
EXERCISE, 152-lM.I.
1. Prop, pretty, preach, prior, priory, brush,
broom, brawl, breath.
2. Trip, triad, dredge, dreary, trash, dream,
drill, brawny, bring.
3. Crop, grotto, grudge, creek or crick, grassy,
crush, grim, crawl, growth.
4. Frap, Friday, friary, frog, freer, frowzy,
frith, frump, freely.
5. Threap, throb, thrum, thrash, throng, thrill,
thrall, thrifty, threnody.
6. Shrap, shrub, shrike, shriek, shrug, shrive,
shrewish, shrimp, shrink.
7. Blab, Plato, blotch, bleary, bleak, blower,
blowzy, plush, plum.
8. Bluffy, blithe, blithely, blank, plank, blazon,
plaisance, Pleyel, Pliny.
9. Club, cloudy, clutch, clique, Clara, glassy,
clash, glum, cloth.
10. Flap, flighty, fledge, flurry, flourish, flake,
flare, flume, flail.
11. Fluff, fluffy, flesh, fleshy, flanch, flinch, flung,
flank.
12. Yale, yell, yelling, yawl, yule, yowl^ yowling,
yelk, yolk.
13. Vapor, maker, buckle, tackle, peril, rural,
family, cooler, nailer, lovingly.
14. Tweed, twitch, twixt, twirl, twang, twankay,
twill, dwale, dwang.
15. Quip, quiet, queachy, quick, choir or quire,
quarry, quassia, Quassy, qualm.
16. Quoth, quail, quota, guacho, guaco, guaiac,
guanaco, guava, guelph.
17. Worth, worthy, wearily, wordy, wearier, war-
ble, yerba, Europe, Yarmouth.
1 8. AValrus, wolf, welfare, wheeler, wheeling,
wheelbarrow, wooer, hewer, Yawa!, Whcewhel.
188 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
LESSON 13.
S PREFIX TO INITIAL HOOKS, ETC.
L s Pr, sTr, sCr, sKr, syR, sFr, sThr, sShr,
sShl, sMr, sMl, swL.
'< sBr, sDr, sJr, sGr, sVr, sDhr, sZhr, sZhl,
sMpr, sMpl.
185. sPl, sTl, sCl, ski, swR, sFl, sThl, sYl, sXr,
sNl, sKw.
" sBl, sDl, sJl, sGl, sVl, sDhl, sNgr, sXgl, sGw.
186. Supper, saber, setter, cider, seeker, suffer,
sever, simmer, simper, sample, seizure, social, supreme,
spiritous, spiritously, swell.
" Supple, sable, settle, satchel, sickle, Sigel,
civil, sooner, singer, single, skill, school, sequoia, Sa-
gua, swarthy, swarm.
187. Swear, soiree, swale, swallow, Zwolle, sway-
er, suwarrow, Sewell, Suyarrow, Seyell.
188. Spry, spruce, spray, stray, straw, spring,
sprawl, strap, streak.
" Stream, string, stroll, scribe, scrub, screech,
scream, scrawl, scroll.
" Splice, spliced, splash, squaw, squeak, square,
squelch, pasquil, spume.
189. Extra, Uxbridge, prosper, destroy, dispraise,
prescribe, display, explicit, sensible.
" Vesper, vestry, mastery, massacre, atmos-
phere, rostrum, pastry, disciple, disable.
a. Descry, discursive, disagree, disagreeable, de-
cipher, deciphers, decipherable, dissever, jasper.
104-5. Suspire, sister, sisters, sesterces, sastra,
sisterly, sisterhood, sistrum.
" Stopper, stutter, stitcher, stoker, stabber,
staider, stager, stagger, staggers, necessarily.
190. hPr, hTr, hCr, hTl, hTw, hCl, hCw, hKl,
hThr, hShr, hFl, hFw, hThl, hThw, hYl, hNr, hM.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 180
AKr, AK1. AKw, APl,APw, Aw>R, AR1,
A Mr, AMI, AwL, ALr, AFr.
Hopper, Hebrew, hatter, hydra, Hagar, hag-
gle, hatcher, heifer, heathen, hummer, hobble, huddle,
hovel, Henry.
LESSON 14.
FINAL HOOKS. THE N AND F HOOKS.
199. Kn, Gn, Pn, Bn, Tn, Dn, Cn, Jn, Rn,
" Nn, Ngn, Fn, Vn, Thn, Dhn, Yn, Yu,
" Mn, Mpn, Wn, TFn, Sn, Zn, Shn, Zhn, Ln,
" Pawn, boom, ten, down, ken, gain, chain,
John, rain, rein or reign.
" Wan, won or one, assign, ozone, men, im-
pugn, shown, lean, fine, vine, thin, thine, noun, yon
or yawn.
" Happen, siskin, sustain, cistern, cistercian,
Sicilian, sassolin, cisalpine, socinian, secern, station.
200-a. Candy, mundane, Fuente, learner, learn-
ing, sustenance, suspension, terrapin, fancy, pans}",
tansy, Chauncey, frequency, tenon, pronoun.
" b. Canch, bench, trench, chinch, wrench, munch,
winch, lynch, finch, penny, guinea, finny.
201. Coins, guns, pounce, bounce, tense or tens,
dance, chance, jounce, rinse, prince.
" Kansas, ganzas, pounces, bounces, tenses,
dances, chances, jounces, rinses princes, or princess.
" Assistance, cadence, cadences, expense, ex-
penses, sequence, suspense, existence, resemblance.
" Resistance, distance, reluctance, turns, barns,
elegance, allegiance, variance, eloquence.
202. Nouns, once or ones, mens, fence or fens,
fences, lens, lenses, ransom, minstrel.
203. Pounced, danced, chanced, fenced, punster,
punsters, spinster, spinsters, minister.
206. Cuff, gaff, puff, biff, tiff, deaf, chaff, Jove,
reef, wharf, swerve.
190 T11K I'lloN-ocKAT'IIir MANTAI..
a. Refer or reefer, ' rover, river, cover, paving 1 ,
drover, driver, driveway, briefer, approvingly.
I). Puffy, buft'et, covey, coffee, cafe, chaffy, Java,
defy, review.
c. Cuffs, puffs, tiffs, chaffs, roofs, refuse, refuses,
devise or device, devises or devices.
EXERCISES 199-206.
1. Pen, tun, wren, win, zone, shone, mine, then,
lawn.
2. Upon, atone, again, Animon, Essen, anon,
even, heathen, alone.
3. Pippin, bobbin, Teuton, jejune, cocoon, Gog-
gin, rereign.
4. Balloon, demon, Japan, cabin, rattan, ma-
chine, marine, barn, turn.
5. Flinch, French, Manchuria, lyncher, granger,
pincher, trencher, ginger, ranger.
6. Prune, brain, brown, train, drawn, drown,
churn, adjourn, yarn.
7. Crane, crown, grain, frown, throne, shrine,
frowning, frownings, frowningly.
8. Plain, plan, blown, clean, cleaner, glean,
gleaner, Klondike, flown.
9. Doubloon, chaplin, chagrin, shagreen, en-
shrine, decline, incline, recline, membrane.
10. Twain, twine, Dwen, queen, twenty, twinge,
dwindle, Quincy, quinsy.
11. Satan, sedan, spin, skein, sprain, strain, screen,
civilian, swollen.
12. Dunce, prance, trance, glance, quince, offense,
announce, denounce, renounce.
13. Dunces, prances, trances, glances, quinces,
dispenses, reponses, distances, instances.
14. Mince, minces, lance, lances, wince, winces,
monstrous, remonstrance, minstrelsy.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. ]!!
15. Canst, against, rinsed, pranced, cleansed,
glanced, announced, denounced, renounced.
10. Proof, brief or breve, brave, trough, groove,
bluff, cliff, quaff, strive.
17. Divide, devoid, devote, David, davit, referee,
reference, references, referable, roughness, rebuff,
reproof or reprove, defense, provoke, telegraph, tele-
phone, dwarf, groovy, bluffy.
LESSON 15.
FINAL HOOKS CONTINUED. THE TER HOOK.
209. Actor, patter, pouter or powder, tatter,
chatter, gather, gaiter, batter, bitter, biter, butter,
debter, j utter, Jtr.
' ' Writer, orator, Arthur, redder, raider, rather,
order, sector, scatter, spider, sorter, surder, starter,
Ktr.
" Crater, prater, traitor, relater or relator,
warder, greeter, braider, brighter, brother, blotter,
character, collector.
" Scudder, scepter, cruder, creature, platter,
pleater or pleader, plotter or plodder, clatter, gladder,
glitter, equator, splutter.
" Barter, border, tartar, darter, curator,
Jupiter, debater, captor or capture, repeater, rebutter,
surrebutter.
" Nectar, educator, agitator, liberator, lubrica-
tor, rejecter, reporter, recorder, regulator, circulator.
' Proctor, proprietor, preceptor, prosecutor,
director, inspector, desecrater, dissipater, deserter,
disorder, demonstrator.
" Detractor, protractor, prospector, projector,
investigator, replicator, reflector, structure, structural,
subterfuge, Catherine.
210-11. Factors, vectors, evictors, navigators, elec-
tor, selector, escheator, elector, selector, escheator
192 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
LESSON 16.
THE SHUN FINAL HOOK AND THE SHUN CURL.
214. Action, caution, option, passion, addition,
ration, mission, ambition, nation, Rshn, Mshn.
" Reaction, rogation, caption, diction, educa-
tion, adoption, ebullition, eviction, affection, volition,
' ' Rotation, petition, dentition, agitation, Egyp-
tian, mutation, notation, magician, logician, quotation.
" Nation, fashion, vision, lesion, lotion, session,
secession, donation, revision, remission.
" Creation, suppression, secretion, location,
election, repletion, section, saltation, vocation, avoca-
tion.
" Citationer, dictionary, educational, sectional,
sectionalism, rational, national, additional, legations,
allegations, terminations.
217. Position, possession, decision, excission, ac-
cession, recision, transition, acquisition, cessation,
musician, sensation, dispensation, Psshn, Truss/in,
annunciation.
" Positional, oppositional, possessional, proces-
sional prepositional, transitional, musicianal, musician-
ally, sensational, sensationally, decisions, excisions,
accessions, recisions, physicians.
LESSON 17.
DOWNWARD AND UPWARD R AND L.
231. Fear, sphere, flare, veer, heavier, surveyor,
fierce or fears, veers, flares, fearful, fearless, fearlessly.
232. Pair or pare, tear, chore, core, prayer,
player, spare, drear, clear, queer, fear, fearful, Greer,
grower, grayer, crier.
" Row, are, rare, rarer, carrier, arc or ark,
arm, roam or Rome, mar, weigher, sower, shower,
lower, tailor, newer, sneer, Thor, ewer.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 193
" Parry, tarry, cherry, carry, prairie, blurry,
dreary, Clara, queery, merry Assyria, showery, Lyra,
ferry, narrow, theory.
" Seer or sere, sorry, serio, serious, seriously,
surge, sermon, star, - starry, stereo, starch, storm,
kaiser, poser, Towser, Chaucer, racer, tracer.
" Wire, worry, warrior, where, wherry, rule,
sworn, yore, Uri, yarn, Tortatto, Shakespeare,
Borneo, barge, retiring, pureness, fortuitous, forth.
236-d. Fail, fuel, veils or vales, failing, Nile,
Nellie, nasal, nasally, nicely, facile, facilely, thistle,
thistly, Yosel, Yosely, sensational, sensationally, sen-
sationalist.
237. Lo or low, lake, loom, el or ell, elk, elm,
help, thill, yellow, meal, assail, shallow, Ashley,
lisle.
" Poll, pall or Paul, pull, Powell, Buell, tall,
towel, duel, chill, jill, jewel, keel, gale, goel, rill,
rowel, earl, musicianal, musicianally.
" Spill, sprawl, brawl, Pleyel, troll, droll,
Stowell, dwell, Charles, crawl, cruel, scrawl, sickle,
scull or skull, stickle, Cloel, quell, squeal.
" Felly, valley, polly, tally, duello, chilly,
gayly, goelin, rally, early, trolley, scrawly, sickly,
Scully, cruelly, Cluley, quickly, squally.
" Seal, silly, slow, Sloan, still, stilly, stolen,
wall, willow, woolen, wheel, whilst, alarm, learning,
swell, sNsZL, fealty anility, facility, nazality, V$As-
LT, F#AsL, FsAsL.
LESSON 18.
DOWNWARD AND UPWARD SH.
240-a. AMr, #AM1, ^Mpr, ShM.pl, ShwL, ShyR.
b. Fish, flash, huffish, lavish, slavish, fishy, flashy,
fishes, flashes, vicious, Fashoon, vitiation, fishiest,
flushes t.
104 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
" Officiously, vitiosity, officiousness, lavishness,
Vashti, Fashoda, fish-glue.
c-d. FsSfi, FnSJ, NnSA, SknM, PfSh, Kf.v//,
Rfx/,.
211. Partial, bushel, F.S7/1, NX/d, FtfAls, FSAlshn,
FSAlst, Ntf/tlshn, Ntf/dst.
242. Sh, ShK, ShR, ShMp, ShS, ShL, ShX, ShF,
ShTh, ShsR, ShsX, ShssN.
" ShKr, ShPr, ShTr, ShCr, ShFr, ShThr,
ShShr, ShShl, ShKl, ShPl, ShTl, ShCl, ShwR, ShRl,
ShNr, ShNl, ShFl, ShThl, ShYl, SbtfAl.
Shape, shady, sham, shewel, shewelly, shal-
low, shyly, Ashley, shallower, ashler, cash, rush,
mush, lash, gnash or Nash, bishop, dishevel.
" Bush, bushy, dash, Joshua, Prussia, plush,
crash, clash, trash, trashy.
" Shrill, shroel, shroelly, Schlem, fisher, fish-
woman, fish-trowel, fish-monger, bushelman, FShlMn,
NShlMn, Schiller, association, rhetorician.
LESSON 19.
THE HALVING PRINCIPLE
244-5. Pat or pad, spot, sprite, prate or prayed,
plait, plate, plaid or played, bit or bid, brought, braid
or brayed, blade, pits, bits or bids, braids.
' ' Apt, act, etched, east, eased, aft, ashed, ebbed,
egged, edged, Crete or creed, greet or greed.
44 Fright or fried, throat, flight, hacked, hedged,
heft, haft, Hittite, hated, hooded, audit, aided.
' ' Coat or code, pot or pod, tote or toad, chit
or chid, gate, bait or bayed, dot or Dodd, jot or jawed,
speed, prate or prayed, plot or plod, glut.
4 ' Cute or cued, could, got or God, good, pout,
bout or bowed, taught, tot or Todd, doubt or Dowd,
chat, sprout, spread.
44 Pride, proud, pleat or plead, plight or plied,
TITK PHOyoORAPIIIC MAN 7 r.VL. 105
bright or bride, bread, trait or trade, trite or tried,
trout, skate, street, strode.
" Abrade, applied, occurred, augured, uttered,
ottered, avert or averred, overt, afloat, seated, suited,
sated.
Pent, pend or penned, attend, tent or tend,
tents or tends, bent or bend, font or fond, coughed,
caved, scant or scanned, tattered, glittered, motioned,
fends, gifts.
Mit or mid, aimed, seamed or seemed,
stemmed, hammered, simmered, meant or mend, mottle
or model, dimmed, net or Ned, end, nooned, sent or
send, honored, endeavored, fanatic.
Battery, pottage, detach, dotage, detect,
dedicate, beautiful, foundry, phantom, freedom,
grander, greatly.
Gladly, cultivate, dreadful, tact or tacked,
tagged, checked, joked, capped, left, lapped, shaved,
sheaved.
" Thickened, rescued, insect, basket, basked,
regret, halberd, tabled, shackled, shepherd, engraft,
engraved.
" 246-8. Replied, liquid, present, provide,
tribute, clubbed, climate, alphabet, frequent, fre-
quently, phonetic, rapidly, positioned, fountain, main-
tain, mundane.
240-5U. Duad, Druid, triad, poet, pleiad, Naiad,
petty, Tahiti, dado, grotto, cloudy, Fido.
251-a. Impute or imbued, impend, mopped or,
mobbed, stamped, hampered, ambled, impassioned
impatiant, simpered, sampled, tempt, sham pood, lam-
pooned, lumbered, rumpled, promptly.
252-a. Hanged, angered, angled, singled, wronged,
fingered, tingled, shingled, inked, ranked, inkled,
rankled, anchored, tinkered, Langdon, Wington.
253-a Wit, whit, white, sweet, wade or weighed,
196 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
swayed, Haywood, yacht, yawed, hewed or hued, went
or wend, wind, yawned, yield.
254. Separationist, fusionist, visionist, excursion-
ist, Salvationist, liberationist, elocutionist, prohibition-
ist, revisionist, inflationists.
LESSON 20.
THE HALVING PRINCIPLE, -CONTINUED. R AND L HALVED.
257. Right, Wright, rite or write, rate or raid,
art, ord, erred, aired, hart, heart or hard, herd or
heard, hired, rites or writes, arts, herds.
4 ' Light, lot or laud, load, alt, ailed, old, oiled,
hailed, halt or hauled, holt or hold, lights, Leeds.
4 ' Sort, surd, start or starred, stored, slate, salt,
sled, sailed, stilt, stilled, sorts, stilts.
a. Erret, aerate, aright, arid, arrayed, Herod, har-
rowed, harried, hurried, horrid, riot, ruddy.
" Elite, alight, allot, allied, aloud, helot, hal-
lowed, salute, solid, stolid, Elliott, lady.
258. "Wert, word, ruled, yard, raft, raved, rift,
rent or rend, rafts, rents or rends, ordered, ruddered.
" Rationed, warned, whirred, relieved, yarned,
yearned, served, surround, surrounds, starved, swerved,
Hay ward.
44 Wilt or willed, wild, welt, weld or welled,
lard, lord, lent or lend, eland, slant, silent, swelled
highland, Holland.
259. Rightly, rattle, writing, written or ridden,
redden, reddening, rooting, rating or raiding, routing.
4 4 Hartley or hardley, hurtle or hurdle, Hart-
man, Harton, harden, hardening, Harding, sorting,
starting.
44 Lightly, lighten, lightening, lighting, Alton,
laden, loaden, leading, olden.
'' Halting, Holden, Holding, slightly, slighting,
sledding, stilting, warden, wildly.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 197
" Article, ratify, ratified, certify, certified, or-
dinary, ordinal, ordinally, ratable, Hartford, Rudyard,
rudely.
260-1. Turret, tarried, garret, ferret, ferried,
afford, merit, smart, smeared, desert^ resort, thwart,
report, retort.
Parrot, part, tart or tarred, towered, Stuart,
Stewart or steward, dart, charred, jarred, mart or
marred, showered, feared, veered, reward, inwardly.
" Kilt or killed, belt or belled, dolt or doled,
jolt, broiled, melt, molt or mold, assault, assailed,
result, rustled, desultory.
" Hamlet, runlet, bustled, tusseled, exult,
exalt, excellent, upheld, uphold, beheld, behold, mildly.
" Felt, failed, knelt, nailed, quilt, quelled,
squealed, dowelled, jewelled, Newland, lowland, Ash-
land.
LESSON 21.
THE HALVING PRINCIPLE, CONCLUDED.
263. Sheet, shut, shout, shot or shod, shoat or
showed, shoot or shoed, shed, shad, shade.
" Sheets, shuts, shouts, hushed, hashed, sheet-
ing, shedding, shading, shadings.
" Pushed, abashed, cashed, gashed, gushed,
rushed, gnashed, splashed, brushed.
" Crushed, crashed, clashed, thrashed, cherished,
nourished, relished, flourished, perished.
" Sashed, swished, shirt or shirred, short,
shred, shrewd, shroud, shreds, shrouds.
" Shelled, shield, Schultz, shields, shan't,
shunt or shunned, shinned, shined, shunts.
" Shorten, shortening, shortened, shorthand,
shortly, shortness, enshroud, enshrouds, shielding,
shunting, enshrined.
198 THE PHOXOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
" Dished, dashed, mashed, smashed, lashed,
slashed, abolished, polished, fished, flashed, vitiate,
WSht, freshet, refreshed.
266. Midnight, intimate, sentiment, Hampton,
nempt, maiden, madness, moneyed, Medusa, thanet,
viaduct, Betsy, locked, chitchat, kitkat.
" Needham, nomad, named, feared, veered,
WFt, int, WVt, TFYt, esthete, ThSt, YSht, ShZt,
ZhZt, latish, leashed, flashlight.
" PNt, TFt, CFt, KWt, PSt, TSht, pennate,
bonnet, tiffet, defeat, devote, Jouthet, key-weight,
busied, dashed.
270. Fate, fated, mate, mated, dart, darted, belt,
belted, create, created, plant, planted, mend, mended.
" Rate, rated, light, lighted, alight, alighted,
load, loaded, allude, alluded, fade, faded, found,
founded.
" Excite, excited, exceed, exceeded, decide,
decided, recite, recited, reside, resided, solicit, solic-
ited, resist, resisted.
271. Add, added, hate, hated, heed, heeded, cite,
cited, side, sided, state, stated.
272. Test, tested, adjust, adjusted, waste, wasted,
fast, fasted, enlist, enlisted, request, requested.
273. Wait, waited, wade, waded, freight, freighted,
treat, treated, doubt, doubted, yield, yielded.
275-7. Contest, writest, rudest, hardest, lightest,
loudest, oldest, slightest, fleetest, shortest, proudest,
brightest, greatest, roundest, grandest, fondest.
280. Active, motive, native, sanative, relative, in-
dicative, provocative, dative, elective, sensitive, act-
ively, indicatively, electively, sensitively.
281. Petal, pedal or peddle, beetle or beadle, title,
tidal, cattle, kettle, rattle, fatal, victual, metal, medal
or meddle, nettle, needle.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 199
LESSON 22.
THE LENGTHENING PRINCIPLE.
282. Mutter or mother, matter, madder or Mather,
motor, meter, Easter, oyster, zither.
" Shedder, sheather, shutter or shudder, father,
fetter, feature, future, voter, thither.
" Neater or neither, nadir, entire, enter or ender,
another, smatter, smother, Sumpter, cimeter.
u Center or sender, saunter, softer, mortar, mur-
der, norther, threader.
" Fritter, flatter, flutter, filter or philter, falter,
shrewder, shorter, shelter, shoulder, diameter, promo-
ter, pander or panther.
" Letter or leather, leader, lighter or lither,
looter or Luther, lather, latter or ladder, older, elder,
halter, holder, solder, slighter.
" Stilter, stalder, alderman, palter, beholder,
Walter, welter or welder, wielder, wilder, wilderness,
swelter, larder.
283. Sumpter, embitter, importer, imperator,
tempter, prompter, trumpeter, temperature.
a. Cincture, puncture, tincture, juncture, perfunc-
tor, sphincter.
285. Wetter, waiter, water, sweeter, whiter,
weather, weeder, wither, wider, wader, whether
whither, yachter, Yoder, yielder.
286. Tenter or tender, chanter, janitor, renter or
render, winter or winder, asunder, O'Shanter, absen-
ter, Lysander.
" Monitor, fainter, fender, thunder, yonder, inno-
vator, originator, provender, progenitor.
" Canter or candor, lender, slanter or slander,
painter, ponder, binder, printer, planter, sprinter,
splinter.
287. Watered, weathered, withered, fettered, flat-
tered, sheltered, shouldered, slaughtered, paltered.
200 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
' ' Smothered, centered, rendered, tendered, foun-
dered, embittered, tinctured.
288. Entire, adventure, feature, material, tincto-
rial, loiter, imputer, imparter, ambulator.
289-90. Northern, eastern, zittern, lantern, leath-
ern, luthern, northener, maternity, Walderon.
" Moderation, immoderation, federation, allitera-
tion, alteration, litheration, puncturation.
LESSON 23.
PREFIXES.
293. Contain, condense, construe, contrive, con-
demn, control, contract, contribute, conquer, congress,
conquest, congregation.
" Condone, condition, concise, consult, convert,
conceited, content or contend, contained, conjecture,
constable, comfort, comestible.
" Candy, cambist, campaign, camber, comber or
cumber, Kemble or Kim ball, council, counsel or can-
cel, Campeachy, Cambridge, cambric, Kendrick,
kimbo,
" Commit, commute, commode, commodity,
common, commune, comment or commend, commenta-
tor, commentatory, command, commandment, com-
mence.
" Commemorate, commix, commingle, commis-
sure, commissary, commission, commerce, commercial,
Conner or cunner, connate, connive, cognizant.
" Cammock, kummel, cummin, cumminic, Gum-
ming, cannon, cannoneer, cannonade, cannular, canny or
Kinney, cannel or kennel, Kennedy.
" Discontent, decompose, nonconductor, noncom-
missioned, recompense, recommit, reccommend, re-
commence, recognizance, inconstant, unconsciously,
incongruous.
" Discomfit, disconcert, encumber, unenciim-
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 201
bered, incandescent, incantation, uncommon, uncanny,
unkennel, kinnikinic.
" Incomplete, incompletely, inconvenient, incom-
petent, inconsistent, inconceivable, unconditional, un-
concern, unconcerned.
" Circumflex, circumvent, circumambient, cir-
cumnavigate, circumference, circumspect, circumscribe
circumjacent, circumlocution.
c. Congo, camphor, canter, counter, cantata, Kem-
ble, Kimball, condor, conjure, Conrad or comrade,
counsel, Cambridge, Connellsville, disconnect, discom-
mode, kinnikinic.
" -d. Preconcert, incumbent, unconversion, re-
condite, reconvey, reconcile, complement, concern,
confidence, contrary, convenient, conversation, canvas
or canvass, canvassed.
f , 294. Accomplice, accomplish, accompany, accom-
modate, akimbo, O'Connor, O'Connel, unaccomplished,
accommodation, akimbo, unaccompanied, anaconda,
concomitant, concomitants, concomitantly, concomi-
tance, concomitancy.
295-96. Contravene, contradict, contradance, con-
trovert, counterfit, countermand, countersign, counter-
irritant, Canter bury, controversy, controversial, contro-
versialist, counterconnect, counter-compony, incontro-
vertible, uncontradicted, contribution.
29T. Cognition, cognomen, cognate, cognizance,
recognize, recognition, recognizance, incognito, unrec-
ognized.
298. Inspire, inspiration, inseparable, instrument,
unstrung, insufferable, unsocial, insolence, insulation,
insular, unsalable, enslave, unseemly, unswept, un-
swayed.
a, e, 299. Unskilled, unsupplied, unsettled, unsad-
dled, unsatcheled, unswerved, unsquared, uncivil,
unseen , insurgent, insurrection, unsurpassed, unservice-
"2(}'2 THE PHOXOHRAPHIC MAXTAL.
able, inconsiderable, inconsiderate or unconsidered,
inconsiderately.
300. Intermit, intermittent, intermission, inter-
marry, intermural, intermeddle, intermingle, interme-
diate, intramundane, interspersed, interjacent, inter-
view, intervene, interfusion, international.
" 301-a. Enterprise, entertain, introduce, inter-
}x>se, interval, interpolate, interrogate, interpret, inter-
cede, interstice, transact, transfigure, transcript, tran-
sept, transom.
302. Magnanimous, magnanimously, magnanimity,
magnify, magnifier, magnificient, magnficiently, mag-
nificence, magniloquence, magniloquent, magniloquent-
ly, magnitude.
303. McBride, McBurney, McDonald, McDowell,
McFarland, McKnight, McLeary, McLeod, McLellan,
McMaster, McMullen, McNamara, McPherson, Mc-
Tiernan, McVicker.
" McAdam, McElroy, McHenry, Mclntosh,
McCleary, McClellan, McCoy, McCook, McCul lough,
McKenna, McKenzie or Mackenzie, McKinley,
McGee, McGlynn, McGregor.
304-b. Selfish, selfishly, selfishness, unselfish, un-
selfishly, unselfishness, self-love, self-denial, self-made,
self-reliant, self-evident, self-esteem, self-assertion,
self-possessed, self-sufficient'.
305-6. Self-control, self-conquer, self-conscious,
self-conceit, self-conceited, self-contained, self-com-
mand, self-condemned, self-confidence, self-composed,
self-complacent, self-control, self-conquer, self-contra-
dict, self-controvert.
LESSON 24.
AFFIXES.
316-b. Ing, ings, hong, hongs, song, songs, sting,
stings, pang, bring, spring, tongs, string, wrong,
sling, Sring.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 203
317. Owing, owings or Owings, hoeing, hoeings,
aiming, knowing, clewing, glowing, paying, brewing,
doing, doings, strewing, rowing, selling, soaring,
" Staking, stepping, stating, stitching, staying,
storing, steaming, stilling, stunning, wearing, weary-
ing, ruling, yarring, welling.
318-a. Mocking, looking, shipping, leaping, fetch-
ing, lodging, marrying, belting, melting.
" Keeping, paling, mailing, raking, coaching,
barring, rushing, matching, moving, copying, mellow-
ing, pirating.
" Roaring, sparing, scheming, framing, loath-
ing, soothing, feeling, fearing, veering, rallying, retir-
ing, retorting.
" Meeting, impeding, promoting, prompting,
cutting, chatting, waiting, lighting, flitting, knitting,
deserting, pouting, treating, Tht-, yielding.
" Tinning, winning, nooning, accounting, chant-
ing, shunting, lending, coughing, pottering, motion-
ing, fashioning, FA^AnXg, roughing, rationing, posi-
tioning.
b. Musing, whizzing, leasing, facing, causing,
tossing, choosing, racing or razing, spacing, tracing,
closing, freezing.
" Cleansing, glancing, pouncing, bouncing,
prancing, dancing, trouncing, chancing, rinsing.
" Jouncing, condensing, entrancing, wincing,
fencing, convincing, lancing, mincing, announcing.
c, 321. ThstNg, yeasting, lasting, testing, jesting,
RnstNg, costing, resting, feasting, blustering, muster-
ing, frying-pan, looking-glass, dancing-master.
322-3. Knowingly, lovingly, surpassingly, entic-
ingly, rejoicingly, sufficingly, ThsXgli, youzeingly,
jestingly, approvingly, cunningly, amazingly, entranc-
ingly, mincingly, convincingly, Worthington, Elling-
ton, Kensington.
204 THE PHOXOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
LESSON 25.
AFFIXES, CONTINUED.
324-5. Fashionable, actionable, attainable, account-
able, unaccountable, provable, sensible, insensible,
accessible, sociable, finishable, accountableness, prov-
ubleness, sensibleness, sociableness, reasonableness.
326. Painful, binful, spoonful, tuneful, manful,
mindful, graceful, binfuls, spoonfuls.
327. Manfulness, mindfuiness, lawfulness, doleful-
ness, restf ulness, artfulness, boastf ulness, wastefulness,
painfulness, tunefulness.
" Fruitf ulness, doubtfulness, thoughtf ulness,
dreadfulness, ruefulness, faithfulness, ruthfulness,
healthfulness, bashfulness, awfulness.
328. Attractiveness, secretiveness, alimentiveness,
combativeness, inhabitiveness, attentiveness, passive-
ness, evasiveness, decisiveness, pensiveness.
329. Hopelessness, carelessness, recklessness,
boundlessness, thoughtlessness, endlessness, joyless-
ness, restlessness, artlessness, listnessness, souless-
ness, Yslessness.
LESSON 26.
AFFIXES, CONCLUDED.
330. Biograph-y-ic-al-ly, geography-ic-al-ly, helio-
graph-y-ic-al-ly, telegraph-y-ic-al-ly, stenograph-y-ic-
al-ly, orthography-ic-al-ly, lithograph-y-ic-al-ly, phono-
graph-y-ic-al-ly, photograph-y-ic-al-ly, telegraphist,
stenographist, phonographist.
a-b. Biographer, geographer, heliographer, tele-
grapher, orthographer, lithographer, photographer,
telegram, programme, phonogram, mimeogram, logo-
gram.
331-a. Potency, vacancy, vagrancy, regency, ten-
ancy, leniency, infancy, relevancy, necromancy, dis-
crepancy, corpulency, vicegerency, T: P, J;V.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. U
" Elegancy, efficiency, sufficiency, currency,
Montmorency, emergency, tangency, benignancy,
sequency, truancy, buoyancy, fluency.
332-4. Barbarity, propriety, temerity, triviality,
formality, popularity, speciality, affability, possi-
bility, accountability, accessibility,sensibility, expansi-
bility, responsibility.
" Vicinity, docility, sincerity, finality, penality,
geniality, plurality, urbanity, humanity, proclivity,
declivity, concavity, divinity, nationality, rationality.
" Putridity, placidity, lucidity, fatuity, gratu-
ity, variety, notariety, tenuity, torpidity, rapidity,
insipidity, turgidity, torridity, timidity, validity,
asafetida.
335-9. Integrity, ubiquity, agility, hilarity, solid-
ity, civility, stability, stupidity, insularity, duality,
materiality, reality, parity, penalty.
340. Sphericity, veracity, felicity, vitiosity,
precocity, verbosity, duplicity, reciprocity, electricity,
elasticity, perspicacity, pugnacity, eccentricity, lax-
ity, convexity, sagacity, curiosity, necessity.
341. Myself, thyself, itself, oneself, ourself, your-
selves, myself, thyself, itself, oneself, ourself, your-
selves.
342. Lordship, hardship, leadership, partnership,
seamanship, friendship, statesmanship, ownership,
fellowship.
343. Friendly, friendliness, friendless, confidently,
winsome, w r insomeness, aptness, remittance, appro-
priateness, achievement.
LESSON 27..
DEKIVATIVES, NEGATIVES, ETC.
344-a. Keen, keener, keenest, keenly, keenness,
slant, slants, slanting, slantly, slanted, shrilly,
facilely.
206 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
345. Immortal, immigration, emigration, innoxi-
ous, irresolute, relevant, irreconcilable, illegal, illib-
eral, unknown, unnecessary, unnerve.
" a, 347. Immask, immerge, immure, immesh, im-
mingle, ennoble, innate, innocence, innerve, unlace,
unlike, unroof, enlighten, inroad.
348, a. Mistake, postmaster, postoffice, postage,
postpaid, postpone, lastly, testament, toastmaster.
b-d. Sanctity, anxious, unction, sanction, sane,
tioned, distinction, distinguish, extinguish, languish,
attainment, assignment, appointment, stationary,
stationery. .
" Testamentary, stranger, transmit, transla-
tion, passenger, messenger, swift, swiftly, swiftest,
swifter.
THE REPORTING STYLE.
CHAPTER VIII.
OMISSION OF VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS. THE
VOWEL SCALE AND POSITION. LOGO-
GRAPHS AND SEMIGEAPHS.
LESSON 28.
OMISSION OF VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS.
350. In the Reporting Style the vowels and diph-
thongs, with but comparatively few exceptions (which
will be mentioned in the next chapter), are, for the
sake of speed, omitted from all words of consonant
outline. This, it is true, decreases the legibility of the
writing, but only to the extent of the omissions stated,
the skeleton outlines of the words still being amply
legible for all the purposes to which shorthand is ap-
plied and by those who have had experience with them
are preferred to the vocalized forms, since the loss of
time required to write the latter more than counter-
balances whatever gain might be obtained from their
greater legibility.
THE VOWEL SCALE AND POSITION.
351. As many words are of similar outline, par-
ticularly when they consist of one stem simple or com-
pound or of two simple stems, it becomes necessary
when such words are left un vocalized to distinguish
207
208 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
them apart, otherwise they would often conflict in
meaning. Therefore, if the accented vowel or diph-
thong can in some way be indicated the word may I >e
easily read. Accordingly, what is called the Vowel
Scale has been adopted by shorthand writers embracing
all the regular vowels and diphthongs and is formed
by alloting certain of the former to one of three posi-
tions, above, on and through, or below the line of
writing and certain of the latter to one of two posi-
tions, above and through or just below it. These are
known as the first, second and third positions. (See
also sec. 45. ) By writing a word in one of these, either
its accented vowel or diphthong is usually indicated.
This scale or arrangement is in the order found by ex-
perience to be the best for stenographic purposes and
is as follows:
SHORT VOWELS. LONG VOWELS. DIPHTHONGS.
First position i o I e oi
Second " e u a o
Third " a a a u ou ui
352. A single or half length sloping or perpen-
dicular letter when in the first position is placed with
the lower end half the length of a T stem above the
line. When in the second it is placed on the line as
heretofore and when in the third it is struck through
it, half above and half below. Horizontal, full and
half sized stems in the first position are placed below
and touching an imaginary upper line the height of a T
stem above the ordinary one, except in the case of
simple straight stems which are written just below the
line so as not to be confused with it. In the second
position horizontal full and half sized stems are written
on the line (see sec. 4), and in the third below and
touching an imaginary one half the length of a T stem
underneath it in the same manner as when in the first
position.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 209
353. When a double length letter is written in po-
sition it begins at the same point as its corresponding
single length.
a. A downward double length letter in the first
position thus has three-fourths, in the second one-half
and in the third one-fourth of its length above the
line. An upward double length letter in the first and
second positions is written in the same manner as its
single length; namely above and on the line. When
in the third position, however, its first fourth is
placed below the line while the remaining three fourths
extend above it. Horizontal double length letters are
of course written in position in the same manner as
are the corresponding single and half lengths.
354. When a word consists of two or more stems
it is written, if all are horizontal, in the position of
the first stem. In other cases it is written with the
first downward or upward stem, whether this is initial
or not, in the required position. An initial horizontal
stem in such words is thus raised or lowered in each
position in order to accommodate itself to that of the
following stem except before an upward stem in the
second or a downward half length one in the first in
which cases it is written on or above the line the same
as when alone. The same is truo of two or more
initial horizontal stems.
355. All the vowels and diphthongs as such, when
alone or words of two syllables and over composed
wholly of both or either are written, in the second po-
sition, that is on the line, the same as in the Element-
ary Style. Sometimes, however, the vowels when
alone, and also the breath dots and circles, are em-
ployed as words, and are then written either in the first
or second position according to stenographic conveni-
ence, as will presently be explained. When written
in the first position these characters are placed just
below and touching the imaginary upper line. (See
210 TI1K PIl'ONOflKAI'II.r MANTAL.
sec. 352.) If they should ho written in the third po-
sition they would be made just below and touching the
imaginary lower line. They are, however, seldom
placed in the third position.
a. Sometimes the loops are employed to represent
phrases, as will be explained in Chapter X. In which
case they are written in position the same as down-
ward stems but not often in the third position.
356. Derivative words generally retain the position
of their primitives.
357. The position of a consonant is indicated in
stenotypy by small superiors in the same manner as is
a vowel or diphthong. (See sec. 46.)
358. Besides the first, second and third positions
there are two others, namely the fourth and zero, in
which words are written. These will be considered in
Chapter X.
CAUTION IN REGARD -TO WRITING IN THE FIRST
POSITION.
359. When writing in the first position the words
should not be placed too far above the line. In the
case of perpendicular or slanting strokes an elevation
of half a T length is a sufficient indication of position
while horizontals and small characters should never be
written any higher than the length of a T stem.
SMALL W AND Y INSERTED ALONE.
360. In the Reporting Style when a word occurs
which in the Elementary Style is written with the
small disjoined W or Y or HW or HY as explained in
section 60, both the semiconsonant and vowel are
usually omitted. Sometimes, however, only the vowel
is omitted. In which case the outline of the word is
written in its proper position and the small W or Y or
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 211
H"W or HY opening to the right or upward (w or Y,
H w or HV) placed opposite the center of the stem as
usual.
THE BREATHINGS.
361. In the Reporting Style the same rules gov-
ern the breath letters as in the Elementary Style.
Accordingly usually only the H ticks are employed.
a. If preferred in the case of those words in
which, when vocalized, the aspirate is indicated by the
dot,- the latter only may occasionally be inserted and
the vowel omitted according to the principle govern-
ing small W and Y, explained above in section 360.
b. If the ticks are omitted altogether (see sec. 81),
the dot may be employed instead and the vowels usu-
ally omitted in accordance with the principle men-
tioned in the last paragraph in regard to small W
and Y.
LOGOGRAPHS AND SEMIGRAPHS.
LOGOGRAPHS.
362. More than one half of spoken English is made
up of the same words repeated over and over again,
many of them being monosyllables, which, when
written in full, contain only one consonant stem,
simple or compound. Quite a number, however, are
dissyllables of one stem, while the remainder are prin-
cipally monosyllables or dissyllables, etc., of two or
more stems. In the Reporting Style all alike are, for
the sake of speed, represented by one stem simple or
compound, or occasionally by their accented vowel
only. All these characters when thus used are called
Logographs, and each, as far as is possible, stands for
one word, or for such words as will not conflict in
meaning.
363. The term Logograph, properly speaking, is
applied only to the characters which represent those
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
words that occur most frequently in language. Two
words, accordingly, may have similar forms and only
one of the latter be a logograph; the other not being
made one because of the infrequency of the word it
represents. From the foregoing, therefore, it will l>e
perceived that as a logograph never has more than
one stem, simple or compound, a phonographic Avon I
of two or more stems can never be a logograph, an<J
also that a phonographic word may have a complete
outline of one stem and yet not be a logograph. The
same observations apply to the vowels.
364. As they consist of one stem or character
logographs are generally written in the position of
their accented vowel or diphthong. (See sec. 351.)
Sometimes, however, when words of the same outline
belong to the same position and would also conflict,
one of them, usually the least frequently occurring
word is written out of position; as in the case of the
words number and remember in the following list.
(See sec. 381.) Also a few words are written in the
second position, the most convenient for the writer,
although they do not properly belong there, when
they will not conflict with any other word in that posi-
tion; as "dear."
365. A logograph of partial or double length out-
line that represents a verb in the present tense may
generally be used to represent it in the past tense.
Where doubt might occur, as for instance, sometimes
after the plural nominative, the letter T or D may be
added disjoined; as in "punished, remembered, mat-
tered," Pn 3 tT, Br'.D, Mtr'.D. The form for the pres-
ent tense is also used for the past in half length
logographs without appendages or with an N or F hook
which represents those words whose present ends in
T, Nt, or Ft, or their heavy sounds, and past in Ed,
mentioned in section 274. (See also see's L^7, and
270 to 273.)
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 213
366. When all the outline letters of a verb are
contained in a single length logograph, the latter may
he halved to represent the past tense, as in "believed,
added, called, followed, valued, cheered, issued,
ushered, assured."
367. Adverbs ending in Ly or Y may usually be
written with the same forms as the primitive adjec-
tives terminating in L. Thus "hopefully, principally,
specially, inexpressibly, ably, idly, equally, fully,"
etc., may be written with the forms for "hopeful,
principal, special, inexpressible, able, idle, equal,
full," etc.
368. The circle S may be added to logographs to
denote the plural number or possessive case of nouns,
etc., or the third person singular of verbs, as in "ad-
vantages, does, others, ifs. " It may also be added to
represent the word "self ;" as in "himself" and the
large circle may represent "selves;" as in "them-
selves," as explained in section 341.
369. Derivative words like those in the last sen-
tence of section 365, and those in sections 366 and
368, can always be easily written, when their primi-
tives are known, from the directions there given.
Consequently they are usually omitted from the fol-
lowing list.
370. In the case of the indefinite articles "a" and
"an" if special distinction is at anytime desired be-
tween them, the latter can be written in full. Like-
wise when any word represented by a logograph is to
be specially distinguished from every other word it is
written in full or vocalized or both.
371. The upward alternative tick for "a" (see
sec. 32), is never written alone or initially. Accord-
ingly it may, if preferred, be employed to represent
the word "and," instead of the logograph given in
the list.
372. For stenotypic convenience a tick or curvet
214 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
(see sec. 27, a) when it is employed as a word in un-
connected writing, is usually represented in stenotypy
by the characters for the half length which it re-
sembles, with the syllable Oid (signifying "like")
added, the combination being pronounced as usual.
Thus Ptoid and Ftoid represent the words "of" and
"all" and are named Peetoid and Feetoid. If the end
of the tick is shaded, the long sound of the vowel
which it represents is added; thus Ttoido, pronounced
Teetoido, represents O, oh or owe.
a. If preferred "all "may be represented with the
upward stem L in the first position instead of with
Ftoid.
373. The shading for the long sound is usually
omitted for stenographic convenience from the right
half circle for the pronoun I, and the left ones for the
pronouns "who-m" and "whose."
a. The semicircles, except those for "who-m"
and "whose," are written in the first position for
stenographic convenience.
374. The definite article "the" is represented
with the light or -f dot (see section 26), written above
the line.
375. If at any time it is desired to specially dis-
tinguish a long vowel word from a short one, as the
verbs "owe" and "awe" for instance, the long vowel
dot may be inserted after the former according to the
rule in section 39. This, however, will seldom be
necessary.
376. When a printed word is connected with its
derivatives by one or more hyphens it signifies that the
logograph stands for all.
377. When a logograph consists of a stem, simple
or compound, it is called a Stem Logograph. When it
does not contain a stem, that is when it consists of
only a circle, tick, etc., it is termed a Small Logo-
graph.
THE PIIOXOORAPIIIC MANUAL. 215
378. Some of the small logographs, as will here-
after appear, have alternative forms, which are em-
ployed for stenographic convenience.
379. The logographs in the following list are
known as General Logographs, since they are em-
ployed in general writing. There are others, known
as Special Logographs, or Technigraphs, used in
special, that is technical, writing, which will be con-
sidered in a succeeding chapter.
380. The list is arranged in phonetic order so as to
be consulted by the learner when reading his own or
others' phonography should an outline at any time be
met with whose meaning has been forgotten. It is
divided into two parts, the first part beginning at P
and the second at F, at Lesson 29. It should be com-
mitted to memory before proceeding to the next sub-
ject. As the characters are generally very suggestive
of the word they represent, they are quite easily
learned. After studying the first part of the list, the
learner should cover a column of the stenotypy and
write the printed words from memory. When this
has been accomplished he should repeat from memory
.the words just written in shorthand. Only a few
repetitions of the process will be necessary. After he
has memorized a page of the logographs he may take
up the next one in the same manner and so on until
the first part of the list is mastered. He should then
pursue the same course with the second part; namely,
Lesson 29.
216
381.
P
1
Pst
3
Pn
91
Pf
?,
Psshn
Pr
1
1
Prns.
1
Prf
1
PI
1
Pins
Plf
3
9,
Plshn ....
sP
3
1
sPn. . .
?,
ssPn
sPrs
sPrst
sPrns ....
sPrnst . . .
sPrshn . . .
sPl
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
sPln
sPlshn, ..
nsPrs ....
nsPrst . . .
nsPrns . . .
nsPrnst . .
Pt
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
Prt
1
Prf t .
Pit.
1
1
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
LIST OF LOGOGRAPHS.
STEM LOGOGRAPHS.
P
occupy 2 up 3 hope, party, happy
happiest
upon 3 punish-ment, happen
poverty 3 hopeful,
opposition 2 position 3 possession
appear 2 principle-al, per
appearance
perfect-ly-tion 2 proof-ve 3 approve-al
plea 2 people-d, play 3 apply
appliance
playful
application
speak, speech 2 spoke, special
spoken
suspension
suppress 2 express 3 surprise
suppressed 2 expressed 3 surprised
experience
experienced
suppression 2 expression 3 separation
supply
explain
explosion
inexpressible
unsuppressed 2 unexpressed
inexperience
inexperienced
occupied 2 put
particular-ly-ity, pride 2 part 3 op-
portunity, proud
profit
plead
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
217
Pint
a
stPnt ....
sPrt
i
1
sPlt
9,
sPlnt
B
2
1
Bss
1
Bsss
1
Bn ......
1
Bf.
2
Btr
2
Bshn
Br
2
1
Brn
8
Brns
Brtr
Bl
2
2
1
Bins
9,
Blf
2
sB.
1
sBf
2
sBshn ....
Bt
1
3
Bnt
1
Brt
1
Brnt
Bit
3
1
T
1
Ts
2
Tst
3
Tn.
3
Tf
1
Tr. .
1
2 plaintiff
1 stipend 2 stupendous-ly-ness
1 spirit 2 spread 3 separate
2 explode
2 explained
B
be, by, buy 2 but, object
business
businesses
combine 2 been
above, objective 3 behalf
better
objection
liberty 2 member, remember 3 number
brethren
remembrance
brother
belong 2 able
balance
belief -ve
subordinate 2 subject
subjective
subordination 2 subjection
about
behind
brought 2 bird, board, aboard 3 brute
brand
built, build-ing 2 bold
T
ought, aught, what, time 2 to, too, it
3 at, out
its 3 itself
attest
atone
whatever
1 internal, try 2 truth 3 true
218
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
Trn.
91
Trf
9,
Trtr
1
Trshn
Tl
2
9
Tlf
Twn
2
1
Twf
sT
2
3
sTn
9,
sTns
sTnst ....
sTsshn . . .
ssT
2
2
3
2
stT
>,
stTn
1
stTshn . . .
sTr.
3
9
sTrn
sTrf ....
sTrnst
sTrtr
sTrshn . . .
ssTrn ....
nsTr . .
2
i
2
2
2
I
9
nsTrf
nsTrtr
nsTrshn . .
Trt
2
2
2
9
Tit
Tlf t
2
9
stTt
1
stTnt. . . .
1
D
1
eternal, eternity
truthful, turf
contractor
contraction 3 attraction
till, tell 3 until
telephone-y-ic-al
between
twelve-fth
satisfy
circumstantial
circumstance
circumstanced
satisfaction
system
state
constituency
constitution-al
external, externality
strange-ness
strife-ve 2 constructive
strangest
constructor
construction
cistern
instruct
instructive
instructor
instruction
trade, toward
told
telephoned
constitute
constituent
D
dollar 2 do, defendant 3 add, had,
advertise-ment
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
219
Ds.
1
Dst
1
Dn
1
Dns
1
Df
1
Dtr. . .
9|
Dshn
Dr
1
1
Drn
Drns ....
Drf ..
1
3
1
Drtr
Drshn
1)1
2
1
1
Dins
Dltr
Dw
1
1
a
sD
2
sDr
2
s Drshn. . .
nsDr ....
Dt
2
'2
1
Dnt
1
Dtrt
Drt
2
1
Dwt
sDrt
nsDrt ....
K
2
2
2
1
Ks
1
Kst
Kn
1
9,
Knst ....
Kr .
2
1
educe 3 adduce
distinct-ly-ion
denominate-ion 2 done 3 providential,
down
audience 3 providence
divine 2 differ-ence-ent-ly 3 advance
debtor, determine-ing
edition 2 condition 3 addition
doctor 2 dear 3 during, dark
doctrine 3 darken
darkens-ness
derive
director
derision 3 duration
idle, idol, idyl 2 deliver-y
idleness 2 deliverance
idolater
dwell-ing
said
consider-able
consideration
inconsiderable
did, deed 3 doubt
audient 3 provident
determined-ly
deride 2 dread
dwelt
considered-ate
inconsidered-ate
K
kingdom 2 come, country
because, cause 2 case
cost 2 cased 3 cast
can, countrymen
canst
christian-ity 2 care 3 cure
220
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
Krs
9,
Krf
9,
Krtr
1
Krshn. . . .
Kl
2
1
Kwst
Kwn ....
Kwf
Kwtr
sKs
1
2
1
1
1
sKr
sKrn
1
1
sKrf
sKrshn . . .
sKl
1
1
1
sKlf
nsKr
1
1
nsKrf.. ..
nsKrshn . .
Kt
1
1
-2
Knt
]
Krt.. .. ..
1
Kit
1
Kltst
Kwt
2
1
Kwnt
sKnt
sKrt
nsKrt ....
nsKrnt . . .
nsKlt
G
2
2
1
3
1
1
1
Gn
1
Gns
1
course, coarse 3 curious
careful 3 carve
creature
creation
call, equal 2 coal 3 clue, clew
conquest 2 quest
question
equivalent-ly
quarter, 2 equator
six-th
describe, scripture-al 3 secure
screen
descriptive
description
skill 2 scale 3 school
skillful
inscribe, 3 insecure
inscriptive
inscription
could
kind 2 account, county 3 count
creed, accord-ing-ly, concord 2 court
3 accurate, cart, crowd
equaled 2 cold 3 cloud, conclude
coldest
quite
acquaint-ance, quaint
second
secret 3 secured
unsecured
unscreened
unskilled 2 unsealed 3 unschooled
G
give-n 2 go, ago
begin-ning, organ 2 begun, again
3 began
begins, organs-ize
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
221
Gnst 1 organist- ized 2 against
Gf 2 gave, govern-ment
Gtr 2 together 3 gather
Gns.s/m . . 1 organization
Gr 1 degree
Grtr 2 greater
Gl 2 glory
Gls 2 glorious
Glf 2 gulf
sG 1 signify-icant
sGns 1 significance
sGf 1 significative
sGshn. ... 1 signification
Gt 1 got, God 2 get, good
Grt 2 great, girt, gird 3 guard
Git 1 guilt-y 2 gold
S
S 1 see, sea, saw 2 so, sow, sew, say 3 us,
use (n.), sue
Ss 1 cease, seize, size
Sst 1 ceased, seized, sized
Sn 1 assign
Sshn 2 cession, session
sSshn .... 2 secession
Ss.s7m .... 2 cessation
Str 1 Easter, oyster 2 Esther 3 aster, astir
Strn 1 eastern, cithern 2 astern
St 1 east 3 asset
Snt 2 assent, ascent, ascend
Z
Z 1 ease-y 2 was 3 those, use (v. )
Zst 2 zest
Zn 2 zone
Ztr 1 zither
Ztrn 1 zithern
Zt. . .3 used
222
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
LESSON 29.
F
F ) 1 if 2 for 3 half
Fn 1 often
Fr 1 offer 2 from
Frst 2 first
Fl 1 follow-ing, fill 2 full
Frtr 2 further 3 farther
Ft 2 after 3 fact
Fit 2 flood
V
V 1 ever 2 have 3 however, halve
Vn 1 even 2 heaven 3 oven
Vr 1 over 2 very, every 3 whoever
Vrs 2 universe
VrssAfi ... 2 conversation
VI 1 evil 3 value
Vlshn .... 3 valuation
s V 2 Savior, several
Vtr 2 voter
Vrt 2 virtue
Th
Th 2 think, oath 3 thank, thousand-th, hath,
youth
Thr 1 author, ether 2 three 3 through
Thrs 1 thrice, authorize
Thrst .... 1 authorized 2 thirst 3 athirst
Tht 1 thought
Thrt 1 authority 2 third 3 throughout
Dh
Dh 1 thee, thy, with 2 them, they 3 though,
thou
Dhs 1 thyself, these 2 this 3 thus
Dhss . . .2 themselves
THE I'llOXOCJKAPinr MAXt'AL.
1 thine, within, heathen "1 than, then
1 either 2 their, there
2 theirs
2 therein
1 withal
2 without 3 that
2 withheld, withhold
Ch
1 each, watch 2 which 3 much
1 watchful 2 whichever
1 cheer-y, watcher 2 chair
2 chairman
1 cheerful
2 children
2 switch 2 such
2 charity 3 chart
1 child
J
1 joy 2 advantage, Jesus 3 large
1 religious 2 advantageous
2 just 3 largest
1 religion 2 general 3 imagine-ary-ation
2 generalize
1 religionist 2 generalized
1 joyful
2 generation
2 justification
3 generalization
3 larger, jury
3 jurist
3 jurisdiction-al
2 angel 3 evangel, largely
3 evangelize
3 evangelist, evangelized
3 evangelization
2 suo;<rest-ed
224
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
Jn. ... . . 1 1 gentlemen 2 gentleman
Sh
Sh 1 she, wish 2 shall 3 issue
Shr 1 wisher 2 sure, usher 3 assure
Shrns .... 3 assurance
sSh 2 selfish
Shrtr .... 1 shorter
Shltr 2 shelter 3 shoulder
Sht 1 wished 2 shalt 3 should
Shtst 3 shouldst
Shrt 1 short
Zh
Zh 2 usual
Zhr 2 pleasure, azure 3 measure
sZhn 1 scission
nsZhn. ... 1 incision
Zhrt 3 measured
M
M 1 my, me 2 am, him, may
Ms 1 myself 2 himself
Mst 1 almost 2 most, must
Mn 1 men, mine 2 man 3 moon
Mr 1 remark-able, Mr., mere 2 more, mercy-
iful 3 humor
Mrs 1 immerse 3 humorous
Mrst 1 immersed, merest 3 humorist
Ml 1 million-th
sM 1 similar-ly-ity 2 some
sMn 3 examine
Mtr 2 matter
sMtr 3 smoother
Mt 1 might, meet-ing, immediate-ly 2 met,
mate, made 3 moot, mood
Mnt 2 amount 3 movement
sMt.. . 2 somewhat
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
225
sMnt 3 examined
Mp 1 importance-ant 2 improve-ment 3 map
Mps 1 impossible-ity 2 impose
Mpss 1 impossibilities
Mpsshn. . . 2 imposition
Mpr 1 empire
Mpl 2 humble 3 ample, amble
sMp 1 simple-y-icity
stMp 2 stump 3 stamp
sMpt 1 somebody
N
N 1 in, inn, any 2 no, know 3 own
Ns 1 influence 2 hence
Nst 1 influenced, honest 2 nest, next
Nn 1 opinion 2 known 3 union
Nshn .... 1 information 2 nation 3 notion
Nr 1 near, nor, honor 2 manner 3 owner
Nrs 2 nurse
Nrshn .... 2 narration
Nl 2 only 3 annual
Ms 2 unless
sN 3 soon
stN 2 stone-y
Ntr 1 entire, neither 2 another
Nrtr .... 1 norther
Nrtrn .... 1 northern
Nt 1 not 2 nature, under, hundred-th 3 hand
sNt 2 cent, scent, sent, send 3 sound
Ng
Ng 1 thing, long, along 2 language
Ngst 1 longest
Ngr 1 longer 2 hunger-y 3 anger-y
Ngrst .... 2 hungriest 3 angriest
Ngl 1 English 3 angle
Ngln .... 1 Englishmen
sNg 1 singular-ly-ity
220
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXTAL.
sXijfii 3 sanguine
sNirshn . . 3 sanction
Ngt I longed
\<rnt 1 longhand
Nglnt .... 1 England
sNgshnt . . 3 sanctioned
R
R 1 or 2 her, are, before 3 our, hour, rue
Rs 2 hers, herself 3 ours, ourself
Rss 3 ourselves
Rf 1 arrive-al, reveal 2 revolve
Rtr 1 writer, order 3 rather
Rshn 2 oration
Rs,s7m .... 1 recission 2 recession
Rl 1 real, rely 2 rail, roll, role 3 rule
Rls 1 release, realize
Rlst 1 realist
Rlf 1 relief-ve
Rltr 2 relater-or
Rlshn .... 2 relation
Rls-s'/cM ... 2 realization
sRn .... 2 concern-ing
2 were 3 aware
2 where
.. 2 wherein
.. 2 whereof
yR 1 year 2 your
?/Rs 2 yours, yourself
2/Rss 2 yourselves
sRt 2 certain-ly-ty
?#Rt 2 wert, word
2/Rt 2 yard
L
L 1 law 2 will
Ln 2 lone, alone
Lshn 2 revelation 3 revolution
TldE PHONOGRAPHIC MANL'.U..
Ptoid .
Btoid .
Ttoid .
Ttoido
Lrn 2 learn
sJL 3 salvation
wLi 2 well
ir//'L. . . 1 while, awhile
Ltr 2 letter
Lt 2 wilt, world
Lrt 1 lord
W
AV 2 weigh, way, away
H\V 1 why 2 when
Wn 2 one, won
Wns 2 once, oneself
n\Vns .... 2 whence
Wtr 1 water
n irtr .... 1 whither, 2 whether
Jltr 1 wider, wither 2 weather
TFt 1 wide 2 weighed 3 would
Wnt 2 went
Y
Y 1 ye 2 yea
nY 3 hew, hue
Ys 2 yes
nYn 3 hewn
Yt 2 yet
Ynt 1 beyond
Ylt 1 yield
SMALL LOGOGRAPHS.
THE S CIRCLE.
s 1 is, his 2 as, has, self
ss . ,2 selves
TICKS AND CURVETS.
1 of 2 ah
2 ha
1 on 2 awe
2 O, oh, owe
22-8
TllK PlloNoiiUAl HU' MANUAL.
Dtoid . .
Ktoid . .
Ktoida .
Ftoid . .
Shtoid .
Wtoid ..
ho, hoe
a, an
aye, eh
all
and
already
ANGLES.
w
1 we
2 you
SEMICIRCLES.
11
1 ay, eye
1 hie, high
1 he
1 other
1 others, otherwise
2 who-m
2 whose
DOTS.
1 the
2 how
Y
i
i
HI
He
u.
us
HU
HUS
+ ..
H.
THE MOST FREQUENT LOGOGRAPHIC WORDS.
382. The following are the most frequent words
represented by logographs in about the order of
their occurrence in general use. Sometimes, how-
ever, after the first seven, namely, after "an," the
order may vary more or less according to the nature
of the subject matter.
the that on has which
and is I he all
of his with but from
to for you are your
in it be not we
a, an or as have when
was
will
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 22i)
SEMIGRAPHS.
383. Semigraphs are words which are either deriva-
tives of logographs or contain a logograph, or its
alternative (see sec. 378); as "advantageously, into,
also, although, onto, whatsoever, " etc. Such words,
the same as those in section 369 can usually be easily
written when their primitives or compounds are
known. A few of the most frequently occurring ones
are given in the Vocabulary, section 418. No further
attention need be paid to them at present.
a. When "ever" and "soever" end a semigraph the
former is never joined when the preceding part of the
word ends with a circle or the latter when it ends
with a circle on an N hook. In such cases they are
written disjoined; thus, Hs 2 '.V, whosever; nWns'.V,
whencever; nWnstsV, whencesoever. In all other
cases they are usually joined; thus, Hw?RV, wherever;
H?/jRsV, wheresoever; T J sV, whatsoever, nWsV,
whensoever; n>/ 2 sV, whosoever; Hwss 2 V, whosesoever.
230
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
CHAPTER IX.
WORDS OTHER THAN LOGOGRAPHS AND SEMI-
GRAPHS. HOMOGRAPHS, VARIAGRAPHS,
VOCAGRAPHS, BREVIGRAPHS
AND VOCABULARY.
LESSON 30.
WORDS OTHER THAN LOGOGRAPHS AND SEMI-
GRAPHS.
384. All words other than logographs and semi-
graphs when of one consonant stem, simple or com-
pound, or two simple stems are usually written in the
position of their accented vowel. (See sec. 351.)
385. When they contain two stems either or both
of which are compound or have three or more, whether
compound or not, they are written in the second posi-
tion as previously stated (see sec. 36-i) the most con-
venient for the writer without regard to their
accented vowel, unless they have similar and conflict-
ing outlines which is comparatively seldom in which
case they are written in position for distinction. (See
also par. a following.)
a. The above two paragraphs relating to conflict-
ing words being placed for distinction in the position
of their accented vowel comprise the general rule.
AVhen, however, such words contain prefixes beginning
with a vowel and would conflict with each other or
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. '2'M
with their radicals in the same position they are usu-
ally written in the position of the vowel of the prefix
and not in that of the accented one or of the accented
vowel of the radical; as, for example, the words
"approbation, attempt, affect" and "affluent," which
are written in the third position to distinguish them
from "probation, tempt, effect" and "fluent," written
in the second. (See list, sec. 393, lines 4, 5 and 12.)
b. Sometimes, again, words are written out of
position the same as in the case of the logographs.
Such, for example, are "pity" and "demand," which
are thus written in order not to conflict with "piety"
and "adamant" placed in position. (See list, sec.
393, lines 1 and 7.)
c. In all cases mentioned in paragraphs a and b,
the most frequent word is usually placed in the second
position, whether it belongs there or not.
386. The above paragraphs, 384 to 385, c, indi-
cate the method of distinguishing by position words of
the same consonants when written alike. There are,
however, occasionally, too many such words for all to
be written alike and be distinguished by position. In
these cases those of the same position which would
conflict are written with different outlines, as "poor"
and "pure" (see list, sec. 397, line 1) sometimes arbi-
trarily, but usually according to the regular rules
heretofore given in Chapters I to VII inclusive.
a. The above paragraph does not refer to words of
the same consonants and different vowel position and
outline, as "appetite" and "potato" or "pledge" and
"apology" included in the list, section 397 (lines 1 and
3) whose forms are varied according to the regular
rules in Chapters I to VII and written, the two former
regularly in position and the two latter in the second
position according to paragraph 385.
387. There are also, occasionally, too many words
of the same consonants for all to be distinguished even
232 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
by position or difference of outline. In such cases the
least frequent of those that remain in each position if
they would conflict with the others are vocalized. But
as it would generally take up too much time to do this
in full, ordinarily only the most suggestive vowel or
diphthong of each word, usually the accented one, is
inserted; as in "aroma" in the list, section 403,
line 7.
388. From all the preceding the learner will per-
ceive that words of the same consonants are written in
two ways: with the same and different outlines, and
that words of the same outline are distinguished in two
ways: by position and vocalization. Also that long
words are not usually necessary to be written in any
position but the second. The reason of which is that
their outlines being generally different from each other
do not often need to be distinguished by position.
389. Many of the above words, that is to say words
other than logographs and semigraphs, are on account of
their frequency or for some other reason presently ex-
plained, separated from the rest into different classes or
lists the same as the logographs are separated from the
great body of words. These are called Homographs,
Variagraphs, Vocagraphs and Brevigraphs. They are
arranged in phonetic order like the logographs for con-
venience when reading phonography (see sec. 380) and
will next be considered.
a. Before doing so, however, the learner will
understand that these terms are applied only to those
words of each kind which occur most frequently.
Accordingly a word may have the same form or treat-
ment as a homograph, etc., and yet not be one, the
same as in the case of the logographs. (See sec. 363.)
390. In the following lists the same rules apply in
similar cases for writing verbs in the past tense and
adverbs ending in Ly or Y, as given in sections 365
and 3<>7.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 233
HOMOGRAPHS.
391. Homographs are words of the same or similar
consonants of frequent occurrence, which are written
alike and distinguished by position. They are invariably
written in full and can thus always be recognized by
their uncontracted outlines.
392. The following list should be thoroughly memo-
rized. (See page 25 and sec. 380.)
393. LIST OF HOMOGRAPHS.
^ > - T \ \
\> \ J \/
V V \ \'
3 \ \ \-
v V o v
~
h
7 I ^ L h> U U
~
j- r 7
oil J ^ ,/ /
10
11 .
234
12 V, V
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
V
13
<rS
15
394.
KEY TO LIST OF HOMOGRAPHS.
1. Piety, pity; opposite, apposite; peaceaMr,
possible, passable.
2. Epistle, apostle; competition, petition, com-
putation; operator, porter; operation, portion, appor-
tion.
3. Pertain, appertain; permit, promote; prominent,
preeminent, permanent; promise, premise.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 235
4. Permission, promotion; prohibition, probation,
approbation; predict, protect; prediction, protection.
5. Preach, approach; proffer, prefer; obsolete,
absolute; baseness, absence; tempt, attempt.
6. Tract, attract; utterly, truly; administration,
demonstration; administrate, demonstrate.
7. Adopt, adapt; diamond, demand, adamant;
diminish, admonish; diminution, dimension, admoni-
tion.
8. Domination, condemnation, damnation; desolate,
dissolute; desolation, dissolution; device, advice.
9. Division, devotion; defeat, devote; daughter,
debtor; auditor, editor, doubter.
10. Copy, keep; except, accept; causation, acces-
sion, accusation.
11. Extricate, extract; coalition, collation, collusion;
ghostly, ghastly; exalt, exult; science, essence.
12. Effect, affect; fix, focus, affix; fluent, affluent;
feeling, failing; violent, valiant.
13. Voluble, available; giant, agent; melioration,
amelioration; immaterial, material.
14. Immoderate, moderate; imminent, eminent;
migration, emigration; munition, mention, ammuni-
tion; immature, mature.
15. Immortal, mortal; immoral, moral; impatient,
impassioned; anonymous, unanimous; anomalous, name-
less; unavoidable, inevitable.
16. Inviolable, unavailable; interior, anterior; indi-
cate, induct; national, notional; undefined, indefinite;
indicted, indebted, undoubted.
17. Origin, region; irritate, rotate; irritation, rota-
tion; irrational, rational; irresolute, resolute; repeti-
tion, reputation.
18. Illegal, legal; illogical, logical; element, ali-
ment; eliminate, illuminate; elimination, illumination;
solitary, salutary; wait, await.
236
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
LESSON 31.
VARIAGRAPHS.
395. Variagraphs are words of the same or similar
consonants, of frequent occurrence, which are written
with different outlines for distinction and always in
full. They are thus of the same nature as the homo-
graphs, the only difference being that their forms are
varied. It will be observed that the principles of
position and variation are sometimes combined, as in
the case of the words "appetite" and "potato."
396. The following list should be thoroughly
memorized.
39
LIST OF VARIAGRAPHS.
X
V
X
V
3 v \yy \/ \j x/ \ \r7
\r\ c\ <v
\ vv. \
NO
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 237
13
* V --
^~*\ ^~Q r> ^ ^ ~*~f ^~1 <r-N
15 1 _ L _ t/ O> c A v. 5 ^ v
16
398. KEY TO LIST OF VARIAGRAPHS.
1. Poor, pure; poorest, purest; appetite, potato;
patient, passionate.
2. Apparition, operation; oppression, portion;
prosecute, persecute; Persia, Prussia ; petrify, putrefy.
3. Oppressor, pursuer, peruser; patron, pattern;
pledge, apology; optic, poetic.
4. Person, parson; proportion, preparation, ap-
propriation; proportioned, proportionate.
5. Present, personate; prosper, perspire; predict,
predicate; prediction, predication.
0. Support, separate; beautify, beatify; aberra-
tion, abrasion; breath, birth; bright, broad; aband-
oned, abundant.
T. Contrition, contortion; citation, situation ; train,
turn; Tartar, traitor, trader.
8. Daughter, auditor; debtor, editor; defense, de-
fiance; denned, definite; devote, deviate.
9. Idleness, dullness; domination, diminution;
condemnation, dimension; damnation, admonition.
10. Devotion, deviation; execrate, excoriate;
eclipse, collapse; culminate, calumniate.
11. Cost, caused; corporal, corporeal; credence,
accordance; except, expiate.
L'iiS THE PllOXOllUAl'Hir MANUAL.
12. Cudgel, cajole; extension, extenuation; col-
lision, coalition; God, guide.
13. Garden, guardian; grudge, gorge; garnet,
granite; aspersion, aspiration.
14. Favored, favorite; funeral, funereal; fierce,
furious; frame, form.
15. Mrs., Misses; impassioned, impassionate; mis-
sion, machine; ingenious, ingenuous; animal, ano-
maly.
16. Write, read; righteous, riotous; repression,
reparation; resume, reassume; ruined, renewed.
17. Labored, elaborate; learned, learn'ed, learnt;
let, laid or lade; latitude, altitude; insult, insulate.
i
LESSON 32.
VOCAGRAPHS.
399. Vocagraphs are words vocalized either in part
or in full to distinguish them from other and more
frequent words of similar form which are not vocal-
ized. They are always written with their full out-
lines.
400. A vocagraph may have only a part of a vowel
inserted as in the words "anew, new" or li knew"
which are written with the first half of the left semi-
circle for long u joined to the stem N; the halved
semicircle standing for the full vowel. The latter
part of the halved form is seldom shaded for the long
sound.
a. The stenotypic representation of "new," etc.,
as above, is NFtoid. (See sec. 372.)
401. "Now" is written with the N stem and the
alternative tick for short o; being an abbreviation con-
sisting of the first half of the diphthong ou when made
with the alternative tick and the right semicircle
for long u as explained in section 34. Its stenotypic
representation is NCtoid.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
402. In the following list of vocagraphs the first
eight lines contain also the unvocalized words from
which they are distinguished. Sometimes when the
number of words of the same outline is very great
merely the vocagraphs are given, as in line 9, etc. The
list should be thoroughly memorized.
403.
LIST OF VOCAGRAPHS.
2 sUL
3 V
J 7
X A
240 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
15 ^ ^
17 X X ^ ^ * iT \ _
404. KEY TO LIST OF VOCAGRAPHS.
1. Opposition, apposition; steady, staid or stayed;
adapt, depute.
2. Squeal, squall; sqeak, squawk; face, efface;
fuse, effuse; far, afar.
3. Formula, formulae; flee, fly; fluent, effluent;
join, adjoin.
4. German, germane; Germany, germania; mo-
tion, emotion; mission, emission, omission.
5. Monarch, monarchy; name, enemy; sun, snow;
endowed, endued.
6. Noxious, innoxious; antithesis, antitheses; nu-
trition, innutrition; nutritious, innutritious; honest}',
insight.
7. Arm, army, aroma; russet, rusty, roseate; rele-
vant, irrelevant.
8. Less, else; lye, oil; sulphate, sulphite.
9. Upper, pro, prow; epic, opaque; abbey, obey.
10. Baby, boquet, bestow, settee, suit, stow.
11. Taboo, attack, item, aid, ode, adieu, idea, ideal.
12. Identify, identity, depot, ache, echo, axes
(pi. of axis), eclat.
13. Cuckoo, croquet, ague, ogle, glow.
14. Highest, sow, ice, Isaiah, ozone, Isaac, ivy,
age, edge.
15. Aim, aimed, emit, omit, amass, omen, mica,
immigration.
1C. Inner, highness; anew, new or knew, now,
nigh, nay, array, arrow.
17. Era, eyrie, area, higher, ally, highly, highway.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 241
LESSON 33.
BREVIGRAPHS.
405. The complete outlines of many words of fre-
quent occurrence, mostly of different consonants are
either of such great length or their letters are of such
awkward junction that it is impossible to write them
with the swiftness of rapid speech. The forms of such
words, therefore, are more or less contracted, usually
by omitting the awkward junction or junctions or one
or more of the unimportant letters or the endings after
writing two or three strokes. All such words when
thus written are called Brevigraphs. Brevigraphs,
accordingly, always have one or more of their letters,
whether stems or attachments omitted. They thus dif-
fer from the words in the three preceding lists which
are always written with their full outlines.
a. From paragraphs 362 and 405 the learner will
understand that when a word is contracted to one stem
it is, if it is a frequent one, made a logograph, but if
contracted to two or more stems it is made a brevi-
graph.
406. Brevigraphs are not vocalized. Instead, if
distinction is desired they are written in position ac-
cording to the rules given in section 385. Usually,
however, the outlines are different from each other as
well as from all other words and can, therefore, be
written in the second position without regard to their
accented vowel. Each one thus has a fixed form of its'
own different from every other and consequently can
everywhere be recognized by it.
407. A brevigraph, as will appear from the follow-
ing list, usually stands also for the principal deriva-
tives of the word it represents. The list should be
thoroughly memorized.
342
408.
THE riloXOCKAPHIC MAXIMAL.
LIST OF RltKVKHtAFHS.
1
\ \
N X V
\ _ \
^ L
\
L
8
9
11
"7 -7 Z
L_
12 1 -y 7
13 -\ *\
14
15 /\ /^* /\>
r
16
A.
\
/V
^-^
1'HE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 243
409. KEY TO LIST OF BREVIGRAPHS.
1. Purpose, publie-ly-sh, appointment, peculiar- ly,
episcopal, perpetual-ate, perpendicular-ly, perf orm-ance.
2. Perhaps, probable, approximate-ly-tion, pros-
pect, prescribe, proscribe, apprehend, comprehend.
3. Baptize-ist, baptism, obstruction, abstraction,
observation, bishop, bank, substantial, subscribe-r,
subscription.
4. Attainable, attainment, atonement, transcript,
transcription, transcribe.
5. Transgress, transgression, transfer, transmis-
sion, stranger, strangely, strength, strengthen, digni-
fy-ity.
6. Destructive, destruction, declare, discrimi-
nate-ly-tion, danger, dangerous, democrat-ic.
7. Cabinet, capable, expect-ation, exchange, eccen-
tric, acknowledge, acknowledged, acknowledgment.
8. Correct-ly, character, characteristic, collect,
qualification, example, agriculture-al, agriculturalist.
9. Congregate, aggregate, auspicious-ly-ness, es-
pecial, establish-ment, astonish-ment, esquire, essen-
tial.
10. Husbandman, forward, froward, frantic, fa-
miliar-ly-ity, theistic, atheistic, challenge.
11. Magazine, machinery, mortgage, merchandize,
mathematic, antagonize-ist-ic-ism, interest, interested.
12. Notwithstanding, intelligent, intelligible, intel-
ligence, entertainment, intellect-ual, natural.
13. Independent-ly-ence, indispensable, nondescript,
indiscriminate-ly-tion, individual, neglect, influential,
never.
14. Investigation, nevertheless, knowledge, anx-
ious, length-y, lengthen, lengthened.
15. Represent, representative, representation, re-
public-sh, republican, architect-ure-al, aristocracy, ir-
regular-ly, regular-ly.
244 THE PHOXOGRAPIIIC MAXUAL.
16. Respect-ful, respectable, resembie-ance, rever-
ence, revenge, orthodox-ly-y, arithmetic.
17. Archbishop, original, arrangement, legis-
late-ure, legislative, legislation.
DIRECTIONS FOR FORMING BREVIGRAPHS, ETC.
410. In forming brevigraphs, or other contracted
words, the following are some of the rules usually
adopted. (See also sec. 344.)
a. Omit initial K from the syllable Ex before ini-
tial hooks; as in "extreme, experiment, explore" or
"exquisite," except where the resulting word (if not a
logograph) would consist of only one stem as in "Exe-
ter, extra, expert" or "exploit." (See the Vocabula-
ry, sec. 418.)
b. Omit final K before Shun when it occurs after
the stem F or the double consonant Tr or the treble
one Str as in "purification, protraction, restriction."
Also omit it before V when it occurs after the treble
consonant Str; as in restrictive. Furthermore omit it
before Ter after the double and treble consonants Tr
and Str as in "contractor, protractor, constructor, re-
strictor."
c. Omit final P after the treble consonant Skr and
before V or Shn; as in "prescriptive, proscription."
d. Omit final B after the treble consonant Skr; as
in "superscribe."
e. Omit the V stem after upward R when the latter
follows the S circle; as in "observation."
f. Omit Shi after the N hook or stem; as in "pru-
dential, pestilential, provincial, provincialism."
g. Occasionally the F hook, particularly in words
of two or more stems, is allowed to stand for the final
syllable Ful or Fully as in "powerf ul-ly. " (See also
sees. 326 and 367.)
h. When the termination Tively occurs in a brevi-
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 245
graph whose primitive is written with the F hook,
as in ' 'restrict! vely, proscriptively, " write the VI
stem; thus, RsTrVl, PrsKrVl. (See par. band also sec.
280.)
1. If preferred, however, the upward L stem may
be then written disjoined or joined after the F hook;
thus, RsTrf'.L, PrsKrfL.
i i. Sometimes an N hook may be placed within a
Ter hook, as in "determination," or allowed to repre-
sent "not" after a halved stem, as in "whatnot."
j. Sometimes a word is expressed by intersecting
two of its stems, as in "nevertheless," in line 14 of the
preceding list.
k. Usually words of the same part of speech should
not have the same form.
LOGOGRAPHS, HOMOGRAPHS, ETC.,
ARRANGED ALPHABETICALLY.
411. The following list contains all the preceding
five lists; namely, logographs,' homographs, varia-
graphs, vocagraphs and brevigraphs, arranged in
alphabetical order so as to be consulted by the learner
when writing phonography should an outline at any
time be forgotten.
412. LOGOGRAPHS, HOMOGRAPHS, ETC.
A
a, Ktoid
abandoned, BnDnt
abbey, aB 3
aberration, BRshn
able, Bl
aboard, Brt
about, Bt 3
above, Bf
abrasion, Brshn
absence, Bs 3 Ns
absolute, Bs 3 Lt
abstraction, Bs 3 Trshn
abundant, BntNt
accept, KsPt 3
accession, Kss/m
accord-ing-ly, Krt 1
accordance, Krt J Ns
246
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
account, Knt
accurate, Krt 3
accusation,
ache, aK
acknowledge, KJ 1
acknowleged, KJt 1
acknowledgement, KJ 1 -
Mnt
acquaint-ance, Kwnt
adamant, D 3 Mnt
adopt, D 3 Pt
add, D 3
addition, Dshn 3
adduce, Ds 3
adieu, D 3 u
adjoin, a-Jn 1
administrate, D 1 MnsTrt
administration, D 1 Mns-
Trshn
admonish, D 3 MnSh
admonition, D 3 MnShn
adopt, D'Pt
advance, Df 3
advantage, J
advantageous, Js
advertise-ment, D 3
advice, D 3 Vs
afar, aF 3 j??
affect, F 3 KT
affix, F 3 Ks
affluent, Fl 3 Nt
after, Ft
again, Gn
against, Gnst
age, aJ
agent, JNT
aggregate-d, GrG
ago, G
agriculture-al, GrKl
agriculturist, GrKlst
ague, G-r
ah, Ptoid
aid, aD
aim, aM
aimed, aMt
aliment, L 3 Mnt
all, Ftoid 1
ally, L 1 !
almost, Mst 1
alone, Ln
along, Ng 1
already, Wtoid 1
altitude, LtTD
am, M
amass, Mas 3
amble, Mpl 3
amelioration, MIRshn 3
ammunition, M 3 Xshu
amount, Mnt
ample, Mpl 3
an, Ktoid
and, Atoid
anew, NFtoid
angel, Jl
anger-y, Ngr 3
angle, Ngl 3
angriest, Ngrst 3
animal, NM1
anomalous, NMLs 1
anomaly, NML 1
anonymous, Kn J Ms
annual, Nl 3
another, Ntr
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
247
antagonize-ist-ic-isrn,
Nt s r
anterior, NT 3 RR
antitheses, NtThsSs
antithesis, NtThss
anxious, NgShs
any, N 1
apology, PLJ
apostle, PsL
apparition, Prshn 1
appear, Pr 1
appearance, Prns 1
appertain, Pr 3 Tn
appetite, P 3 Tt
application, Plshn 3
appliance, Pins 3
apply, PI 3
apportion, P 3 Rshn
appointment, Pt 1 Mnt
apposite, Ps 3 T
apposition, aPs-s'Aw 1
apprehend, Pr 3 ND
approach, PrC
approbation, Pr 3 Bshn
appropriation', PrPrshn
appro ve-al, Prf 3
approximate-ly-ion PrKs
archbishop, RGB
architect-ure-al, RKT
are, R
area, Ria
aristocracy, RsTKr.
arithmetic, RfTh
arm, R 3 M
army, R 3 Mi
aroma, R 3 oM
arrangement, RnJt
array, Ra
arri ve-al, Rf 1
arrow, Ro
as, s
ascend, Snt
ascent, Snt
aspersion, SPrshn
aspiration, SPRshn
assent, Snt
asset, St 3
assign, Sn 1
assurance, Shrns 3
assure, Shr 3
aster, Str 3
astern, Strn
astir, Str 3
astonish-ment, St J X
at, T 3
atheistic, ThsK
athirst, Thrst 3
atone, Tn 3
atonement, T 3 Mnt
attack, aTK
attainable, TnB
attainment, TMnt
attempt, T 3 Mpt
attest, Tst 3
attract, Tr 3 Kt
attraction, Trshn 3
audience, Dns 1
audient, Dnt 1
auditor, Dt*R
aught, T 1
auspicious-ly-ness, S 1 ?
author, Thr 1
authority, Thrt 1
authorize, Thrs 1
248
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
authorized, Thrst 1
available, VLB1
await, Wt 3
aware, wR 3
away, W
a\ve, Ttoid
awhile, H70L 1
axes (pi. of axis), Kses 3
ay, I 1
aye, Ktoida
azure, Zhr
B
baby, BBi
balance, Bins
bank, B 3 Ng
baptism, B 3 PsM
baptize-st, B 3 P
baseness, BsNs
be, B 1
beatify, BTF
beautify, BtF
because, Ks 1
been, Bn
before, R
began, Gn 3
begin-ning, Gn 1
begins, Gns 1
begun, Gn
behalf, Bf 3
behind, Bnt 1
belief- ve, Blf
belong-ed, Bl 1
bestow, BsTo
better, Btr
between, Twn 1
beyond, Ynt 1
bird, Brt
birth, BRTh
bishop, B'Sh
board, Brt
bold, Bit
boquet, BKa
brand, Brnt 3
breath, BrTh
brethren, Brn 3
bright, Brt 1
broad, BrD
brother, Brtr
brought, Brt 1
brute, Brt 3
build-ing, Bit 1
built, Bit 1
business, Bss 1
businesses, Bsss 1
but, B
buy, B 1
by, B 1
cabinet, KB 3
cajole, KJL
call, Kl 1
calumniate, K1MNT
can, Kn
canst, Knst
capable, KB1
care, Kr
careful, Krf
cart, Krt 3
carve, Krf 3
case, Ks 1
cased, Kst
cast, Kst 3
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
249
causation, 'Ksskn 1
cause, Ks 1
cease, Ss 1
ceased, Sst 1
cent, sNt
certain-ly-ty, sRt
cessation, Ssshn
cession, Sshn
chair, Cr
chairman, Crn
challenge, C1J
character, KrK
characteristic, KrKsK
charity, Crt
chart, Crt 3
cheer-y, Cr 1
cheerful, Crf 1
child, Clt 1
children, Cl
christian-ity, Kr 1
circumstantial, sTn
circumstance, sTns
circumstanced, sTnst
cistern, ssTrn 1
citation, sTshn 1
cithern, Strn 1
cloud, Kit 3
clue, Kl 3
coal, Kl
coalition, KLshn 1
coarse, Krs
cold, Kit
coldest, Kltst
collapse, KLPs
collation, KLshn i
collect, KPK
collision, Klshn 1
collusion, KLshn 3
combine, Bn 1
come, K
competition,
comprehend, PrND
computation, P 3 Tshn
concern-ing, sRn
conclude, Kit 3
concord, Krt 1
condemnation, DMNshn
condition, Dshn
congregate, Gr*G
conquest, Kwst 1
consider-able, sDr
consideration, sDrshn
considered-ate, sDrt
constituency, stTn
constituent, stTnt 1
constitute, stTt 1
constitution-al, stTshn 3
construction, sTrshn
constructive, sTrf
constructor, sTrtr
contortion, T^Rshn
contraction, Trshn
contractor, Trtr 1
contrition, Trshn
conversation, Vrsshn
copy, KP'
corporal, KrPrL
corporeal, KrPrRl
correct-ly, Kr ' K
cost, Kst 1
caused, KsD 1
could, Kt
count, Knt 3
county, Knt
250
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
country, K
countrymen, Kn
course, Krs
court, Krt
creation, Krshn
creature, Krtr 1
credence, KrDns
creed, Krt 1
croquet, KrKa
crowd, Krt 3
cuckoo, K 3 Kn
cudgel, KJ1
culminate, KIMnT
cure, Kr 3
curious, Krs 3
D
damnation, D 3 MNshn
danger, DJr
dangerous, DJrs
dark, Dr 3
darken, Drn 3
darkens-ness, Drns 3
daughter, Dtr 1
dear, Dr
debtor, Dtr
declare, D 3 K1
deed, Dt 1
defendant, D
defense, DfNs
defiance, DFNs
defined, DFnt
definite, DfNt
degree, Gr 1
deliver-y, Dl
deliverance, Dins
demand, DMnt
democrat-ic, DM
demonstrate, DMnsTrt
demonstration, DMns-
Trshn
denominate-ion, Dn 1
depot, DPo
depute, D 3 Prt
deride, Drt 1
derision, Drshn 1
derive, Drf 1
describe, sKr 1
description, sKrshn 1
descriptive, sKrf 1
desolate, DsLt
desolation, DsLshn
destruction, DsTrshn
destructive, DsTrf
determine-ing, Dtr
determined-ly, Dtrt
deviate, DVT
deviation, DV$An
device, DVs
devotion, DVshn
diamond, D^nt
did, Dt 1
differ-ence-ent-ly, Df
dignify-ty, D J G
dimension, DMnShn
diminish, D 1 MnSh
diminution, D'MnShn
director, Drtr
discriminate-ly-ion, Ds-
KrM
dissolute, Ds 3 Lt
dissolution, Ds 3 Lshn
distinct-ly-ion, Dst 1
divine, Df 1
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
251
division,
do, D
doctor, Dr 1
doctrine, Drn 1
dollar, D 1
domination, D 1 MNshn
done, Dn
doubt, Dt 3
doubter, Dt 3 R
down, Dn 3
dread, Drt
dullness, DLXs
duration, Drshn 3
during, Dr 3
dwell-ing, Dw
dwelt, Dwt
E
each, C 1
ease-y, Z 1
east, St 1
Easter, Str 1
eastern, Strn 1
eccentric, KsNtr
echo, Ko
eclat, Kla
eclipse, KIPs
edge, e-J
edition, Dshn 1
editor, DtR
educe, Ds 1
efface, eFs
effect, FKT
effluent, eFIXt
effuse, eFs !
eh, Ktoidfi
either, Dhr 1
elaborate,. LBrT
element, LMnt
eliminate, L^MnT
elimination, L'MXshn
else, eLs
emigration, MGrshn
eminent, MnNt
emission, eMshn 1
emit, gMt 1
emotion, eMshn
empire, Mpr 1
endowed, NDowt 3
endued, NDnt 3
enemy, eNM
England, Nglnt 1
English, Ngl 1
Englishmen, Ngln 1
entertainment, NtTMnt
entire, Ntr 1
epic, ePk
episcopal, Psk
epistle, Ps J L
equal, Kl 1
equaled, Kit 1
equator, Kwtr 1
equivalent-ly, Kwf 1
era, R 1 ^
especial, Sp
esquire, S J K
essence, SNs
essential, SN
establish-ment, St 3 B
Esther, Str
eternal, Trn
eternity, Trn
ether, Thr 1
evangel, JP
2.")2
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
evangelist, Jlst 3
evangelization, Jlsshn 3
evangelize, Jls 3
evangelized, Jlst 3
even, Vn 1
ever, V 1
every, Vr
evil, VI 1
exalt, GsLt 1
examine, sMn 3
examined, sMnt 3
example, GsMp
except, KsPt
exchange, KsCJ
excoriate, KsKRt
execrate, KsKrt
expect-ation, KsP
experience, sPrns
experienced, sPrnst
expiate, KsPT
explain, sPln
explained, sPlnt
explode, sPlt
explosion, Plshn
express, sPrs
expressed, sPrst
expression, sPrsshn
extension, KsTNshn
extenuation, KsTNShn
external, sTr
externality, sTr
extract, KsTr 3 Kt
extricate, KsTrKt
exult, 'GsLt
eye, T 1
eyrie, R'i
F
face, Fs
fact, Ft 3
failing, FZNg
familiar-ly-ity, F 1 M
far, F 3 7?
farther, Frtr 3
favored, FVrt
favorite, FVrT
feeling, F'ZNg
fierce, F7?s
fill, Fl 1
first, Frst
fix, F'Ks
flee, Fl 1
flood, Fit
fluent, FINt
fly, Fl'I
focus, FKs
follow-ing, Fl 1
for, F
form, F7?M
formula, F^ML
formulae, F7?MLe
forward, F?#Rt
frame, FrM
frantic, Frt'K
from, Fr
f reward, FrRt or Fr Wi
full-y, Fl
further, Frtr
funeral, FNrZ
funerial, FnRL or FNR1
furious, FRs
fuse, Fs 3
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
253
G
garden, GrtN
garnet, GRNt
gather, Gtr 3
gave, Gf
general, Jn
generalization, Jnsshn
generalize, Jns
generalized, Jnst
generation, Jshn
gentleman, Jnt
gentlemen, Jnt 1
German, JrMn
germane, JrMan
Germania, JrMNia
Germany, JrMN
get, Gt
ghastly, GsT 3 L
ghostly, GsTL
giant, J^Nt
gird, Grt
girt, Grt
give-n, G 1
glorious, Gls
glory-ied, Gl
glow, Glo
go, G
God, Gt 1
gold, Git
good, Gt
gorge, GRJ
got, Gt 1
govern-ment, Gf
granite, GrNt
great, Grt
greater, Grtr
grudge, GrJ
guard, Grt 3
guardian, GrDn
guide, GD 1
guilt-y, Git 1
gulf, Glf
H
ha, Btoid
had, D 3
half, F*
halve, V s
hand, Nt 3
happen, Pn 3
happiest, Pst 3
happy, P 3
has, s
hath, Th 3
have, V
he, He 1
heathen, Dhn 1
heaven, Vn
hence, Ns
her, R
hers, Rs
herself, Rs
hew, nY 3
hewn, H5Tn 3
hie, Hi 1
high, Hi 1
higher, ni-R 1
highest, ni-St 1
highly, HlL 1
highness, m-Ns 1
highway, Hi-W
him, M
himself, Ms
his, s 1
254
TIIK PHONOGRAPHIC MAXfAI,
ho, Dtoid
hoe, Dtoid
honest, Nst 1
honesty, NsT 1
honor, Nr 1
hope, P 3
hopeful, Pf 3
hour, R 3
how, H
however, V 3
hue, nY 3
humble, Mpl
humor, Mr 3
humorist, Mrst 3
humorous, Mrs 3
hundred-th, Nt
hunger-y, Ngr
hungriest, Ngrst
husbandman, ZBtMn
I, i 1
ice, I-S 1
idea, i-D 1
ideal, l-D 1 !,
identify, iDntF
identity, iDntT
idle, Dl 1
idleness, Dins 1
idol, Dl 1
idolater, Dltr 1
idyl, Dl 1
if F 1
illegal, L'Gl
illogical, L'JKl
illuminate, L 3 MnT
illumination, L 3 MNshn
imagine-ary-ation, Jn 3
i m m ater ial , MtrL 1
immature, MtR 1
immediate-ly, Mt 1
immerse, Mrs 1
immersed, Mrst 1
immigration, iM^rshn
imminent, Mn J Nt
immoderate, MtRt 1
immoral, MrL 1
immortal, MrtL 1
impassionate, Mpshn T 3
impassioned, Mpshnt 3
impatient, Mpshnt
importance-ant, Mp 1
impose, Mps
imposition, Mpsshn
impossibilities, Mpss 1
impossible-ity, Mps 1
improve-ment, Mp
in, N 1
incision, nsZshn 1
inconsiderable, nsDr
inconsidered-ate, nsDrt
indebted, NtTt
indefinite, NDfNt
independent-lv-ence, Xt-
Pnt
indicate, Nt J Kt
indicted, NtTt 1
indiscriminate-ly-ion, Xts '
KM
indispensable, NtsPns
individual, NtVt 1
induct, NtKt
inevitable, NVtBl
inexperience, nsPrns
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
inexperienced, nsPrnst
inexpressed, nsPrst
inexpressible, nsPrs
influence, Ns 1
influenced, Nst 1
influential, NxS/d 1
information, Nshn 1
ingenious, NJNs
ingenuous, NJNS
inn, N 1
inner, iNr 1
innoxious, iNKShs
innutrition, iNTrshn 1
innutritious, iNTr'Shs
inscribe, nsKr 1
inscription, nsKrshn 1
inscriptive, nsKrf 1
insecure, nsKr 1
insight, NslT 1
instruct, nsTr
instruction, nsTrshn
instructive, nsTrf
instructor, nsTrtr
insulate, nsLT
insult, nsLt
intellect-ual, NtZ 1
intelligence, NtJns
intelligent, NtJnt
intelligible, NtJBl
interest, NtsT
interested, NtsTt
interior, NTRR
internal, Tr 1
investigation, NVss/m
inviolable, NV J LB1
irrational, Rshn 1 !^
irregular-ly, R'G
irresolute, Rs'Lt
irrelevant, iRIVnt
irritate, R'Tt
irritation, R'Tshn
is, s 1
Isaac, !-Z J K
Isaiah, I-Z
issue, Sh 3
it, T
item, I-T'M
its, Ts
itself, Ts 3
ivy, I-V 1
Jesus, J
join, Jn 1
joy, J 1
joyful, Jf
jurisdiction-al, Jrsshn
jurist, Jrst 3
jury, Jr 3
just, Jst
justification, Js,s7m
K
keep, KP
kind, Knt 1
kingdom, K 1
knew, NFtoid
know, N
knowledge, NJ 1
know, Nn
L
labored, LBrt
256
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
lade, LD
laid, LD
language, Ng
large, J 3
larger , Jr 3
largest, Jst 3
largely, Jl 3
latitude, LtTt
law, L 1
learn, Lrn
learned, Lrnt
learn'ed, LrNt
learnt, LrnT
legal, LGl
legislate-ure, LJ
legislation, LJshn
legislative, LJf
length-y, NgTh
lengthen, NgThn
lengthened, NgThnt
less, Ls
let, Lt
letter, Ltr
liberty, Br 1
logical, LJK1
lone, Ln
long, Ng 1
longed, Ngt 1
longer, Ngr 1
longest, Ngst 1
longhand, iNgnt 1
lord, Lrt 1
lye, L>
M
machine, MShn
machinery, MShR
made, Mt
magazine, M*G
man, Mn
manner, Nr
map, Mp 3
mathematic, MfTh
mate, Mt
material, MtrL
matter, Mtr
mature, MtR 3
may, M
me, M 1
measure, Zhr 3
measured, Zhrt 3
meet-ing, Mt 1
melioration, MIRshn 1
member, Br
men, Mn 1
mention, MNshn
merchandize, MrCts
mercy-iful, Mi-
mere, Mr 1
merest, Mrst 1
met, Mt
mica, M'Ka
might, Mt 1
migration, M^rshn
million-th, Ml 1
mine, Mn 1
Misses, Mss 1
mission, Mshn l
moderate, MtRt
monarch, MnRK
monarchy, MnRKi
mood, Mt 3
moon, Mn 3
moot, Mt 3
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
257
moral, MrL
more, Mr
mortal, MrtL
mortgage, Mi^G
most, Mat
motion, Mshn
movement, Mnt 3
Mr., Mr 1
Mrs., MsZ
much, C 3
munition,
must, Mst
my, M 1
myself, Ms 1
name, NM
nameless, NMLs
narration, JSrslni
nation, JS ; shn
national, NshnL
natural, Nt 2 Z
nature, Nt
nay, Nfi
near, Nr 1
neglect, NG1K
neither, Ntr 1
nest, Nst
never, NV
nevertheless, NfV
new, N Ft oid
next, Nst
nigh, N 1 !
no, N
nondescript, NtsKPl 1
nor, Nr 1
norther, Nrtr 1
northern, Nrtrn 1
not, Nt 1
notion, Nshn 3
notional, NshnL 3
notwithstanding, NtsTnt 1
noxious, NKShs
now, NCtoid
number, Br 3
nurse, Nrs
nutrition, NTrshn
nutritious, NTrShs
O
O, Ttoido
oath, Th
obey, Ba
ode, oD
object, B
objection, Bshn
objective, Bf
observation, BsRshn
obsolete, Bs : Lt
obstruction, BsTrhsn
occupied, Pt 1
occupy, P 1
of, Ptoid 1
offer, Fr 1
often, Fn 1
ogle, oGl
oh, Ttoido
oil, oiLt 1
omen, oMn
omission, oMshn 1
omit, oMt 1
on, Ttoid 1
once, ^"ns
one ^Yn
THE PHONOGRAPHH MANTAL.
oneself, Wns
only, Nl
opaque, PiiK
operation, P'Rshn
operator, P'Rtr
opinion, Nn 1
opportunity, Prt 3
opposite, Ps*T
opposition, Pss/m 1
oppression, Prshn
oppressor, PrsR
optic, Pt'K
or, R 1
oration, Rshn
order, Rtr 1
organ, Gn 1
organist-ized, Gnst 1
organization, GnssAfi 1
C 1 7
organize, Gns 1
origin, R 1 Jn
original, R*J
orthodox-ly-y, RThD
other, u 1
others, us 1
otherwise, us 1
ought, T 1
our, R 3
ours, Rs 3
ourself, Rs 3
ourselves, Rss 3
out, T 3
oven, Vn 3
over, Vr 1
owe, Ttoido
own, N 3
owner, Nr 3
oyster, Str 1
ozone, oZn
parson, PRsN
part, Prt
particular-ly-ity, Prt 1
party, P 3
passable, Ps 3 Bl
passionate, Pshn 3 T
patient, Pshnt
patron, PTrn
pattern, PtRn
peaceable, Ps^l
peculiar-ly, P 3 K
people-d, PI
per, Pr
perfect-ly-tion, Prf 1
perform-ed-ance, PRF
perhaps, PrPs
permanent, Pr 3 MnNt
permission, PrMshn
permit, PrMt
perpendicular-ly, PRPnt
perpetual-ate, PRPt
persecute, PRsKt
Persia, PRSh
person, PrsN
personate, PrsNT
perspire, PrsPR
pertain, PrTn
peruser, PRsR
petition, PTshn
petrify, PtRF
phonography, Fn
piety, P J T
pity, PT
THE PHONOGRAPHIC -MANUAL.
259
plaintiff, Pint
play, PI
playful, Plf
pica, PI 1
plead, Pit 1
pleasure, Zhr
pledge, P1J
poetic, PTK
poor, Pr !
poorest, Prst 3
porter, PRtr
portion, PRshn
position, Pss/m
possession, Ps.9//;/ 3
possible, PsP)l
potato, PTT
poverty, Pf
preach, Pr ] C
predicate, PrDKt
predication, PrDKshn
predict, Prt'Kt
prediction, Prt'Kshn
preeminent, PrMnNt
prefer, PrfR
premise, PrMs
preparation, PrPRshn
prescribe, Prs 1 !^
present, PrsNt
pride, Prt 1
principle-al, Pr
pro, Pro
probable-y, PrB
probation, PrBshn
proffer, Prf'R
profit, Prft 1
prohibition, Pi^Bshn
prominent, Pr'MnNt
promise, Pi^Ms
promote, PrMt
promotion, Pr 3 Mshn
proof-ve, Prf
proportion, PrPshn
proportionate, PrPshnT
proportioned, PrPshn'. D
proscribe, PrsK
prosecute, PrsKt
prospect, Prs*Pt
prosper, PrsPr
protect, PrtKt
protection, PrtKshn
proud, Prt 3
providence, Dns 3
provident, Dnt 3
providential, Dn 3
prow, Pr 3 ow
Prussia, PrSh
public-ly-sh, PB
punish-ment, Pn 3
pure, P 3 R
purest, P 3 Rst
purpose, PPs
pursuer, PRSR
put, Pt 3
putrefy, PTrF
Q
quaint, Kwnt
qualification, KlFshn
quarter, Kwtr 1
quest, Kwst
question, Kwn
quite, Kwt 1
260
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
R
rail, Rl
rather, Rtr 3
rational, Rshn 3 L
read, R'D
real, Rl 1
realist, Rlst 1
realization, Rls-s'An 1
realize, Rls 1
reassume, RSM
recession, Rsskn
recission, ~Rsshn l
region, RJn
regular-ly, RG
release, Rls 1
relate-or, Rltr
relation, Rlshn
relevant, RIVnt
relief -ve, Rlf 1
religion, Jn 1
religionist, Jnst 1
religious, Js 1
rely, Rl 1
remark-able-y, Mr 1
remember, Br
remembrance, Brns
renewed, R 3 ND
reparation, RPRshn
repetition, R 1 PTshn
represent, RP
representation, RPshn
representative, RPf
repression, RPrshn
republic-sh, RPB
republican, RPBn
reputation, R 3 PTshn
resemble-ance, RsM
resolute, RsLt
respect-ful, RsP
respectable-y, RsPBl
resume, RsM
reveal, Rf
revelation, Lshn
revenge, RVJ
reverence, RV
revolution, Lshn 3
revolve, Rf 3
righteous, R*Ts
riotous, R^TS
role, Rl
roll, Rl
roseate, RsiiT
rotate, RTt,
rotation, RTshn
rue, R 3
ruined, R 3 Nt
rule, Rl 3
russet, RsT
rusty, RsTi
S
said, sD
salutary, sL 3 TR
salvation, sL 3
sanction, sNgshn 3
sanctioned, sNgshnt 3
sanguine, sXgn 3
satisfaction, sTsshn 3
satisfy, sT 3
savior, sV
saw, S 1
say, S
scale, sKl
scent, sXt
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
2G1
school, sKl 3
science, S*Ns
scission, sZhn 1
screen, sKrn 1
scripture al, sKr 1
sea, S 1
secession, sShn
second, sKnt
secret, sKrt 1
secure, sKr 3
secured, sKrt 3
see, S 1
seize, S 1
seized, Sst 1
self, s
selfish, sSh
selves, ss
send, sNt
sent, sNt
separate, sPrt 3
separation, sPrshn 3
session, Sshn
settee, sTe
several, sV
sew, S
shall, Sh
shalt, Sht
she, Sh T
shelter, Shltr
short, Shrt 1
shorter, Shrti
should, Sht 3
shoulder, Shlti
shouldst, Shtst v
significance, sGne> J
signification, sGshn 1
significative, sGf 1
signify-icant, sG 1
similar-ly-ity, sM 1
simple-y-icity, sMp 1
singular-ly-ity, sNg 1
situation, sTShn
six-th, sKs 1
size, Ss 1
sized, Sst 1
skill, sKl 1
skillful, sKlf
smoother, sMtr 3
snow, sNo
so, S
solitary, sL'TR
some, sM
somebody, sMpt 1
somewhat, sMt
soon, sN 3
sound, sNt 3
sow, S
sow(n.), S 3 ou
speak, sP 1
special, sP
speech, sP 1
spirit, sPrt 1
spoke, sP
spoken, sPn.
spread, sPrt
squall, sKwoL
squawk,
squeak, sKw 1
squeal, sKwL
staid, staD
stamp, stMp 3
state, stT
station, stShn
stayed, staD
262
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
steady, stD
stipend, stPnt 1
"stone-y, stN
stow, sTo
strange-ness, sTrn
strangely, sTrJl
stranger, sTrJr
strongest, sTrnst
strength, sTtrTh
strengthen, sTrThn
strife-ve, sTrf l
stump, stMp
stupendous-ly-ness, stPnt
subject, sB
subjection, sBshn
subjective, sBf
subordinate, sB 1
subordination, sBshn 1
suqscribe-er, sBsKr
subscription, sBsKrshn
substantial, sBsTn
such, sC
sue, S 3
suggest-ed, sJst
suit, saT
sulphate, sLFT
sulphite, sL^Flt
seen, sN
supply, sPl 1
support, sPRt
suppress, sPrs 1
suppressed, sPrst 1
suppression, sPrshn 1
sure, Shr
surprise, sPrs 3
surprised, sPrst 3
suspension, ssPn
system, ssT
taboo, T 3 Ba
Tartar, T 3 Rtr
telephone-y-ic-al, Tlf
telephoned, Tlft
tell, Tl
tempt, TMpt
than, Dhn
thank, Th 3
that, Dht 3
the, + 1 .
thee, Dh 1
their, Dhr
theirs, Dhrs
theistic, Ths'K
them, Dh
themselves, Dhss
then, Dhn
there, Dhr
therein, Dhrn
these, Dhs 1
they, Dh
thine, Dhn 1
thing, Ng 1
think, Th
third, Thrt
thirst, Thrst
this, Dhs
those, Z 3
thou, Dh 3
though, Dh 3
thought, Tht 1
thousand-th, Th 3
three, Thr
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXTAL.
263
thrice, Thrs 1
through, Thr 3
throughout, Thrt 3
thus, Dhs 3
thy, Dh 1
thyself, Dhs 1
till, Tl
time, T 1
to, T
together, Gtr
told, Tit
too, T
toward, Trt
tract, TrKt
trade, Trt
trader, TrtR
train, Trn
traitor, Trtr
transcribe, TrsKB
transcript, TrsKPt
transcription, TrsKPshn
transfer, TrsFr
transgress, TrsGs
transgression, TrsGshn
transmission, TrsMshn
true, Tr 3
truly, Tr 3 L
truth, Tr
truthful, Trf
try, Tr 1
turf, Trf
turn, TRn
twelve-th, Twf
U
unanimous, Nn 3 Ms
unavailable, NVLB1
unavoidable, NWB1
undefined, NDf 'Nt
under, Nt
undoubted, NtTt 3
union, Nn 3
universe, Vrs
unless, Ms
unsealed, nsKlt
unschooled, nsKlt 3
unscreened, nsKrnt 1
unskilled, nsKlt 1
unsuppressed, nsPrst 3
until, Tl 3
up, P
upon, Pn
upper, uPr
us, S 3
use(n.), S 3
use(v.), Z 3
used, Zt 3
usher, Shr
usual, Zh
utterly, TrL
V
valiant, V 3 Lnt
valuation, Vlshn 3
value, VI 3
veracity, VRsT
very, Vr
violent, V^Lnt
virtue, Vrt
voluble, V'LBl
voracity, VoRsT
voter, Vtr
204
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
w
wait, Wt
was, Z
watch, C 1
watcher, Cr 1
watchful, Cf 1
water, Wtr 1
way, W
we, w 1
weather, TFtr
Aveigh, W
weighed, TFb
well, wit
went, Wnt
were, ivR
wert, wRt
what, T 1
whatever, Tf 1
when, nW
whence, nWns
where n?cR
wherein, H?/>Rn
whereof, H?/:Rf
whether, H IFtr
which, C
whichever, Cf
while, HM^L 1
whither, H TFtr 1
Avho, HU
whoever, Vr 3
whom, HU
whose, HUS
why, nW 1
wide, TFt 1
wider, TFtr 1
will, L
wilt, Lt
wish, Sh 1
wished, Sht 1
wisher, Shr 1
with, Dh 1
withal, Dhl 1
wither, TFtr 1
withheld, Dhlt
withhold, Dhlt
within, Dhn 1
won, Wn
word, u'Rt
world, Lt
would, TFt 3
write, Rt 1
writer, Rtr 1
yard,
yea, Y
year, yR 1
ves, Ys
yet, Yt
yield, Ylt 1
you, Y
your, yU
yours, 7/Rs
yourself,
yourselves, ?/Rss
youth, Th 3
Z
zest, Zst
zither, Ztr 1
zithern, Ztrn 1
zone, Zn
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 265
LESSON 34.
PREFATORY REMARKS ON THE VOCABULARY
413. The following vocabulary contains a number
of semigraphs (see sec. 383) and other words in ad-
dition to those in the preceding five lists, whose forms
might not readily occur to the learner. Occasionally,
also, for completeness, a word from one of these lists
is included. The vocabulary is arranged in alphabeti-
cal order for convenience of reference when writing.
(See sec. 411.)
414. As the past tense of those verbs mentioned
in section 274, and of verbs like those in the first part
of section 365 is usually written with the same form as
for the present it is not usually given. The same
course is pursued with the past tense of verbs whose
present ends in a circle or loop. (See see's. 125 and
272.) In other cases generally only the past tense of
irregular verbs is represented. Again adverbs ending
in Ly or Y of the same nature a> those in section 367
are usually omitted.
415. Where two forms for a word are presented
the first is usually preferred.
416. When a shorter form is iven after a longer
~ o
one it generally indicates that it may be employed if
it occurs more frequently than usual.
417. The list is divided into six parts, the first part
beginning at A, and the others at D, I, M, Q and U,
respectively, at Lessons 35, 36, 37, 38 and 39. It
should be memorized so that any word in it may
usually be written at once on being heard. This
should bo done before proceeding to the next chapter.
THE PHOXOUKAl'HJO MANUAL.
418.
VOCABULARY.
Aarhuus, R 3 S
abandon, BnDn
abandonment, BnDMnt
abed, Bt
abhor, B'hR or BUI
al)ility, Bit 1
abject-ly, BM
ablative, BltV
al)olish, BLSh
abolished, BLSht
abolition, BLshn
abolitionism, BLshnsM
abolitionist, BlshnSt
abortive, BRtV
abortively, BRtVl
Abraham, BruaM
Abrarn, BrM
abroad, Br'D or Brt 1
abscissa, BsS
absolute, Bs 3 Lt
absurd, BsRt
accommodate-d, -MDt 1
accommodation, -MDShn 1
accompany,
accomplice, -Pis 1
accomplish, -PPSh
accordance, Krt * N s
accountability, Knt 8 Bt
accountable, Knt 2 B
accouter, Ktr 3
accumulate, KMLt
achievement, Cf'.Mnt
acme, K 3 M
acquiesce, KwS
acquire, Kw 1
acquirement. Kw J Mnt
acquisition, K\vs.s7/// ]
acquisitiveness, KwsTfXs
acute, KT 3
ad. (for advertisement),
a I) 3
ade(|iiate, D 3 Kvvt
adhere, I) 1 !*
adhesive, DsV
adhibit, D 3 Bt
adhort, D 3 Rt
adhortatory, D 3 RTtR
adjourn, Jrn
adjournment, JrMnt
adjudge, J 3 J
adjust, Jst
adjustment, JsMnt
administer, D^lNstr
administrate, D^MnsTrt
administration, I) 1 MnsTr-
shn
administrative, D 1 MnsTrf
administrator, DMsH or
D'MnsTrtr
administratrix, DMnsKs
or DMnsTrtKs
admissable, DMsB
advancement, Ds 3 Mnt
advantageously, JsL
advantageousness, JsNs
adventure, DfNtr
adventurer, DfNtrR
adverb, DVrB
adverse, D 3 Vrs
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
207
advert, D 3 Vrt
advertiser, L)s 3 R
affectionate, FKshnT
affidavit, Ft 3 Vt
afore, YJ?
aforesaid, FA'sl)
afternoon, FtNn
afterward, FtWrt
agency, JnS or JNS
Aguinaldo, GwnLD
aha, u^Hji
Ahab, AB
ahead, AD 3
ahem, ahM
ahoy, aiW
Aiken, Kn
Akenside, KnsD
akimbo, -B 1
Alabama, LBM
Alabaman, LBMn
alarm, LrM or Lr 3
Alaska, LsK
Alaskan, LsKn
alchemy, LKM
alcohol, LKL
alembic, LMpK
alert, LRt
Alger, LJr
Alhambra, LMBr
alien, Ln
alike, aL^K
alimentary, L 3 MntR
alkali, L'KL
all, Ftoid 1 or L 1
alligator, LGtr
alhiight, FtoidNt 1
all-wise, LMVs
Almighty, L x Mt or Ftoid
Mt 1
alphabet, LFBt
already, Wtoid 1 , Lrt^Lr 1
or LrD
also, L^
although, FtoidDh 3 or
L'Dh
altogether, Gtr 1 or L^Gtr
aluminium, LMnM
alway, L 1 ^
always, L ! Ws
amanuensis, MNNss
amateur, MTr
ambassador, MpsDr
ambassadress, MpsDrs
amber, Mpr 3
ambidexterous, MpDKs-
Trs
ambient, Mpnt 3
ambiguous, MpGs
ambition, Mpshn 1
ambitious, MpShs 1
Amboy, Mp 3
ambrosia, MBrZh
ambrozial, MBrZAL
amen, Mn
amendment, MntMnt
America, MrK
American, MrKn
amiable, MB!
among, MNg
amongst, MNgst
amplification, JSIplFshn 3
amplify, M[>1F 3
amputate, MpTt 3
anaconda, N'D 1
268
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
analogy, N1J
analysis- es, Nlss 1
analyze, Nls 1
anarchist, NrKst
anarchy, NrK
ancestor, NSstr
ancestry, NSsTr
anchor, NgKr
anchoret, NgKrT
anchorite, NgKrT 1
ancient, Nshnt
ancillary, NsLR
anew, NFtoid
angelic, J1K
angelical, J1K1
Anglo-Saxon, Ngl 3 ssN
anguish, NgSh
angular, Ngl 3 R
angularity, NgPRT
anhelation, NhLshn
anhydrous, NhDrs
anility, NLT
animadvert, NMDVrt
ankle, NgKl
annex, N 3 Ks.
annexation, N 3 Ks-sA^
annexed, N 3 Kst
annihilate, NhLt 1 , NLt 1
or Nit 1
annihilation, NhLshn J ,
NLshn 1 or Nlshn 1
anniversary, NVrsR
announce, Nns 3
announced, N 3 Nst
announcement, N 3 NsMnt
annoyance, N a Ns
annul, NZ
annunciate, NNSht
annunciation, NnssAw or
NNShshn
answer, NsR
antarctic, NtR 3 KK
antecedent, NtsDnt
antedate, NtDt
anther, Ntr 3
anthracite, NtrsT
anticipate, NtsPt
anticipation, NtsPshn
antidote, NtDt 3
antipathy, NtPTh
antipode, NtPd
antique, Nt J K
antiquity, NtKwT 1
antiseptic, NtsPtK
anti-slavery, NteLVr
anybody, NBt 1
anyhow, N^HO^
any-one, N J Wn
anything, N J NG
anyway, N a W
anywhere, N
apace, Ps 3
apart, Prt 3
apathy, P 3 Th
apathetic, P 3 ThtK
apathetical, P 3 ThtKl
apparition, Prshn 1 or
aP x Rshn
appendage, Pnt 3 J
appertain, Pr 3 Tn
applicable, P1 3 K
appreciate, PrSht
appreciation, PrShn
appreciative, PrShtV
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
appreciatively, PrShtVl
appreciator, PrShtr
appreciatory, PrShtR
apprentice, PrnTs
approbative, Pr 3 Bf
approbati veness, Pr 3 Bf Ns
appropriate, PrPrt
April, PrL
arbiter, RBtr
arbitrarily, RBtRRL
arbitrary, RBtRR
arbitrate, RBtRt
arbitration, RBtRshn
arbitrator, RBtRtr
archangel, RKJ1
arctic, R 3 KK
ardor, Rtr 3
arduous, RDS
Ariel, RL
arise, aRs 1
aristocrat-ic-al, RsTKrt
arithmetical, RfThL
arithmetician, RfThshn
Arizona, RZN
Arizonan, RZNn
Arkansan, R 3 'ZnorR 3 Zn
Arkansas, R 3 'Zs or R 3 Zs
Arkansaw, R 3 'S or R 3 S
Arkansawan, R 3 'SN or
i R 3 SN
Arlington, RLNgt or
RINgt
arrange, RnJ
arterial, R 3 TR1
arterialization, R 3 TRlssA,
arterialize, R 3 TRls
artery, R 3 TR
artesian, R J Tshn
Arthur, Rtr 1
article, RtKl
articulate, RtKlt
artificial, RtFtfAl
artillerist, RtLRst or
RtLrst
artillery, RtLR or RtLr
artisan, Rts 3 N
artist, Rtst 3 or RTst
artistic, RTsK
artistical, RTsKl
asafetida, Si Ft
ascend, Snt
ascendant, SntNt
ascension, SNshn
ascent, Snt
ascertain, SRtN
ascetic, STK
asceticism, STssM
ashore, Shr 3
asleep, SLP
aspirate, SPRt
assail, SL
assailer, SLR
assay, S
assayed, SD
assay er, SR
assemble-y, SMpl
assent, Snt
assets, STs
asseverate, SVrt
associate, SSht or SxS^t
associated, SShTt or StfATt
association, Ssshn or
SShshn
assuage, SJ
270
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
assuager, SJr
assume, S 3 M
assumer, S 3 Mr
asteroid, StrD
asthma, S 3 M
Astor, Str 3
Astoria, STR
astound, St 3 Nt
astragal, StrGl
astral, StrL
astringent, StrNJnt
astrolabe, StrLB
astrologer, StrLJr
astronomer, StrNR or
StrR
astronomical, StrNKl
astronomy-ic, StrN
atheism, ThsM
atheist, Thst
atheistic, ThsK
atheistical, ThsKl
athwart, ThwRt
Atlanta, Tln 3 T or TLnT
Atlantic, Tlnt 3 KorTLntK
atmosphere, TMsFr
attach, T 3 C
attain, Tn
attend, Tnt 3
attendance, Tnt 3 Ns
attendant, Tnt 3 Nt
attention, T 3 Nshn
attentive, Tnt 3 V
attentively, Tnt 3 VL
attenuate, T 3 XT
attenuation, T 3 NShn
attitude, T 3 iTt
attorney, TrN
attractor, Trtr 3
auditor-y, Dt J R
August, Gst 1
Aurora, RR
austere, S^R
austerity, S a Trt
authentic, ThntK
authenticity, ThntSt
auto, T 1
autobiograph-y-ic-al, T 1 -
BG
autobiographer, T'BGr
autobiographist, T J BGst
autograph-y-ic-al, T 5 G or
T'Gf
autographer, T'Gr
autographist, T'Gst
automobe, TMp or TMB
automobile, TM or TMB1
avenge, VJ
average, VrJ
avert, Vrt 3 or aVrt. (See
vert)
avocation, V 3 Kshn
avoid, a-Vt 1
avouch, a-V 3 C
avow, aAV 3
awed, oD 1
awes, os or oZ 1
awe-struck, oisTrK
awful, Fl 1
awfulness, Fl a Ns
awing, o- or
awning, N J Ng
axis, Kss 3
ayes, as or aZ
ays, is 1
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
271
B
Bahama, BM
bamboo, B 3 Mp
banana, BNN
banish, BnSh
bank, B 3 Ng
banker, B 3 NgR
bankrupt, B 3 NgPt
bankruptcy, B 3 NgS
barb, BrB
barbarian, BrBrn
barbarity, BrBrt
Barbary, BrBR
barbecue, BrBK
barber, BrBr
barely, BRL
bargain, BrGn
bark, I>RK
barley, BRL
barrel, BR1
battle, Bt 3 L
bdellium, DIM
beadle, Bt'L
l>eautiful, Bt 3 Fl or B 3 Tf
beautify, Bt 3 F or B 3 TF
beauty, B 3 T
became, BKM
become, BK
Bedouin, BtWn
beehive, B ! V
beehouse, B*S
beetle, Bt'L
beforehand, RNt or BfNt
beginner, Gn'R
beginnings, gn 01
Behan, BN
behave, BV
behavior, BVR
behead, BD
beheld, BLt
behemoth, BMTh
behest, BhSt
behindhand, Bnt'Nt
behold, BLt
beholden', BLtN
beholder, BLtr
behoof, B 3 F
behoove, B 3 V
being B J Ng
benefaction, BNfFshn
benefactor, BNfFtr
benefactress, BNfKs
benefice, BNFs
beneficed, BNFst
beneficeless, BNFsZs
beneficence, BfNs or BN-
FsNs
beneficent-ly, BfNt or BN-
FsNt
beneficential, BfNxS'/il or
BNFsN^Al
beneficial, BfL or BNF-
Skl
beneficialness, BfLNs or
beneficiary, BfR or BN-
FShr
jeneficiate, BNFSht
jeneficiation, BNFShshn
enefit, BNFt
)enefitter, BNFtr
jenevolent-ly-ence, BNV
)enight, B J Nt
benign, BNn
272
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
benignant-ly-ity, BNg
Benjamin, BnJ
Bennett, BNt
beryl, BR1
beset, BsT
beside, BsD
bespeak, BsP
bespoke, BsP
bespoken, BsPn
bethel, BThl
better, Btr or BtK
betterment, BtrMnt,
BtriMnt or BtRMnt
between, Twn 1 or Bt*Wn
betwixt, B^Kwst
bewail, BwL or BwL
be weep, B*WP
bewilder, B^Ltr or Bw 1
Ltr
bewitch, B^w-C
bewitcher-y, B^w-CR
bewitchingly, B^w-CNgl
bias, B 1 S
biased, B'St
Bible, BB1
bijou, B 3 Zh
Bimbley, BMB1
binder, BNtr
bindery, Bnt J R
biograph-y-ic-al, B J G
biographer, B*Gr
biographize, B J Grs
boa, B
boaconstrictor, B'sTrtr
boastful, BsFl
bodiless,
bodily,
body, B'D
bohea, B 1
Bohemia, B 1 ^!
bois, Bw 1
bolder, Bltr or BltR
bolt, BLt
bolter, BLtr
bombast, BMpst
bombastic, BMpsK
bombastical, BMp.s'Kl
Bombay, B^lp
bonnet, BNt
border, BRtr
bother, Btr 1 or BDhr
botheration, Btr J Shn or
BDhrshn
bothersome, Btr^M or
BDhrsM
bottle, Bt^
bountiful, BnTf
bountifulness, BnTfNs
bounty, BnT
brachygraph-y-ic-al, Br-
Kg
brachygrapher, BrKGr
brachygraphist, BrKGst
brethren, Brn 3 or Br 3
bribe, Br!B
briber-y, Br^r
bridewell, Brt^L
brighter, Brtr 1
brightest, Brtst 1
Britain-on, BrTn
Britannia, BrTN
British, Br^Sh
broader, BrDr
broadest, BrDst
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
273
Brompton, BrMptN
brotherhood, BrtrD
brother-in-law, BrNl
Buena Vista, BNVsT or
BwNVsT
builder, Bltr 1 or Bit 1 R
burden, BrDn
burdensome, BrDsM
Burlington, BrLNgt
busied, B*Zt
busier, Bs*R
busiest, Bs^t
busily, Bs a L
business, Bss 1 or Bs^s
busy, B'Z
busybody, Bs^t
Butterick, BtrK
bystander, B^TtR or
Bst'Ntr
byway, B J W
C
Caesar, SsR
Cahawba, KB 1
Cahoone, K 3 N
calculate, KlKlt
calculi, K1K1
calculus, KlKls
calends, KINts
calendar er, KINtr
Calhoun, KIN
California, Klf 1
Calif ornian, Klf'N
cam, K a M
camber, -Br 3
cambist, -Bst 3
cambistry, -Bs 3 Tr
camblet, -Bit 3
Cambo, -B 3
Cambodia, -BD
camboge, -B 3 J
Cam boy, -B 3
Cambria, -Br
Cambrian, -Brn
cambric, -BrK
Cambridge, -BrJ
Cambyses, -Bss 1
Camden, -Dn 3
came, KM
camel, KM1
cameleon, KMLn
camellia, KML
camelopard, KMlPrt
cameo, K 3 M
camera, KMR
Cameron, KMrn
camis, KMs
camisade, KMsD
camisado, KMsDo
camlet, -Lt 3
camomile, KMML
camp, K 3 Mp
campaign, -Pn
campaigner, -PnR
campaniform, -PNF
camper, K 3 Mpr
Camperdown, -PrDn
campestral, -PsTrL
campestrian, -PsTrn
cam'phene, -Fn 3
camphine', -Fn 1
camphor, -Fr 3
camphorate, -Fr 3 T
camphoric, -Fr 3 K
27 I
TIIE PHONOGRAPHIC MANTAT..
Cumpi, -P
campion, -Pn 3
Campo, -P 3
campus, -P 3
Canada, KND
Canadian, KNDn
canaille, KXZ
canakin, KNKn
canal, KN1
canard, Kn 3 Rt
canary, KnR
cancel, -sL 3
cancellation, -sLshn 3
cancer, -sR 3
cancriform, -KrF 3
cancrine, -Krn 3
candelabra, -DlBr
candelabrum, -DiBrM
candent, -Dnt 3
candid, -Dt 3
candidacy, DtS or KntDS
candidate, Dt, DtiT or
KntDt
candidateship, Dt'.Sh, Dtt
TShorKntDttSh
candidature, DtTr, DttTtr
or KntDtr
candle, -Dl 3
candle-light, -DPLt
candlemas, -DPMs
candle-stick, -Dlst 3 K
candor, -Dr 3
candy, -D 3
cane, Kn
canescent, KNsNt
Canfield, -F'Zt
canicnla, KNKL
canicular, KXKLr
canicule, KNK1
canine, KNn
canis, KNs
canister, KNstr
canker, -Kr 3
cannel, -Nl 3
cannibal, -XB1
Cannock, -NK
cannon, -Nn
cannonade, -NND
cannoneer, -NnR
cannonry, -NnR
cannular, -NLr
canny, -N 3
canoe, K 3 X
canon, KnN
canonic, KnXK
canonical, KnNKl
Canopus, KNPs
canopv, KNP
Cantab, -TB
Cantabrian, -TBrn
Cantabrigian, -TBrJn
cantalever, -TLVr
cantaloupe, -TLP
cantata, -TT
cantatrice, -TtrC or TTtrC
canteen, -Tn 1
canter, .Tr 3
Canterbury, Kt'.BR
canthus, -Ths 3
canticle, -TK1
can tie, -Tl 3
cantlet, KntLt
canto, -T
Can 'ton, -Tn 3
THK PHONOGRAPHIC! MANUAL.
Canton', -TV
cantoon, -Tn 3
Canute, K 3 Nt
canvas, Vs 3
canvass, Vs 3
canvasser, VsR
cany, KN
canyon, -Yn 3
canzone, -ZN
can/onet, -ZXt
capital-ol, KPtL
captain, KPt 3
captaincy, KP 3 tT
captainry, KPt 3 Nr
captainship, KPt 3 tSh
captivate, KPtVt
captive, KPf 3 or KPtV
captivity, KPft 3 or KPt-
VT
carefulness, KrfNs
caricature, KrKTr
carol, KR1
Carolina, KrLN
Carolinan, KrLNn
Caroline, KrLn
Carpenter, KrPntR
carriage, KRJ
casual, KsL or KZhl
casuality, KsLT or KZhlT
casuist, KsSt or KZhst
casuistic, KsStK or KZhsK
casuistry. KsSTr or KZhs-
Tr
cathedral, KThtrL
catholic-ism, KTh 3
cattle, KtL 3
caudal, KtL 1
caused, KsD 1 or Kzd 1
cauter, Ktr 1
cauterism, Ktrs 1 ^!
cauterization, Ktrsshn*
cauterize, Ktrs 1
cauterized, KtrsD 1
cautery, KtR 1
celestial, sLsL
celestial ize, sLsLs
centigrade, sNtGrt or sNt
central, sNtrZ
centralization, sXtrZss/m
century, sNTR
certificate, sRtFt
certification, sRtFshn
certify, sRtF
chairmanship, CrnSh
', chamber, CMpr
i chancel, Cs 3 L or CNs/,
chancellor, Cs 3 LR
chancery, Cs 3 R *
change, CJ or C
changeable, CJB1
changer, CJr
chapter, CPtr(C 3 Pin
Bible references.)
char, C 3 R
characteristical, KrKsKl
characterization, KrKs6'/m
characterize, KrKs
characterized v KrKst
charge, CrJ or C 3
charger, CrJr
i chargeable, CrJBl
charta, KrT
chartaceous, KrTShs
' chart, Crt 3
276
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
charter, Crt 3 R
charterer, Crt 3 RR
charter-party, Crt 3 RP
chartism, Crt 3 sM
chartist, Crtst 3
chartometer, Crt 3 Mtr
chattel, Ct 3 L
Chauncy, CnS
Cheathet, C'Tht
cheerfulness, Crf'Xs
chemical, KMK1
Chicago, ShKG
Chihuahua, OVW or C\v-
W
chill-y, C'L
choler, KLr
choyer, C'R or C l vR
churn, CRn
Cicero, sSR
circumstantiate, sTn 3 Sht
circumvent, sR'Vnt
cissoid, SsD
citator, sTtr 1
cite, sT 1
citizen, sTn 1
citizenry, sTn u .R
citizenship, sTn u .Sh
city, sT 1
cittern, sTRn
classification, KIsFshn
clearly, K1RL or K1R1
client, Klnt 1
cling-y, KPXg
clinker, KINgKr
clothier, Kltr
Co. (for company), K
cognac, -Y'K ,
cognate, K'GXl
cognomen, K'GNMn
cognizable, -Xsli 1
cognizance, -Xs ' Xs
cognizant, -Xs'Xt
cognizee, -XZ 1
cognizor, -XsR 1
cohasset, KhSt
coherent, KhRnt
cohesion, KHf'Zhn
cohesive, Knf's\'
cohort, KhRt
Cohoes, KhZ
colder, Kltr or KltR
collar, KLr
collateral, KLtrL
colleague, Kl'G
collectedness, KPKXs
collectible, KIKBl
collection, Kl'Kshn
collective, KPKf
collectively, KPKfL
collector, Kl'Ktr
collectorate, KIKtrT
collectorship, KIKtrSh
college, KIJ
collide, KLt 1
collocation, KIKshn
Col. (for Colonel;, Kl 1
colonel, KrNl
colony, KPN
Coloradan, Kin 3
Colorado, Kl 3
Coloradoan, K1 3 X'
Columbia, KIMp
columbiad, KIMpt
Columbian, KIMpn
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
277
Columbus, KIMps
column, Kl'M
com, K ] M
coma, KM
Comanche, KJVlnC
comatose, KMTs
comb, KM
combat, -Bt 1
combative, -B^V
combatively, -fit 1 VI
combination, -l^Nshn
comedian, KMDn
comedy, KMD
comely, K'.L or KL
comeliness, KiLXs or
KLNs
comer, K'.R or KR
comestible, -StBl
comet, K'Mt
cometh, KtTh or KTh
comfort, -Frt
comforter, -Frtr
comfrey, -Fr
comic, KMK
comity, KMT
comma, -M 1
command, -Mnt 3
commeasureable, -MZhrB
or -Zhr'B
oommemorable, -MMBl
commemorate, -MMRt
commemoration, -MM-
Rshn
commemorative, -MM-
RtV
commemorator, -MMRtr
commencement, -MnsMnt
or -MnsiMnt
commenced, -MNst
commences, -MNss (See
sec. and eng. 202.)
commend, -Mnt
comment, -Mnt 1
commerce, -Mrs
commercial, -MrShl
commingle, -M^gl
commingled, -M^Ngit
commiserate, -MsRt
commiseration, -MsRshn
commissariat, -MsRT
commissary, -MsR
commission, -Mshn 1
commissioner, -Msh^R
commissure, -MShr
commit, -Mt 1
committee, -Mt 1 or MT
commix, -MKs 1
commixed, -M
commixture, -
commodore, -MDr or
Mtr 1
common, -Mn 1
commoner, -MnR 1
commonest, -M^st
commonly, -MnL 1
commonness, -Mn a Ns
commonplace, -MNPls or
MnMPls
commonwealth, -MnL^Th
commotion, -Mshn
communicate, -M 3 NKt
communication,' -M 3 N-
Kshn
278
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
commute, -Mt 3
commuter, -Mtr 3
commutual, -Mt 3 L
companion, -PnN
company, PX (Sec Co.)
compare, -Pr
comparison, -PrsN
comparative, -PrtV
comparitively, PrtVl
compartment. -PrtMnt
compliment, PIMnt
complimentary, PIMntR
Compton, KMptN
comrade, -Rt 1
Comstock, -stK 1
con, Kn 1
concave, -Kf
concavity, -Kft
conceal, -sL 1
concenter, sNtr
concentrate, -sNtrT
concentration, sXtrshn
concentrative, sNtrTf
concentrativeaess, sXtr-
TfNs
concentric, -sNtrK
concentrical, -sXtrKl
concentricity, sNtrst
concert, sRt
concession, -Sshn
conch, KN^K
concomitant, -Tnt
concomitantly, --TtL or
TnttL
Conde, -D 1
Condon, -Dn 1
condor, -Dr 1
cone, Kn
Conestoga, KNsTG
confer, -F7?
couferable, -FRBl
conferee, -FR
conference,, FRns
conferential, -FRn
Confucius, -F*S7iS
conge, -J 1
conger, -Gr 1
Congo, -G 1
congress, -Grs
congressional, -GrshnL
Congreve, .Grf 1
congruous, -GrS
conic, KnK
conical, KnKL
conjunction, -JXgshn
con' jure, -Jr 1
conjure', -Jr 3
Conkey,' -K 1
Conk ling, -KlNg
connascence, -Xs 3 Xs
connascent, -Xs 3 X t
connate-ure, -Xt
connatural, -X'tZ
Connaught, -X't 1
Connecticut, -X'tKt
Connecticutter, -X^tKtr
connect, -XKt
connection, -X'Kshn
Connell, -XI 1
Connellsville, NlsVZ or
NlsV
Connelly, -XZ 1
Conner, -X'r 1
connex, -XKs
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
279
connive, -XT 1
connoisseur, -XsR
connubial, -NBL
conodont, KXDnt
conoid, Knl)
conominee, KXMX
Conrad, -Rt 3
Conroy, -R 1
consequence, sKns 1
consequent-ly, "sKnt 1
consequential, sKn 1
consertion, sRshn
conservable, sRBl
conservableness, sRBlns
eonservance, -sRVns
conservancy, -sRtV
conservant-ly, sRVnt
conservation, -sR or -sR-
Yshn
conservational, -sRL or
sRVshnL
conservatism, -sRVteM
conservative, sRVt or
sRVtV
conservatively, -sRVtVl
conservativeness, -sRVti-
Vns
conservator, -sRVtr
conservatory, -sRftR
conservatrix, -sRtKs
conserve, sRf
conserver, -sRfR
conservership, -sRfRSh
conservingly, sRf XgZ
consignment, -sN'Mnt
consist, ssT 1
consistence, ssTns 1
consistencies, ssTnss 1
consistency, ssTn 1
consistent-ly, ssTnt 1
consonance, -sN^'s
consonant, sN 1 Nt
consort, -sRt 1
conspicuous-ly-ness, sP 1 Ks
constable, -stBL
constablery, -stBLR
constabulary, -stB 3 LR
constant, -stNt 3
Constantinople, stNtNPl
orstXtPl
constitutionality, stTshn 3 -
T or stTshnLT
constriction, -sTrshn 1
constrictor, -sTrtr 1
construct, sTrKt
constructiveness, sTrf Xs
consuetude, sT l D or
sWiTt
consume, sM 3
consumer, sMR 3
consumptive, -sMptV
contend-t, -Tnt
contention, -TXshn
contentment, -TtMnt
continent, Tn'Nt
continental, Tn J NtZ
continence, Tn J Ns
contingent, -TnJnt
continual, TNZ
continuance, TNNs
continuant, TNNt
continuation, TXShn
continue, TX
continuity, T'.Xt
280
THE PHOXOunArilU' M. \\UAL.
continuous, TXs
continuously, TXsZ
contort, -T^Rt
contortionist, -T l Rshn St
contra, -Tr 1
contraband, KtiBnt 3
con'tract, Tr'Kt
contract', Tr 3 Kt
contract'or, Trtr 3
contradance, Kt'. Dns
contradict, KtiDKt
contravene, KtiVn 1
contravention, EtfVNslin
controversial, VrShl
controversialist, VrShlst
controversy, VrS
controvert, KtiVrt
convey, -V
conundrum, KnXtrM
convent, -Vnt
convention, -VXshn
conventionality, -VXshn-
LT
convert, -Vrt 1
convolve, -V1V
Conway, W
cook, K 3 K
cooperate, KPrt 1
coral, KR1
v-orn, Krn 1
cornelian, KrNln
corneous, Ki^Ns
corner, KrnR 1
corner-stone, KrnR^Tn
cornice, Ki^Xs
corn-stalk, Krn 1 sTK
corona, KRN
coroner, Kr 3 Xr or KRXr
corps, Kr
correction, Kr J Ksh n
corrective, Ki^KTf
correctness, Kr ' K Xs
correspond, Krs'Pnt
corrupt, Ki -1 Pt
coterie, KtR
council, -sL 3
counsel, -sL 3
countenance, -Tn 3 X*s
countenanced, -Tu'Xst
countenances, -Tn 3 Xss
counter, -Tr 3
counteract, Kt'.Kt 3
counterirritant, KtiRTnt
counter-man, KttMn
countersign, KtisX 1
countersink, KtisX^g 1 !^
countess, KntS 3
countryman, KMn
countryseat, K'sT
county-court, KntKt
county-seat, KntsT
courage, KrJ
courteous, KrTs
courthouse, Krt 2 S
covenant, KYnX't
Covington, KfX^gt
cowherd, K 3 hRt
cowhide, KD 3
create, KrT
creative, KrTf
creator, KrTr
credential, KrDn
creosote, KrsT
cricket, KrKT 1
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
281
cricketer, Kr'Ktr
criminal-ate, Ki^Mn
critic-ique, Kr'K or Krt 1 -
<K
critical, Kr^Kl
criticalness, Krt J KlNs
criticise, Krt'sZ
criticised, Krt^sZt
criticiser, Krt 1 sZR
criticism, Krt^sZM
cucumber, K 3 KMpr
cultivator, KltVtr
cumbent, -Bnt
cumber, -Br
Cumberland, -BrLnt
cumbersome, -BrsM
cumbrous, -Brs
cumin, KMn
Gumming, -MXg
cumulate, KMLt
cuneiform, KNRffM
cunning, -NNg
Cunningham, -NNgM
cute, Kt 3
Cuyahoga, KG
cylinder-ic, sLNtr
cylindrical, sLNtrKl
cymbal, sMpl 1
LESSON 35.
D
dahlia, D1Y or DL'.v
Dahomey, DM
Dakota, DKT
Dakotan, DKTn
Dalhousie, D1Z
dampen, D 3 Mpn
damper, D 3 Mpr
Danish, DnSh
dashed, D 3 Sht
dative, DTf
daughter-in-law, D 1 ]^!
David, DVt
davit, D 3 Vt
debenture, DB, DBXtr or
DBntE
decapitate-ion, DKPt
decease, DSs
deceased, DSst
December, DsMp or Ds-
MpR
decipher, D-s-Fr
decisive, Dss^
declaim, DK1M
declarable, D 3 K1B1
declaration, D 3 Klshn
declarative, D 3 KlTf
declaratory, D 3 K1TR
dedicate, DtKt
dedication, DtKshn
deduce, DDs
deduced, DDst
deducible, DDsBl
deduct, DDKt
deduction, DDKshn
defeat, D^t
defend, DfNt
defer, DfR
deference, DfRns
deferential, DfKn
deficience, DFshns
deficiency, DFtSh
282
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
deficient, DFshnt or D:-'
Fshnt
defied, D'Ft
defier, D'F^
defile, DFZ
defilement, DFLMnt
defiler, DFLr
defiling, DFLNg
define, DFn
definite, 'DfXt
deforin-ity, DFr
deformation, DFrshn
defrav, Dfr
defiant, D'FXt
defy, D'F
degeneration, DJshn
dehiscence, DsNs
dehort, D'Rt
dehortatory, D a RtTR
deified, D^Ft or D'FD
deify, D'F
Delawaran, DbrRn or Din
Delaware, DlwR or Dl
delectable, DIKtBl
delegate, DIGt
delegation, DIGshn
deleterious, DLtRs
deliberate, DIBrt
delicate, DIKt
delicious, DLShs
delight, Dlt 1
delinquency, Dln:K or
DlntKw
delinquent-ly, DIKnt
delirium, D1RM
delirious, DIRs
delude, Dlt 3
delusion, Dlshn 3
democracy', DMS
democratical, DMK1
demonstrative, DMnsTrf
Deneen, DXn
Denmark, DMrK
denote, DNt
denounce, DXns
denounced, DXXst
denouncement, DXXsMnt
dental, DnTL
denunciation, DXns-v//// or
DXn^Ashn
dependency, DPtD or
DPniD
derange-ment, DRnJ or
DrXJ
derelict, DRIKt
dereliction, DRlshn
derivation, Drf$An
derivative, Drft^V
derivatively, Drf t J VL
dervish, DrfSh
descriptiveness, SKrf^'s
desert, DsRt
desertion, DsRshn
deserve, DsRf
deservedly, DsRftL
deservedness, DsRftX's
deserver, DsRfR
designate-ion, DsG
desire-able, DsR
desirous, DsRs
desperate, DsPrt
despicable-ness, DsPK
despondency, DsP:D or
DsPntD
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
283
destination, DstXshn
destiny, DstN
destructiveness, DsTrfNa
desuetude, DsTt or DsWt-
Tt
detach, DtC
detachment, DtCMnt
detail, DTL
detailed, DTLt
detain, DTn
detect, DtKt
detection, DtKshn
detector, DtKtr
detective, DtKtV
deter, DtR
deteriorate, DtRRT
determent, DtRMnt
determinahility, DtrBt
determinable, DtrB
determinableness, DtrBns
determinacy, DtrS
determinant, DtrNt
determinate, DtrT
determinately, DtrTL
determinateness, DtrTns
determination, Dtrn or
DtrSh
determinative, DtrTf
determinator-y, DtrTR
determine-ing, Dtr
determined-ly, Dtrt
determiner, Dtr'.R
determinism, DtrZM or
DtrtsM
determinist, DtrsT or Dtr
St
detest, DTst
detestable, DTsBl
detestation, DTsTshn
detinue, DtN
detonate, DtNt
detour, Dt 3 R
detract, DTrKt
detractor, DTrtr
detraction, DTrshn
detractive, DTrf
detrimental, DTrMntL
develop-ment, DfP
deviate, DVT
devious, DVs
deviously, DVfcZ
devoid, D'Vt
devolve, DV1
devote, DVt
devotee, DVT
devotional, DVshnL
devour, DfR
devout, D 3 Vt
diadem, DDM
diagram, DfG
differentia, DfSh or DfRn-
Sh
diflerentiable, DfShB or
DfRnShB
differential, DfSh or DfRn
differentiate-d, DfSht or
DfRnSht
differentiation, DfShshn or
DfRnShshn
differentiator, DfShtr or
DfRnShtr
difficult-y, D 1 Kit or Kit
diffidence, DFDns
diffident, DFDnt
284
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
dignitary, D'GTR
dilapidale-ion, DIP
dilemma, DIM
diligent, DUnt
dilute, D 3 Lt
dilution, D 3 Lshn
diocese, DSs
diphthong, DfThXg
diplomat-ic, DPIMt
direct, DrKt
direction, Drshn
directory, DrTr
dirt, DRt
disadvantage, DsJ
disagree, DVGr
disappear, Ds*Pr ?
disappointment, DsPtMnt
disapprove-al, Ds 3 Prf
disarm, Ds 3 RM
disarmament, Ds'RMMnt
disaster, DsZtr
disasters-ous, DsZtrs
discourage, D-s-KrJ
discourse, DsKrs
discourteous, DsKrTs
disco ver-y, DsKf
discredit, D.s-KrDt
discreet, DsKrt
discrepant, D-s-KrPnt
discursive, D-sKrsV
disease, Dss 1 or DsZ
diseased, DssD or DsZt
disfranchise, D.sFrnCs
disfurnish, D-sFrnSh
disgorge, D.sOrJ
disgrace, D*Grs
dishearten, Ds-hlvtX or
DsRtN
dished, D'Sht
dishevel, DShVl
disinterested-ness. DsNts-
Tt
dismember, DsBr
disorganization, Ds 1 -
Gnsshn
disorganize, Ds^ns
disparage, DsPrJ
displeasure, DsZhr
disprove-al, DsPrf
disrespect, DsRsP
disrespectful, DsRsPf
dissatisfaction, D 3 sTsshn
dissatisfy, D 3 sT
dissever, DVr
dissimilarity, DsMLrt
dissimilar-ly, DsM
dissuade, DsD
dissuasion, 'Dsskn
dissuasive, DssV
distemper, DsTMpr
distincti ve-ly Ds^V
distinctiveness, Dst u .Vs
distinctness, Dst 1 Xs
distinguish, DstNg
distraction, Ds 3 Trshn
distribute, DsTrBt
district, DsTrKt
district attorney, DsTrX
District of Columbia,
DsKl
District of Columbian,
DsKln
district court, DsKt
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
285
disturb, DstrB
disuse, Ds 3 S
divers, DfRs
diverse, DVrs
divert, DVrt
divide, D'Vt
dividend, D'VDnt
divider, D a Vtr
divination, DWXshn
diviner, Df'R
diviniest, D^St
divinity, D'Vnt or I) 1 -
<Vnt
divinely, Df*L or Df'.L
divorce, DVrs
dolorous, DLRs
domestic, DMsK
dominion, DMnN
donate, DXT
Donohue, DX
door, DR
dot, Dt 1
dotage, DtJ
dote, Dt
downcast, Dn 3 Kst
downfall, Dn 3 FZ or D 3 F1
downfallen, D 3 FLn or D 3 -
Fln
downhearted, D 3 Rt
downright, D 3 lS T rt
downstairs, Dnstrs 3
downtrod-den, D 3 Trt
downward, Dn 3 Wt or D 3 -
dreadnaught, DrtXt
drum-head, DrMD
dutiful, D 3 Tf
dutifulness, I) 3 TfXs
duty, D 3 T
dyspepsia-tic, DsPP
dweller, DwK,
dwelling-house, DwS
dwelling-place, DwPls
E
earl-y, RL
earlier, RLr
earliest, RLst
earnest, R J Xst
earnestly, R
earnestness,
earth, RTh
earthly, RThL
Easter-day, Sti^D
eastward, St^Rtor St 1 -
Rt
eccentrical, KsXtrKl
eccentricity, KsNtrst
economic-y, KnM
editorial, DtRl
efficacious-ly-ness, FKuShs
efficience, Fshns 1
efficiency, F u .Sh
efficient-ly, Fshnt 1
eheu, e-nY 3
Eichenbaum, KnBM
eight, 8
elastic, LsK
elastical, ZsKl
elasticity, LsTst
elbow, LBo
Eldorado, LDrD
eleven, 11
elector, LKtr
280
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXC.U.
electric, LK
electrical, LKK1
electrician, LKShn
electricity, LKTrst
electrify, LKF
elegance, LGns
Elegancy, LiG
elegant, LGNt
elegantly, LGNtZ *
elemental, LMntL or'LMt-
L
elementary, LMntR
elephant, LFnt
elevator, LVtr
Elihn, Linr or LnY
Ellsworth, LsKTh
elongate, Xg J Gt
elongation, Ng'Gshn
eloquent, LKwnt
elsewhere, LsR
embank, MpXgK
embankment, MpXgKMnt
embark, MpRK
embarrass, MpRs
embellish, MpLSh
ember, ]\Ipr
emblazon, MBlsN
emblem, MB1M
emblement, MplMnt
em I )odimentj MpD ' Mnt
embody, MpD 1
emboss, Mps 1
embossed, Mpst 1
emerge, Mr 1 ,!
emigrate, MGrt
empanel, MpXl
emperor, MprR
emphatic, MFt
empiric, Mpr'K
empirical, Mpr'Kl
empiricism, Mpi^ssM
employ-ee, MP1
employer, MP1R
empress, MPrs
emj)tion, Mpshn
empty, MpT
enclosure, NKlsR
encumber, N'.Br
endeavor, NtVr
endless, Nt-Zs
endlessly, XtZsZ
endorse, XDrs
endorsee, NDrS
endorser, XDrsR
energy, NrJ
English, Ngl 1 or Ng 1
Englishman, XglMn 1 or
Ng'Mn
Englishmen, Ngln 1 or
Xgn ]
enhance, Xns
enhanced, XXst
enhancement, NNsMnt
enlace, Xls or XLs
enlacement, XlsMnt or
XLsMnt
enlard, 'X T Lrt 3
enlarge, X'.P
enlighten, XlTn
enlightenment, X'lTMnt
enlink, XPX'gK
enlist, Xlst 1 or XLst 1
enlistment, Xls 1 Mnt, Xls-
T 1 Mnt or XLs 'Mnt
THE PHONiHiKAPIlir MANl AL.
enliven, IS'lYn
enlivener, MVnR
enrage, NRJ
Knriffht, Nrt 1 , NrT or N-
Rt
enrole, NR1
enslave, nsLV
ensnare, NsNR
entangle, NtNgl
en'terance, Ntrns (See
en'trance )
enterprise, NtPrs
entertain, NtTn
entertainment, NtTmnt
enthusiasm, NThss 3 or X-
ThZsM
enthusiast. XThss 3 T or N-
Th Zst
enthusiastic-al, NThss 3 N-
Thss 3 K or NThZsK
en'trance, JS'Trns (This
\vord should be spelled and
pronounced en'terance.
See en'terance above.)
entrance', NTrns
entwine, NTwri 1
entwist, NTwst 1
enunciate, NNSht
envelope, TsVP
episcopalian, PsKn
episcopalianism, PsKnsM
e[)itaph, PtF
epitome, Pt J M
equality, KIT 1
c(]iialize, Kls 1
equalized, Klst 1
equanimity, K \vnMT
e<iuity, KwT
equivalence, KwV
erroneous, RNs
erfoneously, RNsZ
error, RR
erysipelas, RsPLs
escheat, SOT
escheator, SCtr
eschew, S 3 C
essay, 8
essayed, SD
essay er, SR
essayist, Sst
estate, 8Tt
esteem, S^AI
esthete, 8 ir riit
esthetic, SThtiK
i esthetical, SThtKl
; estimate, StMt
estop, St 1 !*
i estrange-ment, STrn
j Ethiop-ia, ThP
Ethiopian, ThPn
euchre, YKr
Euclid, YKlt
Euclidian, YKltN
Eugene, YJn
eulogium, YUM
eulogy, Y1J
eupepsy, Y-PPS
euphony, Y-F 3 N
Euphrates, FrTs or F-Fr
Ts
euphuism, y-F* 3 M
eureka, yRK or YRK
Europe, //RP
! European, //RPn
288
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
eustachian, Yst Kn
Euterpe, y-TRP
Euterpean, Y-TRPn
euthanasia, Y-ThNZ
evangelic, J1 3 K
evangelical, J1 3 K1
everlasting, V J Lst
everlastingly, V 1 LsL
evermore, V 1 Mr
everybody, VrBt
everyday, VrD
everyone, Vrn
everything, VrNg
everywhere, Vrnw?R
evidence, VtNs
evident, VtNt
evolve, V1V
ewe, Y 3 (See weigh.)
ewer, Y 3 R (See weigher. )
exacerbate, GssRBt
exact, sKt 3
exacter, sKtr 3
exaction, sKshn 3
exactitude, sKt 3 Tt
exactly, sKt 3 L
exactness, sKt 3 Ns
examinable, sMn 3 B
examination, sM 3 Nshn
examinee, sM 3 N
examiner, sMn 3 R
exasperate, GssPRT
exchequer, KsC
execute, KsKt
executer, KsKtr
execution, KsKshn
executioner, KsKshnR
executive, GsKf
executor, GsKtrorGsK
executrix, GsKKs
exempt, GsMpt
exemption, GsMpshn
exercise, KsRss
exercised, KsRssD
Exeter, KsTr
exhale, KsL
exhaust, GssT 1
exhibit, GsBt 1
exhort, GsRt 1
exhume, Gs 3 M
exist, GssT
exonerate, Gs^rt or Gs
NRt 1
exoneration, Gs 1 Nrshn or
GsNRshn 1
exonerative, Gs'XrtV or
GsNRt'V
exonerator, Gs^'rtr or
GsXRtr 1
exorcise, KsRss 1
exorcised, KsRss 1 D
expediency, KsP'.D
experiment, sPrMnt
expert, KsPrt
explicable, sPlKBl
explicit, sPlsT
exploit, KsPlt 1
exploitation, KsPPTshn
explore, sPIR
expressage, sPrsJ
exquisite, sKwsT ,
extemporaneous-ly, KsT-
Mp
extemporary, KsTMpK 11
extempore, KsTMpR
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
289
extemporise, KsTMpRs
exterminate, sTrMXt
extermination, sTrMXshn
exterminator, sTrMXtr
exterminatory, sTrMXtR
extinct-ness, KsTXgKt
extinction, KsTXgshn
extinguish, KsTXg
extinguishable, KsTXgB
extinguisher, KsTXgR
extra, KsTr
extraction, sTrshn 3
extractor, sTrtr 3
extraordinary-ly,
extravagance, sTrfGns
extravagancy, sTrfGnS
extravagant-ly, sTrfGnt
extravagantness, sTrfGnt-
Ns
extravaganza, sTrfGnZ
extreme, sTrM
extrinsic, sTrsK
extrinsical, sTrsKl
eyed, 1-D 1
eyeing, I- 1 or Xg 1
eyes, is 1
eyesight, 1-sT 1
eye-witness, l-Wt 1 Xs or
I-T'Xs
facer, FsR
facetious, FsSh or
facetiously, FsSh or Fs-
ShsL*
facetiousness, Fs&Aor Fs-
facile, FsZ
"facility, FsZt or F*LT
factory, FKTr
Fahrenheit, FRnT or F
failure, FLR
falchion, Flshn, 1
or FICn
falter, Fltr 1
family, FM1
Farwell,
farewell,
Farmington, F^MXgt
farthing, FrThNg
farther, Frtr 3
Fashoda,
Fashoon,
fastidious, FsTD
fastness, Fs 3 Xs
fatal, FtZ
fatalism, FtLsM
fatalist, FtLst
father-in-law, Ftrn a L
fault, Fit 1
faultily, FPTL
faultiness, FPTNs
faultless, Flt J Ls
faultlessly, Flt J LsL
faulty, FI J T
favor, FVr
favorable, FVrB
favoritism, FVrTsM
February, FB
federal, FtrZ
federalism, FtrLsM
federalist, FtrLst
federate, FtrT
federation, Ftrshn
Till: I'tlOXOORAl'IlIC MAXl'AL.
federative, FtrTf
feesimple, F'.sMpL
feller, FLr or FLK
female, FML
fencer, FnsR
fern, FRn or F72n
fern-leaf, FRnLF or
LF
ferrule, FR1
fettle, FtZ
fiasco, F 3 sK
fiddle, Ft'Z
fiddler, Ft'Zr
fidelity, FDlt
Filipino, F1PN
filter, Fltr 1
filler, Fl'R
finance, FnNs
financial, FnN
financier, FnNsR
finish, FnSh
finite, F'Nt
firm, F72M or FrM
firmament, F^MMnt or
FrMMnt
firmamental, F^?MMntL
or FrMMntL
firman, F7?Mn or FrMn
firmer, F^Mr or FrMr
firmest, F7?Mst or FrMst
firmly, F/?ML or FrML
firmness, F7?MNs or Fr.M-
Ns
firstborn, FrsBRn
first-day, FrsD
first-fruits, FrsFrts
first-hand, FrsNt
firstling, FrsLXir
firstly, FrsL
first-rate, FrsRt
first-thing, FrsXg
first-time, FrsT
fiscal, FsKL
fish-y, YSk
fished, F'Sht
fisher-y, F'Shr
fisherman-men, F^hrnor
F^hrMn
fish-glue, F'SAGl
tishhawk, F^'AK
fishhook, F 3 xS7*K
fishiest, F S
fishiness,F 1
fishing-line, F'X/, % Ln
fish-joint, F'AV/Jnt
fish-kettle, .
fish-line, F
fishman-men, F'Shnor F 1 -
ShMn
fish-market, F^V/MrKt
fish-monger, F'ShMNgr
fish-shop, F^^AShP
fish-trowel, F^hTrL
fishwife, F 1 ^AF or WF
fishwives, F^AVs or }Y-
Vs
fishwoman-men, F J >S/m or
F^'/AVMn
Fitzhugh, FtsnY or FtS
five, 5
flambeau, FIMp
flash-house, FLS'AS
flashily, F1SA1
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
U91
flash-light, FltfALt or Fl-
ShLt
Florida, F^D
Floridan, FPDn
florin, FIRn
Hurry, FIR
flush-board, FIShBrt
flushest, FlAst
Fohi, Foni or F
fold, FZt
folder, FLtr
folio, FL
follower, F1*R or F'LR
foothold, Ft 3 hLt
footsoldier, Ft 3 *LJr
footsore, Ft 3 sR
footstep, Ft 3 sTP
footstool, Ft'sTL
forage, FRJ
forager, FRJr
forced, FJ?st
forceful, FJ2sF
forcible, F7?sB
forcibleness, F7?sBns
ford, FRt
fore, FT?
foreign, FRn
foreigner, FRnR
forever, FV
foretell,
forewarn,
forfeit, F'Ft
forfeiture, F
forgave, FrGf
forge, F*J
forger, F^r
forgery, FUR
forget, FrGt
forgive, FrG
forgot, FrGt
formal, F J M1
formality, F J Mlt
formalism, F 1 MlsM
formalist, F 1 Mlst
former,
formerly,
fort, FRt
forth, FRTh
forthwith, FRThDh
fortune-ate-ly, F J Rt
forum, FRM
fouler, F 3 Lror F 3 LR
fountain, FntX
four, 4
fowler, F 3 Lr or F 3 LR
Franklin, Fr 3 Kln
frantical, Frt 3 Kl
fraud, Frt 3
fraudulent, Frt J Lnt
fraternal, FrtrL
fraternity, FrtrnT
fraternize, FrtrNs
freedom, Frt 1 M
freeheart, FrUit
Frelinghuysen, FrLNgZn
frequency, FrKn
frequent, FrKnt
freshen, FrShN, Frshn or
FrShn
fresher, FrShr
freshet, FrShT
freshly, FrShl
Friday, FrD
friendly, Frnt^L
THE PHOXo<;l;.U UK' MANUAL.
friendship, FrntSh
frontispiece, FrntsP
fruition, Fr 3 Shn or
Frshn 3
Fuente, FwnT
Fuerte, FwRT
fulfill, F1F1
fuller, FIR
fulsome, FlsM
fulsomely, FlsML
fumble, FMpl
function, FNgshn
functional, FXgshnL
functionary, FNgshnR
fundamental, FntMntL
furnish, FrnSh
furnisher, FrnShR
furniture, FrNtr
furthermore, FrtrMr
furtive, FrTf
furtively, FrTVl
fusil, Fs 3 Z
fusileer, Fs 3 LR
fusillade, Fs 3 LD
futurity, Ftr 3 T
G
gag, G 3 G
gainsaid, GnsD
galaxy, G1KS or GLKS
gambit, G 3 Mpt
gamboge, GMpJ
gambol, GMB1 or GMpl
garrulity, GRlt
garrulous, GRls
gaseous, GSs 3 or Gss 3
razette, GsT
Gehenna, GN
gendarme, ZhtRM
genteel, JnTL
gentile, JnTL
gentility, JTlt
gentle, JtL or JntiL
gentlemanly, Jnt'.L
gentleness, JtLNs or Jnt-
iLNs
geography-ic-al, J X G
geographer, J a Gr
geologer, JUr
geological, JUKI
geologist, JUst
geologize, JUs
geology, J1J
geometer, JMtr
geometrician, JMtrshn
geometry, JMtR
George-ia, JrJ
Georgian, JrJn
gerrymander, JrMntR
gesticulate, JsTKlt
gesture, JsTr
Gethsemane, GTh*MN
giraffe, JRf
Girard, JRRD
girder, Grtr
glimpse, GPMps
glorification, GIFshn
glorified, GIFt
glorify, GIF
governor, GfR
greater, Grtr or GrtR
Great Britain, Grt 2 Brt
Greenwich, GrnC
grindstone, GrntsTn
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
293
gunsmith, GnsMTH
gunwale, GnL
H
habeas corpus, BsK or
BsKPa
habit, Bt 3
habitant, B 3 Tnt
habitual, Bt 3 L
hacienda, ThND
halfway, F 3 W
halt, hLt 1
halter, hLtr 1
halyard, hlYrt
Hamlet, hMLt 3
hamper, Mpr 3
Hampton, hMptN
handle, NtZ 3
handsome, Nt 3 sM
handwriting, NtRt 3 or
Nrt 3
handy, ND 3
hang, Ng 3
hanger, Ngr 3
hanger-on, Ngrn 3
hanker, Ng 3 Kr
hap, P 3
haphazard, P 3 ZRc or P 3 -
sRt
hapless, P 3 Ls
haply, P 3 L
happier, P 3 R
happily, P 3 L
happiness, P 3 N&
harangue, hR 3 N<.;
harbinger, hRBnJR
harbor, hRBr or RBr
hard, hRt 3
harder, hRtr 3
hardware, hRt 3 ?/'R
harlequin, hRLKn
Harold, ARlt 3 or hR 3 Lt
harm, hR 3 M
harp, hR 3 P
harpsichord, hR 3 PsKrt
hart, hRt 3
Hartford, hRtFrt
hasp, hS 3 P
hast, hSt 3
haste, hSt
hasten, hSn
hateful, ATF1 or ATf
hautboy, AoB 1
haw, HO
Hawaii, hW'orhWl 1
hawing, HO-
hawings, no
haw-haw, HO'. HO
hawthorn, hThn^or ATH-
Rn
Hay wood, h Tft 3
hazard, Z 3 Rt
hazardous, Z 3 RDs
head, AD
hear-re, hR 1
hearer, hR!R
heart, hRt 3
hearth, hR 3 Th
heather-y, hDhr
heaver, AV 1 ^
heavier, AV7?
heighho, HIHO
heinous, ANs
heinously, ANsZ
294
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
heinousness, ANsNs
held, hLt
heliogram, hL^fG
heliograph- y-ic-al, hL'G
heliographer, hl/Gr
heliographist, hl/Gst
hemisphere, hMsFr
hen, AN
henceforth, NsFRTH
henceforward, NsFwRt
Henry, Nr or hNr
herald, ARlt or hRLt
heraldic, ARltK or hR-
Lt<K
heraldry, hRltiR or hR-
LtR
here, hR 1
hereabout, bJR^Bt
hereafter, hR'Ft
hereat, hRt 1
hereby, hR 1 ^
herein, hR a N
hereinafter, hR a NFt
hereinbefore,
hereinto,
hereof, hRf 1 or
hereon, hRn 1
hereto, hR 1 T
heretofore,
hereunto,
hereupon, hR^n
herewith, hR a Dh
heritage, hRtJ
Hesoid, hS^
hesitate, ZTt
hesitancy, ZTnS
hew, nY 3 (See whey.)
hewed, nTt 3 (See white.)
hewer, nY 3 R (See weigh-
er.)
Hewitt, HY-T 3
hewn, nYn 3 (See whine.)
hey-day, AaD
hiatus, />aTs
Hiawatha, hW'Th
hied, Hl-D 1
hieroglyph, hRGlf
hies, His 1
high-born, m-BRn
high-bred, Hl-Brt
highland, hLnt 1 or m-
Lnt 1
Highlander, hLnt'R or Hl-
Lnt J R
hight, AT 1
highten, ATn 1
hightened, ATnt 1
highwayman, m-WMn
highwaymen, Hl-W 1 Mn
high wrought, Hi-Rt 1
Hillerman, ALr J Mn or
Lr^Mn
hindmost, Nt 1 Mst
Hines, ANs 1
history, St J R
historian, St a Rn
hither, Dhr 1
hitherto, Dhr'T
hither ward, Dhr J Rt
hive, AV 1
hoed, AD or HoD
hoeing, HO -or ANg
hoes, HOS or hZ
hoho, HoiHO
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
295
hold, hLt
holder, hLtr
Holland, hLnt 1
holster, hLstr
holy, hL
home, hM
homely, hML
homemade, hMMt
homeopathy, MpTh
Homer, Mi-
Homeric, MrK
homesick, hMsK
homespun, hM 2 sPn
homestead, hM 2 sTt
homeward, hM/'-Rt
homicide, Ms I)
honestly, Nst J L or Ns J Z
hone, AN
hong, 7/Ng 1
Honolulu, NLL
honorable-y, NrBl 1
honorary, NrR 1
hoodwink, AD 3 WNgK
hopefulness, Pf 3 Ns
Horace, hRs 1
horal, hRL or AH1
horary, hRR
horde, hRt
horologe-y, hRLJ or AR1J
hospitable, SPtBl
hospital, SPtL
hospitality, SPtLT
host, hSt
hostile-ly, St 1 !^
hostility, St'LT
house, hS 3 or S 3
household, hS 3 Lt or S 3 Lt
householder, hS 3 Ltr or
S 3 Ltr
housekeeper, hS 3 KPr or
S 3 KPr
houses, hZs 3 or Zs 3
Howard, hRt 3
howbeit, AB 3 T
Howe, HoiZ
Howes, (pi. of Howe), Ho?7s
Howel, hL 3
howitzer, ATsR
hows, (pi. of how), Ho>7Z :i
howsoever, A 3 sVorno^sV
hoy, HOI
Hoyer, ky~R l or H^/R 1
Hubert, HYBrt or er-Brt 3
(See huge.)
hue, H S (See hew. )
hued, nTt 3 (See hewed.)
huff-y, AF
huffish, 7<FA
huffishly
huffishness,
huge, nY 3 J or HY-J 3 CSee
Whedge. )
hugely, nY 3 Jl or HY-J 3 L
(See Whedge.)
Hugh, hY 3
huh, HU
human, Mn 3 or nY 3 Mn
humanity, nY 3 Mnt
humane, nYMn
humanely, nYMnL
humanize, M 3 Xs or nY ; -
MXs
Hume, HY 3 M (Sec \vhiin.;
296
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
humid, HY 3 Mt or r-Mt 3
(See huge.)
humidity, nY 3 '.Mt or
r-MtT 3 (See huge.)
humiliate, nY 3 MLt or
r-MLt 3 (See huge.)
humiliation, HY 3 MLShn
or F-MLShn 3 (See
huge.)
humility, nY 3 MLt or
r-MLT 3 (See huge.)
humpback, hMpBK
Hun, N, AN or nu-N
hundred-weight, NtWt
hung, Ng,
Hungarian, Ngrn or NgRn
Hungary, Ngr or NgR
hunt, Nt
hunter, Ntr
huntress, NtRs or NTrs
huntsman, NtsMn
Huron, nYRn or m/Rn 3
(See Wharren.)
hurl, HRL
hurricane, h'RKn
hussar, hZ 3 R
hustings, hStNgs
hustle, hSL
hustler, hSLR
hyacinth, SnTh
hyacinthine, SnThn
hying, (see hie), Hi- 1 or
ANg 1
hypothecate, FThKt
hypothecation, PThKshn
LESSON 36.
icicle, I-S'Kl
Idaho, I-D 1
Idahoan, 1-Dn 1
identical, Dt a Kl
idlest, Dlst 1
idolatry, DPTr
ignorant, G J Nrnt
illegible, L
illegitimate,
illiberal, L'BrL
Illinoi L J N
Illinoian, L ] Nn
Illinois, L a Ns
Illinoisan, L J NsN
imbecile, MBsL
imbue, Mp 3
imitate, MTt 1
imitation, MTshn
imitative, MTTf
imitator, MTtr
immeasurable, MZhi^Bl
immigrant, IVPGrnt
immigrate, iM 1 Grt
immobile, MB1 1
immobility, MBit 1
impact, Mp 3 Kt
impair, MpR
impale, MpL
impanel, MpNl
impart, Mprt 3
imparter, Mprtr 3
impartial, MPrShl
impassion, Mpshn 3
impeach, MpC 1
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
297
impede, Mpt 1
irnpeder, Mptr 1
impediment, MptMnt
impel, MpL
impend, Mpnt
impenetrability, MpntRBlt
or Mpnt
impenetrable, MpntRBl or
Mpnt
impenetrableness, MpntR-
Bl ns or Mpnt
imperative, MprtV
imperatively, MprtVl
imperatorial , Mprtr ' L
imperatorian, Mprtr 'N
imperfect-ion, MPrf 1
imperial, Mpi !l L
imperialism, Mpr J LsM
imperialist, Mpr'Lst
imperious, Mpr'S
imperiously, Mpr 1 S L
imperil, MpRl
impersonal, MPrsNl
imperturbation, MPrtr-
Bshn
imperturbability, MPrtr-
Bt
imperturbable, MPrtrB
impetus-ous, MpTs
imponderability, MpNtr-
Blt
imponderable, MpNtrBl
imponderableness, MpNtr-
Blns
i ni ponderous, Mp ' Mrs
imponderousness, Mp 1 -
NtrsNs
import, Mprt 1
importer, Mprtr 1
importune, MpRtN
impose, Mps
impost, Mpst
imposter, Mpstr 1
imposture, MpsTr
impound, Mpnt 3
impracticable, MPrK
impractical, MPr 3
impregnable-ate-ion, M-
PrG
improbable, MPrB
impugn, Mpn 3
impulse, MpLs
impunity, MpnT 3 or Mi-
Pnt
imputation, MpTshn
inalienable, NLnB
inarticulate, NrTKlt or
NRTKlt
inartificial, NrtFxSAl or
NRtF^Al
inasmuch, NsC 3
incandescent, N'DsNt
incanescent, NKNsNt
incantation, N'Tshn
incapable, NKB1
incentive, NsNtV
inception, NsPshn
inceptor, NsPtr
incident-al, NsDnt
incessant, NssNt
income, N 1 K or N J KM
inconsistence, NssTns 1
inconsistencies, NssTnss
inconsistency, NssTn 1
298
THE PHOXOtiKAPHIC MAXTAI..
inconsistent-ly NssTnt 1
indeed, NDt 1
indefatigable, NtFt 1
indenture, NtNtr
independency, NtPiD or
NtPniD
indescribable, NtsKBl
index, Nt*Ks
India, ND J
Indian, Nt'N
Indiana, Nt J N
Indianan, Nt J Nn
Indianapolis, N^NPls
Indian Territory, Nt*N-
TEt
indication, Nt J Kshn
indict, NtT 1
indictable, NtT'Bl
indictment, NtT 1 Mnt
indifference-ent-ly, NDf
indigent, NtJnt 1
indignant^ly-ty, Nt*G
indignation, ISVGshn
individuality, NtVLT or
NtMVt
indivisible, NtVsBl
induce, NDs
induction, NDKshn
indulge, NtZJ
indulged, NtZJt
indulgence, NtZJns
indulgency, NtZ'.J
indulgent-ly, NtZJnt
indulger, NtZJr
inefficacious-ly-ness, NF-
KaShs
inefficient-ly, NFshnt 1
inelastic, NlsK or XlsTK
inelasticity, NlsTst
infant, NFnt
infectious-ly-ness,IS"FK8hs
infer, NF^
inferable, NFRB1
inference, NFRns
inferences, NFRnss
inferential, NFRn
inferior, NFRR
infernal, NFrXl
intinite-ly, XFnt 1 or
infinitude, NFn'Tt'
infinity, KFnt 1 or X^Fnl
infinitessimal, NFn'TsM
inform, NF 1
informal, NF'Ml
informality, NF'Mlt
informer, NF J Mr
ingle, Ngl 1
inhabit, NBt !
inhabitant, NB 3 Tnt
inhale, NhL
inhere, NhR 1
inherent, NhRnt 1
inherently, NhRnt 1 L
inherit, NrT or NhRT
inhibit, NBt 1
iniquitous, NKwTs
iniquity, NKwT
initial, N^/il
injunction, NJNgshn
injure-y, NJr
ink-y, Ng ! K v
I nk e r man , Nir 1 K rMn
inkle, Ng J Kl
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
299
inlace, Nls or NLs
inlaid, Nit or NLt
inland, Nlnt or NLnt
inlander, NlntRorNLntR
inlay, Nl or NL
inlayer, Nlr or NLR
inlet, Nit or NLt
inly, NZ 1
innermost, iNi^Mst
inning, N J Ng
innovation, NVshn 1
innumerable, NMrBl 1
inordinate, Nrt*Nt
inquire-y, N J Kw
inroad, NrD or NRt
insatiability, nsShBt
insatiable, nsShB
insatiableness, nsShBns
insecurity, nsKrT 3
inseparable, nsPr 3 Bl
insignificance, N*sGns
insignificant, N*sG
insist, NssT 1
insistence, NssTns 1
insistent, NssTnt 1
insnare, NsNR 1
inspect, NsPKt
inspection, NsPKshn or
NsPshn
inspector, NsPKtr or Ns-
Ptr
inspiration, nsPrshn 1
inspire, nsPr 1
inst. (for instant), Nst 1
instant, NsTnt
instantly, NsTtL, NsTnt
or NsTntiL
instead, NsTt
instinct-ive-ly, NsTNg
institute, NsTt 1
institution, NsTshn 1
institutive, NsTTf
institutor, NsT'Ttr
instrument, nsTrMnt
instrumental, nsTrMntL
instrumentality, nsTriMnt
insubordinate, NsB 1
insubordination, NsBshn 1
insufferable, nsFrBl
insufficiency, NsFshnS
insufficient-ly, NsFshnt
insuperable, nsPrBl
insurance, NShrns
insure, NShr
insurrection, NsRshn
intangible-ness, NTnJ
integrity, NtGrT
intellectuality, NtZ 1 LT or
NtZ^Tlt
intend-t, NtNt
intention, NtNshn
intercede, NtsD
intercept-eel, NtsPt
intercession, NtssA?&
intercessor, NtSsR
interfere, NtF,ff
interference, NtFRns
interim, Ntr 1 M
intermit, NtMMt
intermittent, NtMMTnt
intermission, Nt 1 tMshn
inter-ocean, Ntrshn 1
inter-oceanic, Ntrshn 1 K
; ntern-e, Ntrn 1
300
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
interplead, NtPlt
interpleader, NtPltr
interpolate, NtPLt
interpret, NtPrt
interpreter, NtPrtr
interrogate-ory, NtGt
interrogation, NtGshn
interrogative, NtGtV
interrogatively, NtGtVl
interrogator, NtGtr
inter-state, NtistT
intertwine, NttTwn 1
intervene, NtVn
interview, NtV 3
intestate, NTsTt
intimate, Nt J Mt
intimation, Nt 1 Mshn
intimidate-ion, NT 1 Mt
into, NT
intolerable, NtLrBl or
NT1RB1
intolerance, NtLrns
intolerant, JS T tLrnt
intoleration, NtLrshn
intrench, NTrnC
intrepid, NTrPt or NtrPt
intrepidity, NTr'.Pt or
NtriPt
intricate, Ntr*Kt
intrigue, Ntr*G
intriguer, Ntr 1 Gr
intrinsic, Ntrs 1 K or
NTraK
intrinsical, NTrs^l or
NTrsKl
introduce, NtDs
introduction, KtDshn
introspection, NtsPKshn
or NtsPshn
introvert, NtVrt
intuition, NTshn
intuitional, NTshnL
intuitive, NTTf
intuitively, NTTV1
intwine, NTwn 1
inutile, N-Y-T 3 L
invasion, NVshn
investigate, NVsGt
investigator, NA'sGtr
investment, NVsT or
NVstiMnt
involuntary, XVlntR
involve, NV1
Iowa, l-W 1
lowan, l-AVn 1
Ipswich, PswC
irascible, Rs'B or RRsB
Iroquoi, R x Kw
Iroquois, R^ws
Irrawaddy, R J wD
irrecoverable, R J Kf
irrespective, R^Pf
irrespectively, R J sPVl
irresponsible, R^PnsB
Irvington, RVNgt
Irwin, RWn
island, i-Lnt 1
islet, i-Lt 1
Israel, ZRL
Israelite-ic-ist, ZRLt
issuable, Sh 3 B
isthmus, SMs
Italian, TLn
Italy, T J L
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
301
iterate, T'Rt
itinerancy, TNrS, TNrnS
or TNrNS
itinerant, TNrnt
luka, Y 3 K
Ivanhoe, V'N
izzard, Z J Rt
J.
jaguar, JGwR
jail, JL
jailor, JLR
janizary, JNsR
January, J 3 N
Japheth, JfTh
jasper, JsPr
Jefferson, JFrsN or Jf-
RsN
Jeffries, JFrs or Jf Rs
Jehovah, JV
Jehu, J 1 (See bohea and
boa.)
jeremiad, JrMt
Jericho, JrK
Jesus Christ, JK or JssK
jingo, J a Ng
jointly, JntML
journalism, JrNlsM or
JrsM
journalist, JrNlst
journalistic, JrNlsK
Jouthet, J 3 Tht
joyf illness, Jf^s
joyous, J a S(See religious. )
joyously, J 1 SL
joyousness, J 1 SNs
judge, JJ
j udicatory-ture, JtKtr
judicial, JtShl or JtShl
judiciary, JtShr
judicious, JtShs
July, J!L
jumble, JMpl
jumper, JMpr
junction, JNgshn
June, Jn 3
jungle, JNgl
junior, JNr
junk, JNgK
jurat, Jrt 3
jurisprudence, Jrs 3 P
juror, Jr 3 R
jury box, Jr 3 BKs or Jr 3 -
Ks
juryman, Jr 3 Mn
jury mast, Jr 3 Mst
jurymen, Jrn 3
jury-room, Jr 3 RM or Jr-
3 M
just, Jst
justice, JsTs
justification, Jsshn or Js-
Fshn
justify, JsF
justly, JsL
juxtaposition, JKsPss/m
K
kaiser, KsR
Kanawha, KNW
Kamchatka, -Ct 3 K
Kan-Choo, -C 3
Kandhar, -Dr 3
Kandiyohe, -DY
302
TI1K PHONOGRAPHIC MAXl'AL.
Kaukakce, -K 3 K
Kankaree, -KR 3
kangaroo, -GR 3
Kansakee, -sK
Kansan, -Zn 3
Kansas, -Zs 3
Kan-Soo, -S 3
Kehoe, K or K-eno
Kemble, -Bl
Kendall, -Dl
Kendrick, -DrK
Kennebeck, -XBK
Kennedy, -XD
kennel, -XI
Kenosha, KXSh
Kensett, -sT
Kensington, -sXgt
Kentuckian, -TKn
Kentucky, -TK
Kenwyn, -Wn
Kenyon, -Yn
kettle, KtL
keyhole, IOL
key-weight, K J Wt
kilderkin, Kltr^n
Kimball, -Bl 1
kimbo, -B 1
kindle, -Dl 1
kindergarden, -DrGrtX
kinetic, KNtK
king, K'Xg
kingly, KNgl
king-post, KXgPst 1
kingship, KX^gSh 1
Kingston, KXgsTn 1
kink, K'XgK
Kinross, -Rs 1
Kioway, K 1 \V
knew, XFtoid
Kong, K'Ng
Kun-Hegyes (Knn-Hed-
yesh), -ADSh .
laboratory, LBrtR
ladle, LtL or LD1
lamentable, LMntB
lampoon, LMpn
lampooned, LMpnt
lamprey, LMPr
lance, Lns 3
lanced, L 3 Nst
lanceolate, Lns 3 Lt
lancer, Lns 3 R
lancet, Lns 3 T
land, Lnt 3
landholder, Lnt 3 Ltr
landlord, Lnt 3 Lt
landsman, Lnts 3 Mn
landsmen, Lnts^In
Langdon, LX'gtX^
languish, L 3 XgSh
lantern, LXtrn
Laramie, LrM or LRM
larboard, LrBrt
larceny, Lrs 3 X"
larch, "Lr 3 C
lard, Lrt 3
larder, Lrtr 3
largeness, J 3 Ns
largess, LrJs
lariat, LRT or LRt
lark r LrK
larrup, LRP
THE PlION'OGRAI'llIC MAXl'Af,.
303
larvae, Lr' ! V
laryngeal, LrnJL
laryngitis, LrnJTs
laryngoscope, LrNgsKP
larynx, LrXgKs
lash, L 3 Sh
lashed, L 3 Sht
lastly, Ls 3 L
laundry, Lnt J R
laurel, LR1
lavendar, LVNtr
lavish, LVSh
lavished, LVSht
lavishly, LV#/d
lavishment, LNShMnt
lavishness, LV/S'ANs
Lawler. LLr
lawyer, L J R or L J //R
learner, LrnR
leash, L J Sh
leashed, L^ht
lecture, LKtr
leer, Lr 1
leeward, L^/jRt
leeway, L^W
legendary, LJtR
Leghorn, LGRn
legible, LJB1
legislator, LJR
legitimate, LJtMt
Lehigh, L 1
lene, L J N
lengthways, NgThws or
NgThs
lengthwise, NgThws 1 or
NgThs 1
lesion, Lshn 1
lessee, L J S
lesser, LsR
lesson, LsN
Lexington, LKsNgt
liar, L^
liberal, LBrL
lieutenancy, LTnNS
lieutenant, LTnNt
like, L^
likely, L^l
likewise, L } Kws or L J Ks
Lincoln, LNgKn or Ln 1
limpet, L 1 Mpt
limpid, L 1 Mpt
liner, Ln a R
lingo, L J Ng
linguist, LNgst
linguistic, LNgsK
linguistical, LNgsKl
listen, Ls J N
litho, L J Th
1 ithograph-y-ic-al, L 1 TLG
lithographer, L ir ThGr
lithographist, L^fhGst
little, Lt J L
load, Lt
local, LK1
Lockhart, LKRt
locomobe, LKMp
locomobile, LKMpl
logograph, L ] GG
London, LntN
longboat, Ng^t
longevity, LnJft
longitude-inal, LnJt
longsighted, N
looker-on, L 3 Krn
304
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
lordly, Lrt'L
lore, Lr
Lorenzo, LrnZ
lottery, Lt J R
Louisiana, LZN
Louisianan, LZNn
lower, LR
lowest, Lst
Lucifer, LsFr
luckily, LKL
lumbago, LMpG
lumber, LMpr
lump-y LMp
lumped, LMpt
lumpiest, LMpst
lurch, LrC
lure, Lr 3
lured, Lrt 3
lurid, L 3 Rt
lurk, LrK
Lutheran, Ltr 3 N
luthern, Ltrn 3
lyre, Lr 1
lyric, Lr a K
lyrical, Lr'Kl
LESSON 37.
M
M. (for monsieur), M 1
Mab, Mp 3 or MB 3
Mable, MB1
Mabley, MB1
Macaulay, MKL
machinist, MShst
madam, Mt 3 M
madden, Mt 3 N
mademoiselle, M 3 MsL
Madison, MtsN
madonna, MDN
magisterial, MJsRl
magistracy, MJsS
magistral, MJsTrL
magistrate, MJ
Magna Charta, MiKr
magnanimous-ly-ity, M 3 G
(or as in eng. 302.)
magnate, MGNt
magnese, M ] GNs
magnesia, MGNZh
magnesian, MGNZhn
magnesite, MGNsT
magnesium, MGNZbM
magnet-ic-al, MGnt
magnets-ise, MGnts
magnetized, MGntst
magnetism, MGntsM
magnificent-ly-ce, M*G (or
as in eng. 302.)
magnifier, MiF 1 ^
magnify, MiF 1
magnolia, MGN1
magniloquence, M'.LKwns
magniloquent, M'LKwnt
magniloquently . Mi LKwnt-
L
magnitude, MiTt
Magnus, MGNs
magnum, MGNM
maguey, MGw
mahogany, MGN
Mahomet, M J Mt
Mahoney, MN
mail, ML
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
305
Maine, Mn
Mainer, MnR
maintain, MnTn
maintenance, MnTns or
MnTnNs
majesty, MJ 3
majestic, MJs 3 K
majestical, MJs 3 Kl
majority, MJrt
male, ML
malicious, MLSh
malignancy, MPG'N
malignant-ly, Ml'G
malignity, Ml'GT
Manhattan, MnTn 3
manhood, MnD
manlike, MnLKor MntLk
manly, MnL or Mn'L
mannerly, Nr 8 Z
mansion, MNshn
manslaughter, MsLtr 3
manufactory, MnF
manufactural, MnFZ
manufacture, MNF
manufacturer, MNF7?
manuscript, MsKPt orM-
NsKPt
map, Mp 3
mapach, MpC 3
maple, MP1
mapped, Mpt 3
mappery, Mp 3 R
maraud, MRt 1
March, MrC
marcher, MrCr
marchioness, MrShNs
marge, MrJ
margin, MrJn
maritime, MrtM
mark, Mr 3 K
markee, Mr 3 K or Mr 3 K-e
marker, Mr 3 Kr
market, MrKtor Mr J Kt
marketer, MrKtr or Mr 1 -
Ktr
marque, Mr 3 K
marquee, Mr 3 K or Mr 3 K-G
married, MR 3 D
marsh-y, MrSh
marshal, Mrshl
mart, MRt 3
mart3 r r, Mrtr 3
martyrdom, MrtrD 3 M
martyrize, Mrtrs 3
Maryland, MRlnt
Mary lander, MRlnt R
mash, MSh
mashed, MSht 3
Massachusetts, MC 3
Massachusettsan, MsCn 3
master, Mstr 3
mater, Mtr
maternal, MtrnL
maternity, MtrnT
mathematical, MfThL
mathematician, MfThshn
mathematics, MfThs
matin, M 3 Tn
matinee, MtN
matron, Mtrn
matronage, MtrnJ
matronal, MtrNl
matron! xe, MtrNs
maturity, MtR 3 T
306
TIIK J'HOXOUIJAPIllr MANUAL.
maxim-a, Ms 3 M
maximum, Ms 3 MM
May, M
mayhem, MM
may hew, M 3
Mayo, M
Mclntyre, MKNtr
meander, M'Xtr
meantime, MnT 1
meanwhile, MnwL 1
measureable-y, Zhr 3 B
measurer, Zhr 3 R
measurement, Zhr 3 Mnt
mechanic, M 3 K
mechanical, M 3 K1
mechanics, M 3 Ks
mechanism, M 3 KnsM
medal, MtL
meddle, MtL
median, MDn 1
medicine, MtsN
meditate, MtT
meditation, MtTshn
Mediterranean, MtTrnN
medium, Mt J M
melancholy, M1KI or Ml-
NK1
membership, Br'.Sh
memento, MMnT
memorable, MMB1
memoranda, MMD
memorandum, MMM
memorial MMR1
memorize, MMRs
memorized, MMRst
memory, MM
mender, MNtr
menhir, MnK
mention, MXshn
mentionable, MNshnB
mentioned, MX.shnt
Mentor, MNtr
mercantile, MrKntL or
MrKtL
merchandixe, MrCts or
MrCtZ
merchant, MrCnt
merchantable, MrCtBl
merchantman, MrCtMn
merchantmen, MrCt'.Mn
mercifulness, Mr:Fs
merciless, MrsLs
merge, MrJ
merger, MrJr
merograj)h, MrGrf
mesh, MSh
meshed, MSht
Mess, (for Messrs. ), Ms-
or MSh
messenger, MsJr
Messiah,' MS 1
messieurs, MsRs 1 or MSh 1 -
Rs
Messrs., MsRs or MShrs
metal, MtL
meteor, Mtr 1
meteoric, Mtr 1 K
meteorite, MtrT 1
meteorolite, MtrLt 1
meteorological, MtrJ'Kl
meteorologist, MtrJst 1
meteorology, MtrJ 1
methinks, MThs 1
method-ic, MTht
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
307
methodical, MThtKl
Methodism, MsM or
MThteM
Methodist, MThtst
methodistic, MThtsK
methodistical, MThtsKl
methought, MTht 1
Methuseleh, MTh.vL
metropolis, MtrPls
metropolitan, MtrPlTn
Mexican, MsKn
Mexico, MsK
Michigan, MSh 1
Michiganer, MSh J R
microscope-ic,
microscopical, M l KrsKl
midday, Mt 1 !)
middle, Mt'L
midnight, Mt^Nt
mighty, MT 1
mignonette, MnNT
migrate, M'Grt
mile, ML 1
mileage, ML'J
milch, MIC
military, MLtR
militia, MLSh
mill, ML 1 (or M 1 after a
figure. )
miller, MLr 1 or ML'R
millionaire, MPR
Milwaukee, MLWK
minaret, MNRt
mincer, MNsR 1
minim, Mn*M
minima, M'NM
minimum, Mn*MM
minion, MnN
minister, M'Nstr
ministerial, M a NsRL
ministral, M ] NsRl
ministrant, M J NsRnt
ministration,
ministry, M ] NsR
Minnehaha, M 3 N
Minnesota, MNsT
Minnesotan, MNsTn
minority, M*Nrt
minister, M 1 Nstr
minstrel, MnsTrL
minstrelsy, MnsTrLS
minuet, MNT
minute, MnT
minute, (adj.), MNT
minutely, MNTL
minuteness, MNTNs
minuter, MNtr
minutest, MNTst
misdemeanor, MsD
misfortune, MsFrt'N or
MsFrt 1
mishap, MsP 3
Miss, Ms 1
Misses, Mss 1
missionary, Mshn J R
Mississippi, MssP
Mississippian, MssPn
Missouri, MsR
Missourian, MsRn i
mistake, MsK
mistaken, MsKn
mister, Mstr 1 (See Mr.)
mistook, Ms 3 K
mistress, MsTrs (See Mrs. )
308
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
mitten, Mt'N
mittened, Mt*Nt
mixture, JV^Kstr
mob, Mp 1 or MB 1
mobber, Mp*R or MBr 1
Mobile, MB1
mobilization, MBlssAn,
mobilize, MBls
moderation, Mtrshn 1
modern, Mtrn 1
modest, Mtst 1
modestly, MtsL 1
modesty, MtsT 1
modicum, Mt*KM
modification, MtF'Kshn
modifier, MtF'T?
modify, MtF 1
mohair, MR
Mohammed, MMt
Mohammedan, MMDn
Mohammedanism, MMDs-
M
Mohamrnedism, MMtsM
Mohawk, M'K
Mohegan, M'Gn
Mohican, M*Kn
Moho, M
monasterial, MNsTRl
monastery, MNsTR
monastic, MNsTK
monastical, MNsTKl
monasticism, MNsTssM
Monday, MnD
Monheimer, MnMR
monitor, M'Ntr
monitress, M'XTrs
monody, MND
Monon, MnN
Monongahela, M'nXGl
monopoly, MnPL
monosyllabic, MX.yBK
monosyllable, MX.--LBI
Monseigneur, MyR 1
Monsieur, MsR 1 or MS
(SeeM.)
monster, MnsTr
monstrosity, MnsTrst
monstrous, MnsTrs
monstrously, MnsTr.sL
Montana, Mnt'N
Montanan, Mnt'Nn
month, MTh or MNTh
monthly, MThL or MN-
ThL
Montmorency, MntMiR
monumental, MnMntL
mop, Mp 1
mope, Mp
Moplah, MpL 1 or MP1 1
moppet, MpT 1
mopsey, MpS 1
Mormon, Mi^Mn
Mormonism, Mr J MsM
morn, Mrn 1
morning, Mrn a Xg
morning-star, Mrn ' X^gstr
morning-stars, M rn 1 -
Xgstrs
morphine, MRFn
mortgagee, MrGJ 1
mortgage r-or MrGJr 1
mortification, MrtFshn
mortify, MrtF
mother-in-law, MtrnL
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
309
mountain, Mnt 3 N
mountaineer, Mnt 3 NR
mountebank, MntB 3 Ng
move, MY 3
Mr. (for mister), Mr 1
Mrs. (for Mistress), MsS
mulberry, MlBr or ML-
BR
Mulholland, MLLnt
mullion, MLn
multiply, MltPl
multitude, MltTt
mump, MMp
mumper, MMpr
mundane, MnDn
mural, MR1,
murder, Mrtr
murderer, MrtrR
murderess, MrtrS
murderous, Mrtrs
murderously, MrtrsL
musical, MsKl
mustache, JVIsSh 3
mutual, MtL 3
mutuality, MtL 3 T
myrmidon, MrMDn
mystic, Ms*K
mystical, M.^Kl
mysticism, Mss*M
mystification, MsFshn 1
mystify, MsF 1
mythology, MThlJ
mythological, MThlJKl
N
nadir, Ntr
Nahant, N 3 Nt
nailer, NLr
Nancy, NnS or NNS
narcissus, NrSss
nard, Nrt 3
nardine, Nrt 3 N
narrate, NrT or NRt 3
narration, Nrshn or N-
Rshn 3
narrative, NrTf orNRt 3 Y
narratively, NrTYl or N-
Rt 3 Vl
narrator, Nrtr or NRtr 3
narrow, NR
narrowly, NR1
nasality, NsZt or NsLT
natant, NTnt
natatory, JS'TtR
nautical, Kt J Kl
nautilus, NT^s
naval, NY1
navigate-d, NVG
navigator, NVGtr
nay, N
Nazarine, NsRn
nearly, NrZ
neatly, NtZ, NetZ or
N-etZ
Nebraska, N 3 B or NBrsK
Nebraskan, N 3 Bn or
NBrsKn
necessary, NssR
necessarily, NssRl
necessity, NssT
needle, NtZ 1
needless, NtZs 1
needlessly, NtZs'Z
neglect, NGl or NG1K
310
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
neglecter, NGltr
neglectful, NGlf
negligence, NGlns
negligent, NGlnt
Nehemia, NhM or NM
neigh, N
Nelson, NlsN
Neptune, NPTn
Nero, NR 1
nervously, NrVsZ
nettle, NtZ
neuralgia, NR1J
Nevada, NVt 3 or NVD
Nevadan, NVt 3 N or N VDn
new, NFtoid
New England, N 3 Nglnt
New Englander, N 3 Nglnt-
R
newer, NR 3
newest, Nst 3
newish, NSh 3
New Hampshire, NMpShr
New Hampshiran, NMp-
Shrn
New Hartford, NhRtFrt
New Haven, NVn
New Jersey, NJZ
New Jerseyan, NJZn
Newland, NZnt or NLnt
newly, NZ 3
New Mexican, NMsKn
New Mexico, NMsK
newness, N 3 Ns
New Orleans, NRlns 3 or
NR 3 Lns
news, Ns 3 or N 3 ns
newspaper, NsP 3 Pr
New Testament, NTsMnt
or Ntst 3
New Year, NyR 1
New Years, NyRs 1
New York, NyR
New York City, NyRsT
New Yorker, NyRR or
NyRKr
New York State, N^Rst
Niagara, N 3 Gr
Nicaragua, NKrG or X
KrGw
nicety, NsT 1
nicknacks, N J KnKs
nickname, NKNM
nigh, N 1
nigher, NR 1
nighest, Nst 1
nightly, NtZ 1
nihilism, NhLs^l or
NPsM
nihilist, NhLst 1 or Nlst 1
nine, 9
niter, Ntr 1
nitrate, NtrT 1
nitric, Ntr*K
noes, Ns
Noah, N
nobody, NBt
nocturne, NKTRn
nocturnal, NKTRnL
nod, ND 1
node, ND
nohow, N-Hcm
noiseless, NsZs
noiselessly, NsZsZ
noisiness, NZNs
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
311
noisily, NZL
noisy, NZ 1
noisome, NsM
Nolan, NZn or NLn
nomad, NMt
nomenclature, NMKltr
nonce, Nns 1
nonconformist, Nn 'FMst
nonconformity, Nn <FMT
nondescript, Nn 1 i DsKPt
none, Nn
nonentity, NnNtT
nonsense, NnsNs
nonsuit, NNsT 3
no-one, N 2 Wn
Norman, Nr 1 Mn
north, Nr r rh
North America, NrMrK
North Carolina, Nr l Kr
North Carolinan, Ni -1 Krn
North Dakota, NrDKt
North Dakotan,NrDKtN
northeast, NrSt 1
northeaster, NrStr 1
northeasterly, NrSti^L
northeastern, NrStrn 1
northern, Nrtrn 1
northerner, NrtrnR 1
northstar, NrThstr 3
northward, Nm'Rt 1
northwest, NrWst
northwester, NrWstr
northwesterly, NrWsRL
northwestern, NrWsRn
Norway, NrW
Xorwepfian, XrJn
Norwich, NrC
nosology, NvLJ
nostril, N-s-TrL
nostrum, N-s-Tr^I
notable, NtBl
notarial, NtRl
notary, NtR
nothing, NTh or NThNg
notification, NtFshn
notify, NtF
November, NV
novitiate, NVSht
now, NCtoid
nowadays, N 2 Das
noway, N 2 W
nows (pi. of now), Ns 3 or
numerable, NMrBl
nutritive, NTrTf
nutritiveness, NTrTfNs
nutshell. NtShl
O
objectionable, BshnB
objectively, BfiL
objectiveness, BfNs
objectivity, BfT
objectless, BLs
objector, BiR
oblong, BINg
obscure, BsKr
obscurity, BsKrt
observable, BsRBl
observableness, BsRBlns
observance, BsRVns
oksei'vanev, BsR'.V
ohservanda, BsRVnD
312
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
observanclum, BsRVnDM
observant-ly, BsRVnt
Observantine, BsRVntX
observation, BsR
observational, BsRL
observative, BsRVt or
BsRVtV
observator, BsRVtr
observatory, BsRftR
observe, BsRf
observer, BsRfR
observership, BsRfRSh
observingly, BsRfNgZ
obsolete, Bs'Lt
obstructive, BsTrf
obstructor, BsTrtr
O'Connell, -XI 1 or o'Xl 1
O'Connor, -Xr 1 or o'Xr 1
occupy, P 1 , KPi 1 or
KfP
oceanic, ShXK
October, KtBr
octoroon, KTRn
ocular, KLr 1
off, F 1
officer, FsR
official, FA1
officiate, F'Sht
officious, ~FShs
officiously, F/ShsL
officiousness, FxS'AsXs
oft, Ft 1
oftener, Fn'R
oftenest, Fn*St
oftentimes, Fnt J Ms
ofttimes, Ft 1 Ms
O'Hara, ohR 3 or hR 3
Ohio, o or OKI
Ohioan, om-N
Oklahoma, KIM
Oklahoman, KIMn
old, Lt or o-Lt
older, Ltr or o-Ltr
oldest, Ltst or G-Ltst
Old Testament, LtTs^lnt
or Ltst
olympiad, L a Mpt or L 1 -
MpD
Olympian, L J Mpn
Olympus, L^Mps
Omaha, ^l 3
omnipotence, ]\IXPns
omnipotency, ]SIXPtT
omnipotent-ly, MXPt
omnipresence-t. MXPr
omniscience, MXShns
omnisciency, MXi Sh
omniscient-ly, MXShnt
onerary, XR J R
onerate, XRt 1
oneration, XRshn 1
onerous, X T Rs J
onerously, X'Rs'L
oneself, Wns
onion, Xn
onlooker, Ttoid 1 LKr (See
sec. 383.)
onset, TtoidsT
onslaught, Ttoid J
onto, KtoidT
onward, Ttoid 1 ?6<Rt
operate, P'Rt
operative, P J Rf
operatively, P J RfL
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
313
opine, Pn 1
opiniative, Nn l4 .Tf
opinionated, Nn'tTt
opinionative, Nn u .Tf
opinioned, Nn lc .D
opinionist, NnSt 1
Oppenheimer, PnMR
opportune, Pr 3 Tn
opportunely, Pr 3 TNl
opportuneness, Pr 3 TnNs
opportunity, Prt 3 or Pr 3 -
Tnt
oppression, Prshn
oral, Rl
orator, R*Tr
oratorial , R ir TrL
oratorical, R'Tr,
orR'TRKl
oratorio, R l TRo
oratory, R'TR
order, Rtr 1
ordinal, Rt'NZ
ordinance, R^Nns or R 1 -
DnXs
ordinary, Rt J Nr
ordnance, Rt^ns
Oregon, RGn
Oregonan, RGNn
Oregonian, RGnN
organic, Gn J K
organical, Gn^L
organism, Gn a sM
Orleans, RLns
ornamental, RnMntL
orrery, R J R
orthoepist, RThPst
orthoepy, RThP
orthographer, RThGr
orthographist, RThGst
orthographize, RThGs
orthography-ic-al, RThG
Osage, SJ
Osawatomie, SWtM
Oscar, SKr
ostensible,
ostler,
ostracise, StrSs
ostrich, StRC
Otaheite, oTT
other, u 1 or Dhr 3
others, us 1 or Dhrs 3
other ways, u^Was or
DJir 3 Was
otherwise, us 1 or Dhr 3 Ws
oust, St 3
ouster, Str 3
outdoors, T 3 DRs
outer, Tr 3
outfit, T 3 Ft
outstretched, T 3 sTrCt
overalls, Vr^s
overboard, Vr a Brt
overseer, Vr^R
overtake, Vr^K
overture, Vrtr 1
overwhelm,
owed, oD
owes, os or oZ
owest, oSt
owing, 6- or Ng
oyer, yR
oyes, Ys
oyez, Y
314
THE PHOXOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
pageantry, PJtR
paletot, PLT
pallet, P 3 Lt
palliate, P 3 Lt
palliative, P 3 LtV
pallid, P 3 Lt
pallor, PLr or PLR
panorama, PNrM
pantry, PntR
papal, PP1
paragram, PrfG
paragrammist, PrfGst
paragrammatist, PrfGTst
paragraph-ic-al, PrG or
PrGf
paragrapher, PrGr
paragraphist, PrGst
paragraphistical, PrGsKl
parallax, PRIKs or PrLKs
parallel, P 3 R1
paralleled, P 3 Rlt
paralytic, PRltK
paralyze, PRls
paralyzed, PRlst
parasol, PRsL
parcel, PrsL
Paris, PRsorP'R
Parisian, PRsN or PRshn
parliament-ary, Pr 3 L
parliamentarian, Pr 3 Ln
parlor, PrLr or PrLR
partial, PrSM.
participant, PrtsPnt
participate, PrtsPt
participation, PrtsPshn
participator, PrtsPtr
particle, PrtKl
partisan, .P 3 RtsX
partner, PrtNr
partnership, PrtNrSh
passenger, PsJr
passion, Pshn 3
pastry, PsTr
pasture, PsTR
pasturage, PsTRJ
patent, PTnt or Pt 3
patentable, PTntB or Pt 3 -
Bl
patentee, PTnT or Pt 3 T
patent-office, PTntFs or
Pt 3 Fs
pater, Ptr
paternal, PtrL or PtrNZ
paternity, PtrT or PtrNT
pater-noster, PtrNstr
pathetic, PThtK
pathetical, PThtKl
patience, Pshns
patiently, PshntL
patois, PTw
patriot, PTrt
patriotic, PTrtK
patriotism, PTrtsM
patronymic, PtrNMK
peaceful, Ps'Fl
peanut, P J Nt
pearl-y, PrL
peculiarity, P 3 KLrt
pecuniary-ly, PKn
pedal, PtL
pedantry, PDtR
peddle, PtL
penalty, PX1T
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
315
penance, PnNs
pencil, PXsZ
pendage, PntJ
penman, PnMn
penmen, P^Mn
pennant, PnNt
pennate, PNt
pennon, PnN
Pennsylvania, PsV, P, Pn
or'PN
Pennsvlvanian, PsVn or
PsVnN
penurious, PnRs
penury, PnR
per, Pr
perannum, PRNM
percent, PRsNt
percentage, PRsNtJ
performer, PRFMr
perfunctor-y, PrfNgtr
peril, PR1
perilous, PRls
periphery, PRfR
perish, PRSh
perpendicularity, PRPnt-
Lrt
perpetuation, PRPshn
perpetuity, PRPiTt
perplex, PrPLKs
perplexed, PrPLKst
perplexedly, PrPLKsDL
perplexity, PrPLKst
persecution, PRsKshn
persecutor, PRsKtr
persevere, PrsVr
perseverance, PrsVrns
Persian, PRShn
persist, PrssT
persistency, PrssiT
persistent-ly, PrssTnt
personal, PrsNl
perspective, PrsPf
perspectively, PrsPVl
perspicuity, PrsP'.Kt
perspicuous-ly-ness, Prs-
PKs
persuadable, PrsDBl
persuade, PrsD
persuader, PrsDr
persuasibility, PrssBt
persuasible, PrssB
persuasion, Prs.s7m
persuasive, PrssV
persuasory, PrssR
pertain, PrTn
perturb, PrtrB
perturbation, PrtrBshn
pervade, PrVt
pervert, PrVrt
pestilence, PsLns
pestilent, PsLnt
pestilential, PsLn
petal, PtL
petrifaction, PtRFshu
phenomena, FnMN
phenomenal, FnMNl or
FnM
phenomenon, FnMNn
Phi la. (for Philadelphia),
F J L
Philadelphia, FltF
philanthropical, FlnPL
}>hilanthropist, FlnPst
philanthropy-ic, FlnP
316
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
philharmonic, FlKMnK
Phillip, F1P
Philippine, FlPn
Philistine, FlsTn
Philistinism, FlsTsM
philoproofenitiveness, Flf J
orFlPrJNtiVs
philter, Fltr 1
phone, Fn
phonetic, FXtK
phonic, FnK
phono, FN
phonogram, FXfG
phonograph-y-ic-al,FnG or
FXG
phonographer, FnR or
FXGr
phonographist, FnGst or
FXGst
phonoscript, FnsK
phonotype-y-ic-al, FXtP
photo, FT
photogram, FTfG
photograph-y-ic-al, FTG
photographer, FTGr
photographist, FTGst
photolithogram, FtLThfG
(or FT)
photolithograph-y-ic-al, Ft-
LThG
photolithographer, FtL-
ThGr
photolithographist, FtL-
ThGst
phraseogram, FrsfG
1 >hraseo:raph-y-ic-al, FrsG
physical, FsKl
picturesque, PKtrsK
pillar, PLr or PLR
Pindar, PXtr
pioneer, PX'R
pitiful, PTf or Pt^l
platform, PltF or PltFr
playfulness, PlfXs
pleasurable, ZhrB
pleasurableness, ZhrBns
plenipotentiary, PlnP
plenteous, PlnTs
plentiful, PlnTf
plentifulness, PlnTfNs
plenty, PlnT
Plimpton, PIMptN
polar, PLr or PLR
polish, PLSh
polished, PLSht
politic, Plt'K
political, Pl^Kl
politician, Ph^Shn
pomp, P^Ip
Pompey, P : Mp
poniard, PnRt
poorer, Pr 3 R
poorhouse, Pr 3 hS or Pr 3 S
poorly, Pr 3 L
poorness, Pr 3 Xs
poplar, PPLr
popular-ly, P J P
popularize, P a Ps or P J P-
LRs
port, PRt
portage, PRtJ
porterage, PRtr J
Porto Rican, PrtRKn
Porto Rico, PrtRK
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
317
Porto Ricoan, PrtRKN
positive, PsTf
positively, PsTVl
positiveness, PsTfNs
postmeridian, PsMRt
postmortem, PsMtM
postponement, PsPMnt
postscript, PsKPt
potage, Pt J J
potash, Pt'Sh
potential-ly-cy, PTn
potter, Ptr 1
pottery, Pt'R
powder, Ptr 3
Powderly, Ptr 3 L
power, P 3 R
powerful, P 3 Rf
powerfulness, P 3 R'.Fs
Powhattan, PTn
practicable, Pr 3 KBl or
Prt 3 Bl
practical, Pr 3 Kl or Prt 3 -
Kl
practice, Pr 3 K or Prts 3
practiced, Pr 3 Kt or Prtst 3
practicer, Pr 3 Kr or
Prts 3 R
practitioner, Prshn 3 R or
Prt 3 Shr
precede, Pr^D
precedent, Pr^Dnt
precession, Prashn*
precise, Prss 1
precisely, Prss 1 !;
precision, Prsshn 1
predecessor, PrDssR
predestinarian, PrDsNrn
predistinate, PrDstNt
predestination, PrDst-
Nshn
predestine, PrDsTn
preface, PrFs
prefix, PrfKs
prejudice, PrJt
prejudicial, PrJtShl
preliminarily, PrLML
preliminary, PrLM
prepare, PrPR
prependage, PrPnJ or
PriPntJ
preposition, PrPsshn
prerogative, Pr J RG
presbyter, PrsBtr
Presbyterial, PrsBtRl
Presbyterian, PrsBt
Presbyterianism, Prs
BtsM
presbytery, PrsBtR
prescription, Pr^Krshn
prescriptive, Pr 1 sKrf
prescript! vely, Pr^KrVl
preservable-y, PrsRBl
preservation, PrsR
preservative, PrsVt or
PrsRVtV
preservatory, PrsRftR
preserve, PrsRf
preserver, PrsRfR
presidency, Prs'.D
president, PrsDnt
previously PrVsZ
princes, Prnss 1
princess, Prn^s
privilege, Prf J J
118
THE PHONOGRAPHIC M.VXUAL.
privileged, Prf J Jt
probate, PrBT
procedure, PrsDR
proceed, PrsD
process, Prss
procession, PrssAyi
product, Pr 3 DKt
production, Pr 3 Dshu
productive, Pr 3 Df
profession, PrFshn
professional, PrFshnL
professor, Prf or PrFsR
proficience, P^Fshns
proficiency, Pi^F'.Sh
proficient-ly , Pr ' Fshnt
profitable, Prf t J B
proti tableness, Pf r t * Bns
profound, PrFnt
profundity, PrFntT
prohibit, Pr'BT
prohibitive, Pi^Bf
project, PrJKt
prolong, Pr J Ng
prolonged, Pi^Ngt
prompt, Pr*Mpt
promulgate, PrMlGt
pronoun, PrXn
pronounce, PrNns
pronounced, PrNNst
pronunciation,
or PrXn*S7<shn
proper-ly-ty, PrP
prophesier, PrfP J SR
prophecy, Prf*S
prophet, Prft 1
prophetess, Prft 1 S
prophetic,
prophetical,
propose, PrPs
proposed, PrPst
proprietary, PrPrTR
proprietor, PrPrtr
propriety, PrPrT
prorogue, PrRG
proscription, PrsKrshn
prescriptive, PrsKrf
proscriptively, PrsKrVl
prosecution, Prs 3 Kshn
prosecutor, Prs 3 Ktr
prospective, Prs^f
prospecti vely, Prs'PVl
prospectus, Prs l PTs
prosperity, PrsPrt
prosperous, PrsPrs
prosperously, PrsPrsL
protective, PrtKtV
protector, PrtKtr
protest, Prtst
protestant, PrtsTnt
protestantism, PrtsTtsM
protestation, PrtsTshn
protested, PrtstiD
protester, PrtstR
prothonotary, PrThntR
protract, PrTrKt
protracter-or, PrTrtr
protraction, PrTrshn
protractive, PrTrf
protrude, Pr'Trt
protruder, Pr 3 Trti
protrusion, Pr 3 Trshn
provide, Pr a Vt
provider, Pr J Vtr
province, PrfXs
provincial, PrfX
provincialism, PrfXsM or
PrfXShlsM
prudential, PrDn
prunella-o, PrXZ
pruner, Prn 3 R
Prussian, PrShn
publican, PBn
})ublication, PBshn
publicist, PBssT
publicity, PBLst
publisher, PBShr
Puebla-o, PwBL or PwBl
puerile, P 3 R1
puerility, P 3 RIT
punctuation, PnsrTshn
pupil, P 3 P1
purely, P 3 RL
purification, P 3 RFshn
purport, PPRt
purposed, PPst
pursuance, PRSNs
pursuant, PRSXt
pursue, PRS
pursued, PRSt
pursuer, PRSR
pursuit, PRSt
pursuivant, PRsVnt
purveyor, PrVT?
Putnam, Pt'NM or
PTNM
putrefaction, PTrFshn
putrefied, PTrFt or PTrf D
pyramid-ic, PrMt or
PRMt
pyramidal, PrMt L or
PEMtL
pyramidical, PrMtKl or
PRMtKl
LESSON 38.
Q
quadrangle, KwtRNgl
quadrangular, KvvtRNglR
quadrant, KwtRnt
quadrat, KwtRt;
quadrator, Kvvt 1 Rtr
quadrature, KwtRtr
quadrennial, KwtRNZ
quadrilateral, KwtRltrL
quadrille, KwtRl
quadrillion, KwtRln
quadroon, KwtRn
quadruman, KwtR^n or
KtrMn
quadrumana, KwtRMX or
KtrMN
quadruped, KwtRPt or
KtrPt
quadruple, KwtRPl
quaere, KwR
quagga, KwG
quahog, Kw : G orKw^G
qualifiedly, KlFtL
qualify, K\F
qualitative, KITTf
quality, KIT
quantitative, KwntTTf
quantitive, KwntTf
quantity, KwntT
quantum, Kwn^M
quarantine, K \\RntN
quarrel, K\vRl
J20
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
quart, KwRt
quartered, Kwtrt 1
quartermaster, Kwtr * Mstr
(quartern, Kwtrn 1
quartet, KwRTt
quarto, K\vRT
quench, KwnC
question, Kwn or Kn
questionable, KwnB or
KnB
questioner, KwnR or KnR
quick-step, Kw'KsTP
quiet, KwT
quinine, KwnN
quinteroon, KwntRn
quitclaim, Kwt 1 KlM
quondam, KwntM
quorum, KwRM or KwM
quotient, Kwshnt
R
racehorse, RsRs or RshRs
rafter, RFtr
rail, Rl
railer-y, R1R
railroad, R1RD or Rl'.Rt
railway, RIAV
rampage, RMpJ
rampant, RMpnt
rampart, RMprt
rancid, RnsD
Randall, RnDL
random, RntM
ranger, RnJR or RnJr
ransack, RnsK
ransom, RnsM
rapid, RPt
Rappahannock, RPXK
rarer, RRR
rasher, RShr
ratify, Rt 3 F
ratification, Rt 3 Fshn
rattle, Rt 3 L
rattler, Rt 3 Lr
read (red), Rt
read, R'D
reader, R'Dr
realm, RIM
Reaumur, RMr or R
recessional, RssA?>Z
recherche, RShrSh
recognize, R'Xs
recognition, R'Xshn
recognizance, R'XsNs or
RfNsNs
recollect, RK1K or R 1
recollection, RKlKshn or
Rshn 1
red, Rt
re-elect, RIKt or RLKT
re-establish-ment, R 3 StB
refer, RR or Rf R
referable, RRB1 or Rf RBI
referee, RR-6 or RfR-e
reference, RRns or RfRns
references, RRnss or Rf-
Rnss
referendum, RRnM or Rf-
RntM
referential, RRn or RfRn
reflection, RFlshn
reform, RF
reformation, RFshn
reformative, RFTf
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
321
reformatory, RFTR
reformer, RFMr
refraction, RFrshn
regard, R 3 Grt
regeneration, RJshn
regenerative, RJf
regimental, RJMntL
regret, RGrt
rehear, RhR
reheard, RhRt
rehearsal, RRsL or RhRsL
rehearse, RRs or RhRs
rehearsed, RRst or RhRst
Rehmn, RhM or RM
relative, RltV
relatively, RltVl
relict, R'lKt
religious, Js 1 (See joyous.)
religiously, Js a L
religiousness, Js a Ns
relinguish, RlNgSh
remainder, RMntR
reminder, R'MntR
remonstrate, RMnsTrt
remonstrance, RMnsTrns
remonstrator, RMnsTrtr
renew, R 3 NFtoid
renewable, R 3 NB1
renewal, R 3 NZ
renewed, R 3 NtFtoid
renewedly, R 3 NDL
renewer, R 3 NR
renounce, RNns
renounced, RNNst
renouncement, RNNsMnt
renown, RNn
Renshaw, RnSh
renunciation, RNnss/m or
RNntfAshn
replenish, RPln
reporter, RPRtr
repu blicanis m , RPBsM
repugnance-t-ly, RPG
repute, R 3 Pt
require, R*Kw
requite, R*Kwt
requiter, R*Kwtr
resentment, RsNtMnt
reservance, RsRVns
reservation, RsR
reservative, RsRV T t or Rs-
RVtV
resevatory, RsRftR
reserve, RsRf
reservedly, RsRftL
reser vedness, RsRf ti Ns
reservee, RsRV
reserver-or, RsRfR
reservist, RsRVst
reservoir, RsRVT? or Rs-
resignation-, RsG
respective, RsPf
respectively, RsPVl
responsible-y, RsPnsB
restful, RsF or RsTFl
restiveness, RsTfNs
restoration, RsTRshn
restorative, RsTRTf
restrict, RsTrKt
restriction, RsTrshn
restrictive, RsTrf
restrictively, RsTrVl
restrictor, RsTrtr
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
resurrect, RsRKt
resurrection, RsRshn
resurrectionist, RsRshn St,
resurrectionize, RsRshns
retire, RTR
retract, RTrKt
retractor, RTrtr
retraction, RTrshn
retractive, RTrf
retrospect, RTrsP
retrospection, RTrsPshn
retrospective, RTrsPf
return, RTRn
Rev. (for reverend), RV
(See reverend.)
revengeful, RVJf
revenue, RV
reverend-t, RfRnt (See
Rev.)
reverential, RfRn
revert, RVrt
revivification, RVVFshn
revivify, RVVF
revolutionary, Lshn 3 R
revolve, Rf or RV1
revolver, Rf or RVlVr
reward, RwRt
re weigh, RW
re weighed, R TFt
reweight, RWt
Reynolds, RNlts or RN-
Zts
Rhenish, RnSh
rhetoric, RtrK
rhetorical, RtrKl
rhetorician, Rtrn or Rtr-
Shn
Rhode Island, RtLnt
Rhode Islander, RtLntR
Richard, RCrt
richer, R^Cr
riddle, Rt'L
ritual, Rt*L
road, Rt
Roderick, RtrK
Roger, RJr
roller, R1R
Roman, RMn
Roman Catholic-icism, R-
KTh
Roman Empire, RMMpr
Romanism, RMsM
romantic, RMntK
rotary, RTR
rotund, RTnt
rotundity, RTntT
roughness, RfNs
router, Rtr 3
R. R. (for railroad), RR or
R'R
rudimentary, R 3 DMntR
ruin, R 3 N
ruler, R1 3 R
runaway, RnW
runic, Rn 3 K
runner, RnR
rural, RR1
R.W. (for railway), RW
or RtW
.S
saddle, sDl 3
safflower, sFPR
saffron, sFrn 3
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
32?,
Sahara, S 3 R
sahib, S 3 B
Sambo, sMp 3
sample, sMpl
sanctification, sNgFshn 3
sanctify, sXgF 3
sanctity, sNgT 3 T
sanctum, sNgT 3 M
sanctum sanctorum, sNg-
T'MsNgtrM
sandwich, sNtC
San Francisco, sNss 1 !^
Sanhedrim, sNDrM or sN-
hDrM
Sanskrit, sNsKrt or sNsKt
sash, sSh 3
sasher-y, sShr
Satan, sTn 3
Satanic, sTn 3 K
satchel, sCl 3
satin, sTn 3
satinet, sTn 3 T
satire, sTR
satiric, sTRK
satirical, sTRKl
satirist, sTRst
satisfactorily, sTs 3 RL
satisfactory, sTs 3 R
satisfier, sTs 3 F/i
satrap, sTrP
saturate, sTRt
Saturday, sTRD or sTrD
Saturn, sTRn
said, sD
sawer, S*R
sawyer, S 1 yR or S^R
saying, SNg
scarf, sKRf or sKrf 3
scenery, sN ] R
Schiller, ShLR
schism, SsM
Schlegel, ShlGl
scholar, sKLr or sKIR
schorl, ShrL
Schwab, Sh!B or Sh'wB
Schwartz, Sh 3 Rts, Shw-
Rts or ShwRts
Schweinfurth ShnFRt or
ShwnFRt
Schweinitz, Sh^ts or
ShwNts
Schwerin, ShRn or ShwRn
scientific, S^t
scientifical, S J NtZ
scoffer, sKf!R
score, sKR
scorn, sKRn
scorner, sKRnR
scornful, sKRnF
scoundrel, sKtRl
season, SsN
secede, SsD
secessionist, sSshnSt
secretary, sKrtR
security, sKrT 3
sedan, sDn 3
sedate, sDt
sedentary, sDtR or sDntR
seize, Ss 1
seized, Ss J D
seldom, sLtM
self, s or sLF
self-assertive, sSRtV
self-sacrifice, ssKrFs
Till-; PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
self-same, ssM
self-satisfied, ssT 3
self -seeker, ssKr 1
self -slaughter, ssLtr 1
self-sufficient, ssFshnt
selves, ss or sLVs
senate, sNt
senator, sNtr
send, sNt or sND
senior, sNR or sNyR (See
ST.)
sensationalism, sNs,s/mZs-
M
senselessly, sNsZsZ
sensible-y-ity, sNsB
sensitiveness, sNsTfNs
sent, sNt 1
sentence, sNtNs
sentenced, sNtNst
sententious, sNtNShs
sentiment, sNtMnt
sentimental, sNtMntL
sentimentality, sNtMntLT
sentinel, sNtNl
sentry, sNtR
separable, sPr 3 Bl
separate, sPrt 3
separately, sPrt 3 L
separateness, sPrt 3 $Ns
separation, sPrshn 3
separatism, sPrts 3 M
separatist, sPrtst 3
separator, sPrtr 3
separatory, sPrtr 3 R
separatrix, sPrtr 3 Ks
September, sPtMpr
servant, sRVnt
serve, sRf
server, sRfR
servient, sRVnt
servitor, sRVtr
servitorship, sRVtrSh
servitude, sRVTt
serviture, sR 3 Vtr
sessional, Sshni L or SshnZ
setoff, sTf 1
settee sTe 1
settle, sTl
settler, sTIR
seven, 7
sever, sVr
severance, sVrns,
severe, ,s
severely,
severer, sV7?R
severest, sV^st
sew, S
sewed, sD
sewn, sN
sewage, S 3 J
sewer, S 3 R
sewerage, S 3 RJ
Shaker, ShKr
Shakespeare, ShKsPR or
ShsP
Shakespearean, ShKsPRn
or ShsPn
shale-y, Shi
shaloon, ShLn
shallop, ShLP
shallot, Sh J Lt
shallow, Sh 3 L
shamble, #AMpl or ShMpL
shampoo, Sh 3 Mp
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
325
shapely, ShPl or ShPL
share, Shr
Sharzwood, Shrs Wi
shaver, ShVr or ShVT?
shawl, Shi 1
shear, Shr 1
sheath, Sh J Th
sheathe, Sh a Dh
sheather, Sh J Dhr
Sheehy, Sh 1
Sheldon, ShlDn
Shelley, ShL
Shelbyville, ShlBVl
shelf, ShlF
shell, Shi
Shelton, ShltN
shelve, ShlV
Shency, ShnS
shepherd, ShPrt
sherry, ShR
shield, Shit 1
shillalah, ShLL
shilling, ShlNg
shilly, Sh x L
shimmer-y, xSAMr or Sh-
MR
shire, Shr 1
shoal, Shi
shore, Shr
shorn, Shrn
shorthand, ShrtU^t
shortsighted, Shr^sTt
short-time, Shrt 1 M
Shoshone, ShShN or Sh-
Shoyer, SA*i/R, Sh'R or
shrew, Shr 3
shrewd, Shrt 3
shrewdly, Shrt 3 L
shrill-y, ShrL
shriller, ShrLR
Shruble, ShrBl
shuttle, ShtL or ShTl
Sicily, sSL
sidle, sDl 1
sierra, SR or sR
siesta, SsT
sigh, S 1
sighed, sD 1
sight, sT 1
significancy,
Sihor, S*R
simile, sML 1
similitude, s
simmer, sMr 1
simper, sMpr 1
simpleness, sMp 1 Ns
simpler, sMpR 1
simplest, sMpst 1
simpleton, sMpn 1
simplification, sMpFshn 1
simplified, sMpFt 1
simplify, sMpF 1
single, sXgl 1
singsong, sNg a sNg
sinless, sNls 1 or s
sinlessly,
sinlessness, sNls 1 Ns or
s^ifLs
sinner, sNr 1
Sioux, S 3
sir, sR
sire, sR 1
326
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
Sisco, ssK 1
Sismondi, ssMnD
Sissman, ssMn 1
sister, ssTr 1
sister-in-law, ssT^Nl
site, sT 1
situate, sT'T
sixpence, sKsPns
sizzle, SsL
skillfulness, sKlf x Ns
slack-water, sLKwtr or
sLKWtr
slash, sLSh
slashed, sLSht
slavish,
slavishly, s
slavishness,
small, sML
smaller, sMLr or sMLR
smash, sMSh
smashed, sMSht
sociability, sShBt
sociable, sShB
sociableness, sShBns
social, sShl
sociality, sShlT
socialism, sShlsM
socialist-zed, sShlst
socialistic, sShlsK
socials-ize, sShls
society, SsT
Socinian, sSuN
Socinus, sSNs
soever, SV
Soho, S
sojourn, sJrn
soldier, sLJr, sLtr (see
sec. 70) or sJr
solsticial, sLsTShl
somber, sMpr 1
somehow, sM-now
something, sMNg
sometime, sMtM
somewhere, sMn?/;R
sonant, sXXt
son-in-law, sNnL
songstress, sNgstrs 1 or
sNgsT'Rs
sooner, sNr 3
soonest, sNst 3
Sorosjs, sRss
sorrel, sRl 1
sorrily, sR 1 !*
sorrow-y, sR 1
sorrowful, sRf 1
South Carolina, sTh 3 Kr
South Carolinan, sTh 3 Krn
South Dakota, sThDKt
South Dakotan, sThDKtN
southeast, sSt 1
southeaster, sStr 1
southeastern, sStrn 1
southerly, sDhrL or sDhL
southern, sDhrn or sDhn
southerner, sDhrR or
sDhnR
southward, s?rRt 3 or sTh 3 -
%'Rt
southwest, sWst 3
south wester, sWstr 3
southwestern, sWs 3 Rn
sow, S
sowed, sD
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
327
sown, sN
specialist, s
speciality, sP-S
specialization, sPShlshn
specialize, sPA7/ls,
specialty, sPT or sP/6VtlT
specification, sPsFshn
sphere, sFT?
sphericity, sFRsT
sport, sPRt
square-d, sKw
squarely, sKwL
squatter, sKwtr 1
Sr. (for senior), sR 1
stal)ility, stBLT
stable, stBL
Stacy, stS
staid, staD or sTD (See
stayed. )
staidness,staDNs or stDNs
stand, stNt 3
standard, stNtrD 3 or stNt-
Rt 3
staple stPL
star-ry, stR 3
starred, stRt 3
start, stRt 3
Staten, stTn
statesman, stTsMn
statesmen, stTs 1 Mn
station, stShn
stationary-ery-er, stShR
stationed, stShnt
statist, stTst 3
statistic, stTsK
statistical, stTsKl
statistician, stTsTshn or
statuary, stT 3 R
statue, stT 3
statuesque, stT 3 sK
statuette, stT 3 T
stature, stTr 3 or stT 3 K
status, stTs
statute, stTt 3
statutory, stTt 3 R
stay, sT
stayed, stiiD or sTD(See
staid. )
stead-y, stD
steadiness, stDNs
steamboat, stMpt
stear, stR 1
stearate, stR'T
stearic, stR^
stearin, stRn 1
steatite, stT'T
steed, stD 1
steeple, stP'L
steno, stN
stenograph-y-ic-al, stNG
stenographer, stNR or
st^Gr
stenographist, stNGst
stenotype-y, stNtP
stentor, stNtr
stentorian, stNtrn
stereotype, stRt 1 ?
stereotyper, stRt a Pr
sterile, stRL
sterling, stRLNg
stern, stRn
stew, sT 3
328
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
steward, sT 3 Rt
stewardess, sT 3 RtS
stewardship, sT 3 RtSh
Stewart, sT 3 Rt
stewed, stD 3
stewish, sT 3 Sh
stied, stD 1
stipple, 6tP*L
stipulate, stPLt
stipulation, stPLshn
St Loui, stL or sNt L 3
St Louis, stLs or sNt Ls 3
stone, stN
stoned, stNt
stood, stD 3
store-y, stR
storm, stRM
stout, stT 3
stouter, stTr 3
stoutest, stTst 3
stove, stV
stow, sT
stowage, sTJ
stowed, stD
Stowell, sTL
stower, sTR
strain, sTrn
strangle, sTrNgl
strangled, sTrNglt
strangler, sTrNglR
stratagem, sTrtJM
strategist, sTrtJst
strategy, sTrtJ
stratification, sTrTfKshn
stratify, sTrTF
Streeter, sTrtr 1
stringency, sTriJ
strong, sTrNg
stronger, sTrNgr
strongest, sTrNgst
stronghold, sTrXglt or
sTrXghLt
strongly, sTrNgl
structure, sTrtr
stub-by, stB
stubble, stBL
stubborn, stBrn or stBRn
stubbornly, stBrnL or
stBRnL
stubbornness, stBrns or
stBRns
student, stDnt 3
study, stD
stutter, stTr
sty, sT^See stied.)
Stygian, stJn 1
suasible, sWsB
suasion, sWshn
suasive, sWsV
suasoiy, sWsR
suave, sWV
suavely, sWVl
suavity, sWVT
subaltern, sBLtrn
subjectively, sBVl
subjectiveness, sBfNs
subjectivity, sBfT
subject-matter, sBMtr
subpoena, sPN
subserve, sBsRf
subservience, sBsRVns
subserviency, sBsRtV
subservient-ly, slisKVnt
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
329
substantial, sBsTn
substantiate, sBsTSht
substantiation, sBsTSh or
sBsTShn
substitute, sBsTt
substitution, sBsTshn
subtracter, sBTrtr
subtraction, sBTrshn
success, sKss
successful, sKssF
succession, sKssshn
successive, sKssV
successively, sKssVL
sue, S
sued, sD 3
Suez, Ss 3
suffer, sFr
sufferance, sFrns
sufficience, sFshns
sufficiency, sFiSh
sufficient-ly, sFshnt 1
suffragan, sFrGn
suffrage, sFrJ
sugar, ShGr
suggester, sJstr
suggestion, sJn
suggestive, sJf
suicide, SsD
suit, sT 3
suitable-y, st 3 Bl
suite, sWt*
summer, sMr
snn, sN
Sunday, sND
sunder, sXtr
sundown, sNDn 3
suntish, sNFA'/>
sunflower,
sunless, sNls or sNZs
sunlight, sNlt 1 , sNLt 1 or
sNZt 1
sunlike, sNUK
sunlit, sNlt 1 , sNLt 1 or
sNZt 1
sunned, sNt
sunnier, sNR
sunniest, sNst
sunrise, sNRs
sunset, sNsT
sunshine, sJsShn
sunstroke, sNsTrK or
sNstr
superable, sPrBl
superficial, sPrF
superficies, sPrF/SAs
superintend-ent, sPrNTnt
superintendence, sPrNTnt-
Na
superintendency, sPrNT-
iDor sPrNTniD
superior, sPRR
superscribe, sPrsK
superscription, sPrsKshn
supplant, sPlnt 3
supplanter, sPlnt 3 R
supple, sPl
supplicate, sPlKt
supreme, sPrM
surely, ShrL
surmountable, sRMntB
surpass, sRPs
surrender, sRNtr
surround, sRnt 3
surveyor,
330
THE PHONOGUAPHIC MANUAL.
susceptible, SsPt or SsPt-
Bl
suspect, ssPKt
suspend, ssPnt
suspicion, ssPshn
suspire, ssPr 1
sustain, ssTn
sutler, sTLR
suttle, sTl
swage, sJ or swj
swale,
swallow,
swamp-y, sWMp
swash, sir-Sh 1
swashed, sVF-Sht 1
swath, sw-Th 1
swathe, sw-Dh
sweat, sWt
sweater, sWtr
sweaty, sw-T
s weati ness, sw-TNs
Swede, s TFt 1
Sweden, sTFi'N
Swedenborg, sTFt'NB
Swedish, sw-D'Sh or slFt 1 -
'.Sh
sweep, sWP
sweet, sWt 1
sweetheart, sWt'Rt
sweetish, sw-T 1 Sh or s Wt l -
iSh
sweetly, sWt*L
swell, mtjLi
swelter, s^Ltr
swift, sWFt, swFt 1 or
sFt 1
swifter, sWFtr, sw-Ftr 1 or
sFtr 1
swiftest, sWFtst, sw-Ftst 1
or sFtst 1
swiftly, sWFtL, sw-Ft'L
or sFt'L
swiftness, s WFtNs, sw-Ft 1 -
Ns or sFt'Ns
swindle, sWnt 1
swindler, sWnt'R or
sWt'Lr
swish, sSh 1 orsir-Sh 1
switch, sC 1 or sw-C 1
switchman, sC'Mn
switchmen, sCn 1
Switzerland, sWtsRLnt
swollen, sv/'Ln
symbol, sMpL
sympathetic, sMpTht
sympathetical, sMpThtKl
sympathy, sMpTh
symptom, sAIpt'M
synonym, sNnM
synonymous, sXnMs
tabernacle, TBr
tachygraph-y-ic-al, TKG
tachygrapher, TKGr
tachygraphist, TKGst
taffeta-y, TfT
Tahiti/ TT
talkativeness, T^KtiVs
Tallahassee, TLS or T1S
tallyho, TL
tano-ence, TnJns
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
331
tangent, TnJnt
tangential, TnJn or TnJ-
Shl
tangible-ness, TnJ
tangle, TNgl
tannin, TnN
tantamount, TTMnt or
TtMnt
tariff, TRf or Trf 3
tarnish, TrnSh
tart, T 3 Rt
Tartar, T s Rtr
tartarous-us, T 3 RTRs
Tartary, T 3 RTR
tasteful, TsFl
technic, TK
technical, TK1
technicality, TKlt
technics, TKs
technology, TKN1J
telegram, TlfG
telegram mic, TlfGK
telegraph-y-ic-al, TIG
telegrapher, TIGr
telegraphist, TIGst
telephoner, TlfR
telephonist, Tll'St or Tlst
temper, TMpr
tempered, TMprt
temperament, TMprMnt
temperance, TMprns
temperate, TMprT
temperature, TMprtr
tempest, TMpst
templar, TMP1R
temple, TMpl
temporal, TMprL
temptation, TMpTshn
tempter, TMptr
tenable, TNB1
tenant, TnNt
tendency, TntS or TntNS
tendon, TntN
tendonous, TntNs
tenement, TNMnt
tenemental, TNMntL
tenet, TNt
Tennessee, TnS or TNS
Tennesseean, TnSn or TN-
Sn
tenon, TnN
tensile, TNsL
tentation, TntShn
tentative, TntTf
tentatively, TntTVl
term, TrlVI
terminal, TrMNl ,
terminate, TrMNt
termination, TrMNshn
terminator, TrMNtr
terminatory, TrMNtR
terminer, TrMNr
territory, TRt
territorial, TRtRl
terse, TRs
terser, TRsR
tersest, TRssT
tersely, TRsL
testament, TsMnt
testamentary, TsMntK
testification, TsFshn
testify, TsF
testimonial, TsMKl
i testimony, TsM or TMN
332
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXL'AL.
tete, Tt
teteatete, TtiTt
Texan, TssN or TKsX
Texas, Tss or TKss
text, TKst
Thahash, ThSh
texture, TKstr, orTKsTr
Thanet, ThNT
thankful, Th 3 Fl .
thankless, Th s Ls
thanksgiving, Ths 3 G
Thawler, ThLr or ThLR
thea, Th 1
theater-ic, Thtr 1
theatrical, Thtr'Kl
theism, ThsOI
theist, Thst 1
theistic, Ths 1 !^
theistical, Ths^l
thence,^Dhns
thenceforth, DhnsFTh
thenceforward, DhnsFwRt
theology, ThlJ
theologian, ThlJn
theological, ThlJKl
theorem, Th a RM
theoretical, Th^tKl
theory, Th 1 !*
thereabout, DhrBt
thereafter, DhrFt
thereat, Dhrt
therefore, DhrF
therefrom, DhrFr
therein, DhrN
thereinto, DhrNT
thereof, DhrPtoid
thereon, Dhrn
thereout, Dhrt 3
thereto, DhrT
theretofore, DhrtFT?
thereunto, DhrnT
thereupon, DhrPn
therewith, DhrDh
thes (pi. of the), Rtsoid 1
or Dhs 1
these (pro.), Dhs 1 or Rts-
oid 1 (Upward ' 'the"tick
and S circle by way of
license. )
thicket, ThKt
thill, Thl 1
thiller, Thl J R
thinker, ThiR or ThR
thistle, ThsZ
thither, Dhtr 1
thitherto, Dhr 1 !
thole, Thl
Thor, Thr 1
thorn, Thrn 1
thorner, Thr 1 ^^
thorniest, Thi^Xst
thornless, Thrn^Ls
thorny, Thr^
thorough, ThR
thoroughly, ThRl
those, Z 3 or Dhs 3
threshold, ThrShltor Thr-
ShLt
throttle, ThrtL
throughout, Thrt 3 or
Thr 3 T
thumbed, ThMt
thumped, ThMpt
Thursday, ThrsD
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
thwack, ThwK
thwacked, ThwKt
thwaite, Thwt
thwart, ThwRt
thwarter, ThwRtr
thwite, Thwt 1
thwittle, Thwt 1 !,
tidal, Tt 1 !, .
tide, Tt 1
tide-waiter, Tt'Wtr
tide-way, Tt l W
tiffet, T ;i Ft
timber, T x Mpr
timbre^ TMBrL
timely, T^.LjT 1 Lor T J M-
L
timid, TMt
title,. Tt'L
to-day, TD
to-do, TD
tomahawk, TMK
to-morrow, TMR
ton, Tn
tonic, TnK
tonical, TnKL
to-night, TNt
tonnage, TnJ
torment, TrMnt
tormenter-or, TrMNtr
torture, TRtr
total, TtL
township, Tn 3 Sh
townsman-men, Ts 3 Mn
traction, Trshn
trammel, TrMl
tranquil, Tr'Ng
tranquil! ty, Tr s NgKlt
tranquilize, Tr 3 Ngs
transact, Trs 3 Kt
transaction, Trs 3 Kshn or
transactor, Trs 3 Ktr
transatlantic, TrsTlntK or
TrsTLntK
transcend-ence. TrsNt
transcendency, TrsNtS
transcendent-ly-ness, Trs-
Nnt
transcendental, TrfN
transcendentalism, Trf Nt
transcendentalist, TrfNst
transcendentality, TrfNT
transept, TrNsPt
transfer, TrsFr
transform, TrsF
transformation, TrsFshn
transformer, TrsFMr
transfuse, TrsFs
tranship, TrnShP
transient, TrsNt or Trn-
Shnt
transit, Trs 3 T
transition, Trnsskn 1
transitive, TrsTf
transitory, TrsTr
translate, TrsLt
translucent, TrsLsNt
transmit, TrsMt
transmute, Trs 3 Mt
transom, TrNsM
transpire, TrsPr
transplant, TrsPlnt
transport, TrsPRt
transportation, TrsPshn
334
TUE PHONOGRAPHIC MAM Al..
transporter, TrsPtr
transpose, Trs 3 Ps
transposition, Trs 3 Ps.sAw
transship, TrsShP
transubstantiate-ion. TrsB
transubstantiated, TrsBt
transverse, TrsVrs
treater, Trtr 1
tremble, TrMpl
tremendous, TrMnDs
tremor, TrMr
trespass, TrsPs
trial, Tr'L
trimmer, Tr J Mr
trisect, Tr J sKt
trisection, Ti^sKshn
trivet, TrVt or TrfT
trotter, Trtr 1
trombone, TrMpn
truly, Tr 3 L
trumped, TrMpt
trumpet, TrMpT
trumpeted, TrMpTt
trumpeter, TrMptr
trustful, TrsFl
trustworthy, TrswRDh
truthfulness, TrfNs
tuckahoe, TK
Tuesday, TsD
tuition, Tshn 3 or TShn
tuitionary, Tshn 3 R or
TShR
tumble, TMpl
tumbler, TMplR
tutor, Ttr 3
two, 2
twofold, 2 FZt
twoedged, 2 e-Jt
twohanded, 2 NDt 3
twopenny, 2 PN
twoply, 2 PI 1
tympan, TMpn
tympanum, TMpnM
Tyrrell, TR1
LESSON 39.
U
ubiquity, BKwT
ugh, ui
ult (for ultimo), Lt
ulterior, LtRR
ulteriorly, LtRRL
ultimate-ly, LTMt
ultimatum, LTMtM
ultimo, LTM
ululate, LLt
ululation, LLshn
Ulysses, Lss 1 or YLss
umbel, Mpl
umber, Mpr
umpire, Mpr
unalterable, NLtr a Bl
unanimity, NnMT 3
uncial, N-5A1
uncivil, nsVl 1
uncivilized, nsVlst 1
uncommon, N l5 Mn
uncommonly, N'MnL 1
unconstitutional, NsTshn 3
unconstitutionality, Ns-
Tshn 3 T
unction, Ngshn
unctuous, NgTs
THE PHONVUiRAlMIK 1 MANU'AL.
underhand, NtNt
Underbill, NthL
undermine, NtMn
undermined, NtMnt
undersign, NtsN
undersigned, NtsNt
understand, Nt 3 sTnt
understood, Nt s sTt (See
interested.)
undertake, Nt^TK
undertook, NtT 3 K
underwrite, NtRt
underwriter, NtRtr
underwritten, NtRtN
unearthly, NrThL or
NRThL
uneasy, NZ 1
unenlightened, NNlTnt
unequal, N M K1
unerring, NRNg
unexampled, N 3 GsMp
unexempt, NGsMpt
unexpectetl-ly, NKsP
unhoped, NPt 3
unhorse, NhRs
unhurt, NhRt
unicorn, NKrn
uniform-ed-ly, Yn 3 F
uniformity, Yn 3 Ft
unify, Y 3 NF
unimportant, N 1 Mp
unimproved, NMp
uninfluenced, N'Nst
uninfluential, N^JNShl
uninteresting, NNtsT
unionist, N 3 JS'st
unique, N 1 K
unison, N 3 sN
unit, Nt 3 or Y-Nt 3
Unitarian, NT 3 Rn
unite, Y^t
unity, NT 3
United States, Nss
universal, VrsL
university, VrsT
unlace, Nls
unlaced, Nlst
unlanched, NINCt 3
unlatch, NIC 3
unlawful, N1F1 1
unlearn, NLrn
unlettered, NltrD
unlike, N1 J K
unlikely. NPKl
unlimber, NIMpR
unlimited, NIMTt
unload, N1D
unlock, Nl'K
unloose, Nls 3
unloosed, Nlst 3
unloosen, Nls 3 N
unlovely, N1V1
unluckier, NIKr
unluckiest, NIKst
unluckily, N1KI
unlucky, NIK
unmeasured, NZhrt 3
unquestionable, NKvvnB
unransomed, NRnstMt
unread, NRt
unready, NRD
unreal, NR1 1
unreality, NR1 1 ?
unreasonable, NRsNBl
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
X
urireave, NRf 1
unrecognized, NR'Nst
unrecompensed, NR'Pnst
unreconciled, NR'sLt
unrecorded, NRKrt
unrecumbent, NR'Bnt
unredeemed, NRDMt
unredressed, NRDrst
unregeneration, NRJshn
unregarded, Nr 3 Gt
unregretted, NrGt
unreined, NRnt
unrepentant, NRPntNt
unrepresented, NRP
unrest, NRst
unrestrained, NRsTrnfc
unrighteous, NRTs 1
unripened, NR*Pnt
unrivaled, NR^lt
unroof, NRf s
unsaddle, nsDl 3
unsatchel, nsCl 3
unsatisfactory, NsTsR
unscriptural, nsKr x L
unscrupulous, nsKrPls
unseasoned, NSsNt
unselfish, nsSh
unsequester, nsKwstr
unsettle, nsTl
unsociability, nsShBt
unsociable, nsShB
unsociableness, nsShBns
unsocial, nsShl
unsquare, nsKw
unsubstantial, NsBsTn
unsummoned, nsMnt
unsupplied, nsPlt 1
unto,
untold, NTH
untoward, NTrt
untwine, NTwn
untwist, NTwst
unusual, NZh
unwilling,
unwritten,
unyielding, NYt- 1 or
upbraid, PBrt
uppermost, uPrMst
upright, PRt
uproot, P 3 Rt
upstairs, Pstrs
upward, Pw?Rt
Uranus, yRNs
Uriah, yR 1
usage, Z 3 J
usable, Z 3 B1
useful, S 3 F1
useless, S 3 Ls
uselessly, S 3 LsL
usurer, ZhRR
usurious, ZhRs
usurp, ZRP
usurper, ZRPr
usury, ZhR
Utah, Y-T 3
Utahan, r-Tn 3
Utan, Y-Tn 3
Ute, Yt 3
utensil, Y-TNsZ
Utica, Y-T 3 K
utile, Y-TL
utilitarian, Y-TLtrn
utilitarianism, Y-TLtrnsM
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
utility, Y-TLT
utilize, Y-TLs
utilized, Y-TLst
utmost, TMst
Utopia, Y-TP
Utopian, Y-TPn
utter, Tr
utterance, Trns
uttermost, TrMst
uva, Y-V 3
uvate, Y-Vt 3
uzcma, Y-Z 3 M
vacancy, V;K
vacant, VKNt
vacantly, VKNtZ
vacation, VKshn
vacillancy, Vs;L
vacillant, VsLnt
vacillate, VsLt
vacillation, VsLshn
Vanhoesan, VnSn
Vanhorn, VnRn
Vanhouten, VnTn
vanish, VnSh
vanquish, VNgSh
variety, VRT
varnish, VrnSh
vaseline, VsLn
Vashti, VShT
vassal, Vs 3 Z
vassalage, Vs 3 LJ
Vassar, VsR
vaulter, Vltr 1
vegetable-ate, VJt
vegetation, VJshn
vegetative, VJtV
vehement, VMnt
vehicle, VKl
velocity, VLst
vengeance, VJns
venire, Vn*R
ventilate, VntLt
venture, VNtr
veracity, VRst
verd, Vrt
verdant, VrtNt
verdict, VrtKt
verdure, Vrtr
verge, Vr J
verisimilitude, VrsMLTt
Vermont, VrMnt
Vermonter, VrMntR
versatile, VrsTL
versus, Vrss
vert, Vrt
vertant, VrtNt
vessel, VsZ
vestry, VsTr
vesture, Vstr
veteran, Vtrn
veterinarian, VtrnRn
veterinary, VtrnR
vexatious, VKsShs
via, V 1
viceversa, V^Vr or VVr
vicious, V6ViS
viciously, VShsL
viciousness, V -6VisXs
victor, VKtr
victory, VRTR
victual, Vt*Z
victualer, Vt T Lr
338
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAX CAT..
vigil, VJ1
vineyard, Vn'Rt
Virginia, V J J
Virginian, V 1 Jn
visavis, Vs*V
vivavoce, ViV or VVS
vision, Vshn 1
visionary, Vshi^R
visit, Vs'T
visitant, Vs ir Tnt
visitation, Vs^shn
visitor, Vs'TR
visor, VsR
visual, VZA1 or VZhl
visualize, VZAls or VZbls
vital, Vt'Z
vitativeness, VTTfNs
vitiation, V/S/tshn
vitiosity, VShst or V//sT
vivi fl cation, VVFshn
vivify, VVF
Vladimir, VltMr
vocation, VKshn
void, Vt 1
Volapuk, V1PK
volatile, VLtL
voracity, VoRst
votary, VtR
vouch, V 3 C
vow, V 3
voyage, V J J
voyager, V^r
voyageur, V 3 Jr or Vw 1 -
Zhr
Vreeland, Vi^Lnt
vulture, Vltr
\\"
waddle, TJVL
waft, W 3 Ft
vvafter, W 3 Ftr or w-Ftr 3
wage, w-J
wager, w-JR or w-Jr
Wahabee, AVB
Wahoo, W 3
wainscot, WsKt
Wakefield, A\^KFlt
wakeful, WKf
wakef ulness, WKfNs
wander, W'Ntr
wanderer, ^\' ' XtrR
ward,
warder,
warehouse, ?rRS
warren, ^Rn 1
wary, %'R
wash, TT-Sh 1
washed, TF-Sht 1
washer, Tr-Shr 1
Washington, Sh J Ngt
Washingtonian, Sh'NgtNn
washout, ir-Sh 1 '!
wast, St or Wst 1
wasteful, WsF or WsTF
watchfulness, Cf^s
watchman, C 1 Mn
watchmen, Cn 1
watery, Wt a R
wattle, Wt 3 L
Wauwatosa, WWtS
wave, "NVV
waved, AWt
waver, WVr
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
we, w 1 or W
NVwmler, WLr or WLR
wedge, w-J
Wednesday, WnsD
weed, TFt 1
weedy, w-D 1
Weehawken, WKn
weigher, WR
weight, Wt
weighed, Wt
weighty, w-T
welcome, 7/jLK
Weller, LR
westerly, WsRL
western, AYsRn
West Virginia, WsVJ
West Virginian, WsVJn
westward, WsRt
wharf, iitvlli *
wharfage, n?^R 1 FJ
wharf ager, HwR'FJr
Avharf-boat, m/'R'FBt or
wharfinger,
Wharton, H^RTn (See
Yharton. )
whatnot, Tnt 1
whatsoever, T^V
wheat, nWt 1
Whedge, nw-J
whence ver, nWns'.V (See
sec. 383, a.)
whencesoever, nWnsi sV
(See whencever. )
whenever, nWV
whensoever, nWsV
whereabout, Hw>RBt
whereas, H?^Rs
whereat, H?/jRt
whereby,
wherefore,
wherein,
whereinto,
whereof, H?t'Rf
whereon, H?/jRn
wheresoever,
whereto, m/jRT
whereunto,
whereupon, H?/'RPn
wherever, HwRV
whereout, Hii/'Rt 3
wherewith, ii^RDh
wherewithal, H</.'RDhL
wherry,
whey,
whichsoever, CsV
Whidge, Hw-J 1
whiff,
whiff ed-et, HA\ Tl Ft
whiffety, nW^T
whilst, H TFLst 1
whilom, m/'I/M
whim, HW 1 ^! (See Hume.)
whimsical, nW^MsKl
whine, nWn 1 (See hewn.)
Whipple, nW 1 ?!
whirlwind, Hw?RLnt
whisker, nWsKr
white, nWt 1
whiten, nW^N
Whitehouse, HWtS
whitewash, HWt 1 -iF-Sh
whitey, Hw 1 -! 1
340
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
whithersoever, n Wtr 1 s V
whitish, HW-TShor nWt 1 -
iSh
whom, HU or M 3
whomsoever, Hu 2 sV or
MsV 3
whose ver, Hus 2 iV (See
whencever. )
whosesoever, Huss 2 V or
Hus 2 < sV (See whenceso-
ever. )
whoso, HU 2 S
whosoever, Hu 2 sV
widow, w-D 1
widowhood, w-D*D
width, w-DTh
Wilmington, wLMXgt
Winchell, WnCL
Winchester, WnCstr
winder, W x Xtr
windrow, Wnt*R
Wington, WNgtN
winner, Wn*R
winter, W*Xtr
wintry, Wnt*R
Wisconsan, WsKsN or
WsK
Wisconsin, WsKsN or
W r sK
Wisconsiner, WsKsNr or
WsKr
wisdom, Ws*M
wistful, Ws'F
wit, Wt 1
witch, w-C 1
witchery, w-OR or TF-Cr 1
withdraw, Dh J Dr
withdrew, Dh 3 Dr
withe-y, w-Th 1
withholden, DhlDn
without, Dht, or w-T 3
withstand, Dh^Tnt
witness, Wt^'s or T'Ns
witticism, w-TssOI
wittier, w-^R
wittiest, w-Tst 1
wittily, w-T J L
wittiness, w-T^Xs
witty, w-T 1
woman, AVMn
women, W J Mn
wonder, WXtr
wonderful, WXtrF
wonderous, WXtrs
won't, Wnt
wood, Wt 3
wooden, Tft 3 X
woodiness, w-D 3 Xs
woody, w-D 3
woo, W 3
wooed, TFt 3
Woo-Hoo, W 3 or W 3 HU
work, %'R 3
worker, wR 3 R
work-house, %'R 3 S
working-class, wR 3 'Kls
working-man, ?#R 3 'Mn
working-men, ioR 1? Mn
working-woman, u'R 3 'W-
Mn
working- women, //-R l ' W-
Mn
workman, ^'Rri 3
workmanlike, </jRn 3 K
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
341
workmanly, ?/_'Rn 3 L
workmanship, ?/jRn 3 Sh
workmen, wRa i
work-woman, ?rR 3 WMn
work-women, ?/ < R 1 WMn
work-shop, ?/-R 3 ShP
world, Lt or wRLt
worldling, LtLNg or
worldly, LtL or ?rRLtL
worrel, WRi or u<RL
worship, ?rRSh
worshipper, ?rRShr
Worthington, wRDh'.Ngt
write, Rt 1
writer, Rtr 1
written, Rt*N
Wyatt, w-T 1
Wynal, AVnL
Wynly, WnL
Wyoming, W a M or WM-
Ng
A\ yominger, W 1 Mr or AV-
MNgr
X
Xagua, AGw 3
Xalapa, hR 3 P
Xanthippe, ZntP
X;ivier, ZVr
Xenia, Z 1 N
Xenophon, ZnFn
Xerxes, ZRKss
Ximines, hMNs
xilophone, ZLFn
Xylander, ZLNtr
xyst, Zst 1
xyster, Zstr 1
Xystus, Zs^
yacht, Yt 1
yachter, Ytr 1
yachtman, Yt 1 Mn
yachtsman, YtsMn or
Y-Ts 1 Mn
yager. YGr
yah, Y 3
yahoo, Y 3
Yak, Y 3 K
Yale, Yl
yam, Y 3 M
Yank-ee, YNgK
yanolite, YNZt
yaourt, 7/Rt 3
yap, Y-P 3
yarage, ?/RJ
yardstick, yRtsTK or
2/Rtst
Yarmouth, yRMTh or
yR 3 Th
yarn, 7/Rn 3
Yarnell,
yarrish, y
yarrow, yii 3 or Y 3 R
yataghan, Y-TGn
Yates, Yts
Yattaw, Y-T 3
yaupon, Y-Pn 1
yaw, Y 1
yawl, Yl 1
yawn, Yn 1
yawp, Y-P 1
Yazoo, Y-Z 3
342
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
ycleped, KIPt
yearn, yRn
yeast, Yst 1
yeasty, Ys'T
Yeauler, YLr or YLR
Yeddo, Y-D
Yeia, Y*Y
yelk, Y1K
yell, Yl
yelled, Ylt
yellow, YL
yelp, YIP or F-LP
yelper, YIPr or F-LPr
Yelverton, YlVrtN
yend, Ynt
yenite, YNT
yeoman, YMn
yeomanry, YMnR
yeomen, Y 1 Mn
yerk, 7/EK
Yesso, Y-S
yester, Ystr
yesterday, StRD
yestereve, YstrV
yesterevening, YstrVnNg
yestern, YstrN
yesternight, YstrNt
yew, Y 3
ye wen, Y 3 N
Yharton, HyRTn (Pro.
Hyarton. See Whar-
ton).
yielder, Yltr 1
yieldingly, Ylt 'Ngl
yieldance, Yl^Ns
yodel, TiL or Y-DL
Yoder, Ptr 1
yojan, YJn
yoke, YK
yokel, YK1
Yokohama, YKM
yolk, Y1K or YK
yon, Yn 1
yonder, Y*Ntr
yore, yR
York, yRK
Yorktown, yRKTn
Yosel, YsZ
Yoselin, YsZnor Y-ZLn
Yosely,YsZ or Y-ZL
Yosemite, Y-SMT
you, Y or Y 3
Youatt, Y-T 3
young, YNg or Y-Ng
younger, YNgr or Y-Ngr
youngest, YNgst ?r
Y-Ngst
youngster, YNgstr or
Y-Ngstr
younker, YNgKr or Y-Ng-
Kr
yowl, Yl 3
yowler, Y1 3 R
Ypsilanti, PsLnT
yttria, Tr 1
yttrium, Tr a M
Yucatan, YKTn
yucca. YK
yuf ts,' Y-Fts
yulan, YLn
yule, Yl 3
yunx, YNgKs
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
Zachariah, ZKR
Zachary, ZKr
Zambezi, ZMpZ
/am boo, Z 3 Mp
Zanzibar, ZnZBr
Zend, Znt
zenith, ZNTh
zephyr, ZFr
Zeus, Zs 3
zigzag, ZGsG
Zion, Z'N
zizania, ZZN
zodiac, ZtK or ZDK
zoilean, Z^n
zoisite, Z 1 sT
zoological, ZLJK1
zoophagous, ZFGs
zoophyte, ZFt
zoozoo, Z 3 Z
Zoroaster, ZRstr
zouave, Z 3 V or zW 3 V
zoundz, Znts 3
zoutch, Z 3 C
zuche, Z 3 C
zygomatic, ZGMt
zymotic, ZMtK
zythum, ZThM
344 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL,
CHAPTER X.
PHEASEOGEAPHY.
LESSON 40.
419. When two or more words are joined without
lifting the pen the combination is called a phrase.
This is the speediest method of writing from the fact
that the words follow one another without -an interval
the same as when spoken. Thus the time which would
otherwise be taken in lifting up and putting down the
pen is saved. Phrases are usually formed of words
of one syllable, and, accordingly, are well adapted to
writing English, which is largely composed of such
words. The first word of a phrase, if it is a stem
word, is generally written in its proper position and
the remaining word or words follow without regard to
position. When, however, the first word is a first place
horizontal stem, it is, if necessary, slightly raised or
lowered in that position in order to give the proper
position to the second word. (See also sec. 354.) For
the same reason the small logographs (see sees. 377,
378 and 381) are usually written initially in any posi-
tion. There should not be so many words in a phrase
as to cause the combination to run too far above or be-
low the line of writing say more than the length of
two and one-third single length perpendicular stems.
Phrases, even in the swiftest writing, should not aver-
age over three words, monosyllabic or otherwise, to a
phrase, though sometimes four, or perhaps five Avords
aro joined, but mostly only two. Phrases should not
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 345
be inconvenient to join, or be liable to conflict with
words, and should usually be natural; that is they
should consist, of words that are naturally thrown to-
gether into phrases in speech.
420. They are written in two ways, first by join-
ing the words together, as in NDhsKs, in this case; is 1 ,
1 as; which is on the same principle as joining words
in script longhand, and second by writing them with
one stem or character, simple or compound; thus, Ct,
which it; Crft, which are of it; st, as to. Phrases
written in the second manner are called Phraseographs,
while those made in the first, whether the separate
characters consist each of one word or are phraseo-
graphs, are termed Joined Phrases. Again, phraseo-
graphs which contain stems are called Stem Phraseo-
graphs and those without stems Small Phraseographs.
(See also sec. 377.)
a. Besides the two methods above given in which
all the words of a phrase are either joined or written
in one stroke there are others in which some of the
words as well as syllables are indicated by omission or
position, etc. These are designated by the general
term Constructed Phrases and will be considered here-
after in their proper order.
b. The indication of phrases by the different
methods explained above is termed Phraseography.
TICKS, CURVETS, SEMICIRCLES, ETC.
421. A small logograph when joined initially
usually accommodates itself to the position of the
following word, unless this is another small logograph
standing alone, in which case the method is usually
reversed, the latter accommodating itself to the posi-
tion of the former. As a general rule second place
tick logographs, except "a" or "an" and the simi-
larly positioned alternative ticks for "how," are not
joined.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC ilAXUAL.
422. In all cases following a tick is written initi-
ally usually only when it is inconvenient to write it
finally. Furthermore, a tick is not usually prefixed
to an initial right Sr or Ssr circle on a straight stem,
unless it is in a line with the latter. Lastly when a
logograph has two or more forms the most convenient
one is generally used.
423. Sometimes a light tick or curvet logograph
is shaded the former throughout and the latter in the
middle to indicate the addition of "the*' although
the word the logograph represents may have no
aspirated or long vowel sound. When this is done it
is l>y way of license for the sake of speed.
424. In stenotypy when two or more ticks, cur-
vets and semicircles are joined to one another no stem
being attached the figure denoting the first or third
position is placed after the first character; thus, Ptoid 1
Ktoid; Ktoid 1 Ptoid; Ktoid 3 Rtoid. (See also the first
two sentences of par. 421.)
425. "The," the most frequent word in the Eng-
lish language (see sec. 382), is joined initially, finally,
or medially by Ctoid or Ktoid; thus, CtoidK 1 , the
kingdom; CtoidR 1 , the ear; CtoidK, the air; CtoidK 3 ,
the hour; CtoidMn, the man; CtoidMn 3 , the moon;
Ctoid W, the way; CtoidS 1 , the sea; CtoidSh, the show:
CtoiclL 1 , the law; CtoidPr, the principle-al; CtoidTr 1 ,
the tree; CtoidCr, the chair; CtoidDlns 1 , the idleness;
CtoidJl 3 , the evangel; CtoidThr, the three; CtoidShr,
the sure; CtoiclNr 1 , the near; CtoidFl, the full, Ctoid-
ThlJ, the theology; Ctoid Yi 3 , the yule; CtoidsK 1 , the
sky; CtoidsR 1 , the seer; CtoidsJr, the sojer; CtoidsShl,
the social; CtoidsPl 1 , the supply; RtoidB, the bay;
RtoidD 3 , the due; RtoidC 1 , the watch; RtoidX 1 , the
inn, RtoidXn, the known; RtoidNn 3 , the noon-union;
RtoidKr, the crow; RtoidyR 1 , the year; RtoidKI, th(-
clay; RtoidPl 3 , the apple, Rtoid/rR 1 , the Avar; Rtoi<l-
Mr, the more; RtoidFr 1 , the free; Rtonl//-L, the Avell;
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 347
RtoidShlMr, the Shelmar; RtoidsP 1 , the spy; Rtoids-
D 1 , the side; RtoidsJ 1 , the siege; RtoidsPrt 1 , the
spirit; RtoidsTr 1 , the straw; RtoidsFr 1 , the cipher;
RtoidsThr, the Sthray, RtoidsKl 3 , the school; Rtoids?r-
Rn, the sworn; FCtoid, for the; MnCtoid, man the;
NsCtoid, knows the; MRtoid, may the; NnRtoid, none
the; Ms 3 Rtoid, mass the; FCtoidW, for the way;
nWRtoidNssT, when the necessity. Neither tick is ever
written alone, the dot for "the" then being employed
instead. (See, however, see's. 468, 494: and 498.)
426. "He" is joined initially, finally or medi-
ally by Jtoid or Rtoid; thus, JtoidMt 1 , he might;
JtoidM, he may; JtoidMst 3 , he massed; Jtoid TFt 3 , he
would; JtoidS 1 , he saw; JtoidS, he so; JtoidSh, he
shall; JtoidSht 3 , he should; JtoidL, he will; JtoidRts 1 ,
he writes; JtoidRs, he rows; JtoidRn 3 , he ran; Rtoid-
Tht 1 , he thought; RtoidDhn, he then; RtoidDht 3 , he
that; RtoidNs, he knows; RtoidNs 3 , he owns; RtoidC 1 ,
he each; RtoidC 3 , he much; RtoidD 3 , he had; Rtoids-
Tt, he stood; RtoidsD, he said; RtoidsPst, he supposed;
Dh 3 Jtoid, though he; SRtoid, so he; F JtoidM, for he
may; nWRtoidNFtoid, when he knew. Occasionally
v.-hen a better or more legible junction can be obtained
than with the ticks the logograph may be joined medi-
ally; thus, F^ne-D, if he had; F-ne-Ns, for he
knows. The logograph is seldom joined finally.
a. It will be observed that the above ticks and
those for downward and upward H are the same.
They are stenotyped as above because they represent
a word in accordance with section 372. When, how-
ever, they represent downward, or upward H they are
stenotyped h and h in accordance with section 27.
1. It will be observed that the upward H and "the"
ticks are the same. This, however, in the above cases
as well as in others hereafter causes no difficulty
since the words are such as do not conflict. (See also
the last sentence of sec. 362.)
348 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
b. If desired "he" may be represented finally and
medially by Ctoid instead of Jtoid. In which case it
will not conflict with the downward tick for "the".
(See also rem. 1.)
c. 'When a phrase containing a medial semicircle
logograph is indicated in stenotypy, the semicircle is
always connected by a hyphen to both the preceding
and the following stem, as in the phrase "for he
knows" in paragraph 426. If, however, a circle
precedes or follows it, the hyphen is omitted. The
logograph is thus indicated the same as in the Elemen-
tary Style when it occurs as a vowel. The same course
is pursued with the small W and Y angles w r hen they
occur in phrases. (See see's. 438, 439 and 440.)
-4-27. The phrase "of the" is represented alone or
initially by Btoid; thus, Btoid 1 , of the; BtoidKs 1 of
the cause; BtoidKs, of the case; BtoidKs 3 of the
cues; BtoidT 1 , of the time; BtoidD, of the day;
BtoidF 3 , of the few; BtoidL 1 of the law; BtoidyR 1 ,
of the year; BtoidR, of the air; BtoidR 3 , of the
hour.
428. "How" is joined initially in the second posi-
tion by DtoidorRtoid (see see's. 372, 27 and 421) ac-
cording to convenience; thus, DtoidR, how are;
DtoidM, how may; Rtoid^D, how do; Rtoid 2 Xof,
how long. It is also joined medially by these char-
acters and Jtoid; as in FDtoidC, for how much; Tl-
RtoidNg, tell how long; FJtoidMN, for how many;
FJtoidNg, for how long. These ticks are never used
finally or alone.
429. "On" is joined initially by the logograph or
by Ktoid when the logograph will not join well; thus,
TtoidM 1 , on my; TtoidMs 3 , on alms; TtoidWn, on
one; TtoidZ 3 , on those; TtoidDhr, on their; Ttoid-
Kl 1 , on call; TtoidDht 3 , on that; TtoidDh 1 , on thy;
TtoidDh, on them; KtoidT, on it; KtoidX, on no;
KtoidV 3 , on view; KtoidSh, on show. The logo-
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 349
graph may also occasionally be joined finally or med-
ially; thus, KTtoid, come on; GTtoid, goon; KTtoid-
KTtoid, come on, come on; GTtoidGTtoid, go on,
go on.
430. The phrase "on the" is indicated alone or
initially by Dtoid, or by Gtoid when the former will
not join conveniently; thus, DtoidK 1 , on the key;
DtoidKs, on the case; DtoidRf 3 , on the roof; Dtoid-
S 1 , on the sea; DtoidRTh, on the earth; DtoidLnt 3 ,
on the land; DtoidPr, on the principle-al; DtoidTr,
on the tray; DtoidTr 3 , on the true; DtoidsTrt 1 , on
the street; DtoidKIM, on the claim; DtoidwR 1 , on
the war, DtoidNr 1 , on the near; GtoidT 1 , on the
time; GtoidD, on the day; GtoidDshn 3 , on the
addition.
431. "A" or "an" is joined finally or medially by
the logograph or by Ptoid, the preference when con-
venient being usually given to the latter. It is also
joined by Ttoid after Th or Dh and upward L without
appendages; thus, PKtoid, paya-an; BKtoid, but a-an;
MKtoid, may a-an ; FPtoid, for a-an; N 1 Ptoid, in a-an;
DPtoid, do a-an; ThTtoid, think a-an, Dh 3 Ttoid,
though a-an; LTtoid, lay a-an; PKtoidMn, pay a man;
nWPtoidGrt, when a great; N 1 PtofdMMnt, in a
moment; ThTtoidMn, think a man. Ktoid should
always be made horizontally and Ttoid perpendicu-
larly, otherwise in rapid writing they may sometimes
conflict respectively with Rtoid and Ctoid for ' 'the. ' '
Where doubt would occur they should be omitted.
"A" or "an" is also joined initially by the logograph
or Ttoid, the latter being employed when the former
will not join conveniently; thus, KtoidRf 1 , a reef;
KtoidR, a ray; KtoidR 3 , an hour; Ktoid Mn 1 , a
mine; KtoidMn, a man; KtoidMn 3 , a moon; KtoidSh,
a show; KtoidL 1 , a law; KtoidPl 3 , an apple; Ktoid-
Bw 3 , a bois; KtoidsKr 1 , a seeker; Ktoid&KrB 1 , n
scribe; KtoidsT, a straw; KtoidsMr, a summer;
.>.")0 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
KtoidsThr, a Sthray, KtoidsNr 1 , a signer : Ktoid-
sXgr 1 , a singer; KtoidsW, a sway; KtoidsSK, a Cicero;
KtoidsShB, a sociable; TtoidK 1 , a key; TtoidKs, a
case; TtoidK 3 , a cow; TtoidW 1 , a wee; TtoidW, a
way; TtoidS 1 , a sea; Ttoid /<Mr, a Shoraer; Ttoid-
Dl 1 , an idle; TtoiclClt 1 , a child; TtoidFlt 1 , a flight;
TtoidFwnTs, a Fuentes; TtoidThlPss, a thlipsis;
TtoidThwK, a thwack; TtoidYl, a Yale; TtoidYl 3 , a
yule; TtoidsPl^a supply; TtoidsDl 3 , a saddle; Ttoids-
Cl 3 , a satchel; TtoidsVl 1 , a civil; TtoidsThl, a Sethel;
TtoidsYl, a Syoi.
a. Ttoid is employed initially only as in the ex-
amples just given. In all other cases Ktoid is written.
b. If preferred Ktoid only may be employed in-
itially for "a" or "an'' Ttoid being abolished.
432. "I" is joined finally or medially by the ticks
for "a" or "an" above, namely, Ktoid, Ptoid and
Ttoid and in the same manner: thus, MKtoid, may I;
BKtoid, but I; F'Ptoid, if I; ThTtoid, think I; Dh 3 -
Ttoid, though I; LTtoid, lo, I; nWKtoidN, when I
know; BKtoidM, but I may; F J Ptoid^R, if I were;
ThTtoidM, think I may. "Ktoid and Ttoid should
always be made horizontally and perpendicularly,
otherwise they may occasionally conflict with Rtoid
and Jtoid for "he." Where doubt might occur they
should be omitted. "I" is also joined initially by the
logograph, Ptoid, Ttoid or Ktoid; thus, i-Knt 1 , I can
not; i-K, I come; PtoidMt 1 , I might; PtoidM, I am-
may; Ptoid W, I weigh; PtoidSh 1 , I wish; PtoidSh,
I shall; PtoidSht 3 , I should; PtoidC 3 , I much; Ptoid-
RsV, I receive; Ptoid V 3 , I view; PtoidTh 3 , I thank;
Ptoid Yt, I yet; PtoidsTt 1 , I sighted; PtoidsD, I said;
PtoidsPst, I supposed; Ptoid*-Pr 3 Xg, I sprang; Ptoid-
sTrK, I struck; PtoidsK 1 ^!, I scheme; TtoidS 1 . 1
see; TtoidZ, I was; KtoidP, I pay; KtoidT 1 , I tie;
KtoidD, I do; KtoidD 3 , I had; KtoidDt 1 , I did;
KtoidN, I know, KtoidN 3 , I own. Occasionally when
THE PHO.VOGUAPIIJC MAXt'AL. 351
a better or more legible junction can be obtained than
with the ticks the logograph may be joined medially;
thus, H \Y-i-G, when I go; nW-i-sh, when I shall.
The logograph is seldom joined finally.
a. Ttoid is usually joined initially only to the S
stem without prependages.
b. If preferred the logograph may be used before
N, S and Sh instead of Ktoid, Ttoid and Ptoid; thus,
i-N, I know; i-N 3 , I own; i-S 1 , I see; i-Z, I was; i-Sh 1 ,
I wish; i-Sh, I shall.
433. "And," the second most frequent word in the
English language (see also sec. 425), is joined initially
by the logograph, or Shtoid; thus /SAtoidN 1 , and in;
.S'AtoklN, and know; xS'AtoidN 3 , and own; /S'AtoidF 1 ,
and if; xS'AtoidF, and for; /SAtoid'V*, and however;
(SAtoidS 1 , and see; tfMoidS, and so; /S7/toidSh, and
shall; AS'AtoidP, and up; xS'AtoidC 1 , and each; /67/toid-
C, and which; S7<toidC 3 , and much; /67/toid^/R, and
your; xS'AtoidsF, and as for; ShtoidM 1 , and me; Shtoid-
M, and him; ShtoidL, and will; ShtoidK, and come.
Neither character is ever joined finally or medially.
(See also see's. 492 and 498.)
a. If desired "and" may also be joined medially
and finally by Ktoid, Ttoid and Ptoid the same as "a"
or "an."
b. If the upward alternative tick for "a" is em-
ployed to represent "and" (see sec. 371) it should be
joined only in the second position to avoid conflict
with the upward tick for ' 'the. "
434. The phrase ''and the" is indicated alone or
initially by Zhtoid; thus, Zhtoid and the; ZhtoidT 1 ,
and the time; ZhtoidKss 1 , and the causes; ZhtoidKss,
and the cases; ZhtoidMs 3 , and the moose.
435. "All " is joined initially by the logograph or
by upward L, the latter in the first position and
usually to stems only; thus, FtoidB, all be; FtoidP,
all day; FtoidC, all which; FtoidSh, all shall; Ftoid-
352 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
Sht, all should; FtoidX 1 , all annoy; FtoidX, all
know; FtoidXs 3 , all news; FtoidXgs 1 , all things;
FtoidDh 1 , all thy; FtoidDh, all they; FtoidDh 3 , all
thou; FtoidY 1 , all ye; FtoidYnt 1 , all beyond; Ftoid-
L 1 , all law; FtoidwL 1 , all well; LUitrs, all writers;
L 1 ^!, all my-inay; L^Mn, all men; L^VVs, all ways;
L t S, all see-say.
436. The phrase "all the" is indicated alone or
initially, by Vtoid,; thus, Vtoid 1 , all the; VtoidT 1 ,
all the time; VtoidD, all the day; VtoidDs 3 , all the
dues; VtoidXs 1 , all the influence; VtoidXn, all the
known; VtoidXs 3 , all the news.
437. The phrase "already the" may be represent-
ed by shading the logograph; thus, TFtoid 1 , already
the. Both the logograph and phraseograph are usually
written alone.
438. "We" is joined initially, finally or medially
by the logograph or the alternative form w (see see's.
60, a and 62); thus w-T 1 , we ought; w-P, we pay;
w-V, we have; w-Th 3 , we thank; TF-W, we weigh;
TF-Rt 1 , we write; w-S, we say; PF-Sh 1 , we wish; ir-M,
we may; ir-X, we know; TF-X 3 , we own; D-w, do we;
FMv, if we; nW-vr, when we; Dh-w-Th, though we
think; nW-ir-K, when we come.
439. "You" is joined initially, finally or medially
by the logograph or the alternate form Y (see see's.
60, a and 62); thus, Y-T, you ought; Y-V, you have;
Y-Th 3 , you thank; Y-Yt, you yet; Y-Sh 1 , you wish; Y-
"NV, you w r eigh; Y-S, you say; Y-N, you know; Y-X 3 ,
you own; F-Mt 1 , you might; F-M, you may; F-Rt 1 ,
you write; F-K, you come; F-R, you are; r-L, you will :
X-Y, know you; R-Y, are you; M-F, may you; S-F, so
you; L-F, will you; F^Y-Th, if you think; L-Y-Xt, will
you not;R-Y-Xt, are you noti F^r-M, if you may.
a; AVhen "you" occurs medially before X the sec-
ond tick of F may, by w r ay of licence, be written Ctoid;
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 353
thus, DRtoidCtoidN, do you know; Dt^RtoidCtoidNt,
did you not.
440. "AVho" or "whom" is joined initially, finally
or medially by the logograph or the alternative form
u the initial shading for the aspirate being omitted
(see also sec. 373); thus, nu-Tnt 1 , who-m ought not;
Hu-D, who do; nu-D 3 , who had; nu-Kn, who can;
nu-NCtoid, who now; Hu-Ns 3 , who owns; -w-Mt 1 , who
might; u-M, who may; 'w-Mst 3 , who massed; ^-Rt 1 ,
who write; u-Rt, who wrote; u-R 3 , who-m our; Ftoid 1 -
u, all who; N-HU, know who-m; MN-nu, many who;
B-w, but who-m; sM-w, some who; F-Hu-Dhs, for who-
m this; F-nusDhs, far who is this; H TFR-nu-Kn,
where who can; Dh-iZ-Kn, they who can; Dh-w-S, they
who say; S-iZ-Kn, so who-m can; B-wsDhr, but who is
their-re. Sometimes medially between a downward
straight stem or right curve and a left curve the right
half circle may be changed into a hook on the convex
side of the latter; thus, B-iZ-Ns, but who knows;
DU-w-V, did who have; Ow-Ths, which who thinks.
The logograph is not often joined finally.
441. "Whose" may be joined in the same manner
as "who-m," when convenient; thus, HusT 1 , whose
time; HusT, whose it; HussT, whose is it; T 3 -ws, at
whose; NMiusNM, in whose name; T-wsRKwst, at
whose request, us is not usually employed initially
since it would then bo liable to conflict Avith tho right
N curl. (See sec. 298.)
442. "Other" is joined initially, finally or medi-
ally by the logograph or the alternative form u\ thus,
u-Ngs 1 , other things; u-Ngs, other languages; u-Ns 3 ,
other news; u-Kss 1 , other causes; u-Kss, other cases;
u-Ts 1 , other times; u-Ds, other days; u-Ds 3 , other
dues; u-Ss 1 , other seas; u-Shs 3 , other shoes; -w-Mn 1 ,
other men ; i^-Mn, other man ; w-Mn 3 , other moon ; ><-Ls l ,
other laws; 'w-W'Ks, other walks; N^u any other;
N-u, no other; M 1 -^, my other; Dh'-u, with other;
3.">4 THK PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
C 1 -?;, each other; Vr-w, every other; NMi-Wn, any
other one; N 8 -u-Wn, no other one; Vr-u-Wn, every
other one.
443. "Others" or "otherwise" may, when con-
venient, be joined finally; thus, MX-us, many others-
otherwise; sM-NS, some others-otherwise.
44:4. Each of the preceding small logographs
(see's. 425 to 443) should be joined only when it will
form an angle with the preceding or following wont.
When it will not do this the logograph should be
Avritten alone in its proper position as given in the
list in section 381. None of the tick, curvet or half
circle logographs except the "and" tick, if the latter
should be used as a logograph (see sec. 371), is ever
joined to a vowel word of two or more syllables.
a. A tick will, if necessary, join at the same
angle to any letter to which its full length stem will
join. If at any time words which are represented by
the same character should be in danger of conflicting
with each other, one of them should be written alone
with the logograph. This, however, will seldom if
ever occur.
LESSON 41.
CIRCLES AND LOOPS.
THE S CIRCLE.
445. The S circle may be used:
a. Either initially, finally or both to represent
either of the logographs "as, has, is" or "his;" in
which case it usually accommodates itself to the posi-
tion of the word to which it is attached; thus, sDh 1 ,
as-is thy; sB 3 as-has-is-his to be; sTr 3 , as-is true, syR,
as-is your; s?rR, as were; sFrnt, his friend; sPtoid 1 ,
has-is of; sKtoid 1 , is-his a; sKtoid, as-has a; sCtoid, '
is-his the; sCtoid, as-has the; sw 1 (left circle), as we;
'I'll!-: PHONOGRAPHIC MAXl'AL.
si' (right circle), as yon; SHU, as-has-is who; sPtoid'M,
as 1 am-may; slttoidD 3 , as I had; s-i-G, as I go; Ts, it
is-has; Psss, poses his, Jsts, just as; Ptsoid 1 , of as-his;
mis, who as-hus-is-his; Atsoid, and as-has-is-his; ws 1
(left circle), we as; rs (right circle), you as; sJtsoid,
as no. has-is; sGts, as-is good as; sGrts, as-is great as.
It may also be employed medially to represent the
above words; thus, TsBn, it has been, TsNt, it is not;
-V/itsoidXt, and is not; sJtsoid^n, as he has been;
srsAl, as you seem. ''His" should be used after verbs
with caution, since it is liable to conflict in some in-
stances with another form of the verb; as "keep his*'
with "keeps, put his" with "puts." Where doubt
would arise the circle S should be written either separ-
ately or initially on the following word.
b. Finally to represent "us"; as in the phrases
Fs, for us; Pns, upon us; Bfs, above us; Fts, after us;
Gnsts, against us; Ttsoid 1 , on us, /S'Atsoid, and us;
Ptsoid 1 , of us. li Us" like "his" (see par. a) will
sometimes conflict with another form of the verb, as
''take us" with "takes, let us" with "lets." In such
cases the stem S should be written.
c. After the possessive case to represent "self"
and is then written disjoined under or after the middle
of the preceding stem; thus, Mnsts, man's self; Wnsis,
one's self; JrJsis, George's self; JnsMs, John's self;
JMis, Jame's self. (For the manner of writing "self"
as a prelix or affix, see see's. 304 to 306 and 341.)
d. Finally to represent "theirs" in combination
with the Ter hook and lengthening principle. (See
see's. 457, c and 478, e.)
e. Finally to represent "ours" and "self" in
combination with an R or X hook. (See see's. 463,
464 and 468, f, g.
f. Finally to represent "one's" or "ones" in com-
bination with the oS hook. (See sec. 466.)
THE PHOXOGKAPHIC MANUAL.
g. Finally to represent "its*' in combination with
the halving principle. (See sec. 477.)
446. The S circle may also usually be attached
initially, finally or both to any other phrases or
phraseographs that may be hereafter mentioned to in-
dicate either of the words in paragraph a of the above
section.
1. In stenotypy when a tick logograph is followed
by a circle logograpfy the latter is written before the
termination Oid; thus, Ptsoid 1 , of his. When it is
followed by a circle that begins a stem word, the circle
is written after the Oid; thus, CtoidsM, the same.
THE Ss CIRCLE.
447. The Ss, or double size, circle may be used:
a. Alone to indicate the addition of "as, has, is,
his" or ' 'us" to the logograph represented by the small
circle; thus, ss 1 , his as, his has, his is, is as, is his;
ss, as has, as his, as is, has as, has his, has us.
b. Initially on a simple stem or on an R hooked
straight one and initially or finally on a tick logo-
graph and sometimes on a half circle one to indicate
the addition of any of the phrases in the above para-
graph, the double circle usually accommodating itself
to the position of the following word; thus, ssC 3 ,
has-is as much; ssBn, as has been; ssGt, is as good;
ssF 1 , is as if; ssN 3 , as-has-is-his own; ssXg 1 , has-is as
long; ssBr 3 , as-has-is-his number; ssGrt, has-is as
great; ssPtoid 1 ^!, is as I am-may; ssRtoidTh, is as I
think; ssKtoid, is as a-an, his is a-an, etc.; ssJtoid 1 ,
is as he; ssCtoid 1 , is as the, etc., Jtssoid 1 , he is as-his,
etc. ; HUSS, who is as-his, etc.
c. Initially or finally to indicate the addition of
an S circle logograph, namely, "as, has, is" or "his,"
to a stem beginning or ending with the small circle;
the double circle, when initial, accommodating itself to
O
the position of the following word; thus, ssC, as-has-is
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 357
such; ssP 1 , as-has-is-his speech; ssD, as-has-is said; ss-
Trf 1 , as-has-is-his strife; ssDrshn, as-has-is-his considera-
tion; ssM, as-has-is some; ssN 3 , as-is soon; Tss, it is as-
his; Dhss, this as-has-is his; Pss, pays as-his; Rss, raise
as-his; Xss, knows as-has-is-his; ssXs, as soon as; ssNss,
us soon as hi.s-is. It may also be employed medially
as above; thus, TssD, it is said; TssGts, it is as good
'as; PtssoidC 3 , of his as much; HessC 3 or JtssoidC 3 , he
is as much.
(1. Finally to indicate the addition of "us" to a
stem ending with the small circle; thus, Pss, pays us;
Rss, raise us; Xss, knows us.
e. After the possessive case to represent ' 'selves, "
and is then written disjoined under or near the middle
of the preceding word; thus, Mns^ss, men's selves;
Bs u .ss, boys' selves. (For "selves" as an affix see
sec. 341.)
f. Finally to represent "selves" in combination
with an R or X hook. (See see's. 465 and 468, h. )
448. The Ss circle may also usually be attached
initially or finally to any other phrases or phraseo-
graphs that may be hereafter mentioned to indicate
either of the phraseographs in paragraph a of the
above section.
THE ST LOOP.
449. The St loop made downward as a left loop in
the direction of Ch may be used alone in the first and
second positions to indicate the addition of "to" or
''too" to the S circle logographs; thus, st 1 , is-his to-
too; st, as-has to-too. The S circle may be added on
the inside of the upper end, the latter forming one
side of it; thus, sts, is to his-us, his too is; sts, as to
his-us, has to as. These forms are used for steno-
graphic convenience instead of the S circle or circles
and stem T.
450. The St loopas above may be attached initially
358 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
to a horizontal or downward tick, left curve or straight
stem without an initial hook, the tick or stem usually
accommodating itself to the position of the loop, but
starting from its upper end and continuing clear of it;
thus, st'rKtoid, is to a-an ; st-Ktoid, astoa-an; st'-Ctoid,
is to the; st-Ctoid, as to the; st 1 -Dh, is to them; st 2 -Dh,
as to them; st'-T, is to it; st 2 -T, as to it; st-C 1 , is to
each; st-C, is to which; st 2 -C, as to which; st J -K, is to
come; st^P, is to pay; st'-N, is to know; sts'-N, is to
his own; sts 2 -N, as to his own; sts^sN, is to his son;
sts s -sN, as to his son.
a. The detached form of the St loop is seldom em-
ployed medially or finally in connection with stemsonly.
451. The St loop may be used finally in the ordi-
nary manner:
a. On the stems Dh and Dht to represent the
words "wast" and "hast," or St in "hadst;" thus,
Dhst 1 , thou wast; Dhst 3 , thou hast; Dhtst 3 , thou
hadst.
b. In the combination Tlst to represent St in the
word "least;" thus, Tlst 3 , at least.
THE STR LOOP.
452. The Str loop made downward as a left loop
in the direction of Ch may be used alone to indicate
the addition of ''their" to the St loopasin section 415,
the S circle being added in the same manner as to the
latter to indicate the possessive; thus, str 1 , is to their;
strs 1 , is to theirs; str, as to their; strs, as to theirs.
These forms are used instead of the S circle or circles
arid the stem T with the Ter hook.
453. The Str loop may be joined initially to the
same stems as the St loop in section 450 and in the
same manner.
a. The detached form of the Str loop is seldom
employed medially or finally in connection with .stems
only.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
454. The Str loop may bo attached finally to a sin-
gle or double length stein to represent the word
"store," the S circle being added for the plural; thus;
7/Tstr 3 , hat store; B 3 Kstr, book store; Ntrstr, another
store; DrGstr, drug store; Fl/?str, flower store; Shstr 3 ,
shoe store; Mstr 1 , my store; Rstr 3 , our store; yRstr,
your store; Tstrs 1 , tea stores; GrsRstrs, grocery
stores.
LESSON 42.
HOOKS, ETC.
5
455. "Are" or "our" is represented by the R hook
and "all" or "will" by the L hook on most simple
stem logographs which represent pronouns, preposi-
tions or conjunctions and on the logograph for the
adjective "such;" thus, Br, but are-our; Br 1 , by our;
Or, which are-our; sCr, such are; Dhr, they are; Nr 1 ,
in our; Bl 1 , by all; Bl, but will; Tl 3 , at all; sTl, as it
will; Cl 1 , each will; Cl, which will;sCl 3 , as much will;
sCl, such will; Fl 1 , if all; Fl, for all; Dhl 1 , with all;
Dhl, they will; Nl 1 , in all; Shi 1 , she will. (See also
sec. 468, a.) These hooks are not usually employed
as above on nouns or verbs.
1. When "all" and "will" can both be written on
the same stem by the L hook, "will" is given the
preference, and "all" is written with the logograph,
except on the logographs "for" and "at" when "all"
is given the preference.
a. ' 'Were" is represented by the R hook on the
logographs "it, which" and "such" written in the
third position; thus, Tr 3 , it were; sTr 3 , as it were;
Or 3 , which were; sCr 3 , such were.
456. The small W hook sometimes represents
kt \vo, v or "with" on upward R and "we" on upward L,
while the small Y hook on upward R sometimes re-
presents "ye" or "you;" thus, ?/.'R, Ave are; s>rR, as
360 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
we are; w?R 3 , with our; w?L, we will; yR 1 , ye are; yR,
you are; syR, as you are.
457. "Their, there" or "they are" is added to a
straight stem by the Ter hook; as in the phrases Btr 1 ,
by their-there; Btr, but their-there-they are; Btr 3 , to
be their-there; Ttr, to their; Ttr 1 , tie their-there; Pr 1 -
Ctr, preach their-there. (See also sec. 478.)
a. When "there" occurs in a compound word in a
phrase, it is usually written with the logograph and
not with the Ter hook; thus, D 3 DhrF, had therefore,
and not Dtr 3 F. (See also sec. 478, c.)
b. The Ter hook as above is not usually written
finally after nouns and is never employed to add the
word "other." (See also sec. 478, d.)
c. "Theirs" may be added by the Ter hook and
circleS combined; thus, Btrs 1 , by theirs; R^trs, reap
theirs.
458. The Shun hook may be employed to indicate
the word "ocean;" thus, TlntKshn (or TLntKshn),
Atlantic ocean; PsFKshn, Pacific ocean; RKKshn,
Arctic ocean, NtRKKshn, Antartic ocean; Nt 1 Xshn,
Indian ocean,
459. The S circle and Shun curl may be used to
represent the word "session;" thus, DhsssAn, this ses-
sion; NssAw, next session; NtrssA?i 1 , entire session;
NtrssAw, another session; W 1 NtrsA l winter session;
spring session; sMrssAw, summer session;
, autumn session; KsTrsshn, extra session.
460. The N final hook may be used to represent:
a. "Own, one" and "in" in such phrases as Rn 3 ,
our own; yRn 3 , your own; Dhrn, their own; sMn,
some one; Ntrn, another one; u-Rn 1 , we are in.
"Own" may also be added to the Ter hook by a small
N hook made within it; thus, Btrn 1 , by their own;
P^Ctrn, preach their own.
b. "Than" (after adjectives and adverbs in the
comparative degree); thus, KwKrn 1 , quicker than;
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 361
Frtrn, further than; Fltrn 1 , fleeter than. "Than"
may also be added by a small N hook written on the
inside of theTer hook; thus, Btrn, better than; Rtrn,
rather than. (See also sec. 467.)
c. "Been" on the stem V when the latter is the
logograph representing "have;" thus, Vn have been.
d. "Not" in combination with the halving princi-
ple. (See sec. 474.)
461. The initial N curl (see sec. 298) may be em-
ployed before the circle S to represent "in;" thus, ns-
Drshn, in consideration; nsM, in some; nsMnt 1 , in
his mind; nsTlMnt, in settlement.
462. The F hook may be used for "have" and
"of," and sometimes for "to have"; as Cf, which
have-of; Cf 1 , each of; Cf 3 , much of ; Df, day of ; sCf,
such have-of; Tlf, it will have; Plf 1 , plea of; Brf 3 ,
number of; sTf, stay of; stTf, state of; L 3 Kf, lack
of' W J Kf, week of; VRTf, variety of; Tf 1 , ought to
have; Trf 1 , try to have; sDf, said of, said to have;
ssDf , is said of, is said to have.
a. The F hook for "of" is seldom employed and
then usually only medially and not finally; thus, VR-
TfKss, variety of causes; DfKshn, day of action; Cfs 1 ,
each of us.
463. "Ours" may be added to a stem by the S cir-
cle and R hook combined; thus, Brs 1 , by ours; Nrs 1 ,
incurs; Trs 3 , at ours. (See sec. 468, f.)
464. "Self" may be added to an R or N hooked
stem by the small S or Ns circle; thus, Brs 1 , by our-
self; Trs, to ourself; Rns 3 , our own self; Brns 1 , by
our own self. (See sec. 468, g.)
465. "Selves" may be added to an R or N'hooked
stem by the large Ss or Nss circle; thus, Brss 1 , by
ourselves; Trss, to ourselves; Rnss 3 , our own selves;
Brnss 1 , by our own selves. (See sec. 468, h.)
4<i<!. "One's" or "ones" may be added by the Ns
circle on single or double length straight stems or the
362 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXCAL.
N hook and S circle on curved ones. Cns 1 , each one's;
Frns, from one's; Vns, have one's; Ftrns 3 , farther
one's-oues.
467. "Than" may be added after a circle on a
right curve by the stem N; thus, MsX, himself than;
MssX, Moses than; WsX, ways than; Ss 1 X, seas than,
see us than: ShsN, shows than; L^X, laws than, loss
than; Lss 1 X, losses than; LsX, less than; Ls 3 X, allow
us than; L'SsX, lessees than; LsXthrn, less than their
own. (See also sec. 460, b.)
HOOKS AND CIRCLES ATTACHED TO THE TICK AND
CURVET LOGOGRAPHS.
468. The small hooks, and small and lanre circles
combined with them may sometimes be attached to the
tick and curvet logographs "of, all, I" (Ttoid), "on, he"
and "the"; the attachments proportioned to the size
of these characters (see also see's. 89, b and 114, a)
to represent the following words:
a. "Are" or u our" by the R hook; thus, Prtoid 1 ,
of our; Trtoid 1 , (or Krtoid, alternate), on our.
b. "All" or "will" by the L hook; thus, Pltoid 1 ,
of all: Bltoid 1 , of all the; Tltoid 1 (or Kltoid, alter-
nate), on all; Dltoid 1 (or Gltoid, alternate), 6n all the;
Fltoid 1 all will; Vltoid 1 , all will the.
c. "Have, of" or "other" by the F hook; thus,
Tftoid 1 , I have; Jftoid 1 , he have; Trftoid 1 , on our
other.
d. "Own" or "other" by the X hook; thus, Prn-
toid 1 , of our own; Trntoid 1 , on our own; Tntoid 1 , on
other; Dntoid 1 , on the other; Cntoid 1 , the other.
e. "As, his, us" or "others" by the small circle,
but only finally; thus, Pltsoid 1 , of all as-has-is-
his; Tltsoid 1 (or Kltsoid, alternate), on all as-has-is*
his; Tftsoid 1 . I have as-his; Tntsoid 1 , on others;
Dntsoid 1 , on the others; Cntsoid 1 , the others.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 363
f. "Ours" by the R hook and small circle com-
bined; thus, Prtsoid 1 , of ours; Trtsoid 1 , on ours.
g. "Self" by the small circle; thus, Prtsoid 1 , of
ourself; Prntsoid 1 , of our own self; Trtsoid 1 , on our-
self; Trntsoid 1 , on our own self.
h. "Selves" by the large circle; thus, Prtssoid 1 ,
of ourselves; Prntssoid 1 , of our own selves; Trtssoid,
on ourselves; Trntssoid 1 , on our own selves.
469. The above phraseographs (par's, a to h) are
not always used. Occasionally the words are written
separately or joined phrases employed. The list above
is complete, no other phraseographs than those given
being used.
LESSON 43.
HALVING.
470. "It, had" or "would'' may be added to a
stem logograph without appendages by halving it.
"It" may also be added in the same manner to a stem
logograph or phraseograph with a final hook and "had"'
furthermore to one with an F hook; thus, Bt, but it
had-would; Tt 1 , ought it, what it-had-would; Knt,
can it; Btrt, better it; Bft, above it, but have it-had,
but of it; Cft, which have it-had; Cft 3 , much of it.
471. "Of it" may be indicated by halving the stem
V in the first position; thus, Vt 1 , of it.
472. "It" may be added to a final stem without
appendages by halving it; as in MKt, make it; FCt,
fetch it: K 3 Rt, carry it; S 3 Mt, assume it; R 3 Vt, re-
view it; Rt^'gt, writing it.
473. "To" may be added to a word of two or
more stems by halving its final stem; as in LKlt,
likely to; RMnt, remain to. "To" may also be added
to the word "able" by halving it; thus, Bit, able to.
474. "Not, had not" or "would not" may bo
added by the N hook and halving principle combined;
thus, Bnt 1 , be-by not; Bnt, but not, but had-would
364 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
not; Dnt 1 , did not; Dnt, do not; Dnt 3 , had not;
Dnts 3 , had not his: Cnt, which had-wouldnot; nTTnt,
when not, when had- would not; TFnt 3 , would not;
Mnt, may not.
a. "She not, she had- would not, shall not" and
''should not" may also be written as above; thus,
Shnt 1 , she not, she bad-would not; Shnt, shall not;
Shnt 3 , should not; particularly when occurring alone.
Usually, however, they are written with the stems in
all cases for convenience; thus, Sl^Xt, Sht'Xt, ShXt,
Sht 3 Xt. The same course is pursued with "she will
not," which is usually written Sh^Xt.
b. When "it" occurs after the verb and before
"not" as in "had it not, do it not," the phrase is not
written as in paragraph 474, but instead the stem
representing the verb is halved and "not"' added by
the logograph, except after the past tense indicated by
halving, when "it not" is represented by Tnt; thus;
Dt'Xt, had it not; DtXt, do it not; MtXt, may it not,
ShtXt, shall it not; ?/'RtXt, were it not; Bt 1 Xt 1 , be it
not; KtTnt, could it not; Sht 3 Tnt, should it not;
?0Rt 3 Tnt, ward it not; Trt 1 Tnt, tried it not.
475. Z halved is used, alone or initially, or after
an S circle logograph only, to represent ' ' is-his-as-has
it;" thus, Zt 1 , is it; Zt'Nt, is it not; sZt 1 , is as it,
his has it; Zt 3 , as-has it; Zt 3 Xt, has it not; sZt 3 , as is-
has it; sZt^Ip, is as it may be. (a.) This form is not
generally used finally or medially except after an S
circle logograph only, as just stated. Instead, in such
cases, the circle S and stem T are usually employed;
thus, Jtsoid^ or Hes 1 ^ he is-has it; Rtsoid 1 ^ and
is-as-has it; BsT, but is-has it; BsTnt. but is-has it not;
TsT, it is it; T 1 sT, what is-has it; BsTtr, but is-has it
their re; BsTrn, but is-has it their own; BssT, but is
as it; DhssT, this is it; DhssTMp, this is as it may be.
b. Zt as above is not used to indicate the addition
of "had" or "would," nor is the N hook added to it,
THE PHOXOUKAPIIir MANl/AL.
as in Znt, to indicate "not," as in "as had- would not."
In such cases the S or Ss circle and the stems for
"had" or "had not" and "would" or "would not"
are employed; thus, sD 3 , is-his-as-has had; sDnt 3 , as-
his had not; ssD 3 , as his had, his has had; ssDnt 3 , as
his had not; s IFi 3 , as-his would; slFnt 3 , as-his would
not; ssTFt 3 , as his would; ss TFnt 3 as his would not.
c. Again, Znt as above is not employed for "is-
has not," etc; but instead the S or Ss circle and the
halved N stem are written; thus, sNt 1 , is-as-has not;
ssXt 1 , is-has-his not, his is not, his has not. Znt,
however, may sometimes be employed for the col-
loquials "isn't" and "has n't." (See sec. 476 b.)
476. The colloquial phrases "did n't, don't, had
n't, would n't, should n't," etc., are usually written
the same as "did not, do not," etc., in paragraph 474.
If, however, particular distinction is desired, they
may be vocalized; thus, Dint 1 , did n't; Dont, don't;
HaDnt 3 , had n't; ITu/nt, would n't; Shu/nt 3 , should
n't, etc.
a. The remarks above also apply to the colloquial
" Shan't,'' except that it is written with the stems Sh-
Nt as explained in section 474, a; thus, ShaNt.
b. The colloquial phrases "is n't" and "has n't"
are also usually written the same as the formal ones
in section 475, c; namely, with the S circle and halved
N stem. But when particular distinction is desired,
they may be represented by Z halved with the N hook;
thus, iZnt 1 , is n't; naZnt 3 , has n't. If preferred,
however, the vocalization may be omitted. (See also,
par. 476.)
477. "Its " may be added by the halving principle
and circle S combined; thus, Tts 1 , what its; Tts, to
its; Tts 3 , at its; Cts, which its; Bfts, above its; Pnts,
upon its; Vts 1 , of its; Nts 1 , in its; KPts, keep its;
S 3 Mts, assume its; MNgts, among its.
a. The word ' ' itself " is never added by the above
3GO TIIK PHOMM iUAPllir MANTA1..
principle, but is either joined with the logograph or
if not, it is written disjoined in its proper position,
usually the former; thus, B J Ts, by itself.
LENGTHENING.
478. "Their, there" or "they are" is added to a
full sized curve stem by doubling its length; as in the
phrases Ftr, for their-there-they are; Vtr, have their-
there; Mtr, may their-there; Dhrtr, they are their -
there; HtcRVtr, wherever their-there-they are; Thtr 1 ,
thaw their-there; Tr 1 Mtr, trim their-there; M^Ftr,
modify their. (See also sec. 457.) If an X hook
follows, it is read after the termination; thus, Ftrn, for
their own; Vtrn, have their own, have their been,
Mtrn, may their own; Dhrtrn, they are their own,
n//'KVtrn, wherever their own; Thtrn 1 , thaw their
own; IVMtrn, trim their own; Ait 1 Ftrn,, modify their
own. (See also sec. 460. a. )
a. The above words and phrases may be added to
a double length curve by making it triple the length
of a single one, the extra length being indicated in
stenotypy by an additional tr; thus, Frtrtr, further
their-there; Frtrtrn, further their own; Shltrtr, shelter
their-there; Shltrtrn, shelter their own; Mrtrtr, mur-
der their-there; Mtrtrn, murder their own; Mrtrtr-
RPTshns, murder their reputations; sXtrtrXrJs, cen-
ter their energies: XtrtrsRVs, enter their service;
TXtrtrsVss, tender their services; sRXtrtrPsts, sur-
render their posts; RXtrtrKnts, render their accounts.
b. The above expedient is not applied to double
length phraseographs, such phrases as "if they are their-
there," etc., being written with the double length stem
and the logograph for "their" or "there;" thus, Ftr 1 -
Dhr, if they are their-there; Fti^Dhrn, if they are
their own, etc.
c. When "there" occurs in a compound word in a
phrase it is usually written with the logograph and
THE PHONOGRAPH ft' MANUAL. Ut'u
not indicated by lengthening; thus, PtoidMDhrF, 1 am
therefore, and not PtoidMtrF. (See also sec. 457, a.)
d. Lengthening as above is not usually written
finally after nouns and is never employed to add the
word "other/ 3 (See also sec. 457, b.)
e. "Theirs" may be added by the lengthening
principle and circle S combined; thus, Frtrs, from
theirs; Dhtrs 1 , with theirs; MNgtrs, among theirs.
IRREGULAR PHRASES.
479. There is a class of very frequent phrases
which are difficult to form regularly and are therefore
written irregularly. These are called Irregular
Phrases. Thus, Mp, may be; Tt 3 Ms, at times, Tlt 3 -
Ms, at all times; T 3 Nrt, at any rate; Dhrnt 1 , on either
band; B 3 , to be; sB 3 , as-has-is-his to be; NrPl, in re-
ply-to-the; NrsP, in respect-to-the; NrsPns, inresponse-
to-the; Ni^Gt, in regard-to-the ; NrF, in referring-to-
the; NrFs, in ref erence-to-the ; irRRns (or wRfRns)
with ref erence-to-the ; ?/'RGrt, with regard-to-the; u<-
RR (//'RfR), we refer; wRGrt we regard; Nrt 1 , in or-
der-to; ]S Tl Ngls, anything else; NThNgls, nothing else;
VrNgls, everything else.
WORDS IN PHRASES DISTINGUISHED BY VOCALIZATION OR
VARIATION OF OUTLINE.
480. In phrase writing words can be distinguished
by position only when they commence phrases. When
they occur medially or finally, therefore, (whether in.
or out of position) and would be liable to conflict with
other words of similar form, they may be vocalized,
or if contracted, written with their full outlines; thus,
T'uD, to aid; TMe, to me; yRs^M, years time;
DhsTM, this time; IS^CtoidKntR, in the country.
1. It is not usually a good practice to vocalize
words medially in a phrase, except in the case of voca-
graphs (see sec. 3DD) which must be so written in any
368 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
event, since this takes more time than to write them
separately in their proper positions. Thus the words
"to me," above, are more quickly written T M 1 .
a. When "time" is written alone and in full it
should usually be vocalized; thus, T^lM, to distinguish
it from "autumn" (TM 1 ) which is generally written
separately. (See sec. 459.)
481. Again, occasionally, where a word as ordina-
rily written will not make a good joining in a phrase its
form may be either varied or written in full; thus, MN-
PRt, my own part; DhsPRt, this part; NDm^sTt, in that
state; NgsFRNg, long suffering.
"WHAT" DISTINGUISHED.
482. "What" in phrases is usually joined only
initially, except after first place small or horizontal
stem logographs (see sec. 419); thus, T l -Y, what you;
T'-w^hat we; T'Dhs, what this; T*T, what at-ought;
Tl'B, what will be; sT 1 , is what; PtoidT 1 , of what;
KtoidT 1 , on what; NT 1 , in what; KsT 1 , because
what.
a. "What" is written as above to distinguish it
from "it," which, being a more frequent word, is
joined finally or medially as well as initially. "What"
is thus written the same as any other logograph that
occasionally requires distinction from another and
more frequent one of similar form in another position;
as, for example, "each" and "at" from "which" and
"to."
b. If it should ever be desired to particularly dis-
tinguish "what, "the small HW character may be in-
serted disjoined; thus, nwT 1 . (See sec. 360.) This,
however, will seldom or never be necessary.
OUGHT.
483. "Ought" may usually be joined everywhere
in phrases when convenient, except when it precedes
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 3CU
"what" (see sec. 482); thus, FtoidT 1 , all ought; BT,
but ought; TT, it ought; DhsTfBn, this ought to
have been; DhTnt, they ought not; CTnt, which ought
not; T'-r, ought you; T^hs, ought this; Tnt'Dh,
ought not they; Tft'Dht, ought to have it that; T ir T,
ought at-to; f ' T 1 , ought what.
OR.
484. When "or" is written medially before a
number the logograph is usually joined to it but not to
the preceding number or word; thus 2 R*4, two or
four; 5 R J 7, five or seven; Dh R 1 !, they or one;
Ftoid R 1 11, all or eleven.
LESSON 44.
OMISSIONS.
485. T may sometimes be omitted for the sake of
speed in words ordinarily written with the St loop by
changing the latter to the circle S; thus, MsLkl, most
likely; MsB, must be; TrsDht, trust that.
486. The N hook may be omitted, if preferred;
thus, P-Y, upon you.
487. Occasionally in a phrase, one or more conso-
nants or a breath letter may be omitted; thus, BsLt-
NssR, absolutely necessary; GrtsTnt, great extent;
Mn 3 F(or nY 3 MnF), human life; TrnF, eternal life",
sPKF, spelling reform; Mn 3 StR, human history;
stTS, state house.
488. The word "well" is always represented by
the iogograph except when it is inconvenient to form
the W hook which is medially or finally after a stem
with appendages on the T, Ch, S and Sh stems with-
out them in which cases it is represented by the stem
L only, the W hook being omitted; thus, sL, as well;
sLs, as well as; ssL, is as-as is well; ssLNn, is as-as is
well known; TsL, it is well; TssL, it is as well; MsL,
370 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
may as well; JssL, just as well; KnL, can well; DL,
do well; sCL, such well; SL, so well; ShL, shall well.
489. A or An, And, By, etc. Such words as "a"
or "an, and, by, of, of the, or, the, to, to the," and
occasionally a syllable, may be omitted medially or
finally from the main words of the phrase in which
they occur; as in the phrases sCn, such a one; FNs-
Tnt, for an instant, GnGn, again and again; sD^D,
side by side ; MtrMp, matter of importance ; FsK, for
the sake-of ; WnBst, one of the best; MrLs, more or
less; CtoidTrR, on the contrary; Krt 1 , according to-
to the; FsTns, for instance.
JUXTAPOSITIONS.
490. When "you, of the" and "to" or "too"
(preposition and adverb) occur medially in a phrase
they may be indicated by juxtaposition, or writing the
words between which they occur very close together,
each in its proper position. This expedient is used
only between stem words; thus, DtMS, did you say;
DiS^M, do you say you saw him; KntstT, can you
state; Kn:K, can you come; nWiKn, when you can;
Dhn:KnK, then you can come; sRFsiRTh, surface of
the earth; LsMM 1 , loss to me; KMiT, came to it;
KM'.Ts, came to its; KMiTs 3 , came to itself; KMiV,
came to have; C 3 '.D, much to do; Z:Dt, was to do it;
Gn'iD, began today; ThsiC 3 , thinks too much. It is
never employed between words which do not contain
stems, or between these and stem words. In such
cases write the words "you, of the, to" or "too";
thus, Ftoid 1 - r Dtoid, all you hoe; Ftoid-Y-V, all you
have; Ftoid 1 Btoid 1 I, all of the eye ; KLr Btoid 1 I,
color of the eye; ShP Btoid e, shape of the o; PrOIt
TRtoid MnT, prompt to the minute; Mns 1 TPtoid
Nt, means to an end; sPn T Ttoid 1 , spoken to on; R 1
T-r, or to you; KM Ts SsTns, came to his assistance;
Ftoid 1 TRtoid, all to thee; Ftoid 1 Tt, all to it; Ftoid 1
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 371
Tts, all to its; Ftoid 1 TTs, all to itself; Ftoid 1 TD,
all to do, or all to-day; Ftoid 1 TD T; all to do it.
a. Juxtaposition as explained in the preceding
paragraph is used only between stem words, since if it
were employed in connection with words without
stems the latter would be liable to be mistaken for the
vocalization of the stems near which they were placed,
or when no stems were employed, for two or more
small characters without the words "you, of the," etc.,
between them.
b. The learner is instructed that when writing at
ordinary speed he need not indicate "of the" by juxta-
position unless he prefers to do so. Again, it is
usually better to write "of the " when the words be-
tween which they occur would make sense without
them; as in the sentence "many of the ships" which
could also be read "many ships." Still there will be
no danger of incorrect reading if the words between
which "of the" occur are always written very close
together.
c. As to "you" and the preposition and adverb
"to" and "too," it is better for the learner to get
accustomed to indicating them by juxtaposition from
the start, particularly "to." The usual manner of
writing the noun or adjective ' 'two" (the number) is
with the figure 2 as will be more fully explained in
the next chapter.
d. When "you, to" or "too" commences a sentence,
or a phrase in the middle of one, the letters are usually
written; thus, Y-D, you do; F-M, you may; TRtoid,
to the; except before B in the phrase "to be," which
is usually written with B in the third position; thus,
B 3 , to be.
e. When "of the" occur between stem words and
a number, they may be indicated by juxtaposition, but
must be written when they occur between small
characters and a number, or between two numbers;
372 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
thus, Dhr 1 '^, either of the two; *2:Mst, t\vo of the
most; Ftoid 1 Btoid 1 5, all of the five; 2 Btoicl 4,
two of the four.
491. From "to". < 'From" and "to" may be in-
dicated by writing the main words of the phrase close
together; as in the phrases DtD, from day to day;
T^T 1 , from time to time; R 3 '.R 3 , from hour to hour.
492. Ing. In connected writing the final syllable
Ing may be indicated either with the stem Ng or with
the dot according to the rules given in sections 317
to 321, or by writing a following tick, half circle or
circle word or the beginning of any following stem
word or figure in the place which would otherwise
be occupied by the Ing dot, as explained in the case of
compound words (see sec. 321); thus, P'Ktoid, paying
a-an; sK^'Ktoid, seeking a-an; G^/SAtoid, giving and;
ssT lV Ptoid, consisting of; ssT 1 'PtoidCtoid, consisting
of the; D'Ftoid, doing all; D'u, doing other; D'Dhr.
doing their-re; G r r, giving you; Dtoid's hoeing his;
G 17 s, giving self; G'T, going to; K'R, coming or;
Pt 3 'Bt, putting about; Wn a 'MN, winning many;
Trs'sRFs, tracing surface; G'7, going seven. This ex-
pedient should not be employed if it will take the
writing too far below the line. In such cases write
the stem Xg or the Ing dot and place the following
word in its proper position. (See, however, sec. 41'-'!. )
493. In the case of verbs from which, as explained
in section 320, the Ng stem and Ing dot may usually
be omitted the context determining the meaning the
indication- of the final syllable Ing by juxtaposition
may also usually be omitted and the first part of the
outline of the word written alone; thus, Dh//-R TRn W,
they were turning away; JtoidZ MV F?/*Rt, he was
moving forward. Generally, however, when a word
follows, it is speedier to write the latter in juxtaposi-
tion than to write it in its proper position, because
the hand does not have to travel so far. But when it
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 373
would take the writing too far below the line it should '
be written alone as just stated. (See also the latter
part of the last paragraph.)
494. Ing the. When the word "the" follows the
final syllable Ing and juxtaposition is employed, "the"
is written with the downward tick; thus, sVCtoid,
saving the; Mn 1? Ctoid, meaning the; in which case a
word following the tick may sometimes be joined to
it; thus, Tr^CtoidsM, trying the same. If, however,
juxtaposition is not employed, "the" is written with
the dot in its proper position, if the preceding word
is not written with the stem Ng (see see's. 317 to 320)
whether the dot for Ing is written or not; thus, Pst-
+ 1 or Pst + 1 , posting the. (See sec. 493.) If the
word preceding "the" is one written with the stem
Ng, as for example, the word "meaning" just given,
the final tick "the" instead of the dot is usually
written; thus, M^NgCtoid, meaning the.
a. When the phrases ''the other-s" follow Ing they
are written as usual; thus, G l5 Cntoid, giving the other;
sK 1 'Cntsoid, seeking the others.
495. When a word containing the final syllable Ing
ends a sentence the stem Ng or the dot is usually
written if it is a noun or adjective and omitted if it
is a verb (see sec. 493); thus, s-DrRtoid Sl^PNG, con-
sider the shipping; S'Rtoid Frst- 1 , see the frosting; but
Dh?/-R Trs, they were tracing; JtoidZ Rst, he was
resting.
496. Cm, Cn, Km or Kn. In connected writing
the initial Cm, Cn, Km or Kn syllables, as in section
293, may be indicated either with the Con dot as there
explained or by writing the remainder of the word so
that a preceding tick, half circle or circle word or the
end of a preceding stem word or figure shall stand in
the place of the Con dot; on the same principle as in-
dicating these syllables medially in words (see sec.
293); thus, Ftoid'Plt 1 , all complied; i'NKts, i con-
374 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
nects; s'Plt 1 , is complete; s'sT 1 , his conceit; s s 'Plt,
as-has complied; s'Nst, as-has commenced; ss'sDt, as is
conceded; Cntoid'Mt 1 , the other committee; B^Trst,
by contrast; Dhs'Tns, this contains; Dh'Krt, they con-
quered; Jgt'Plnt, just complained; TRtoid'DKt, to the
conduct; BsRf's'TrKt, observing his contract; s'Pn,
his compaign; Dhs'Vs, this canvass; Z'Brs, was cum-
brous; s a 'sL, his counsel; T'MDt, to accommodate;
Dhs 1 R 3 M'B, with his arm akimbo; 2'Mts 1 , two com-
mittees; Ds'sRt, does concert. (See "tracting sur-
face," the last phrase but one of par. 492, in which
the initial circle of the second word is placed under
the end of the previous stem, whereas in "does con-
cert" it is written after and slightly above it. (See also
"disconcert," eng. 293, line 8.) This expedient should
not be employed if it will take the writing too far be-
low the line. In such cases write the word in its
proper position with. the Con dot prefixed. (See, how-
ever, sec. 497.)
497. In the case of those frequent words whose re-
maining outlines are sufficiently suggestive and from
which the Con dot is consequently omitted as explained
in section 293, d, the indication of the initial Cm, etc.,
syllables by juxtaposition may also be omitted and the
remainders of the outlines written alone; thus, -f- 1 Vrs-
shn, the conversation; s 1 sRn, his concern; C 3 FDus,
much confidence. It is, however, usually more speedy
to write them in juxtaposition for the reason given in
section 493, in the case of the syllable Ing.
498. When a small logograph occurs before a word
beginning with Cm, etc. , it accommodates itself to the
position of the latter (see also sec. 421), in the case of
"the" the downward tick being employed; thus,
Ktoid'Tst 1 , a contest; Ktoid'DsNt, a candescent;
Ktoid'TNshn, a contention; Ktoid'Tshn 3 , a contusion;
Ktoid'Mt 1 , a committee; Ktoid'sXt, a consent; Ktoid 1 -
Kft, a concavity; Ktoid'sL 1 (s over the center of
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.. liT.")
Ktoid) a consul; Ktoid'sRfR, a conserver; Ktoid'-
sLshn 3 , a cancellation; /SV/toid'Trf l , and contrive;
.s'/>toid'V, and convey; ^Atoid'Fshn, 3 , and confusion;
>'/?toid'Ft 3 , and confute; ^'Atoid'Jr 1 (Jr under the
center of *S7ttoid) and conjure; xSAtoid'Tnt, and is con-
tent; -S'/ctoid'sKnt 1 , and consequent-ly; /SAtoid'sXt, and
consent; AS'Atoid'Kr, and concur; /S'Atoid'Kr 3 , and
canker; xSVitoid'sL 1 , and conceal; iVAtoid'sRf, and con-
serve; /kS'Atoid'ssLt, and consult; /tf/ftoid'sL 3 , and cancel-
council-counsel; u'sL 3 (s above the u), other counsel;
s'sL 3 , as-has-is-his counsel; Ftoid'sLt 3 , all counselled;
Ptoid'Mnt 3 , of command; Ctoid'V 1 , the convoy:
Ctoid'TMpt, the contempt; Ctoid'Fshn 3 , the confu-
sion; Ctoid' JrUi, the conjurer; Ctoid'sRf tR (s opposite
the center of Ctoid) the conservator; Ctoid'Mt 1 , the
committee; Ctokl'sNt, the consent; Ctoid'Mnt 3 , the
command; Ctoid'sMR 3 , the consumer; Ctoid'sL 3 ,
(s opposite the center of Ctoid) the council-counsel.
1. If the dot for "the" is written the Con dot
should always be inserted, since juxtaposition can not
be legibly employed with a dot; thus -(- 1 -Mt 1 , the
committee. This rule of course does not apply to
those words whose remaining outlines are sufficiently
suggestive without the Con dot and which are written
separately, as in the phrase "the conversation," in
section 497.
499. In such phrases as "as, has, is" and "his"
followed by Cm, etc., the S circle may if necessary be
shaded to distinguish it from those containing ' 'self"
followed by the same syllables; thus, z'Trl, as-has-is-
his control; s'Trl, self : control. This, however, will
seldom be necessary and then usually only with "his."
500. When a vowel containing initial Cm, etc., be-
gins a sentence the Con dot is inserted unless the re-
mainder of the word, as stated in section 293, d, is
sufficiently suggestive, otherwise a double meaning
376 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAN'UAL.
may result; thus, -Tst CtoidKs, contest the case; but
sTrKtCtoid, construct the.
501. The Con dot is also inserted when the word
in which it occurs follows "of the" indicated by juxta-
position (sec sec. 490) unless, as stated in section 293,
d, the remainder of the outline is sufficiently suggest-
ive; thus, DtKshn'-Plt 1 , detection of the complot;
but ?/?LTh'sRn, wealth of the concern.
502. It is also inserted when the word to which it
belongs is written in juxtaposition to a preceding word
containing the final syllable Ing unless, as explained
in section 293, d, the remaining outline is suffi-
ciently suggestive; thus, P'-TrKt, paying contract;
but Gr'FDnt, growing confident.
503. Can and Come. The words "can" and
"come" may be represented medially by juxtaposition
in the same manner as Cm, etc. ; thus, r'K, you can
come; i'St 1 , I can see it; H\V'r, when can you;
w l5 G, we can go; L-r'BK, will you come back.
LESSON 45.
THE FOURTH POSITION.
504. When a word is written below and touching
(or in the case of a horizontal straight character see
sec. 4 nearly touching) the line of writing, or with
its first perpendicular or inclined stem , whether initial
or not (see see's. 352 to 358), below and touching it,
it is in what is called the fourth position and indicates
that the word "and" precedes it; thus, +, 4 , and the;
H 4 , and how; a 4 , and a; Hu 4 , and who; w 4 , and we;
y 4 , and you; s 4 , and as-has-is-his ; st 4 , and is-his-as-has
to-too; str 4 , and is-as to their; /SY<toid 4 , and and;
Ttoid 4 , and on; He 4 , and he; i 4 , and I; Ptoid 4 , and of;
Ftoid 4 , and all; Vtoid 4 , and all the; Ftsoid 4 , and all as-
has-is-his; 6 4 anu, and Oahu; G 4 , and go; K 4 M, and
game; R 4 Plt, and replied ?/-R 4 Dh, and worthy; sL 4 Tr,
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 377
and sultry; JtoidM 4 , and home; KtoidMn 4 , and a man;
JtoidM 4 , and he may; sM 4 , and some, and is my;
s 4 Rtr, and is rather; Ktoid 4 D, and I do; Ktoid 4 R, and
a ray; Ktoid 4 RPt, and a rapid; Gt 4 RTRn, and good
return; Ls 4 L, and lastly; MR T 4 Ms Jn 4 C 1 Rt
Ps 4 Tt KtoidLtr, Mary and Thomas and John each
wrote and posted a letter; JMs s 4 Mtr L 4 R z#Rtr,
James and his mother and Laura were there; w?L 4 M
Pit KIR 4 sNg 3 , and William played and Clara sang;
B o 4 R1RD, B. & O. Railroad; i i i 4 R1RD, I. I. &
I. Railroad; swR 4 M'Psts stR 4 Ms'P, and swarming
pests and storms come up; RtoidVLn Ztr 4 , the violin
and zither.
1. From the above it will be perceived that words
containing only horizontal stems and which belong to
the third position, are, when written in the fourth,
raised half a T length (see sec. 352) since the fourth
position for them lies between the second and third.
a. When a double length upward letter is written
in the fourth position it is begun at the same point as
its single length (see sec. 353); thus, Ltr 4 , and letter;
R 4 R, and roar; s 4 Ltr, and his letter; Ktoid 4 ?#LtrNs,
and a wilderness; Ttoid 4 KLtrn, and a caldron; Grt 4 -
sLtr, and great slaughter; Ktoid 4 GrtsLtr, and a great
slaughter.
b. Stem words which might conflict from having
the same form -and representing the same part of
speech should not be written in the fourth position if
there would be danger of such conflict, unless the
least frequent word is vocalized. Experience will
soon teach the learner when to omit such words from
the fourth position or to vocalize them. (See also sec.
410, k.) Frequently the fact that a word is written
in the fourth position gives a clue to its meaning,
which would not be the case otherwise.
c. Words consisting of two or more stems, either
or both of which are compound, or those of three or
378 THE PHOX<x;::.',PHir MANUAL.
more, can usuall}' be written in any position without
danger of conflict. (See par. 385.)
505. A figure may be written in the fourth posi-
tion; thus, Dh -i 4 , they and four; 5 7 4 , five and
seven.
506. If desired the words "he, a" and "an" may
be indicated initially by the fourth position in addition
to the word "and;" thus, s 4 , he as-has-is; Z 4 , he was;
D 4 , he had; sNt 4 , he sent; Tlt 4 M IFt 4 , he told mt-
he would; R 4 Plt Dnt 4 X, he replied he did n't know;
sD 4 Tht 4 Mt 4 , he said he thought he might ;P>t 4 P 4 C
PI 4 KtoidPl 4 M, he bought a peach, an apple and a
plum.
507. If preferred the fourth position need not be
employed for "and," or any of the other words above,
but instead the logographs, ticks and curvets may be
joined initially. In which case this position would
become the third for horizontal and small character
words and the third position half a T length below the
line (see sec. 352) would be abolished. (See also sec.
433, a.)
THE ZERO POSITION.
508. When a word is written on the upper line (see
sec. 352) or with- its first perpendicular or inclined
stem, whether initial or not, resting on it, it is in
what is called the Zero position and indicates that
either of the words "of" or "I" precedes it the con-
text determining which; thus, -f-, of the; a, of a-an;
a, of a; Ftoid , of all; r, of you; s, of as-his-us;
M, of my or I am; KtoidD , of a dollar; TtoidKDM,
of an academy; KtoidDt , of a debt; Ktoid XTt, of a
noted; KtoidBtFl, of a beautiful; GrtJ of great ad-
vantage; KtoidKltD , of a cold day; Th SKtoid
XssT Gn'T, I think I see the necessity of beginning
it; RtoidXs 1 Ktoid DL XsPPr, Hie influence of a
daily newspaper: Xt'13Dn, I know it can be done;
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 379
KtoidMn KrJ, a man of courage; .RtoidwRt Ntr,
the word of another; NtrD, of another day; Ktoid-
LVr LtrTr, a lover of literature.
a. When a double length downward letter is writ-
ten in the zero position it is begun at the same point
as its single length (see sec. 353); thus, Ftr, of future;
DT, of duty; KtoidYtr , of a yachter; KtoidKrFtr ,
of a crofter ; GtShltr , of good shelter; TtoidGrtShltr ,
of a good shelter.
b. Stem words of the same form and part of
speech should not be written in the zero position, if
there would be danger of conflict, unless the least
frequent word is vocalized; the same as in the case
of the fourth position. (See sec. 504, b. )
c. Words like those explained in section 504,0 can
usually be written in any position without danger of
conflict.
509. A figure may be written in the zero position;
thus, S 4, so of four; 5 7, five of seven.
510. If preferred the zero position need not be
employed for "of" and "I," but instead the logo-
graphs and ticks in sections 381 and 432 may be joined
initially. (See also sec. 507.)
CAUTION IN REGARD TO WRITING IN THE THIRD, ZERO
AND FIRST POSITIONS.
511. When writing in the third or zero position
the words should not be written so far below or above
the line as to occupy the zero position of the line be-
low or the third position of the one above. Likewise
when writing in the first position the words should
not be placed so high above the line as to be in the
zero position. (See also sec. 359.) All that is needed
for distinction in each case is merely a half T
length elevation or drop of perpendicular or inclined
stem words and the same or about a quarter length
of all other words.
380 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
a. When writing on unruled paper the above
method is followed in regard to where the line of
writing would be if traced.
THE OR SPACE AND POSITION.
512. "Or" is indicated medially in a phrase by
a space about as long as a double length K, the word
or number following the "or"' being written in the
first position and that preceding it in its proper or the
second position, the space being designated in steno-
typy by two single opposite quotation points; thus,
Y ' ' i 1 , you or I; K < ' G 1 , come or go; F 3 < '
M*X, few or many; JMs l ' Jn 1 , James or John;
Jn 1 ' ' tPMs, John or James; i 1 ' ' Nn 1 , I or
none; Y l ' M 1 , of you or me-him; Dh ' ' 15 1 ,
they or fifteen; 4 ' ' Mr 1 , four or more; 7 ' ' 8 1 ,
seven or eight; Dh ' ' SMMst, they or two of the
most.
a. Small logographs or horizontal stems, or both,
accommodate themselves in the or position to the fol-
lowing downward stem the same as when in the zero
position (see examples in sec. 508); thus, Ktoid?/-Rt
1 ' KtoidFrs 1 , a word or a phrase; sMX ' ' sC^K,
his money or his check; sSsR 4 ' sKT 1 , as Cicero or
as Cato; JtoidSRts ' ' sKrDt 1 , he asserts or is
credited; sVLn ' ' sZtr 1 , his violin or his zither.
b. The observations in paragraphs b and c, section
504, in reference to the fourth position apply also to
the or space and position.
c. When "or" occurs initially it is represented by
the logograph the same as "to" and "too" (see sec.
400, d) which are also indicated by the opposite
method to "or", namely, by a narrow instead of a
wide space.
513. If preferred the or space and position need
not be employed, but instead the logograph may be
written.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 381
THE TO SPACE BETWEEN FIGURES.
514. "To" is represented between figures by a
space about as long as a double length K, the num-
ber after it being written in the second position. If
the number before it is preceded by the word "from"
it is placed in the first position, but if not, in the
second; thus, 2 1 ' ' 4, from two to four ; 14 1 ' ' 15,
from fourteen to fifteen; 5 ' ' 8, five to eight;
21 ' ' 22, twenty-one to twenty-two.
a. When "or" occurs between two groups of the
last examples it is expressed with the logograph;
thus, 2 < ' 4 R 1 4 < ' 8, two to four or four to
eight.
THE BY SPACE BETWEEN FIGURES.
515. "By" is represented between figures by a
space about as long as a double length K, the num-
ber following it being written in the third position
and the one preceding it in the second ; thus, 2 ' ' 4 3 ,
two by four; 15 ' ' 18 3 , fifteen by eighteen.
a. "By" may be written with the logograph, if
preferred; thus, 2 B 1 4; 15 B 1 18.
CAUTION IN REGARD TO PHRASEOGRAPHY.
516. The learner should not employ phraseography
to excess since it then renders the writing somewhat
involved and hence difficult to read. Accordingly it
should be used only enough to ensure speed. Its full
limit is not necessary in ordinary or private writing,
but only in the swiftest reporting. As a general rule
only the most frequent and simple phrases of two and
three words each (usually the former) should be
employed. (See sec. 419.) If the learner will take
care of these, the long phrases will take care of them-
selves no matter how swif t the writing may be. Prac-
tice will soon teach the proper forms. Furthermore,
>M TUB PHOXOORAPHIC MAXfAf..
joining "the"' (see sec. 425) medially when convenient,
very greatly enchances speed, lint it should not be
thus joined if the legibility of the following -word
would suffer by reason of being written out of its
proper position or modifying its form. Words like
those in section 385, however, can usually be so joined.
LESSON 46.
SPECIAL, PHRASES, LOGOGRAPHS AND BREVIGRAPHS.
517. The preceding portions of this chapter are
devoted to what are called General Phrases, that is
phrases which may be employed in general writing.
There are, however, many others, such as Business,
Law, Medicine, Military, Political, Scientific, Theo-
logical, etc., special or technical in their nature, which
are known as Special or Technical phrases or, simply,
Techniphrases and may be indicated by the phono-
grapher when engaged in such writing. The same is
true of Logographs (see sec. 379) and Brevigraphs,
which are then called Special Logographs or Bre-
vigraphs or, simply, Technigraphs. Thus, for ex-
ample, in business the frequently occurring names of
firms, railroad companies, or other corporations, etc.,
or of certain articles of merchandise, can be abbre-
viated by the writer to suit his own convenience. The
learner should, however, understand that in special
writing phrases and contractions can be used which
would not, as a rule (see sec. 519), be admissible in
general writing, because there special phrases and
terms occur so seldom that they must be written either
in full or according to the ordinary rules of abbrevi-
ation, otherwise they will be apt to be illegible. On
the other hand in special w y riting the phrases and words
peculiar to the business or subject recur continually,
and thus the special forms invented to represent them
soon become familiarized and consequently easily read
THE PUON'OGR \P11U 1 MANUAL. 383
by the writer though they may be mostly illegible to
another phonographer not engaged in the same line of
writing.
518. It will therefore be seen that while a person
may be a good general phonographer he may not be a
good special one, and vice versa. Also that a special
writer who may be familiar with the phrases and
terms in one business or profession may not be so with
those in another. Accordingly in order to succeed in
any particular kind of writing, special attention should
be given to it. Books have been published containing
full lists of the phrases and words pertaining to each
kind business, legal, political, etc., which the learner
should obtain if he desires to follow either of them
specially. Most of the outlines in each can easily be
adapted to any system of phonography; and where they
can not other outlines may be invented instead.
519. Sometimes, even in general writing, a phrase
or word of inconvenient length of outline, or a proper
name, occurs very frequently. In such a case the
writer may, after writing it the first time, or perhaps
oftener, in full vocalizing it if it is a proper nanivi
invent an abbreviation for it, usually a suggestive one,
or omit the vocalization.
INTERSECTED PHRASES.
520. Official titles, the names of firms, corporations,
public bodies and any phrases that can not be briefly
or satisfactorily written otherwise, may be indicated
by intersecting; that is by crossing a prominent stem
by a following one or writing it across a preceding
stem, after the principle explained in section 410, j.
When this can not be done because of two straight
strokes lying in the same direction, the second stroke
should be placed close to or under the preceding one
with its beginning opposite the middle of the latter.
Thus. ,'ii*TLR, Gen. Taylor; JntShrAIn, Gen. Sher-
384 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
man; KlfDKsX, Col. Dixon; MtJns, Maj. Jones;
KfRXlts, Ca[)t. Reynolds; KtKKsTn, Capt. Caxton,
D 3 fsMpsX, Admiral Sampson; D 3 iD, Admiral Dewey;
PrfTMsX, Prof. Thompson; K 2 fPn, capital punish-
ment.
a. The words "Society, Association, Committee
and Department" are represented respectively by the
strokes S, Sh, Mt and D, while "Party" is written
with the logograph P; thus, TMpfS, Temperance
Society; FXtKfS, Phonetic Society; Blt'fSh, Build-
ing Association; Ki^fSh, Christian Association; Tr-
ZhrfD, Treasury Department; mR^fD, War Depart-
ment; stT'.D, State Department; S 3 fMt, House Com-
mittee; FnXs'.Mt, Finance Committee; KIMsiMt,
Claims Committee; RfP, Republican Party; DIP or
DMfP, Democratic Party; LBrLfP, Liberal Party;
LBrtP, Labor Party; Pr a BshniP, Prohibition Party
b. The abbreviation "Co.," for "Company," is
always written with K, while the word * 'Company" is
always written in full. (See Vocabulary.) Further-
more the former is seldom intersected, but is usually
joined or disjoined according to convenience. Thus,
RRK, R. R. Co.; R1RDK, Railroad Co.; RYTK, R.
AY. Co. ; R1WK, Railway Co. ; sPrsK, Express Co. ;
BKsK, Box Co.; BrKK or BrK'.K, Brick Co.; stXtr-
D 3 LK or stXtrD 3 LiK, Standard Oil Co.; sMTh K>,
Smith & Co.; sPrs'PN, Express Company; stXtrD 3 -
L'PX, Standard Oil Company; XVPX, Xews Com-
pany; Brn 3 P 4 X, Brown & Company.
1. The word "Company" (PX) above, as in Ex-
press Company, is written is juxtaposition according
to section 496 for the sake of speed. (See sec. 497.)
But it may, if preferred, be written separately in its
proper position, namely, the second, since its outline
is sufficiently suggestive without the aid of juxtapo-
sition.
c. The syllable Con, in the word "connection" and
THIS PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. .'IH5
its derivatives, may be indicated by intersecting the
previous stem with the K stem simple or compound;
thus, N^Kshn, in connection; M^fKshn, my con-
nection; DhsfKshn, this connection; Rn^Kshn, or in
connection; DhfKt, they connect.
LESSON 47.
STEM PHRASEOGRAPHS.
521. The following list of stem phraseographs (see
sec. 420) is formed mostly from single length stem
logographs without appendages. (See sec. 381.) Usu-
ally no circle logographs or possessives are added
or included since these can easily be attached or form-
ed from the others when necessary. Examples of
other phraseographs not contained in the list will be
, found under their respective headings in the preceding
portions of this chapter.
522. The list is arranged in phonetic order for
convenience of reference when reading phonography.
It is divided into two parts, the first part beginning
at P and the second at Ch, at Lesson 48, and should
be thoroughly memorized.
523. LIST OF STEM PHRASEOGRAPHS.
Pf
Ptr
Ptrn
Prtr
Pltr
Pltrn
sPtr
sPtrn . . . .
sPss/m. . .
sPltr. .
3 hope to have
1 occupy their-re 2 up there 3 hope their-
re-they are
1 occupy their own 3 hope their own
1 appear there
2 play their-re 3 apply their-re
2 play their own 3 apply their own
1 speak their-re 2 spoke their-re
1 speak their own 2 spoke their own
2 special session
1 supply their
380
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
sPltrn .... 1 supply their own
nsPrshn . . 1 in suppression 2 in expression 3 in sep-
aration
Pt 1 occupy it 3 hope it
Pnt 2 upon it
sPlt 1 supply it
sPlnt .... 2 explain it
nsPrt .... 3 in separate
B
B 3 to be
Bf 1 be of 2 but have-of
Btr 1 be-by their-re 2 but their-re-they are 3 to
be their-re
Btrn 1 be-by their own 2 but their own, better
than 3 to be their own
Br 1 by our 2 but are-our
Brn 1 by our own
Brf 3 number of
Brtr 2 but are there 2 remember their-re-they
are
Brtrn .... 2 but are their own
Bl 1 by all 2 but will
Blf 1 by all of 2 but will have
Bltr 1 belong-ed there, by all their-re-they are
2 but will their-re
Bltrn ... 1 by all their own 2 but will their own
Bt 1 be-by-buy it 2 but it-had-would
Bnt 1 be-by not 2 but not, but had- would not
Bf t 1 be of it 2 above it, but have it-had, but
of it
Btrt 2 better it
Brnt 2 but are not
Brft 3 number of it
Bit 2 able to, but will it
Bint 2 but will not
Blf t 2 believe it, but will have it
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
387
Tn 1 ought-what one 3 at one
Tns 1 at once
Tf 1 ought of-to have, what of-to have 2 to
have 3 out of
Ttr 1 ought I heir-re, what their-re-they are 2 to-
it their-re 3 at-out their-re
Ttrn 1 ought-what their own 2 to-it their own
3 at-out their own
Tr 1 what are-our 2 to our 3 at our, it were
Trn 1 what our own 2 to our own 3 at our own
Trf 1 try to have 3 it were of-to have
Trtr 1 try their-re, what are their-re 3 it were
their-re
Trtrn. ... 1 try their own, what are their own 2 it
were their own
Tl 1 what will 2 to all, it will 3 at all
Tlst 3 at least
Tin 3 at length
Tlf 1 what will have 2 to all of, it will have
3 at all of
Tltr 1 what all their-re-they are, what will their-
re 2 to all their-re-they are, till their-
re-they are, tell their-re 3 until their-
re-they are, at all their-re
Tltrn .... 1 what all their own 2 to all their own, till-
tell their own 3 until-at all their
own
sTtr 3 satisf y-ied their-re
sTtrn .... 3 satisf y-ied their own
sir 3 as it were
stTf 2 state of
stTtr 2 state their
nsTr 2 in constructing
nsTrtr.. . . j 2 instruct their-re, in constructing their-re
nsTrtrn . . 2 instruct their own, in constructing their
own
888
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
nsTrshn . . 2 in construction
Tt 1 ought it, what it-had-would 2 to it, it
had-would 3 at it
Tnt 1 ought-what not, what had-would not 2 to
not, it not,, it had-would not, at hand
Tft 1 ought to have it-had, what have it-had,
what of it 2 to have it-had 3 out
of it (See sec. 527.)
Trt 1 try it
Trnt 1 try not 3 it were not
Trf t 1 try to have it 3 it were to have it
Tit .... 1 what will it 2 till-tell it 3 until it
Tint; 1 what will not 2 it will not
Tlft 1 what will have it 2 it will have it
stTt 2 state it
D
Df 3 had to have (Alone or initially.)
Dtr 2 do their-re 3 add-had-advertise their-re
Dtrn 2 do their own 3 add-had-advertise their
own
Drtr 1 doctor their 3 during their
Drtrn. ... 1 doctor their own 3 during their own
Dltr 1 idle their-re 2 deliver-ed their-re
Dltrn .... 1 idle their own 2 deliver-ed their own
Dwtr .... 2 dwell-ed there
sDf 2 said of -to have
sDtr 2 said their-re-they are
sDrtr .... 2 consider there '
sDrtrn ... 2 consider their own
ssDrshn . . 2 his consideration
nsDrshn . . 2 in consideration
Dt 2 do it 3 add it, had it-had
Dnt 1 did not 2 do not 3 had not
Df t 3 had to have it (Alone or initially. )
Drt 3 during it
Dlt . .2 deliver it
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
389
sDt j
2
said it
sDft
sDrt
2
2
said of-to haye it 3 has had to have it
consider it
Ktr
2
K
come their-re
Ktrn
Krtr
2
3
come their own
cure their-re <
Krtrn ....
3
cure their own
Kltr
1
call their-re 2 cool their-re 3 clew
their-re
Kltrn ....
1
call their own 2 coal their own 3 clew
their own
Kwtrss/m*
sKrtr
1
1
quarter sessions
describe-d their 3 secure their-re
sKrtrn . . .
1
describe their own 2 secure their own
sKltr ....
2
scale their 3 school their
sKltrn . . .
2
scale their own 3 school their own
nsKr
nsKrn. . . .
nsKrf.. ..
nsKrtr . . .
1
1
1
1
in scripture, in describing 3 in securing
in screening
in descriptive
inscribe their
nsKrshn . .
Knt.
1
1
in description
can not 2 can it
Krt
1
according to-to the 3 cure it
Kit
1
o
call it 2 coal it 3 clew it
sKrt
3
secure it
sKrnt ....
1
screen it
sKlt ....
2
scale it
nsKrt ....
1
in secret
nsKrts*7m.
1
in secret session
Gtr
G
giv-tr-n their-re 2 go their-re
Gtrn
Grtrn ....
sGtr
1
2
1
give-n their own 2 go their own
greater than
siffnifv their-re
390
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
sGtrn .... 1 signify their own
Gf t 2 gave it
Gtrt 3 gather it
sGts 1 has got his-us 2 is-as good as
ssGts .... 2 is as good as
sGrts . . . . 2 is-as great as
ssGrts .... 2 is as great as
S
Str 1 see-saw their-re 2 so-say their-re-they are,
sow-sew their-re 3 us their-re, sue
their-re
Strn 1 see-saw their own 2' so-say-sow-sew their
own 3 us-sue their own
St 1 see-saw it 2 so-so w-sew it, Sat, say it, so
had- would 3 use it
Snt 1 assign it 2 so had-would not
Z
Ztr 1 is their-re 2 was their-re 3 as their-re-
they are, has their-re, use their,
those their-re-they are
Ztrn 1 is their own-one 2 was their own-one
3 as-has their own, use their own,
those their own
Zt 1 is it (See sec. 475, a.) 3 as-has it (see
sec. 475, a), use it
F
Fn 1 if one
Frn 2 from one
Yi'sshn ... 2 first session
Fl 1 if all 2 f or all
Ftr 1 if their-re-they are 2 for their-re-they are
3 half their-re
Ftrn 1 if their own 2 for their own 3 half their
own
Frtr 1 offer their-re 2 from their-re
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
391
Thrn.
Thtr .
Thtrn
Frtrn .... 1 offer their own 2 from their own, further
than 3 farther than
Fltr 1 if all their- re, follow-fill their-re 2 for all
their-re
Fltrn .... 1 if all their own, follow-fill their own 3 for
all their own
Frtrtr .... 2 further their-re-they are
Frtrtrn. . . 2 further their own
Ft 1 if it 2 for it
Fnt 1 if not 2 for not
Frt 1 offer it 2 from it
Fit 1 if all it, follow-fill it 2 for all it
V
Vn 2 have one, have been. (See sec. 460, c. )
Vrn 2 every one
Vtr 1 of their-re, ever their-re-they are 2 have
their-re 3 however their-re-tbey are,
halve their
Vtrn 1 of-ever their own 2 have their own, have
there been 3 however their own,
halve their own
Vrtr 1 over their-re 3 whoever their-re-they are
Vrtrn .... 1 over their own 3 whoever their own
Vltr 1 of all their-re 3 value their-re
Vltrn .... 1 of all their own 3 value their own
Vt 1 of it 2 have it-had 3 however-halve it
Vnt 2 have not, have been it
Vrt 1 over it 3 whoever it
Vlt 1 of all it 3 value it
Vlts . 1 of all its
Th
3 through one
2 think their-re-they are 3 thank-hath their-
re
2 think their own 3 thank-hath their own
392
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MAXCAL.
Thrtr .
Thrtrn
Tht...
Thnt. .
Thrt. .
Cn
Cf.
Ctr.
Dhst
1
Dhsshn. . .
2
Dhr.
2
Dhrn
1
Dhl
1
Dhtr
1
Dhtrn.. ..
1
Dhrtr. . . .
1
Dhrtrn. . .
1
Dhltr ....
1
Dhitrn. ..
1
Dht
1
Dhtst
3
Dhnt
1
Dhrt. .. ..
2
Dhrnt
1
Dhlt
3
Dhlnt.. .
2
3 through their-re
3 through their own
2 think it 3 thank it
2 think not
3 through it
Dh
thou wast 3 thou hast
2 this session
2 they are
either one 2 their own, they are in
3 other one-than
with all 2 they will
thee their-re-with their 2 them their-re
3 though their-re- they are
C v
thee-with their own 2 them their own
3 though their own
either their-re-they are 2 they are their-
re
either their own 2 they are their own
with all their-re
with all their own
with it 2 they had-would
thou hadst
3 though it
within it 2 than-then it, they not, they
had-would not
2 there it-had-woul J
on either hand 2 they are not, there had-
would not
thou wilt
2 they will not 3 thou wilt not
LESSON 48.
Ch
1 each one 2 which one
1 each of 2 which have-of 3 much cf
1 watch their-ro 2 which their-re
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
393
Ctrn
1
Cr
2
Crn
2
Crf . .
9,
Crtr.
1
Crtrn..
1
Cl.
1
Clf
1
Cltr
9,
sCn
2
sCf.
2
sCtr
1
sCtrn. ..
1
sCr
2
sCrf ... .
2
sCrtr
2
sCrtrn. . . .
2
sCl
1
sClf
1
sCltr
2
Ct
1
Cnt......
1
Cf t
9
Crts
2
Crnt
2
Oft
2
Clt
9
watch their own 2 which their own
which are-our 3 which were
which are in, which our own 3 which
were in
which are of-to have 3 which were of-to
have
cheer their-re 2 which are their-re
3 which were their-re
cheer their own 2 which are their own
3 which were their own
each will 2 which will 3 much will
each will have 2 which will have 3 much
will have
which will there
such a one
such have-of
switch their-re 2 such their-re-they are
switch their own 2 such their own
such are 3 such were
such are of-to have 3 such were of-to
have
such are their-re 3 such were their-re
such are their own 3 such were their own
as each will 2 such will 3 as much will
as each will have 2 such will have 3 as
much will have
such will there
each had-would, watch it 2 which it-had-
would
each had-would not 2 which had-would
not
which have it-had 3 much of it
which are its 3 which were its
which are not 3 which were not
Avhich tiro of it-to have it 3 which were
of it-to have it
which will it 3 much will it
394
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
Clnt
Gift..
sCt..
sCnt.
sCft.
sCrts
sCrnt
sCrft
sClt. .
sClnt
sClft.
1 each will not 2 which will not 2 much
will not
1 each will have it-had 2 which will have
it-had
1 switch it 2 such it
2 such had- would not
2 such have it
2 such are its 3 such were its
2 such are not 3 such were not
2 such are of it-to have it 3 such were of
it-to have it
2 such will it
2 such will not
2 such will have it
Jrn | 3 larger than
Shi.
Shtr
Shtrn . .
Shrtr . .
Shrtrn .
Shltrtr .
Shltrtrn
Sht....
Shnt.
Shrt. ..
Shlnt . .
Sh
1 she will
1 wish theii-re 2 shall their-re 3 issue
their-re
1 wish their own 2 shall their own
3 issue their own
2 sure their-re-they are, usher their-re
3 assure their-re
1 shorter than 2 sure-usher their own
3 assure their own
2 shelter their-re 3 shoulder their-re
2 shelter-their own 3 shoulder their own
1 she had-would, wish it 2 shall it 3 issue it
(For "she not, she had-would not, shall
not" and "should not," see sec.
474, a.)
3 assure it
(For "she will not" see sec. 474, a.)
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
395
Zhtr . .
Zhtrn .
Zhrtr .
Zhrtrn
Zhrt . .
nsZh . ,
Mrn.
sMn .
Mtr..
Mtrn . . .
Mrtr. . . .
Mrtrn . .
sMtr. . . .
sMtrn . . ,
Mt
Mnt
sMnt. . .
Mp
Mpn. . . .
Mptr . . .
Mptrn . .
Mpltr . . .
stMptr . .
st Mptrn ,
Mptrtr . .
Mptrtrn,
Mpt. ..
Mpnt ..
stMpt. . ,
Zh
2 usually their-re-they are
2 usually their own
3 measure their
3 measure their own
3 measure it
2 in his usual
M
2 more than
2 some one
1 my dear, me their-re 2 am-him-may their-
their-re
1 me their own 2 am-him-may their
own
1 remark their-re 3 humor their-re
1 remark their own 3 humor their own
2 some their-re
2 some their own 3 smoother than
2 may it
2 may-am not
3 examine it
2 may be
2 may be one
2 may be their-re-they are, improve their
3 map their-re
2 may be their own, improve their own
3 map their own
3 humble their-re
2 stump their-re 3 stamp their-re
2 stump their own 3 stamp their own
2 may be they are their-re
2 may be they are their own
2 may be it, improve it 3 map it
2 may be not
2 stump it 3 stamp it
396
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
Ns 2 no, sir
Xss/m ... 2 next session
Nr 1 in our
Nrn 1 in our own
Nl 1 in all
ssX 2 as-is soon
ssNs 2 as soon as, is as soon as
Ntr 1 in their-re 2 know their-re-they are 3 own
their-re
Xtrn .... 1 in their own, neither one 2 know their
own, another one 3 own their own
Xtrs/m. . . 1 entire session 2 another session
Xrtr 1 near-nor-honor their-re
Xrtrn .... 1 near-nor-honor their own
Xltr 1 in all their-re 2 only their-re
Xltrn .... 1 in all their own 2 only their own
sXtr 3 soon their-re-they are
sXltr .... 3 sooner or later
Xtrtr 1 neither their-re-they are 2 another their-
re
Xtrtrn ... 1 neither their own 2 another their own
Nt 1 in it 2 know it 3 own it
Nrt 1 honor it, in order-to
Ng
Ngr 1 along our
Xgrn .... 1 along our own, longer than
Xgl 1 along all
Xgls 1 thing else
Xgtr .... 1 along their-re, long there
Xgtrn ... 1 along their own, long their own
Xgrtr. ... 1 longer their-re 3 anger their-re
Xgrtrn ... 1 longer their own 3 anger their own
Xgltr .... 1 along all their 3 angle their-re
Xgltrn. . . 1 along all their own 3 angle their own
Xgrtrtr . . 1 longer they are their-re
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
397
R
Rn 1 or in 2 are in 3 our own
Rf 1 or have-of-to have 2 are of -to have 3 hour
of
Rtr lor their-re-they are 2 her-are-their-re, be-
fore their-re-they are 3 rue their
Rtrn .... 1 or their own, writer-order than 2 her-are-
before their own 3 rue their own,
rather than
Rltr 2 roll their-re 3 rule their-re
Rltrn .... 2 roil their own 3 rule their own
1 with or 2 with her, we are 3 with our
%'Rn 1 were in, we are in, with her own 3 with
our own
2 were of -to have, we are of -to have 3 aware
of
2 were their-re, we are their-re
2 where their-re-they are
u'Rtrn ... 2 were their own, we are their own
H?/?Rtrn . . 2 where their own
1 ye are 2 you are
?/Rn 1 ye are in 2 you are in 3 your own
1 ye are- of -to have, year of 2 you are of-
to have
1 ye are their-re 2 you are their-re
yRtrn .... 1 ye are their own 2 you are their own
Rt 1 or it-had-would 2 before it 3 rue it
Rnt 1 or not 2 are not
Rf t 1 or have-of it 2 are of it
Rtrt 1 order it 3 rather it
2 were it
2 where it-had-would
2 were not, we are not
2 where not, where had-would not
2 were to have it, we are to have it 3 aware
of it
2 where to have it
398
yRnt . .
z/Rnts. .
yRf t . . .
TilK PHONOGRAPHIC MAM'AL.
Ltr ...
Ltrn . .
mrLtr . .
HJi'Ltrn
Lt
Lnt. . . .
Lrnt . .
HwLt .
H //'Lnt .
1 ye are not 2 you are not 3 your hand
3 your hands
1 ye are to have it 2 you are to have it.
L
2 we will
1 all-their-re-they are 2 will their-re
1 all their own 2 will their own
1 while their-re-they are
1 while their own
1 all it-had-wouid 2 will it
1 all had-would not 2 will not
2 learn it
1 while it
2 we will not
1 while not
W
nWn ....
1
why one 2 when one
Wtr
-2
Aveigh their-re
nWtr ....
I
why their-re-they are 2 when their-re-
they are
Wtrn . . .
2
weigh their own
nWtrn . .
1
why their own 2 when their own
Wtrn ....
1
wider than
Wtrtr ....
1
water their
Wtrtrn. . .
1
water their own
Wtrtr .. ..
1
wither their 2 weather their-re
H Wtrtr . .
1
whither their-re-they are 2 whether their-
re they are
Wtrtrn . . .
1
wither their own 2 weather their own
H Wtrtrn .
1
whither their own 2 whether their own
Wt
2
weigh it, we had-would
Wnt
a
we had-would not
nWt ....
i
why it-had would 2 when it-had-would
nWnt . . .
i
why not, why had-would not 2 when not,
when had-would not
Wnt .
3
would not
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
399
Yss.
Yl .
Ytr.
Ytrn .
HYtr .
nYtrn
Yt . . .
nYt . .
Ynt .
Ylnt
2 yes, sir
1 ye will
1 ye their-re 2 yea their-re-they are 3 you
their-re
. 1 ye their own 2 yea their own 3 you
their own
3 hew their-re
3 hew their own
1 ye had-would 3 you had-would
3 hew it
1 ye not, ye had-would not 3 you had-
would not
1 ye will not
SMALL PHRASEOGRAPHS.
524. The following list of small phraseographs
has already been given in sections 427, 430, 436, 437,
447 to 450, 452, 453 and 468, but is presented here for
convenience of reference. It should be thoroughly
memorized.
525.
ss.
St..
str ..
strs . .
Prtoid . . .
Prtsoid. . .
Prtssoid . .
Prntoid .
LIST OF SMALL PHRASEOGRAPHS.
CIRCLES AND LOOPS.
1 is as-his, his is-as-has 2 as is-his-has, has
as-his-us
1 is-his to-too 2 as to, has to-too
1 is to his-us, his too is 2 as to his-us, has
to as
1 is to their 2 as to their
1 is to theirs 2 as to theirs
TICKS AND CURVETS.
1 of our
1 of ours-ourself
1 of ourselves
1 of our own
400
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
Prntsoid. .
Prntssoid .
Pltoid
Pltsoid ..
Btoid
Bltoid. . . .
Tntoid . . .
Tntsoid . .'
Tftoid . . .
Tftsoid ..
Trtoid . . .
Trtsoid . . .
Trtssoid . .
Trntoid . .
Trntsoid . .
Trntssoid .
Trftoid. . .
Tltoid. . . .
Tltsoid . . .
Tlntoid. . .
Dtoid
Dltoid . . .
Dlntoid . .
Dntoid . . .
Dntsoid . .
Fltoid
Vtoid....
Vltoid . . .
Cntoid . . .
Cntsoid . .
Jftoid
TTtx)id . ,
1 of our own self
1 of our own selves
1 of all
1 of all is-his-as-has
1 of the
1 of all the
1 on other
1 on others
1 I have
1 I have as-his
1 on our
1 on ours-ourself
1 on ourselves
1 on our own
1 on our own self
1 on our own selves
1 on our other
1 on all (Kltoid, alternate)
1 on all as-has-is-his (Kltsoid, alternate)
1 on all other
1 on the
1 on all the (Gltoid, alternate) '
1 on all the other
1 on the other
1 on the others
1 all will
1 all the
1 all will the, all the will
1 the other
1 the others, the other is-his-as-has
1 he have-of
1 already the
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANt'AL.
401
LESSOX 49.
JOINED AND CONSTRUCTED PHRASES.
526. The following list of joined and constructed
phrases (see sec. 420, a) consists mostly of forms which
might not readily occur to the learner. It is divided
into two parts; one part beginning at A and the other
at O, at Lesson 50, and should be memorised
thoroughly before proceeding to the next chapter.
527. LIST OF JOINED AND CONSTRUCTED PHRASES.
A
about which there, Bt 3 Ctr
absolutely necessary, Bs-
LtXssR
acknowledge receipt, KJ'-
RsT
act of Congress, KtGrs
" " Parliament, KtPrl 3
acts of Congress, KtsGrs
" ' ; Parliament, KtsPrl 3
again and again. (inGn
all bo, FtoidB
" her, L'E
" " own, L'Rn
night, FtoidXt 1 or'L 1 -
Xt
u over, FtoidVr 1
" " the world, Ftoid-
Vr 1 Lt
" right, L'Rt
" sorts, FtoidsRts 1 , or
L'sRts
" such, FtoidsC
" the world, VtoidLt 1
" ways, L 1 Ws
" who, Ftoid'-nu
all your, FtoidyR 1 or L 1 -
yR
u your own, FtoidyRn 1
or L^Rn
along side of, XgsDf J
although there may be,
FtoidDhtrMp
always was, LWsZ
American citizen, Mr 2 K-
sTn
" city, Mr 2 KsT
" people, Mr 2 KP1
" state, Mr*KsTt
among it, MNgt
" its, MXgts
" their, MXgtr
" " own, MXgtrn
" theirs, MXgtrs
&c. , s 4 or >S'//tsoid
and so forth, SHF or x9/<-
toid SfF
: ' the contrary, C'toid 4 -
TrR or ZhtoidTrR
another word, Xtr//-Rt
any other, X 1 -!!
" " one, X'-u-Wn
402
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
:iny time, XT 1
anything else, X l Xgls
" " than, X 1 -
XglsDhn
are our, RR
" " own, RRn
" we, R-w
" " not, R-w-Nt
" you, R-Y
" " not, R-v-Nt
as far as possible, sF 3 sPs
" c < " you are, sF 3 syR
" it had, Zt 3 D
" " " not, Zt 3 Dnt
" " ought, Zt 3 T
" " " not, Zt 3 Tnt
" " was, Zt 3 Z
" " not, Zt 3 ZXt
" " would, Zt 3 lPt
" " " not, Zt 3 IFnt
" soon as possible, ssXs--
Ps
" " " they, ssNs 2 Dh
" there is nothing, Ztrs 3 -
XTh
" to a-an, st-Ktoid
" " the, s^Ctoid
" we, sw 1 or sw (Alter-
nate. )
" well as the, sLsRtoid
" who, SHU
" you, SF
" " seem, sFsM
at all events, Tlf 3 Xts
" " of which, Tlf 3 C
" " times, Tit 3 Ms
any, THX
at anv rate, T :j Xrt
" " time, T 3 fXT
" first, T 3 Frst
" last, T 3 Lst
" length, Tin 3 or T 3 X<j-
Th
" night, T 3 Xt
" " time, T 3 XtT
" no, T 3 X
" " time, T 3 XT
" one " Tn 3 T
" or about, T 3 RBt
" some time, T 3 sMt
" that " T 3 fM
" the first, T 3 RtoidFrst
" " same time, T 3 sMtM
" " time, T 3 RtoidT
" times, Tt 3 M>
" what, T 3 T 1
" " time, T 3 T J T
" " " Avere you
there, T 3 T'Ttr
attorney at law, TrXTL
Attorney General, TrXJn
autumn session, T 1 MwAj
B
before another, RXtr
" or after, RRFt
" you, R-Y
best of you, B.sv/R
between it and that, Twnt 1 -
Dht
Board of Trade, BrtTrt
but we, B-w or B-ir (Al-
ternate. )
" your, Ei/li
THK PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
by any, B'fN
" " means, B'fNMns
." means of, B'MnsPtoid
"day, B'D
" " time, B'DtM
" night, B*Nt
" " time, B'NtT
" no means, B 1 NMns
" return mail, Brt t ML
" your, B'y/R
C
call attention, Kl'TNshn
" your attention, Kl 1 -
2/RTNshn
came to the conclusion,
KMKlshn
can not account, Kn^Knt
Catholic church, KCC
cause of action, Ks 1 Kshn
causes" " Kss^shn
certain extent, sRteTnt
Chamber of Commerce,
CMprMrs
circumstances of the case.
sTssKs
circumstantial evidence,
sTnVt
civilized world, sVls^Lt
or sVlsV'RLt
C.O. D. (for collect on de-
livery), K-ofD
collect on delivery, KIK-
Dl
come to the conclusion,
KKlslm
comes to the conclusion,
KsKlshn
common law, Mn 5 L
" Pleas, MPls 1 or
" spelling, -MnsP
Constitution of the U. S.,
stTshn 3 Ns
Court of Chancery, Krt 2 -
CsR
" " Common Pleas,
Krt 8 MPls
" " General Sessions,
" " justice, KrtMsTs
" " Quarter Sessions,
Krt 2 Kwtrs.s-/^,s-
" " Sessions, Krt-
ashns
" " Special Sessions,
Cross-examine, Krss'Mn
" examination. Krsshn*
or Krss^INshn
D
danger of, DJrf
day time, DtM
" of the week, DfWK
dear sir, DrsR
defendant's counsel, DsK
depend upon you,DPntP-F
did you know, Dt n .N or
DL'RtoidCtoidX
" " notDtMNtorDt 1 -
RtoidCtoidNt
HM
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
direct examination. I)iWi/<
or DrsMXshn
do their duty, DtrDT
" you know, D'N or D-
RtoidCtoidN
" " mean to say, D-
iMnSorD-y-MnS
" not, DiXt or D-
RtoidCtoidXt
" " remember, D'.Br
or D-r-Br
does not, DsNt
dry woods store, Dr'fGtst
or Dr'GtssT
stores, DrHGt-
sts or Dr'GtssTs
E
each other, C l -u
" others, C^-us-
east and west, St*Wst
eastern cities, Str^Ts
" states, Str^Tts
English language, Ngl 1 Xg
enlarge their, NJtr*
etc , Ts
et cetera, TsTR
eternal life, TrnF
ever since, V'sNs
everlasting life,
or V'-LsLF
evening train, Vn
every other, Vr-u
" " one, Vr-?/-AVn
everything else, VrXgls
" " than,' Vr-
NglsDhn
extra session, Ksl'rs.v////
face of the deep, FsDP
" to face, FsFs
fellow citizens, FIsTns
for a long time, FXgT
" an instant, FsTnt
" ever, FV
" " and ever, FVV
" his sake, FssK
" how long a time, F-
DtoidNgT
" instance, FsTns
" my part, FMPrt
" " own part, FMNPrt
( ' several, FsV
" some time, F*Mt
" the first time, FFrsT
or FFsT
" " most part, FMs-
Prt
" " purpose of, FPPs
" " sake of, FsK
" they are their-rc, Ftr-
Dhr
" " " their own. Ftr-
Dhrn
from first to last, Frst-
tLst 3
from other, Fr-M
" your own knowl-
edge, FryRnXJ
G
gentlemanof the jury. JtJr
! gentlemen" " " JtMr
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
405
gentlemen of the conven-
tion, JntVn
give-n it, G 1 T
' " " their-re, G 1 Ttr
" their attention, Gtr 1 -
TXshn
good deal, Gt 2 DL
grand jury, Grt*Jr
great deal, Grt 3 DL
" extent, GrtsTnt
" number -of, GrtBrf
" while, Grt/m'L
greater and greater, Grt-
Grtr
" or less,GrtLs
" " " degree, Grt-
LsGr
II
tufd had, D 3 D
" it not, D 3 Xt (See
474, b.)
" there been, Dtr 3 Bn
" " not been, Dtr 3
NtBn
half an hour, F 3 PtoidR
hand in hand, Xt 3 Xt
has it a, Zt 3 Ptoid
" " had, Zt 3 l)
" " riot, Zt 3 Xt
" " " been, Zt 3 XtBn
" " that, Zt 3 Dht
" " the, Zt :i Rtoid
" " there, Zt 3 Dhr
" u to be, Zt :3 B
u there not, Ztr 3 Xt
he supposed, RtsoidPst
Hon. gentleman, XrJnt
" gentlemen, X T rJnt 1
" member, XrBr
" senator, XrsXtr
House of Commons,S 3 Mns
" " Congress, S 3 Grs
" " God, S 3 Gt
" " Lords, S 3 Lts
" " Parliament, S 3 -
PrL
" " Representitives,
S 3 RPS
Houses of Congress, Ss 3 Gs
how are you, DtoidR-Y
' ' could you, DtoidKt-r
" long, RtoidXg
" many of them, Dtoid-
MXDh
human life, Mn 3 F
I
I did, Dt
" " not, KtoidDnt 1
" have been, TftoidBn or
Vn
" " not, TftoidXt 1 or
Vnt
if it be not, Ft 1 But
" " is " Fts^t
" possible, F!Ps
' ' they are their-re, Ftr J -
Dhr
" " " thei r own, Ftr 1 -
Dhrn
" you know, F-r-X
ifs and ands, Fs 1 Rtsoid 4
400
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
n
accordance-with,
or N'KrtNs
all cases, Nl J Kss
" other cases,
Kss
" respects,
u-R'sPs
" parts, NIPrts 1
" respects,
any, N'N
" case, N
conclusion, N^Klshn
connection-with-with
the, N'fKshn
consequence-of,
effect, NFKT
eitner, NDhr 1
" case
fact, NFt 1
full, NF1
hand, N*Nt
like manner, Nl J KNr
my opinion, N a MNn
or about, NR^t
order that, NrtDht 1
other, N
M-
cases, N^u-Kss
N-u-Ws
" words, N-u-
our own house,
u store, Nrstr 1
point of fact, NPn^Ft
reading, NrD a Ng
receipt, NrsT
reference-to-to the, Nr-
Fs
regard-to-to the, Nr 1 Gt
in relation-to-to the, NR1-
shn 1
" reply-to-to the, NrPl
" respect-to-to the, NrsP
" response-to-to the, Nrs-
Pns
" return, NrTRn
" settlement, nsTlMnt
" so far as, NSFs
" such, NsC
*' " a manner, NsCXr
" that city, NDht J sT
" " state, NDht^Tt
" the course, N^CtoidKrs
" " first, NFrst
" " u instance, NFrs-
NsTns
" " " part, NFrsPrt
" " " party, NFrsP
" " " place, NFrP or
NFP1
" " habit-of, NBt 2 or
N^toidBt
" " last place, NCtoid
L'Pl
" " meantime, NMnT
11 " meanwhile, NM-
" " midst of life, NCt-
oidMsL^F
" " next place, NNP1
" " one " NWPL
" " providence of God,
NDs 3 Gt
" k ' second, N^Knt
' " " place, NsKt-
Pl
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
407
in the sight of God, X-
sT'Gt
" " street, nsTrt 1
" " third, NThrt 2
" " " place, XThrt 2 -
Pl or NThPls
" " United States, X 1 -
Xss
" " word of God, X-
v/'Rt'Gt
" " world, NCtoidLt 1
or XLt 1
" their own right, Xtrn-
Rt 1
" " place, XtrPls
" words, XtrwRts 1
" this city, XDhssT
" " connection, XDhsf
Kshn
" " court, XDhsKt
" " state, XDhssTt
" your opinion, XyRXn
" " reply, X//RRP1
" writing, Xrt'Xg
inasmuch as, XsCs 3
Indian ocean, XtXShn
into their, XTtr
" " own, XTtrn
is it a, Zt^toid
" " not, Zt'Xt
" u " better, Zt J XtBtr
" " the, Zt^toid
" " their-re, Zt^hr
u a own , Zt J Dhrn
" " to be, Zt 1 !*
" there anybody, Ztr'NBt
" " anyone, Zti^XWn
is there anything, Ztr'X-
Xg
" to a-an, st J -Ktoid
" " the, st^Ctoid
it had not been, Tnt 3 Bn
" is impossible, TsMps
" " many, TsMX
" u most important, Ts-
" my opinion, TsMXn
" said, TssD
" sure, TsShr
" surely, TsShrL
'" well known, TsLXn
ought not, T Tnt 1
seems impossible, TsMs-
Mps
" to me,'TsMsM
was, TZ
" not, TZXt
will be, TIB
" have it, TlfT or
Tlft
" not be, TlntB
would have,Tt V
" " been.Tt Vn
" " had, Tt Vt
" " it, Tt Vt
" not be, TntB
joint stock, Jt a sK
" " co., Jt^KK
" " company, Jt 1 -
sK'PX
just as fast, JssFst
"as, JssFsis
408
THE PHONOGRAPHIC
just as fast as possible,
JssP"ssPs
" " good, JssGt
" " long, JssNG
" " much, JssC
" u soon, JsssN
" " well, JssL
" been, JsBn
" now, JsNCtoid
" received, JsRsVt
justice of the peace, JsPs
justices " " " JssPs
K
kingdom of Christ, K 1 -
Krst
kingdom o^ heaven, KVn 1
" " the world,
KLt 1
know about, NBt
" as well, NsL
" " much, N 2 sC
ladies and gentlemen, LDs-
Jnt
last night, Ls 3 Nt or Lst 3 -
Nt
" will and testament,
Ls 3 LTsMnt
latter part-of, Ltr 3 Prt
legislative session, LJs-sAw
less than, LsN (see sec.
467)
let us have, Lts 2 V
" " "it, Lts'Vt
liber tv of the press, Br 1 -
Prs
life estate, L ] FsTt
long side of, XgsDf l
" suffering, NgsFRXjj
" time, NgT 1
" " ago, NgT^G
" " before, Xg'PR
" " since, NgT J sNa
" while, N
u " ago,
many circumstances, MX-
sTnss
" instances, ]\!XNsTnss
matter of fact, MtrFt
" " importance, Mtr-
Mp
may as well, MsL
* ' it please the Court.Mt-
PlsKrt (See sec.
189.)
" " please your Honor,
MtPlsXr
member of Congress, Br-
Grs
11 of Parliament, Br
PrL
" of society, BrfS
or Brf-fS
" of the bar, BrBr
" " " board, Br-
Brt
" of the church,
BrCrC
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
409
member of the House, BrS
it a a Legislature,
BrLJ
' ' of the Senate, BrsNt
members of Congress, Brs-
Grs
" of the Senate,
BrssNt
Methodist church, MThts-
CC
" Episcopal
church, MThtsPsCC
might not, Mt'Nt
more and more, MrMr
" or less, MrLs
morning train, Mrn J Ngtrn
most important, MsMp
" likely, MsLKl
" luckily, MsLKL
Mr. Chairman, MrCrn
" President, MrPrs
" " and Gentle-
men of the Conven-
tion, MrPrsJntVn
" Speaker, MrsP
much more, C 3 Mr
must not, MsXt
my brethren, MBrn 3
" brother, MBrtr
' ' dear brethren, MtrBrn 3
" " brother, MtrBrtr
" " friend, MtrFrnt
" " sir, MtrsR
" other, M 1 -^
" " friend, M-u-Frnt 1
" own, M J N
" " opinion, M J NNn
my text, M^Kst
N
night time, NtT 1
no doubt, NfDt or NDt
" fact, N 1 Ft
11 other, N-u
" " one, N 8 -u-Wn
" time, N 2 T
north and south, NrsTh 1
northeastern cities, NrStr ] -
sTs
' ' states, Nr-
Str 'sTts
northern cities, NrtrsTs 1
" states, NrtrsTts 1
northwestern cities, Nr-
WsRsTs
' ' states, Nr-
WsRsTts
not at that time, NtT 3 fM
" only, Nt J M
nothing else, NThNgls
" " than NTh-
NglsDhn
" less, NThLs
" " than, NTh-
LsN
notwithstanding it, NfTT
" u had-
would, NfTt
notwithstanding the,
NfTRtoid
notwithstanding the fact,
NfTRtoidFt
notwithstanding their,
NfTtr
410
THE PHOXO ;i:APllIC .MANUAL
LESSON 50.
O
objected to, BT
objection sustained, BssTnt
of course it is, PtoidKrsTs
" great advantage, Ptoid
GrtJ
" her, PtoidR
" your, Ptoid^R
offered in evidence, Frt^N-
Vt
on a-an, Ttoid'Ktoid
" account, Ttoid'Knt
" board, TtokPBrt
" his own, TtsoidN 1
" " " account, Tts-
oidN 1 Knt
" it, KtoidT
" more than one occasion,
TtoidMrnWnKshn
" my part, Ttoid^Prt
" one hand, TtoidWnXt
" " occasion, TtoidWn-
Kshn
" or about, TtoidiRBt
" " before, Ttoid'RR
" the contrary, DtoidTrR
" " first, DtoidFrst
" " " instant, Dtoid-
FrsNsTnt
" "one hand,Dtoid\Vnt
or DtoidWnNt
" u other hand, Dntoid 1 -
Nt
" " part-of, DtoidPrt
" " i>resent, DtoidPrsNt
on their own, TtoidDhrn
" their part, TtoidDhrPrt
" this action, TtoidDhs 3 -
Kshn
" " motion, TtoidDhs-
Mshn
" " occasion, Ttoid-
DhsKshn
" " part, TtoidDhsPrt
or TtoidDhPrt
" " subject, Ttoid-
DhssB
" those, TtoidZ 3
" what, KtoidT 1
u whom, Ktoid 1 Hu
" your part, KtoidyRPrt
once again, WsGn
" have, WnsV. (See
whencever. )
" in a while, WsXii'/-L
" more, AYsMr
u or twice, WnsTs
one of the best, WnBst
: " " " most, WnMst
one's sell, W ns:s
9
other cases, u-Kss
" causes, u-Kss 1
" day, u-D
" hand, u-Xt 3
" than u-l)hn
" times, u-Ts 1
" ways, u-\Vs
" words, u-?
oiiffht it not,
" not it-to, Tn^T
" " to be, Tnt 1 B
ought to, T'T
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
411
ought to be, T a B
" " " donejT'BDn
" "have been, Tf'Bn
" " " had, Tf'D
n itjTf'Dt
" we, T'-w or T'-TF
(Alternate.)
our own time, Rn 3 T
" text, Rt 3 Kst
out of doors, Tf 3 DRs
" "it, Df 3 TorTft s
" " the way, Tf 3 W
over and over, "WVr
" " " again, Vr 1 -
VrGn
" the world, Vi^Lt
part of their, Prt 2 Vtr
party measure, P 3 Zhr
" of the first part, P 3 -
FrsPrt
" u " second part,
P 3 sKtPrt
peculiar circumstances,
P 3 KsTnss
peculiar circumstances of
the case, P 3 KsTssKs
perhaps your Honor, Pr-
PsNr
personal estate, PrsNlsTt
petit jury, PtJr
phonetic spelling, FNtKsP
place of business, PlsBss
or PlsBsNs
plaintiff's counsel, PltsK
point of view,
Postmaster General, PsMs-
Jn
postage stamp, PsJsMp
postal card, PsLKrt
Presbyterian church, PrsfC
present circumstances, Prs-
NtsTnss
" state, PrsNtsTt
President of the U. S. ,
PrsNss or PrsDntXss
President's message, Prs M
or PrsMsJ
prima facie case,PrFAS7^Ks
Prime Minister, PrMXstr
Protestant church, PrtsCC
" faith, PrtsFTh
u religion, PrtsJn
Q
Quarter Sessions Court,
Kwtrs-s'A/w 1 Kt
quite certain, Kwt^sRt
" sure they are, Kwt 1 -
Shrtr
quo warranto, Kw?/?Rnt
R
rather be, Rtr 3 B
" give, Rtr 3 G
" have, Rtr 3 V
real estate, R^sTt
registered letter, RJsLtr
recross-examination.RKrs-
shn or RKrsMNshn
redirect examination, RI)r-
sftkn or RDrsMNshn
Reformed church, RFCC
412
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
render themselves, RXtr-
Dhss
Rev. Dr., RVDr
" Mr., RVMr
revised statutes, RVssTts
Roman Catholic church,
RKCC
saw him there, S'Mtr
" you " S'jDhr or
S'-r-Dhr
season of the year, SsXyR
Secretary of Agriculture,
sKrtGr
" of State, sKrt-
sTt
" of the Interior,
sKrtNtr
" of the Navy,
sKrtX
" of the Treasr
ury, sKrtTr
" ofWar.sKrt?^R
seems to be, sMsB
" " have, sMsV
Senate of the IT. S. , sXtNss
senator of the U. S. , sXtr-
NBS
see him there, S*Mtr
" you " S'iDhr or
S'-r-Dhr
set forth, sTfRTh
shall be, ShB
" " able, ShBBl
have, ShV
" have been, ShVn
shall not, ShXt (See sec.
474, a.)
" " be, ShXtB
" " " able, ShXtB-
Bl
" " have, ShXtV
" " " been,ShXt-
Vn
she had been, Sh^Bn
" " not, Sh^Xt (See
sec. 474, a. )
" " " been, Sht^t-
Bn
" will " ShPXt (See
sec. 474, a.)
" would be, ShVB
sec. 474, a.)
" " not be,Sht'XtB
should be, Sht 3 B
" " able, Sht 3 BBl
" have, Sht 3 V
" " been, Sht 3 Vn
" not,Sht 3 Xt(Sees;ec.
474, a.)
" " be,Sht 3 XtB
" " u able,Sht 3 -
XtBBl
" " have,Sht 3 XtV
" " " been,Sht 3 -
XtVn
side by side, sD^D
so as possible, SsPs
" " to be, SsB
" far, SF
" "as, SFs
i " " from, SFFr
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL..
413
so long affo, SNg*G
" much, S C 3 or SMC
" well-will, SL
" " known, SLNn
some other session, sM-
usxhn
something like, sMNglK
sometime ago, sMtMG
southeastern cities, sStr 1 -
sTs
" states, sStr 1 -
sTts
southern cities, sDhrsTs
or sDhsTs
" states, sDhrsTts
or sDhsTts
southwestern cities,
sW 3 sRsTs
1 ' states,
sW 3 sRsTts
special court, sPKrt
" jury, sPJr
" rates, sPRts
" term, sPTrM
spring session, sPrNgs.s/m
State House, stTS
" of facts, stTfKts
step by step, stPsTP or
stPsP
Sunday school, sNDsKl
Superior Court, sPRKrt
Supreme Court, sPrKrt
" of the
State, sPrKrtsTt
Supreme Court of the
U. S., sPrKrtXss
Supreme Court of this
state, sPrKrtDhssTt
supreme power, sPrPR
surely their-re, ShrLtr
" " own, ShrLtrn
T
take care of, TKKrf
" action, TK Kshn 3
" occassion, TKKshn
" pleasure, TKZhr
" your own, TK?/Rn
takes action, TKs Kshn 3
" occasion, TKsKshn
telegraphic dispatch, TIG-
sC or TlsC
tell how long, TIRtoidNg
testimony of the defend-
ant, TsMD
u of the plaintiff,
TsMPlnt
that are, Dht 3 R
" have, Tht 3 V
" " been, Dht'Vn
" is all, Dhts 3 Ftoid
" " " the,Dhts 3 Vtoid
" "it, Dhts 3 T
" "to say, Dhts 3 S
" that, Dht 3 Dht
" they, Dht 3 Dh
" " are, Dht 3 Dhr
" was, Dht 3 Z
" would, Dht 3 IFt
" " not, Dht 3 TTnt
the first, RtoidFrst
" " day, RtoidFrsD
" " one, RtoidFrsWn
414
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
the first part, RtoidFrsPit
" " time, RtoidFrsT
" other day, CntoidD
' " night, CntoidNt 1
" " one, CntoidWn
" " part, CntoidP 3 Rt
" " party, CntoidP 3
" " shall, CntoidSh
" " should, Cntoid-
Sht 3
< " thing, CntoidNg 1
" " time, CntoidT 1
". " way, CntoidW
their words, DhrRts
there always mustbe,Dhr-
LWsMsB
( i must always be, Dhr-
MsLWsB
these numbers, Dhs 1 Brs
they are rather, DhrRtr
."' have, DhV
" have been, DhVn
" would have, DhtV
" " " been,
DhtVn
" would have had, Dht
Vt
" would have it, DhtVt
this action, Dhs Kshn 3
" matter, DhsMtr
" meaning, DhsMnNg
" morn, DhsMn
" morning, DhsMn
" number, DhsBr
" occasion, DhsKshn
those are, Z 3 R
" " not, Z 3 Rnt
those circumstances, Z 3 -
sTnss
" numbers, Z'Brs
to a certain extent, TsRt-
sTnt
" all intents, TlnNnts
" be sure, B 3 Shr
" " there, Btr 3
"' " able to, B 3 Blt
" become, B 3 K
" itself, TTs
" night, TNtorNt 1 in jux-
taposition.
" the, TRtoid
" " end, TRtoidNt
" " world, TLt or
TRtoidLt
" you, T-r
true bill, Tr 3 Bl
truly yours, TrLyRs (Tr-
yRs, subscript.)
trust funds, TrsFnts
U
under the circumstances,
NtsTnss
' ' the necessity,
NtNssT
until one, Tl 3 Wn
U. S. of America, NssMK
" Senate, NssNt
u senator, NssNtr
" Territory, NssTRt
upon the face, PnFs
" " subject, PnsB
" " " of,PnsBf
" you, P-F
THK PHONOGRAPHIC MANCAL.
V
variety of causes, VRTfKss
verdict for the defendant,
VrtKtD
' ' for the plaintiff,
VrtKtPlnt
" of the jury, Vrt-
KtJr
very likely, VrLKl
respectfully, VrRsP
(VtR, subscript.)
u respectfully vours,
subscript. )
" seldom, VrsLtM
" truly, VrTrL (VT,
subscript.)
" truly yours, VrTrL-
yRs( VT//Rs, subscript. )
vice-president, VsPs
W
was it, ZT
" " not, ZTnt
" " their-re, ZTtr
" " " own, ZTtrn
" " therefore, ZTDhr-
F
was its, ZTs
" not, ZNt
" said, ZsD
" that, ZDht
" there anybody, ZtrN-
Bt
" " anyone, ZtrX-
Wn
was there anything, Ztr-
NNg
" " anything said,
ZtrNNgsD
" " nobody, Ztr N-
Bt
" " no one, Ztr N 2 -
Wn
ways and means, WsMns
" of the world, AVsLt
we are in receipt, -?t'RnRsT
41 " rather, toRRtr
" " ready, wERD
" as, ws 1
" believe, w-Blf
" do, w-D
" " not, w-Dnt
" have been, w-Vn
" laugh, vL 3 F
u like, w'L J K
" live, trW
" love, ?/'LV
11 may be, ir-Mp
" " not be, ir-Mnt 2 B
" might "
u refer, ?/jRR or
" regard, ?/jR 3 Grt
" regret,
" remain,
" remember, w-Bi-
" were, w-?rR
" " there, w^rRlr
" yet, w-Yt
were there not, ?/;RtrXt
" they there, wRDhtr
" we, ?rR-w
" yet, w
41(1
TIIK PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
were you, //'R-v
" " not, ?/-R-Y-Xt
" " there,
or ?/'RDhr
western cities, WsRsTs
" states, WsRsTts
what are ye, Tr 1 Y
" " you, Tr 1 -!-
" at, T'T
" connection, T^fKshn
" did you, T 1 Dt'-Y
"do " T 1 D-Y
" has-is it, T^T
" of that, Tf J Dht
" sorU>f,
" time,
" " were you there,
T'Ttr
" took place, T^Pls
" were, T l wR
" ye, TY
" yet, T!Yt
" you, T^r
when they are their - re,
nWtrDhr
" " are their own,
nWtrDhrn
whence have, nWnsV (See
once have)
whenever their-re-they are,
nWVtr
" there is any-
thing, nWVtrsXNg
where are they, H?/jRRDh
" "we H?6'RR-w
do you live,
or
where do you reside, Ji/"Ii-
sD or H//-RRsD
" there has been,
HyRtrsBn
" we, H//-R-W
" werethev,
Dh
you, H^-
" will, H?/-RL
" " you, H?/.'RL-r
" you, H//-R-Y
wherever their-re-they are,
" there is any-
thing, H?/-RVtrsXXg
whether or not, H ITtrRnt
" you are, H ITtn/R
or H trtr-r-R
which are likely, CrLKl
" " " to have.
CrLKlf
" would have, CtV
" " '" been,
CtVn
" would have had,
CtVt
" would have it, CtVt
while the, H^-L^toid
" they are their -re,
HwLtr 1 Dhr
" " are their own,
HwLtr^hrn
" we, H^/'L'-w
" you are, H/rL^R
who have, HU-V
" of, HU Ptoid 1 or
HuPtoid
THE PHOXfKlUAJ'llIC MANUAL.
417
will the, LRtoid
" we, L-w
" you, L-r
" " look, L-r-LK
i< " not, L-Y-Nt
winter session,
with all that, DbPDht
" or without,
or icR^Dht
" other, Dh 1 ^
" reference-to-to the,
u'RRns or mRfRns
" regard-to-to the, wR 3 -
Grt
" regret, ?/?RGrt
" relation-to-tothejDh 1 -
Rlshn
" respect- to-to the,
" them, Dh J Dh
" this, Dh'Dhs
u which their-re-they
are, Dh^tr
witness stand, Wt a NssTnt
or T 1 NssTnt
word of God, wRtGt
words of his text,?/'RtssTst
" " my text, ?oRts-
MtKst
" " our text, ?6'Rts-
RtKst
" " the text, mRtsTst
" " your text, wRts-
yRtKst
world without end, LtDht
'.Nt (the center of Nt
under the end of Dht. )
would be,
" have, Trt 3 V
" " had, TR 3 Vt
" " it, irt 3 Vt
" " been, TTWn
'< " to be, Trt 3 -
VB
would their-re, TFt 3 Dhr
" we, Wi 3 -w
" ye, TOY
" yet, TFt 3 Yt
" you, Trt 3 r
writing it, Rt a Ngt
ye shall, Y'Sh
" " not,
yea, more, YMr
years ago, yRs'G
4 ' and years, yRs }
" " " ago,yEs-
2/RsG
" before, 7/RsR
' ' of age, yRs J
" old, yRsLt
yes, sir, Yss, Yss 3 orYssR
yesterday afternoon, StR-
DftNn
" eve, StRDV
" evening, StRDVn
you are, yR or F-R
" '' not,yRnt or Y-Rnt
" as, YS
" believe, Y-Blf
" have, Y-V
" " been, Y-Vn
" " had-it, Y-Vt
418
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANTA1..
you have their, Y-Vtr
" knew, Y-NFtoid
" know, y-N
" must satisfy, Y-MssT
" remember, F-Br
" will, r-L
your favor, yRF
" Honor, yRNr
" last letter, yRLsLtr
u opinion, yRXn
" reference, yRRRns
or yRRfRns
" references, yRRRnss
or j/RRfRnss
" statement.
" very, yRVr
" " esteemed,
VrsMt
your very esteemed favor,
7/RVrsMtfF
yours &c. , yRss or //Rs-
" and so forth, yRsTh
" etc., yRsTs
" et cetera, yRsTsT or
yRsTsTR
" faithfully, yRsFTh
" respectfully, yRsKsl 1
" truly, yRsTrL (//Hs-
T, subscript.)
" verv respectfully,
yRsVrRsP (yRs-
VfR, subscript.)
" very truly, yRsVr-
TrL (yRsVT, sub-
script. )
THE PHONOUKAPHIC MANUAL. 419
CHAPTER XI.
VARIOUS EXPEDIENTS.
LESSON 51.
FIGURES, ETC.
528. Most of the Arabic figures, that is to say the
nine digits and cipher, cannot be written as swiftly as
rapid speech. Many attempts have been made by
shorthand writers to invent briefer forms than the
Arabic ones and still retain the legibility of the latter,
but all such endeavors have been and are useless since
such forms do not exist in nature. The Arabic figures,
therefore, are at once the briefest and most legible
that can be devised. Again other attempts have been
made to utilize the shorthand letters themselves as
figures, but this has been found objectionable from the
fact that they resemble the other writing about them
and are thus difficult to distinguish and so can not be
readily referred to when necessary. Moreover they
are easily mistaken for each other, besides having two
meanings attached to the same form, and as the greatest
exactitude is needed when dealing with figures these
are most important considerations. Although, there-
fore, the shorthand forms are briefer than the Arabic
ones, none of the above objections apply to the latter,
which are accordingly far preferable. Besides the
preceding, still other attempts have been made to utilize
the shorthand names of the digits, that is to employ
the words "one, two, three," etc., everywhere for
420 THE pHoxoiiKAi'inr MANUAL.
figures; but an objection given above applies here also,
namely, that two meanings sometimes attach to the
same form. Thus although we can and do write the
names of the digits when alone, as "one, three, six,"
etc., no confusion results because the name of the
digit and that of the number are the same. But if we
employ the digits together as "one three" (13) or
"three one" (31) for "thirteen" or "thirty-one," con-
flict ensues because the names of the digits and number
are different. The shorthand names of the digits,
therefore, can not safely be employed as figures which
must have but one meaning and this is given them
only by the Arabic forms.
529. The foregoing observations are made in order
that the learner may not waste his time in endeavoring
to invent the impossible. If better figures could be
invented than the Arabic ones they would be used in
place of the latter; which had it been possible would
have been done long since. The conclusion thus is
irresistible that the Arabic figures are the best that can
be obtained. Finally, even if it were possible to invent
briefer forms as above for the nine digits and cipher
it would still be impossible to write with them such
numbers as one million, etc., swiftly enough for report-
ing purposes since six or more ciphers would have to
be used. Thus, in that respect, no practical advantage
would be gained. The learner is, accordingly, most
earnestly advised to pay no attention to so called sub-
stitutes for the Arabic characters to be employed in
shorthand, but to confine his efforts to representing
numbers without them. There are various ways in
which this can be done by employing the shorthand,
the Arabic figures and certain arbitraries; the best
methods of doing which, in order to obtain the greatest
rapidity, will next be considered. Before proceeding,
however, it is proper to remark that wherever the
Arabic figures cannot be written as swifty as rapid
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 421
speech and yet are necessary to be made, the learner
must write them as swiftly as possible and depend on
the speed of the shorthand to keep up with the flow of
words.
530. In order to render the subject clearer so that
the learner will know just what is possible in the way
of writing numbers speedily with the Arabic characters
when the latter are employed exclusively he is informed
that
a. The digits, except 1, 6 and 7, can not not be
written as swiftly as rapid speech with the Arabic
numerals.
b. The cipher can not be so written.
c. Any number of two figures which contains a
cipher, or any number or group of three or four figures
with two ciphers can not be so written.
d. Any number of two or more figures which does
not contain a cipher or any number or group of three
or four figures containing but one cipher can usually
be so written.
531. From the preceding it will be understood that
numbers are most quickly written by never employing
a cipher in a number of two figures or more than one
in any number or group of three or four figures.
532. The above being premised the following
method of representing numbers has been adopted in
this system.
THE NUMBERS ONI., THREE, SIX AND TWELVE OCCURRING
ALONE.
533. As the Arabic numerals "one" and "six" are
liable to conflict with the shorthand characters when
standing alone that is disconnected from other figures
they are then usually represented by the logographs.
Also "three"" and "twelve" aro then usually written
with the logographs for the sake of speed.
422 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
NUMBERS BEFORE THE WORDS HUNDREDS, THOUSANDS,
ETC., AND MONEY.
534. When a number occurs before either the sin-
gular or plural of the words "hundred, thousand,"
etc., "dollars, cents, pounds (money), '-shillings'' or
"pence" it is written with the Arabic characters
except "one, three, six" and "twelve"' as explained in
the last section. In such cases:
535. "Hundreds"' and "thousands" are represented
by the logographs; thus, WnXt, loo; 2 N't. L"><>: L>:>Nt.
2,500; ThrTh, 3,000; 125Th 3 , 125,000; 4-XtTh,
4( Hi, 000; sKs'XtTh, 600,000; TwfNtTh, 1,200,000;
16NtTh, 1,600,000.
536. If the writer following a speaker very closely
writes a denominational logograph and finds that other
figures follow he can, instead of erasing the logograph,
write them after it in the second position. This, how-
ever, will occur but comparatively seldom and when it
does will be more liable to happen after "thousands"
than "hundreds." These logographs are mostly em-
ployed to indicate round numbers, as 400, 4-000, or
those of four figures which contain two ciphers as
4005,4500. (See sees. 530 and 531.) They should,
accordingly, be written as nearly as possible only in
such cases. The learner, therefore, should write 405
or 425; and 405,642 or 425,648 rather than 4Nt5 or
4Nt25; and 405Th 3 642 or 425Th 3 <J48. When a logo-
graph is once written, however, it should not be erased.
537. Again if a numerical logograph should happen
to be written instead of a figure it also should not be
o
erased. For example, if 105 or 125 and 105,042 or
125,648 should be made in any one of the following
ways it should be allowed to remain; thus, WnNtr> o
WnNt25; and WnXt5Th 3 642 or WnXt25Th 3 (U<v or
Wn<>5 or Wn25; and Wn05Th 3 642 or Wn25Th V,4 s;
or \Vn05, 642 or Wn25,648; or Wn05,sKs 1 42. In othei
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 4U3
words a numerical logograph should generally be
allowed to stand, when once written, whether employed
as a word or symbol. Nevertheless the learner should
usually endeavor to write the logographs only when
their numbers occur alone and the Arabic numerals
in connection with each other as in the preceding
and following examples.
538. "Millions" are also expressed by the logo-
graph, while higher denominations are usually written
in full; thus, Wn Ml 1 ; 2M1 1 ; ThrNtMl; 4BLn; 5Tr-
Ln: sKs'KwtRln, etc. ; Wn MP424Th 3 , 1,424,000;
i'BLn ThrNtMl SNtTh sKs'Nt, 2,300,500,600: 2B-
Ln ThrM4 SOTh 3 sKs 1 , 2,003,056,006; 907M1'524
Th 3 205, 907,524,205.
a. The last number, it will be perceived, is more
quickly written without than with the denominational
logographs. Accordingly, when possible, and no con-
fusion would result, the logographs should be omitted.
(See sec. 530, d and also sec. 536.)
539. "Dollars" are represented by a dot by the
side of the center of the number, logograph or word
to which it belongs, "cents" by a horizontal straight
stroke or dash about as long as a half length K in a
like position and "mills" by M in the first position.
After "six, hundreds" and "millions" the dot or dash
is placed under the center of the logograph. After
"one, three, twelve, thousands, billions," etc. .it is
written alongside of the logograph or word; this be-
cause the first three are horizontal forms and the oth-
ers are not; thus, 2-, $2.00; Wn-, $1.00;. Thr-, $3.00;
sKs 1 , $6.00; Twf-, $12.00; Wn-,. 01; sKsVOG; 5-,
.05; 25-,. 25; Thr M 1 , 3 mills; 3-5-, $3.05; 4-25-,
$4.25; 7- 8- 2M l ,7d.8c. 2m. or $7.08^; sKs 1 5- sKs 1 -
M, <!d. 5c. 6m. or $6.05f; WnNt, $100.00; WnTh-,
$1,000.00; WnNtTh-, $100,000*. 00; ThrNtTh sKs 1 ,
$.'300,006.00; TwfNtTh-, $1,200,000.00; 4MP, '*(,
000,000. 00; oBLn-, $5, 000,000, 000. 00; sKsBLn3-75-,
424 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
$6,000,000,003.75; WnNt, 100 cents; 2Th 3 -, 2000
cents; ThrMl, 3,000,000 cents; 8BLn-, 8,000,000,000
cents; TtoidWn- Rt, a one cent rate; KtoidThr- Mtr,
a three dollar matter; Ktoid 5- GltPs, a five dollar
gold piece.
a. The observations in section 537 in regard to
logographs, apply also to paragraph 539. Thus, for
example, if $3.05 should happen to be written Thr-5-,
the logograph should not be erased.
540. "Pound" or "pounds" (money) are written
in full with Pnt or Pnts in the third position. "Shill-
ings" are indicated by Sh in the first positon, and
"pence" by P in the second. Any of the characters
may be joined after a logograph or word if convenient;
thus, 2Pnts 3 , 2; WnPnt, 1; ThrPnts, 3; 4Sh\ 4
shillings; ThrSh, 3 shillings, sKsSh, 6 shillings; Tvvf-
Sh, 12 shillings; 2P, 2 pence; WnP, 1 penny; TwfP,
12 pence; sKsPnts WnSh sKsP, 6. Is. 6d.;TwfPnta
4Sh! ThrP,12 4s. 3d. ; 7Pnts 3 2Sh l 4P, 7 2s. 4d. ;
2M1 1 Pnts 3 , 2, 000, 000 ; WnBLnPnts, 1,000, 000, 000.
541. When writing numbers as above the comma
may be employed as a separatrix point as nsnal; thus,
48,548-, $48,548.00; 64,689-75- $64,689.75. Gen-
erally, however, it is speedier to indicate the separation
by a small space equal to that taken up when the com-
ma is employed; thus, 48 548; 907 524 205; 64 689-
75-, $64,689.75.
a. One advantage of the above method of repre-
senting money is that the written language is the same
as the spoken. Another is that when lower denomi-
nations follow higher ones the dot or denominational
logographs may be considered as dividing marks after
the ordinary manner. Still another advantage is that
the denominations can be written separately with as
much distinctness as when expressed together.
b. If any time the digits 1 and 6 should be sep-
rated from other figures, they may be extra distin-
THE PHOXOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 425
gtiished if desired by drawing through the stem of
each a horizontal straight stroke about as long as a
double length K.
LESSON 52
NUMBERS BEFORE OTHER WORDS THAN HUNDREDS,
THOUSANDS, ETC., AND MONEY.
542. When a number occurs before any other
words than those in section 534, it is still written as
above explained except that "one, three, six" and
'twelve" are in a few instances, which will appear
hereafter, made with the Arabic characters; thus,
4PrsXs, four persons; 5Pnts 3 , five (or 5) pounds
(weight); TPXs, 7 pennies; WnsNTR, one century;
ThrMn 1 three men; sKs^IThs, six months; TwfPlss,
twelve places.
THE NUMBERS TEN, TWENTY, THIRTY, ETC.
543. When a number over "nine" and under "one
hundred," of one cipher (see sec. 530, c) as 10, 20, 30,
40, etc., occurs alone it is written with the Arabic
digit with a straight stroke added to the figure in the
direction of R or Ch so that the former will end twice
the length of the figure above the line of writing and the
latter half this distance below it; the characters in con-
sequence all being of the same length; thus,
a. It will be observed that the added strokes above
take the place of the ordinary ciphers. They are,
accordingly, alternative forms and are termed Alter-
native or Straight Ciphers, the others being Round or
Elliptical ones.
b. In stenotypy the alternative figures are the same
as above except that the straight cipher is represented
426 THE PHONOGRAPHIC 1 MANUAL.
by the light grave accent; thus, T, 2\ 3\ 4\ 5\ 6\ 7\
8 V , 9\
544. Besides being written alone the above char-
acters are employed in connection with other figures,
that is in numbers over one hundred, or in any connec-
tion; thus, H\ 110; 12\ 120; 24\ 240; 12T (or 1-J
Ntl x ), 1210; 153 X (or 15Nt3 v ), 1530; 4876 X (or 48TV
76'), 48,760; T01 (or Tl or'rNtl), 1001; T25 (or I 1
Kt25), 1025; T^ (or l x Nt5 x ), 1050; 3-T-, $3.10; 5.7 V -,
$5.70; 8'-, .80; 9\ $90.00; 4' Pnts 3 ,40:3 x //Rs 1 ,
30 years.
a. When a numerical denomination occurs alone
after an alternative figure as above, it may, if desired,
be joined to an upward cipher; thus, IVNt, 1000: i r -
Th, 20,000; 3^-Ml, 30,000,000; 5VBLn, 50,000,000,
000.
545. If preferred the numbers 10, 20, 30 and 60,
when alone or before other words than those in section
534, may, the same as 1, 3, 6 and 12 in section 542 be
written in shorthand instead of with the alternative
figures given in section 543; thus, Tn, TwT, ThrT,
sKsT.
CARDINAL AND ORDINAL NUMBERS.
546. The plural of cardinal numbers is written by
adding the S circle to the latter part of the digit or
to the logograph or to the last figure of the number
or to the straight cipher.
a. In the case of the figure ''six" the plural is
added by the small imperfect circle described in sec-
tion 111; thus, Yshns-s.
1. If preferred, the plural of cardinal numbers may
be written with the stem Z placed alongside the figure
in the first position, instead of as in paragraph r4<>,
except in the case of the alternatives with straight
ciphers whose plurals are always written with the S
circle.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 427
547. The S circle may also be added to the logo-
oraphs or words denoting the denominations; thus,
WnNts, ThrThs 3 , 4M1S 1 , 5BLns.
548. The ordinal numbers "first, second, third,
sixth" and "twelfth" are usually written in shorthand
except when they occur after the name of a month
and before the number of a year at the heading of let-
ters (or in Bible references, etc., to be explained pres-
ently) in which cases they are made with the Arabic
figures in the same manner as are the cardinal num-
bers, namely, without the letters St, D or Th attached;
thus, RtoidFrst sKnt ' ' Thrt 1 D ' ' CtoidsKs 1 ' '
Twf ' AV'K, the first, second or third day or the sixth
or twelfth week; Jtoid^K TtoidMrC Frst ' ' Prl 1
sKs 1 , he will come on March 1st or April 6th; ShKG
JN 1 00; Chicago, January 1st, 1900; sTLs FB 6 00;
St. Louis, February 6th 1900.
549. All the ordinal numbers are everywhere writ-
ten with Arabic figures in the same manner as are the
cardinal ones; thus, + 1 4 MTh FtCtoid 5 yR 1 ,the
fourth month after the fifth year; -j- 1 29 Xst 1 , the
29th instant; + 1 l v W'K, the 10th week.
550. The terminals St, D and Th may be added to
the Arabic figures when standing for ordinal numbers,
if desired, in which case they are written alongside
the figures in the first position, St with the S stem
halved after 1, D with the stem D after 2 and 3, and
Th with the stem Th after all other figures; thus,
ISt 1 , 2D 1 , 3D 1 , 4Th% 21st 1 , 22D>, 23D 1 , 25Th ]
a. After straight ciphers the Th may be joined to
the upward forms and disjoined near the end in the
case of the others or they may be joined, if preferred.
551. The plural of ordinal numbers when written
with Arabic figures is expressed by. attach ing the S
circle to the terminals St, D and Th as given in the
preceding section.
552. Usually, however, the ordinal plurals "firsts,
428 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
seconds, thirds, sixths'' and "twelfths" are written
with the S circle attached to the logographs for the
singular as given in section 548; thus, Frsts, sKnts,
Thrts, sKsThs, TwfThs.
553. If there would be danger (which will be sel-
dom) of an ordinal number being mistaken for a car-
dinal one, the former should have the termination St, D
or Th (or the plurals) added.
PECIMAI, FRACTIONS AND MIXED NUMBERS.
554. When decimals are written the denominations
are placed under the last figure of the numbers to
which they belong; "tenths" being indicated by the
alternative figure given in section 543 and all other
denominations by the logographs or outlines for the
ordinary ones, the under-placing being represented in
stenotypy by an inverted double semicolon. When
"ten-hundredths, ten-thousandths, ten-millionths, ten-
billionths," etc., occur the alternative symbol for
"ten" is usually prefixed to the other denominations;
thus, liiT, one tenth (.1); 2<r, two tenths (.2); Hi
Nt, one hundredth (.01;; 3i'Nts, three hundredths
(.03); 14<<Nts (Nts under the 4), fourteen hundredths
(.14); IS'.tNts, fifteen hundredths dollars ($0.15 or
$0 T Vo); 1'iTh, one thousandth (.001); 4^Ths, four
thousandths (.004); 5ttl'-Nts, five ten-hundredths
(.005); 12'.iThs (Ths under the 2), twelve thousandths
(.012); 5ia x -Ths, five ten-thousandths (,0005); 6iiNt
Ths, six hundred thousandths (.00006; Tt'Mls, seven
millionths (,000007); H'lVMl, one ten millionth (.00
00001; SttBLns, eight billionths (.000000008); 2iiT-
BLns, two ten-bill ionths (.0000000002).
555. When a mixed number is expressed in deci-
mals the decimal is written after and a little above the
integer; thus, l'.2'.il\ one and two tenths (1.2); 2il'.i
1\ two and one tenth (2.1); l''.6iil\ ten and six tenths
(10.6); 21'.8<<NtThs, twenty-one and eight hundred
THK PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 429
thousandths (21.00008); liliiMl 1 , one and one mil-
lionth (1.000001); 32t5t'.BLns, thirty-two and five
billionths (32.000000005); 3il416iil v -Ths, three and
fourteen hundred and sixteen ten-thousandths (3.1416);
3: 14 159 265PlsiiNtMls (Nt under the five), three and
fourteen million, one hundred and fifty-nine thou-
sand, two hundred and sixty-five plus hundred rail-
lionths (3. 14159265 -f); 5<WnBLn ThrMl 56Th 3 6i'.l v -
BLns, five and one billion, three million, fifty-six
thousand and six ten-billionths (5.1003056006).
LESSON 53.
COMMON FRACTIONS AND MIXED NUMBERS.
556. AVhen common fractions occur alone they are
written in the ordinary way, except that the dividing
line is omitted; thus, J; 2 V, \\.
557. The same course is followed with mixed
numbers except those containing "twelfths" and
"eighths;" thus, 1J; 3 a 5 9 6{*.
558. "When mixed numbers occur in which the
fractions of the unit consist of "twelfths" or "eighths"
the integer is written as usual but the fractions are
indicated by a horizontal straight stroke with one or
two hooks attached and placed above or below the
last figure of the integer the stroke being about as
long as a single or half length K, according as the in-
teger consists of one or more figures; thus,
11 15 17 111 11 15 11 12
J-IS} J-Tfj J-TTj Ml J-Tj L 7, *-~5
If "T t 3 *T T^l^T 3
11, 11, 11, II If, If, II
cL _L cL A, J- ^ -Lj
U T V, 111!, 211, 112*
U llT 21 112
c- -,
430 THE I IIDNOIIKAIMIIC MANL'AL.
:i. It will be observed that the ternary characters
are placed above the integers, and the binary ones
below them. Also that fractions of the same denomi-
nation begin or end with hooks on the same side of
the stem while those in each series whose numerators
are "five"' and ; 'seven" are alike or end alike. Fin-
ally that the quickest spoken fractions, namely, those
with "one" for the numerator have the speediest forms,
possessing but one hook two of the latter also rep-
resenting "five-twelfths" and "five-eighths."
559. If in mixed numbers, "one twenty-fourth"
or "one sixteenth" (the half of the "twelfth" or
"eighth") is mentioned the former is represented by
two and the latter by one dot placed under the fig-
ure or arbitrary; thus, 1, 1J 2 and / 4 ; 2, 2,\ and . 2 \ ;
J. , 1| and T*,; ^, 4| and T V
560. If the "twenty-fourth" or "sixteenth" is
mentioned in connection with integers only, or with
other fractions Avithout integers the dots are still
written beneath the figures the same as just explained;
thus, 1, 1^; 2, 2 ? y, 15, Ufa ,',, ^ and fa 1, l f ' 6 ;
3, 3^; 18. 18 T y, i, |and T y
561. The plural of fractions is written in the same
manner as that of whole numbers. (See see's. 546 and
551.)
FEET AND INCHES, ARC, TEMPERATURE, TIME, ETC.
562. "Feet" and "inches" are distinguished by
writing the denominations in shorthand, the fractions
and mixed numbers being expressed as in sections
556 to 561 preceding, thus, WnFt WnNC, 1 ft. 1 in. ;
2Ft' 4NCS 1 , 2 ft. 4 in.; ThrFt J^NCs 1 , 3 ft.5| in.;
^Ft 1 6 NCs 1 , 4. ft. 6| and -fr in.; 8 NCs 1 , 8 T V in. ;
INC 1 | and T V in.-
563. "Degrees, minutes" and "seconds of arc" are
written with the ordinary signs after and near the top
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 431
of the number as usual; thus, 2 3' 4", two degrees,
three minutes and four seconds.
564. "Degrees of temperature" are indicated by
the same sign as degrees of arc, the words "Fahren-
heit, Centigrade, Reaumur," etc., if used, being ex-
pressed by logographs or initials just after the com-
bination; thus, 7, 7 degrees; 8F 3 , 8 degrees Fahren-
heit; 14sNt, 14 degrees Centigrade; 21R, 21 degrees
Reaumur.
565. "Hours, minutes" and "seconds" are written,
the first by two dots one above the other after the
number to which they belong and the second and third
by the same signs and in the same manner as those for
minutes and seconds of arc; thus, 3: 14' 28", 3 hr. 14
min. 28 sec.
5(>(). Such expressions as "one-fifteen, two-twen-
ty," etc., designating money, time, extent or other
measure may be indicated by separating the words and
figures, or figures, denoting the units and parts by a
horizontal straight stroke about as long as a double
length K, the words being written in their proper
position and the stroke and figures on the line; thus,
Wn 15, one-fifteen; sKs 1 3\ six-thirty; 2
25, two-twenty-five.
LESSON 54.
BIBLE REFERENCES.
567. In reporting sermons, etc., Bible references,
if ordinal numbers are used, are indicated by placing
the figure for the book above the line of writing, that
for the chapter on it, and that for the verse through it
(or, if unruled paper is used, where the line would be
if drawn) or in the first, second and third positions,
respectively. By this means the book, chapter and
verse may be written in any order with the figures
only and without danger of ambiguity. If the num-
432 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
ber of the book occurs before its name the word
"book," if uttered, is written, otherwise not; thus,
KrThns 1 2 ...5..., Corinthians I, ii. , 5, Corinthians,
first book, second chapter, fifth verse; 1 B 3 K KrThns
2 ...5..., first book of Corinthians, second chapter,
fifth verse; ...5... 2 1 B 3 K KrThns, fifth verse of the
second chapter of the first book of Corinthians; 1 Kr-
Thns 2 ...5..., I Corinthians, ii., 5, first Corinthians,
second chapter, fifth verse; ...5... 2 1 KrThns, fifth
verse of the second chapter of first Corinthians; JMs
4 ...14..., James iv, 14, James, fourth chapter, four-
teenth verse; M^Kst sFrRtoid, ...14... 4 JMs, my
text is from the fourteenth verse of the fourth
chapter of James.
568. If cardinal numbers are used they are placed
the same as the ordinal ones, but the words "book,
chapter" and "verse" must be written in shorthand;
thus, KrThns B 3 K 1 C 3 P 2 Vrs...5..., Corinthians,
book one, chapter two, verse five; Vrs..-5... C 3 P 2
B 3 K 1 KrThns, verse five, chapter two, book one of
Corinthians. If preferred, however, the numbers
may all be written on the line.
569 Should ordinal and cardinal numbers be used
together both are written as usual and will always be
easily distinguishable from each other from the fact
that the words "book, chapter" and "verse" are uttered
after the former and before the latter; thus, KrThns 1
C 3 P 2 Vrs..-5..., Corinthians, first book, chapter two,
verse five; KrThns B 3 K 1 2 ...5..., Corinthians, book
one, second chapter, fifth verse; ...5... 2 B 3 K 1 Kr-
Thns, fifth verse, second chapter, book one of Cor-
inthians.
570. If in any instance the word "epistle" is
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 433
uttered instead of the word "book" it is always writ-
ten. Also if the word "and'' occurs it is expressed
with the logograph; thus, 1 B 3 K KrThns 2 xSVitoid
...5..., first book of Corinthians, second chapter and
fifth verse.
NUMERICAL, AND OTHER DENOMINATIONS.
571. Whenever a numerical, money or other de-
nomination occurs without a number preceding it, it is
written in shorthand, except when the word "cents" or
"dollars," singular or plural, follows the singular or
plural of the words "hundreds, thousands," etc., when
it is expressed with the dash or dot, as usual; thus,
Nts Pl, hundreds of people ;Ktoid sNt ' ' 2 % a cent
or two; KtoidL) 1 , a dollar; MnTs ' ' sKnts 1 , minutes
or seconds; KtoidNt, a hundred cents; KtoidTh 3 -,
a thousand cents; KtoidNt, a hundred dollars; Ktoid-
Th 3 , a thousand dollars; KtoidNt Kwn, a hundred
cent question; KtoidTh 3 - hRs 1 , a thousand dollar
horse.
434 THE IMloXo.iUAPrilC MANUAL.
CHAPTER XII.
SIGNIFICANT MARKS, ETC. REPORTING TRIALS,
HEARINGS, ETC.
LESSON 55.
SIGNIFICANT MARKS, ETC.
572. In reporting a speech, etc., if a word is
omitted from not having been heard, a character like
RtoidsCC, the down stroke being somewhat longer
than a double length Ch, is written, instead of the
word, to denote its omission. If several words are
thus omitted the same mark, which is called the Omis-
sion Mark, is made in the middle of a space left pro-
portionate to the number of words omitted. Should
the omission extend to the end of the sentence, a period
is also written just before the beginning of the next
sentence.
573. When there is a doubt whether a word or
phrase has been distinctly heard or accurately under-
stood a waved line should be drawn under it.
574. If a quotation is made which is known to the
reporter, or if not, is easily obtained, he may omit all
except the commencing and concluding words, indi-
cating the omission by a phonographic dash about
twice as long as usual. (See sec. 138.)
575. Wfren two or more words are repeated they
may, after being written once, or perhaps oftener, be
indicated by a horizontal straight stroke a little longer
than a double length K, as in the sentence, "They
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 435
called last week, - - yesterday to-day."
(See also sec. 519.)
576. Indications of approval or disapproval, etc.,
coming from the audience or from any other source,
or running explanations or comments, etc. , made by
the reporter should be described or given in shorthand
with the proper words enclosed in parentheses (see
sec. 139), for which there will usually be ample time
while the speaker is interrupted; thus, Crs 1 , cheers;
Pis 1 , applause; L 3 Ftr, laughter; JtoidSs 1 , hisses;
N, no; NN, no, no; sNsskn PRR, sensation, uproar;
Crs 1 Pis, cheers, applause; GTtoidGTtoid, go on, go
on; Crs 1 Pis JtoidSs ^Ftr, cheers, applause, hisses,
laughter; ABB KsTMnt -Fshn 3 , hubbub, excitement,
confusion ; nWsLNg JtoidSs 1 MKCrs 1 Grns 4 , whist-
ling, hisses, mock-cheers and groans; Vs 1 , a voice; Cr,
chair; Mn Nr 1 PltF, man near platform.
577. If but one adjective is employed it is usually
written before the noun; thus, Grt Pis, great applause;
TrMnDs Cr x Ng, tremendous cheering.
578. If two or more adjectives are used the first is
generally written before and the others after the noun
in the shorthand notes; thus, Lt 3 Pls TND, loud ap-
plause, continued; Lt 3 L 3 Ftr hLRs Ng 1 , "loud
laughter, hilarious, long;" the reason for which is
that the reporter can not know the second or third
characteristics until the applause, etc. , has lasted for
some time. In transcribing, however, the adjectives
are usually placed before the noun; thus, (loud and
continued applause,) (loud, long and hilarious laugh-
ter.) Again, in transcribing, a description may be
extended or made more definite than in the notes.
Thus the words "man near platform" in section 576
above, may be written: (At this moment a very tall
man near the platform waved his hat and shouted,
"Hurrah for the navy!")
579. The location of various matters in the report
43<) THE PHONOGRAPHIC' MANUAL.
of a speech, etc., may be indicated by the following-
reference marks or signs:
a A simple vertical line drawn in the margin at
the left of the space written upon, calls attention for
some reason not necessary to be specified, or which
the writer has no time to specify, to the part opposite.
(See also Prologue, page 24.)
b. The logograph for "important" written before
this line near the middle indicates an important sen-
tence or paragraph.
c. The several headings may be designated by the
capital script letters A, B, C 1 , etc. , placed before the
. line.
d. The different sections, paragraphs, etc., may
be distinguished by figures and small script letters or
by the mark for the break (see sees. 145 to 147) in
the same position.
e. In addition to the above other marks may be
made before the line if they are found necessary.
f. Two or .more different marks may be written
before the line. Thus, if it has before it the figure 2
and under the latter the logograph for "important, "
the combination reads "Section (or remark) 2, impor-
tant." If quotation marks (see sec. 140) are also
struck underneath the other two signs the word "quo-
tation" is included in the reading; and so on for any
other marks or signs that may be added.
g. If for any reason after a complete report is
taken it is found that only a condensed one will be
needed, the various parts to be condensed may be
indicated by some suitable mark or sign placed before
the line, and those to be excerpted by a different one
similarly placed. If the part to be marked is already
distinguished by other marks the sign for conden-
sation or excerption may be placed before them its
line being omitted.
1. It is not necessary that the line should always
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 437
be drawn except in the first instance explained above.
(See par. a). In all other instances it may be omitted
iind the marks or signs written alone if the part to
which reference is made is not too long.
TRANSCRIPTION OF A SPEECH, ETC.
580. In transcribing a speech or remarks delivered
extemporaneously, if any ordinary grammatical errors
have been made they should be corrected. The cor-
rections, however, should be confined only to such
errors and not extend beyond them. Likewise, if
there are any patent mis-statements which the speaker
clearly did not intend to make, these also should be
corrected. In all other respects the wording should
remain unchanged. (See also sec. 588.)
LESSON 56.
REPORTING TRIALS, HEARINGS, ETC.
581. Different works have been published explain-
ing all the details of reporting trials, hearings, etc;
one or more of which the learner should procure if he
desires to investigate this subject thoroughly. Only
the writing of the examination and testimony will be
considered here.
OM^. There are several methods of writing the
examination and testimony employed by reporters.
The method which the author regards as usually the
best is to separate the questions and answers into para-
graphs by commencing the former at the left of the
space written upon and the latter on the next line
below to the right of the commencing point of the
questions, at the regular distance; namely, twice as
long as the space period (see sec. 136), the interrogation
point and period at the end both being omitted; thus,
Where do you live
In Chicago
438 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
Do you remember what persons were present at the
time this agreement was written and if anything was
said in regard to it
There were several persons present but
I do not recollect how many or what
was said
583. Both questions and answers, when long
enough, extend to the. right side of the space written
upon. If either consists of two or more lines each
succeeding line begins immediately under the commenc-
ing point of its predecessor. If two or more sentences
are contained in a questioner answer, they are separated
by periods the space being used. (See sec. 136.)
In which case, if a sentence should happen to end at or
near the right side of the space written upon, the
next sentence, if it is part of a question, begins as
usual on the line below the distance of a period to the
right of a point under the commencing one of the first
sentence. If the sentence is part of an answer it begins
at the same distance to the right of a point under the
commencing one of the first sentence of the latter.
If the writer prefers, however, and there is sufficient
time, he may write the periods when they occur in the
middle of a question or answer instead of leaving the
spaces. The remaining marks of punctuation are usu-
ally omitted intermedially from questions and answers.
The parentheses, however, are employed to enclose any
explanatory remarks interjected or added by the re-
porter.
584. By writing the examination and testimony as
in section 582, the answers appear in separate columns
and can thus always be easily referred to. This mode
should not be employed on the full width of a page of
the size of foolscap, etc., but only on half of it, other-
wise it will take up too much paper when the questions
and answers are short. Pages of the size of foolscap,
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 430
etc., should, therefore, be ruled with three vertical
lines from top to bottom, one line at the middle, an-
other half an inch to the right of it, and another the
same distance to the right of the left edge. If desired,
however, books may be used ruled in the same manner.
Both the paper and books may be obtained at or through
most bookstores or stationers.
585. When an ordinary sized note book is employed
this method can not be written with two columns
owing to the narrowness of the book. Therefore only
one column is used, the writing extending clear across
the page, the vertical line at the left being half an inch
from the edge as usual.
586. The half inch margin is ruled off as above,
both when single and double columns are used, so that
any reference marks (see sec. 579) may be placed in
it either during the writing of the notes or afterwards.
The name of the person opening the direct examination
is also written in it either wholly or in part as there
may be room. In it are also indicated the beginning
of the cross examination, etc., or of any remarks made
by the presiding officer. Finally, the marginal line is
used as a starting place for the questions which are
commenced close to the right of it. Some writers,
however, do not use the marginal line in narrow note
books but simply commence the questions at or about
where the line would be if drawn. It is here recom-
mended, however, that the marginal line be used since
the reference marks, etc., are much more easily dis-
tinguished if separated by it from the body of the notes
than if the line is omitted.
5*7. Sometimes when the questions and answers
are very short the latter may, in order to save paper,
bo written on the same line with the former, but sep-
arated by about a double length space period. This
is termed "running in tlio answers." A question,
however, should never commence after #uch an answer
440 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
on the same line, but should begin at the usual place
on the line following. If the answer should turn out
to be a long one, its continuation should commence on
the following line at the usual place the same as when
regularly written.
TRANSCRIBING TRIALS, HEARINGS, ETC.
588. There are several methods of transcribing
the examination and testimony in all of which the
proper punctuation marks are inserted both medially
and at the end of the questions and answers. Only
two those which the author considers as usually the
best will be given here. In the first method the
questions and^ answers are written in script or type-
written in the manner explained in section 582 in the
case of the short hand notes, the questions beginning
at the left edge of the space written upon and the an-
swers indented the length of a shorthand space para-
graph to the right of it. When printed, however, the
indentation of the answers is, at the farthest, only about
three-eighths of an inch; thus,
Where do you live?
In Chicago.
Do you remember what persons were present at the
time this agreement was written, and if anything was
said in regard to it ?
There were several persons present, but I do not
recollect how many, or what was said.
1. The answers should never be "run in v in the
transcript as explained in section 587 for the short-
hand notes.
589. In the second method the capital letters Q. and
A., the initials of the words question and answer, are
placed before the questions and answers themselves.
The beginning of each is then indented at the left of
the page the same as are the beginnings of the para-
graphs in ordinary script and print; thus,
THE PIION'OGRAPHIC MANUAL. 441
Q. What is your business ?
A. Dry goods and notions.
Q. Were you ever engaged in any other business
and if so what and where was it ?
A. I followed the shoe business for a while a littje
farther up the street, but finally sold out and went
into my present line dry goods and notions.
500. Of the two methods above the first takes up
a little more paper than the second but is preferred for
the following reasons. In the first place it saves the
time and expense of writing and printing the initials
Q. and A., which are considerable, and are also sur-
plusages, since the interrogation point and period are
written after the questions and answers in any event.
In the next place it is a counterpart of the shorthand
notes so that the questions and answers can be referred
one to the other with the greatest ease, and enables
any particular answer to be found much more quickly
than does the second method. Thus, on the whole,
there is a very great gain. Finally, the questions
and answers are as certainly distinguished as in the
second method, since in the shorthand notes from
which the transcript is taken and on which it depends,
they are distinguished in the same manner. The
learner, however, can adopt either method he chooses.
REPORTING EXERCISES.
591. In the following reporting exercises the en-
graved portions are reading and the printed ones writ-
ing exercises the latter being a key to the
former the same as exemplified in the preceding
pages.
592. The learner should study the first engraved
exercise until it becomes sofamilar as to be read with-
out hesitation. He should then write it from mem-
44lj THK r-HOXUGHAPHIC MANUAL.
ory, using the key, until the notes can be made accu-
rately, always keeping the characters as nearly as pos-
sible of the same size as those in the engraving, as
explained in the Prologue, page 26. Only a few re-
petions in each case will be necessary. He should
then take it from dictation, that is from another's
reading, until he can write it neatly at about 125
words a minute, which is the average rate of speech,
and read the notes without hesitation. After master-
ing the first exercise in this manner he should pursue
the same course with each subsequent one.
REPORTING STYLE READING EXERCISES.
THE RIGHT OF FREE DISCUSSION.
\
i
<\
y
\
(
A
JL .
,
'X
j h
L
C 3
C C
144
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
WEALTH AND ITS MEASUREMENT.
I. / < .-
L
L X
!
v
*"\ ^ fA C
* " t -J 7^-
- J t-
/-p l^ /rr
/ ^L
\ >
V o U J
V
1
\
/-T.
^,
l C
N
-1-
3 ^
i <T J^
L" N ^
.X
N J
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
445
N ^ * V
440
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
Y
rt:
t
T^
rU-
IZLL
i
v
Vk
^ .i-v
x/i i ^r ^ n
<v
lv
{ \
/ /v^ "^ \ ^~ r
V
-
A,
THE PUOXOCJEAI'IiH' MANUAL.
447
^
/
LETTERS.
\r
\
A.
448
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
MAN'S MASTERY OVER NATURE.
\
r
. r*
\
\
v^/<r $
V7
\
- >
- .
,A
THE PHONOGRAPHIC) MANUAL.
4411
OPPORTUNITY AND THE TRUE REFORMER.
\
\
V /
\/
*ss ov~
V
I
r
( V l % 1 ( /. _
* Y l ^ /
\
L.
z ^\
^-i
I
J
1 )
~"
THE rilONOCKAPHU: MANUAL.
V
k - '
^ _
V. ^
THE SUN'S ENERGY.
V
^ t"
L V /(
V7
v
Till-: PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
451
r
/ 3 \r
./ L " \
/L"
.A.
-f
NT"
I L I 1
V
x
<
V-
. ^ ,
i
V-
-1
A
S
! I
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANTAL
t~ 1
-V
\
X
\
X. V
A
VT
V
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
453
"X
J ~
V ^|V
y\>
^v
x
I \t n
!\
v
\
THE GREAT NORTHWESTERN SNOWFALL.
454
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
v
n
v
\
\
N
X
X
>*/' "-* / L.
I X U
A
L I /t
>
L
M
\7
L.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
455
> \x /\_ to
:// V^ >> o
TRUTH.
%
XZ^ ^
^
V
J>
MEN ALWAYS FIT FOR FREEDOM.
r_
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
V
/ x- 1 )'
, p f ^ t
7-^ ^> t-
1
r J- \-
N X
FIDELITY TO THE CONSTITUTION.
-M
\
H
EARLY RISING.
V
L
I
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
457
H t
NO
\
r
t
\
t
^=\
SELF-CULTURE.
/ A.
458
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
JJ_t v^_
/" )
N/ \i
"\
v
. > )
\ / tf X^
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
459
SELF-RESPECT.
A
r
v
V.
A.
LL
V
. A,
A
/ 3_
r
/t
\
r^
THE KNOCKING AT THE GATE IN MACBETH.
/ X \
_r^V
S
\
U^ X
I (. "- "U /| I ^- . ' V
Kid
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
X/k
V
\
/TV -*
V
u
l/H/T
V Q
. V
,
-i I
-y
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
\
N, ^ .u
^ V*
r
L
\
V/
"V
^
V *""-
~ /
Jy- . ^ v S / A^
\
462
TliK PIIOXOUKAPHIC JIAXUAL.
\
PHONOGRAPHERS AND PHONETIC SPELLING.
\
vy
\
THE PHOXOSCRIPT AND PHONOTYPIC ALPHABETS.
/v
C
c -t
V
REPORTING STYLE WRITING EXERCISES.
(KEY TO READING EXERCISES.)
THE RIGHT OF FREE DISCUSSION.
Important as I deem it to discuss on all proper
occasions the policy of the measures at present pur-
sued, it is still more important to maintain the right
of such discussion in its full and just extent. Senti-
ments lately sprung up and now growing fashionable
make it necessary to be explicit on this point. The
more I perceive a disposition to check the freedom of
inquiry by extravagant and unconstitutional pretenses
the firmer shall be the tone in which I shall assert and
the freer the manner in which I shall exercise it.
It is the ancient and undoubted prerogative of this
people to canvass public measures and the merits of
public men. It is a home-bred right, a fire-side priv-
ilege. It hath ever been enjoyed in every house, cot-
tage and cabin in the nation. It is not to be drawn
into controversy. It is as undoubted as the right of
breathing the air or walking on the earth. Belonging
to private life as a right, it belongs to public life as a
duty and it is the last duty which those whose repre-
sentative I am shall find me to abandon. Aiming at
all times to be courteous and temperate in its use ex-
cept when the right itself shall be questioned, I shall
then carry it to its extent. I shall place myself on
the extreme boundary of my right, and bid defiance to
any arm that would move me from my ground.
This high, constitutional privilege I shall defend
and exercise within this house, and without this house,
and in all places; in time of peace and in all times.
4G4 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
Living, I shall assert it, and should I leave no other
inheritance to my children, by the blessing of God, I
will leave them the inheritance of free principles and
the example of a manly, independent and constitutional
defense of them. Daniel AVebster.
WEALTH AND ITS MEASUREMENT.
Wealth comprises ail things having value, such as
houses, lands, cattle, furniture, goods, money, etc., in
short, all objects possessing inherent power to com-
mand other objects in exchange. Value, which is the
chief quality and requisite of wealth, and the universal
name for power in exchange, is the ratio existing be-
tween different commodities with reference to such
exchange. If a bushel of wheat will bring in exchange
two bushels of corn, the value of wheat, expressed in
corn, is as two to one, that is, wheat is worth twice as
much as corn; and the value of .corn expressed in
wheat is as one to two, or one half to one, that is,
corn is worth one half as much as wheat.
A chief requisite to the rating of wealth is that its
value should be susceptible of measurement not mere-
ly that kind of measurement which compares one article
or commodity with another, but a measurement which
may be generally stated in figures, and to which all val-
uable things shall alike be subject. For, while it would
be possible to make an equitable exchange of two com-
modities, as in the case of wheat and corn above given,
such a basis would not be generally effective in the
extended relations required by commerce. What is
requisite to know, is not merely the value of wheat in
corn, but the value of wheat or of corn, in any one of
a thousand different commodities; and this can be done
only by the use of an arbitrary measurement or stand-
ard which shall apply equally to all values, just as
the bushel measure applies equally to the quantity or
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.. 40.")
bulk of wheat, or of corn, or of any other measurable
commodity which it may contain.
Let us adopt such an arbitrary measure of value
and call it Dollar; and then let us suppose that a
bushel of wheat is equal in value, or is measured as
to its value, by the unit of this standard. It will then
occur that a bushel of wheat will be worth a dollar
and a dollar will be worth two bushels of corn. Now
make the dollar the measurer in both cases and we
have one bushel of wheat or two bushels of corn equal
in value to one dollar. Suppose, further, that a
bushel of wheat is exchangeable for three bushels of
potatoes. This fixes the value of potatoes, as ex-
pressed in wheat, at one third (that is, a bushel of
potatoes is worth a third of a bushel of wheat) and
the value of wheat, as expressed in potatoes, at three.
We have now another measure of value, or another
article sustaining a known relation to wheat, and con-
sequently to corn, and we are enabled on this basis to
promote a general exchange in the three articles with-
out the intervention of an arbitrary measure, and yet
the advantage of an extrinsic standard is positive,
even in these limited relations; for if we make the
dollar the measurer again, we have not only one
bushel of wheat, or two bushels of corn, but also three
bushels of potatoes equal in value to one dollar.
The advantage of the dollar measurement, as above
shown, lies in the facility it gives for adjusting the
value of unity of any commodity. And the value of
unity being fixed, the value of any number of units
of one commodity in any number of units of another
is readily computed.
To meet the best conditions of exchange, the meas-
urer of value should be itself a representative of the
value it measures and capable of going from hand to
hand in exchange for the thing measured. Though
not in itself the thing ultimately desired in exchange,
K!l) THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
it must be capable of commanding that thing when-
ever it is wanted. It should, therefore, be something
which all holders of commodities will unhesitatingly
accept. To fill these requisites, it should be:
1. Imperishable, or as nearly so as possible, that
it may continue in use without sensible loss or depre-
ciation.
2. Portable, containing great value in small bulk.
3. Divisible to the farthest practicable extent, that
the smallest values may be suitably represented.
4. Uniform in quality and such that it may be
easily tested.
5. Untarnishable and pleasant to handle, that it
may be appreciated and desired to be held in posses-
sion.
6. Malleable, that it may be wrought into conve-
nient shapes and easily impressed.
7. Rare and difficult to obtain, that its relation to
other commodities may not be suddenly changed by
overproduction.
8. Sufficiently plentiful, that the quality accessible
may be readily adjusted to the healthy demands of
trade.
All these qualities inhere in gold and silver metal and
for this reason they have gradually become to be the
material out of which money is made. It will be said
that gold and silver, being useful commodities and
having an intrinsic value as such, are liable to fluctu-
ation, the same as other commodities, and on this ac-
count will become unreliable as a standard of measure-
ment. This would be true were it not that their uni-
versal recognition as the measure of value gives
them an exceptional position among commodities, and
arrests the natural tendency to respond at once to the
influences which affect other commodities through the
law of supply and demand. And, again, the increase
or diminution of gold and silver, even under extra-
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 467
ordinary circumstances, daring any reasonably limited
period, is so gradual, as to create no apprehension of
sudden disturbances from readjustments.
The difficulty, however, of maintaining as equal
measures of value, two metals having distinct commer-
cial values and liable to constant variation relatively to
each other, is one that cannot be overlooked. It is a
recognized law of commerce as well as of finance that
commodities always seek the best market. Hence,
when the relative value between gold and silver as
money is such that either is worth more in the open
market, it will seek the more profitable field and cease
to circulate in the less profitable. To meet this diffi-
culty it is found necessary to recognize one metal as
the real standard, and by proper restrictions in coin-
age and legal tender attributes to keep the other in
fixed relations, thereto. Packard and Bryant.
LETTERS.
Mr. J. W. Smith,
San Francisco, Cal.
Dear Sir: In compliance with yours of the 2d inst.
we this day ship your order per American Express.
Please notify us by telegraph if the goods do not ar-
rive within a reasonable time.
Hoping that you will favor us again when in need
of anything in our line, we are,
Very respectfully, &c.,
Mess. Hatfield & Jackson,
Cincinnati, O.
Gentlemen: AVe are in receipt of your favor of the
29th ult. containing draft for One hundred and fifty
and jVu Dollars (*15<'iVo ) and have placed the same to
your credit.
AVith thanks for the remittance and soliciting a con-
468 THE PHOXOCiUAPHIC MAXUAL.
tinuance of your orders, which shall always have our
prompt attention, we remain,
Very truly, etc.,
Mess. Wilson & Taylor,
Waco, Texas.
Gentlemen: Your favor of the 8th instant request-
ing quotations is at hand. In reply w r e will say that
we will furnish you the articles mentioned in the cata-
logue herewith and marked in red ink at 30 percent
discount from the list price. These rates are consid-
erably lower than the regular ones and we make them
in order to introduce our goods in your district.
Those checked in black ink are net, while the remain-
der are liable to fluctuate according to the market.
We hope that 3-011 will find these quotations satis-
factory and that we may receive an order from you at
an early date.
Yours very truly,
MAN'S MASTERY OVER NATURE.
The mastery of man over nature! This is an in-
spiring truth which we must not suffer from its famili-
arity to lose its force. By the might of his intellect,
man has not merely made the elephant his drudge, the
lion his diversion, the whale his magazine, but even
the subtlest and most terrible of the elements is the
submissive instrument of his will. He turns aside, or
garners up, the lightning; the rivers toil in his work-
shop; the tides of ocean bear his burdens; the hurricane
rages for his use and profit.
Fire and water struggle together that he may be
whisked over hill and valley with the celerity of the
sunbeam. The stillness of the forest midnight is
broken bv the snort of the iron horse as he drair-i the
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 469
long train from lakes to ocean with a slave's docility,
a giant's strength. Up the long hill he labors; by the
<leep glen he skims, the tops of the tall trees swaying
below his path; his sharp, quick breathing bespeaks
his impetuous progress; a stream of fire reflects his
course; on dashes the tireless steed, and the morrow's
sun shall find him standing in some far mart of com-
merce and the partakers of his wizard journey scattered
to their vocations of trade or pleasure, unthinking of
their night's adventure. What had old Romance
wherewith to match the every-day realities of the
nineteenth century! Horace Greeley.
OPPORTUNITY AND THE TRUE REFORMER.
To the rightly constituted mind, to the truly devel-
oped man, there always is, there always must be,
opportunity opportunity to be and to learn, nobly to
do and to endure; and what matter whether with pomp
and eclat, with sound of trumpets and shout of ap-
plauding thousands, or in silence and seclusion, be-
neath the calm, discerning gaze of heaven? No station
can be humble on which that gaze is approvingly bent;
no work can be ignoble which is performed uprightly
and not impelled by sordid and selfish aims.
Not from among the children of monarchs, ushered
into being with boom of cannon and shouts of revelling
millions, but from amid the sons of obscurity and toil,
cradeled in peril and ignominy, from the bulrushes
and the manger, come forth the benefactors and sa-
viors of mankind. So when all the babble and glare of
our age shall have passed into fitting oblivion, when
those who have enjoyed rare opportunities and swayed
vast empires and been borne through life on the
shoulders of shouting multitudes, shall have been laid
at last to rest in golden coffins, to molder forgotten,
the stately marble their only monuments, it will be
470 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
found that some humble youth who hewed out his op-
portunities, has uttered the thought which shall render
the age memorable by extending the means of enlight-
enment and blessing to our race.
The great struggle for human progress and eleva-
tion proceeds noiselessly, often unnoted, often checked
and apparently baffled amid the clamorous and debas-
ing strifes of greedy selfishness and low ambition. In
that struggle maintained by the wise and good of all
ages bear ye the part of men. Heed the lofty sum-
mons and with souls serene and constant prepare to
tread boldly in the path of highest duty. So shall life
be to you truly exalted and heroic; so shall death bo ;i
transition neither sought nor dreaded; so shall your
memory, though cherished at first but by a few
humble, loving hearts, linger long and gratefully in
human remembrance, a watchword to the faithful and
an incitement to generous endeavor; freshened by the
proud tears of admiring affection and fragrant with the
odors of heaven. Horace Greeley.
THE SUN'S ENERGY.
Let us consider this energy in its familiar form of
the heat by which we live. How great is it? How
hot is iU
Before examining the degree of the sun's heat, let
us look a little into its amount. The sunheat falling
on one square mile corresponds to over 750 tons of
w r ater raised every minute from the freezing to the
boiling point. But there are 49 million square miles
in the cross-section of the earth exposed to the sun
and therefore in each minute its heat falling on tho
~
earth would raise to the boiling point 37 billion tons
of Avater.
We may express this in other ways: as by the
quantity of ice it would melt. And as the whole sur-
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 471
face of the earth, including the night side, is four
times the cross-section exposed to the sun, we find, by
taking 520, (KM) minutes to a year, that the sun's rays
would melt in a year, a coating of ice over the whole
earth more than 160 feet thick.
The amount of heat, therefore, which the sun sends
the earth in order to warm its oceans and make green
its continents is almost incomprehensible. But how
little this is to what passes vis by! The earth as it
moves on in its annual path continually comes into new
regions, where it finds the same amount of heat pour-
ing forth and which still continues to fall into the
empty space it has just quitted where it goes on in
what seems utter waste. If then, the whole annual
orbit were set close with globes like ours, each would
receive the same enormous amount the earth does now.
But this is not all; for not only along the orbit, but
above and below it does the sun set forth its heat, the
final amount being expressible in the number of worlds
'like ours that it could warm in the same manner,
which is two billion two hundred millions.
These numbers are, perhaps, too great to convey a
clear idea to the mind, but let us, before leaving them,
try to give an illustration of their significance in con-
nection with this stupendous outflow of the solar heat.
Let us suppose that we could gather up from the
earth all the ice and snow on its surface, including the
accumulations on its Arctic and Antarctic poles, and
build with it a tower fifteen miles in diameter and high
enough to exhaust our store. Imagine that it could
be preserved untouched by the sun's rays while we
built on w r ith the accumulations of successive winters
until it stretched 240,000 miles into space, forming an
ice bridge to the moon, and that we then concentrated
on it the sun's whole radiation such as it emits con-
tinually. In one second the whole would be gone
melted, boiled, dissipated in vapor.
472 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
Again, the state of Pennsylvania is underlaid by
one of the richest coal fields of the world, capable of
supplying the consumption of the whole country at
its present rate for more than a thousand years to
come. If the source of the solar heat were withdrawn
and we could carry this coal to the solar furnace
and shoot it in fast enough to keep up the present
heat and radiation, the whole would be used up in
rather less than the one-thousandth of a second! Fur-
thermore, if the sun itself had originally been one
solid block of coal it would have burnt out completely
in less time than that in which man has occupied the
earth. Yet during historic times there has been no
noticeable diminution of the sun's heat, for the olive
and the vine grow to-day just as they did three
thousand years ago.
Having considered the amount of the sun's heat, let
us next examine the degree of its temperature. That
is, How hot is it 2 We can make the comparison be-
tween the heat from some artificially heated object and
that given out from an equal area of the sun's face,
so that we choose for comparison the hottest thine: we
can find on a scale large enough for the experiment.
Perhaps the highest temperature we can get on a
large scale in the arts is that of molten steel in the
Bessemer converter. The converter is an enormous
iron pot, lined with fire-brick and capable of holding
fifteen or twenty tons of melted metal. It is swung
on trunnions so that it can be raised by machinery to
a vertical position or lowered to pour its contents into
a caldron. First the empty converter is inclined and
seven tons and a half of fluid iron streams down into
its mouth from an adjacent furnace. It is then lifted
into an erect position and an air-blast from a blowing-
engine is forced in at the bottom through the liquid
iron which has combined with it nearly half a ton of
silicon and carbon -materials which with the oxygen
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 473
of the blast, create a heat which leaves that of the
already melted iron far behind. After some time the
converter is tipped forward and three-quarters of a
ton more of melted iron is added to that already in it.
What the temperature of this last is, may be judged
from the fact that although ordinary melted iron is
dazzlingly bright, the molten metal in the converter is
so much brighter still that the entering stream is, as it
were, dark brown by comparison, presenting a contrast
something like that of chocolate emptied into a white
cup. Looking now, from the front down into the in-
clined vessel, we see the almost blindingly bright inte-
rior dripping with the drainage of the metal down its
side while the circular mouth, which is twenty-four
inches in diameter, presents the effect of a disk of
molten metal of that size. The contents are now no
longer iron, but liquid steel, ready for pouring into
the caldron, which is done immediately; the stream of
falling metal, which continues nearly a minute, pre-
senting with its scintillations and intense brilliancy,
the appearance of a cataract of sunlight.
The pour is preceded by a shower of sparks of the
molten steel projected fully a hundred feet straight
from the open mouth of the converter. In the line of
this an apparatus was stationed in an open window, at
a place whence its view could be directed down into the
converter on one side and up at the sun on the other.
This apparatus consisted of a long photometer box
with a - "porte-lumiere" at one end. The mirror of this
reflected the sun's rays through the box and then on to
the pouring steel, tracing their way to it by a beam of
light visible through the dusty air. In the path of
this beam was placed the measuring apparatus, both
for heat and light, arranged in such a manner that the
effect (except for the absorption of its beams by the
atmosphere on the way) was independent of the size
or distance of the sun and depended on its absolute
474 THE PHOM>',:::APHIC MANUAL.
initial radiation, being equivalent to aking a sample
piece of the sun's face of equal size with the fluid
metal, bringing them opposite each other and seeing
which was the hotter and brighter. The comparison,
however, was not impartial so far as the sun was con-
cerned, since its rays were to a certain extent absorbed,
as was said, by the atmosphere on the way. while those
of the furnace were not. Nevertheless, under these
circumstances the heat from any single square foot of
the sun's surface was found to be at least eighty-seven
times that . from a square foot of the molten steel,
while the light from the sun was proved to be, foot for
foot, over five thousand times that from the steel,
though the latter separately considered, seemed to be
of equal brilliancy.
We must not conclude from this that the teinp';r<nnr,-
of the sun was five thousand times that of the steel,
but we may be certain that it was a great deal the
higher of the two. It is probable from all experi-
ments made up to this date, that the solar temperature
is not less than 3,000 nor more than 30, 000 degrees of
the centigrade thermometer. S. P. Langley.
THE GREAT NORTHWESTERN SNOWFALL.
The soil of the wheat belt region receives no tonic
and stimulant of vegetation equal in power to the peri-
odic snowfalls of the winter season. The artificial
fertilizers of the farms and from the nitrate markets
are of far less value than the snows which cover the
ground and mantle the sources of vegetable growth.
Even a good and prolonged rain is less serviceable
than a fall of snow in fertilizing the soil. The atmos-
phere contains iu dust particles, in the floating remains
of pulverulent organic substances, in gases exhaled
from the earth or formed in the invisible laboratories
THE PHOXOGKAP11IC MANUAL. 475
of nature fructifying elements which are brought
*e
down in showers of rain and aid vegetable
growths.
But the rain is much less effectual than the snow
in bringing the fertilizers in the atmosphere to the
ground. Through the descending columns of a sum-
mer shower the spaces not covered by watery spray
permit the escape of a vast proportion of the matter
floating in the air. Especially the volatile gases,
probably the most valuable part of the fertilizing
elements in the air, escape between the falling rain
drops and reascend to the upper atmospheric heights.
The snowfall descends like a blanket. It brings to
the earth all foreign elements in the air the dust, the
gases, the insect life, the floating drift of smoky par-
ticles from all the centers of industrial activity and
nothing escapes the comprehensive visitation. When
all this enormous wealth of fertilization is brought to
the earth under the snow, it remains there, sinking
into the crevices and pores of the soil, to form res-
ervoirs of fertility for the spring and summer to
follow.
This constitutes the value of the snowfall in the
belts where wheat and other grain products of the
temperate zone are cultivated. It covers the earth and
mantles its treasures of fecundity. It is a promise
of the appearance of the harvest at the appointed
time. The winter snows are an assurance against the
most deleterious effects of the summer drouths. They
are the prophecy of the harvest and foretell the abund-
ance of its fulfilment. The Chicago Chronicle.
TRUTH.
Force of thought may be put forth to weave a web
of sophistry, to make the Avorse appear the better
cause. But energy of thought so employed is sui-
iTtj . THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
cidal. The intellect becomes not only degraded but
diseased and loses the capacity of distinguishing truth
from falsehood, good from evil, right from wrong.
Woe to that mind which wants the love of truth ! For
want of this genius has been a scourge to the world;
its breath a poisonous exhalation; its brightness a de-
coy into the paths of pestilence and death. Truth is
the light of the Infinite mind and the image of God in
his creatures. Nothing endures but truth. The dreams,
fictions, theories which men would substitute for it,
soon die. Without its guidance, effort is vain and
hope baseless. Accordingly, the love of truth, a de-
liberate purpose to seek it and hold it fast, may be
considered as the very foundation of human culture
and dignity. Precious as thought is., the love of truth
is still more precious; for without it thought wanders
and wastes itself and precipitates men into misery.
Channing.
MEN ALWAYS FIT FOR FREEDOM.
There is only one cure for the evils which newly ac-
quired freedom produces and that cure is freedom!
When a prisoner leaves his cell, he can not bear the
light of day; he is unable to discriminate colors or
recognize faces; but the remedy is not to remand him
into his dungeon, but to accustom him to the rays of
the sun. The blaze of truth and liberty may at first
dazzle and bewilder nations which have become half
blind in the house of bondage; but let them gaze on
and they will soon be able to bear it. In a few years
men learn to reason; the extreme violence of opinion
subsides; hostile theories correct each other; the scat-
tered elements of truth cease to conflict and begin to
coalesce; and, at length, a system of justice and order
is educed out of the chaos. Many politicians of our
time are in the habit of laying it down as a self-evident
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL 177
proposition, that no people ought to be free till they
are lit to use their freedom. The maxim is worthy of
the person in the story, who resolved not to go into
the water till he had learned to swim. If men are to
wait for liberty till they become wise and good in
slavery, they may, indeed, wait forever. Macaulay.
FIDELITY TO THE CONSTITUTION.
If an honest, and I may truly affirm, a laborious zeal
for the public service has given me any weight in your
esteem, let me exhort and conjure you never to suffer
an invasion of your political constitution, however
minute the instance may appear, to pass by without
a determined, persevering resistance. One precedent
creates another. They soon accumulate and constitute
law. What yesterday was fact, to-day is doctrine.
Examples are supposed to justify the most dangerous
measures; and where they do not suit exactly, the de-
fect is supplied by analogy. Be assured, that the laws
which protect us in our civil rights grow out of the
constitution, and that they must fall or flourish with
it. Junius.
EARLY RISING.
Early rising is considered by some to be a vulgar
practice. Those who say so have perused the bio-
graphies of great men with little attention. It is in-
disputable that few ever lived to a great age, and
fewer still ever became distinguished who were not in
the habit of early rising. You rise late and of course
get about your business at a late hour and everything
goes wrong all day. Franklin sayc that ' 'He who rises
late must run all day and not overtake his business at
night." Dean Swift avers that he never knew a man
come to greatness and eminence who lay in bed in the
US THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
morning. We believe that with other degenerations
of our days, history will prove that late rising is a
very prominent one. There seems to be no\v a ten-
dency among certain persons to turn day into night
to breakfast late, dine late and go to bed late and con-
sequently to rise late. To a certain extent people
must do as others do; nevertheless, every one is more
or less able to act with something like independence of
principle; the young those who have everything to
learn can at least act upon a plan rising at an early
hour.
In order to rise early we would recommend an early
'hour for retiring. There are many other reasons for
this; neither your eyes nor health are so likely to be
injured. Let it be a rule with you, and if possible
adhered to, that you will be at home and have your light
extinguished by a quarter to ten o'clock in the evening.
You may then rise at six and have eight hours sleep,
which is about what nature requires. It may be most
confidently affirmed that he who from his youth is in
the habit of rising early, will be much more likely to
live to old age, more likely to be a distinguished and
useful man and more likely to pass a life that is pleas-
ant. Chamber's Miscellany.
SELF-CULTURE.
"Every person has two educations: one which he receives
from others, and one, more important, which he gives to him-
self." Gibbon.
It is astonishing how much may be accomplished in
self-culture by the energetic and persevering who are
careful to avail themselves of opportunities, and use
up the fragments of spare time which the idle permit
to run to waste. Thus Ferguson learned astronomy
from the heavens while tending sheep on the highland
hills; Stone learned mathematics while working us a
Till" PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 479
journey-man gardener; Drew studied the highest philos-
ophy in the intervals of cobbling shoes and Hugh Mil-
ler taught himself geology while working as a day
laborer in a quarry, liy bringing their minds to bear
upon knowledge in its various aspects, and carefully
using up the very odds and ends of their time, men
such as these reached the highest culture, and acquired
honorable distinction among their fellow men.
Sir Joshua Reynolds was an earnest believer in the
power of industry and held that all men might achieve
excellence if they would but exercise the power of assid-
uous and patient working. He held that drudgery was
on the road to genius and that there were hardly any
limits to the proficiency of an artist except the limits
of his own painstaking. He would not believe in con-
tinual inspiration but mostly in study and labor. ' 'Ex-
cellence,'' he said, "is seldom granted to a man but as
the reward of labor. Whether you have great or
moderate abilities industry will improve them." Sir
Fowell Buxton, who labored in a different field, was an
equal believer in the power of study and placed his
greatest confidence in extraordinary application. And
it is unquestionably true that the men of the highest
genius have invariably been found to be among the
most plodding, hard-working and intent men their
chief characteristic apparently consisting simply in
their power of laboring more intensely and efficiently
than others. -Samuel Smiles.
SELF-RESPECT.
Self-discipline and self-control are the beginnings of
practical wisdom and these must have their root in
self-respect. Hope springs from it hope, which is
the companion of power and the mother of success.
Every one may say "To respect myself, to develop
myself this is my true duty in life. An integral and
480 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
responsible part of the great system of society, I owe
to society and to its Author not to degrade nor destroy
my body, mind nor instincts. On the contrary, I am
bound to the best of my power to give those parts of
my nature the highest degree of perfection possible.
And as I respect my own nature so am I equally bound
to respect others, as they on their part are bound to
respect me. "
Self-respect is the noblest garment with which a
man may clothe himself the most elevating feeling
with which the mind can be inspired. This sentiment
carried into daily life will be found at the root of all
the virtues. "The just honoring of ourselves," said
Milton, "may be thought the fountain head from
whence every worthy enterprise issues forth. " Every
one may be sustained by the proper indulgence of
this feeling and be lifted and lighted up by it.
Samuel Smiles.
THE KNOCKING AT THE GATE IN MACBETH.
From my boyish days I had always felt a great per-
plexity on one point in Macbeth. It was this: the
knocking at the gate, which succeeds to the murder of
Duncan, produced to my feelings an effect for which
I never could account. The effect was, that it reflected
back upon the murder a peculiar awfulnessand a depth
of solemnity; yet, however obstinately I endeavored
with my understanding to comprehend this, for many
years I never could see why it should produce such an
effect.
Here I pause for one moment to exnort the reader
never to pay any attention to his understanding, when
it places itself in opposition to any other faculty of
his mind. The mere understanding, however useful
and indispensible, is the meanest faculty we have and
the most to be distrusted; and yet the great majority
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 481
of people trust to nothing else; which may do for or-
dinary life, but not for philosophy.
But to return from this digression, my understand-
ing could furnish no reason why the knocking at the
gate should produce any effect direct or reflected. In
fact, my understanding said positively that it could
'not produce any effect. But I knew better; I felt that
it did; and I waited and clung to the problem until
further knowledge should enable me to solve the inci-
dent which the genius of Shakespeare has invented
and I at length did so to my own satisfaction, and my
solution is this:
In Macbeth, with his enormous and teeming faculty
of creation, Shakespeare has introduced two murderers
Macbeth and his wife. Furthermore, we have the
unoffending nature of the victim, 'the gracious Dun-
can'- and with this 'the deep damnation of his taking
off;' and immediately afterward comes the expedient
under consideration to which I now solicit the
reader's attention.
At no moment is the sense of the complete suspen-
sion and pause in ordinary human concerns so full and
affecting as at that moment when suspension ceases
and the goings-on of the ordinary human life are sud-
denly resumed. All action in any direction is best
expounded, measured and made apprehensible by reac-
tion. Now apply this to the case of Macbeth. Here
another world has stepped in and we are made sensible
that the world of ordinary life is suddenly arrested
laid asleep tranced racked into a dread armistice
withdrawn into a deep syncope and suspension.
Hence it is that when the deed is done, when the work
of darkness is perfect, then the knocking at the gale
is heard; and it makes known audibly that the reaction
has commenced; the pulses of life are beginning to
beat again; and the re-establishment of the goings-on
482 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
of the ordinary world first makes us profoundly sen-
sible of the awful parenthesis that had suspended
them.
O, mighty poet! Thy works are not as those of
other men, simply and merely great works of art; but
are also like the phenomena of nature, like the sun
and the sea, the stars and the flowers like frost and
snow, rain and dew, hail-storm and thunder, which
are to he studied in the perfect faith that in them
there can be no too much or too little, nothing useless
or inert but that, the further we press in our discov-
eries, the more we shall see proofs of design and self-
supporting arrangement where the careless eye had
seen nothing but accident and confusion. De Quincey.
PHONETIC SPELLING AND THE COMMON
SPELLING.
If we draw a comparison between phonetic spelling
and the common spelling, we find that the two points in
which they agree are in the endeavor to express the
sounds of our language by certain signs. But here
the parallelism ceases, for in regard to nearly every-
thing else there is a total inequality between them.
For while phonetic spelling investigates the elementary
sounds of the language and gives a distinct sign for
each sound the other employs the few characters used
by our ancestors. Hence much confusion is produced
by using the same sign for several different sounds.
As a result years are required to learn what utterance
is called for in a particular letter.
They who have toiled through years of labor in sim-
ply learning to spell may well complain of their tribu-
lations. Phonographers, however, perceive that the
time is near when the intricacies of the common spell-
ing shall be abandoned for the simplicity of the pho-
netic one. Phonography and its sister arts phonoscript
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 48'.}
and phonotypy are thus destined to take the place of
the former. We shall then see words always written
in accordance with their pronunciation so that no one
need consult- a dictionary to ascertain how a word is
spelled. If phonographers are firm in pressing the
claims of phonography, phonoscript and phonotypy upon
the consideration of the public these arts will soon be-
come universal the more so as they are not experi-
ments but practical methods which must be adopted just
as soon as they become known. Adapted from James
C. Booth.
PHONOGRAPHERS AND PHONETIC SPELLING.
Every phonographer should be able to write and read
phonoscript and- phonotypy with the same facility as
the ordinary script and print. To do this all that is
necessary is to master the phonoscript and phonotypic
alphabets ( which can be done by any phonographer in
from a few minutes to half an hour) and follow the
rules for phonetic spelling presented in the preceding
pages of this book. He will then possess an accom-
plishment which, while it cost him but little effort, will
ever after be invaluable.
[The following- paragraph contains all the sounds of the Eng-
lish language and is from the example in phonetic spelling in
"A System of Phonoscript and Phonotypv," page 91. (See page
28.)]
THE PHONOSCRIPT AND PHONOTYPIC
ALPHABETS.
By the phonoscript and phonotypic alphabets any
person, old or young, may be taught to write and read
in three months ay, often in forty hours instruction
tasks which are seldom accomplished in three years of
484 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANTAT..
great toil by the old alphabets. Every person, there-
fore, who is interested in the acquisition and diffusion
of knowledge, should not fail to employ these alphabets
at once.
DIRECTIONS FOR ATTAINING SPEED.
593. When the learner has mastered the preceding
reporting exercises, as directed in section 592, he should
rewrite them from dictation until they can lie taken at
an average of about 150 words a minute. He should
then take extracts from a newspaper or book. Should
he now meet with a strange word or one for which he
does not remember the contraction he should not stop
to deliberate but simply write it in full and look up the
proper form, if necessary, afterwards. When he can
write about 150 words a minute from new matter and
read his notes correctly he will be prepared to begin
general reporting.
594. The learner will at first find it somewhat diffi-
cult to read phonography because he has been giving
his attention more to writing than reading. If, how-
ever, he frequently reviews what he writes this diffi-
culty will soon disappear. Finally the learner is ad-
vised that speed will gradually increase with expe-
rience. Great manual dexterity is, of course, the result
of great practice and can be attained only by writing
from dictation or speech. (See also sec. 516. ) To
gain speed it is better to write one article fifty times
than fifty articles once each. The same remark applies
to reading. Furthermore, both the writing and reading
should mostly be from matter pertaining to the line of
business or pursuit in which the learner intends to de-
vote his efforts. When he has arrived at the full
limit of his speed he will be able to write, when neces-
sary, at an average of about 200 words a minute, and
in spurts anywhere above that rate to 275 and over.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL. 485
595. In conclusion, the learner is reminded (see
sec. 518) that only experience in any kind of report-
ing will render him proficient in it, no matter what his
speed may be in other respects. Thus, for example,
he might be able to write two or three hundred words
a minute from dictation and yet break down com-
pletely in actual examination and testimony or a speech
or debate running at less than half that speed. No-
thing but experience in such proceedings, therefore, will
ever make him skilled in them. The same remark
applies to every other branch of reporting. Neverthe-
less the learner will reach the goal much sooner if he
has proper preparation beforehand, as directed above,
than if he enters on actual reporting without it.
STENOTYPIC CONNECTED MATTER.
5 Dti. Phonographic connected matter, with or with-
out vowels, may be indicated in stenotypy, in which
case the following rules are adopted:
a. Small logographs and their alternates are spelled
oat, their positions being unmarked unless they are
Avritten in the zero or fourth position.
b. When a vowel or word has two or more signs
the regular form is in roman and the alternates, ex-
cept I and i (Ptoid and Ttoid), in italic; thus, a (Ktoid);
ft (Rtoid); the (Ctoid); the (Rtoid); He (left semicircle);
he ( Jtoidi; lie (Rtoid); i (right semicircle); I (Ptoid);
i (Ttoid); / (Ktoid); on (Ttoid), on (tf/itoid); all (Ftoid);
//// (L).
c. The Ptoid sign for "a" is represented by a and
the Ttoid one by a.
d. The dot sign for "the" is spelled in small caps:
THE.
e. The words u new, anew, knew" and "now" are
spelled out.
f. Figures are written and denominations abbre-
486 THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL.
viated as usual; thus, 40d., 20c., lOOp., 10s.,
5 4' 15".
g. Stem logographs, and also semigraphs and
brevigraphs, are un vocalized.
h. In all other respects the stenotypy is the same
as when unconnected.
597. In the Vocalized Style of phonographic (and
thus of stenotypic) connected matter, all words are
vocalized except logographs, semigraphs and brevi-
graphs. Also usually no phrases are employed. ' Ac-
cordingly the Ing and Con dots and Ing stem are usu-
ally inserted.
598. In the Unvocalized or Keporting Style all
words are unvocalized except vocagraphs and words
needing special distinction; phrasing being employed
and the Ing and Con dots and Ing stem being usually
omitted.
599. In all cases punctuation marks are the same
as in regular print except when they might interfere
with the stenotypy. Emphasis is denoted by a
straight line under the letter or word to be empha-
sized.
600. The following is an example of the Unvocal-
ized or Reporting Style of stenotypy and represents
the first paragraph on page 463.
THE EIGHT OF FREE DISCUSSION.
601. Mp 1 as-z-D'Mt'DsKs on-all PrP Kshns the-
PLS'.Zhrs 3 T 3 PrsNt PRSt Ts stL'MrMp'MnTn-the
Rt 1 sC DsKshn Nts 1 Fl Jst 4 KsTnt, sNtMnts LtL
sPrXg P now 4 Gr'FshnB MKt NssR B 3 sPlsT o/i-Dhs-
Pnt. the-Mr Pr'sV-a DsPss/mi CK-the Frt'M NK\\ "
B 1 sTrfGnt NsTshn 4 PrTnss, Me-F^Mr ShB-the Tn
NC Sh SRt ^-Fr 4 R-the Nr NC Sh KsRss T.
INDEX.
SECTION.
Accent 1 42
Affixes 314-344
Alphabet, Phonographic. ..page 17
Angles at which the letters are
made page 26
Appendages 226
Attachments 224
Bible References 567-570
Breathings, page
11, 26-29, 39, 49, 66 71, 197, 198, 361
Brevigraphs, 389, 405-407, 411, 518, 519
Directions for form-
ing 410
Lists of 408,409, 412
By space between figures 515
Capitals 134, 137, 144
Ch and upward R 17
Circle, Ns or Nss 201, 204
S ...82 92, 111, 127, 172, 184-198
" Ss initial 103108,194, 195
final or medial 109-1 17,277,a
Colloquial phrases, "did n't," etc 476
Compound words beginning with
S 105
Consonants and Vowels, Nature
of.... 55
R and L double. . .159, 160
" single 161
Rough 2
S double 90
S treble, etc 188-193
Smooth 1
W and Y dou-
ble 159, 172-177
Z double 82, 90, a, 93
Curl, N 298, 299
" Shun 217,219,246
Curvet, Lene 27, a, 39, 76, 81
Decimals 554, 555
Degrees 563, 564
Derivatives 104, 106, 107, 344, 369
Diphthongs, Rough 37
Smooth 34
Distinction (see Emphasis) .... 144, a
Dot, Long Vowel 39
pots, Breath 26, 39, 49
E
SECTION.
Emphasis (see Distinction) 144, b
Exercises, Lessons and. ... page 23
" " Directions
for learning. . .page 25
" Lessons and, Elemen-
tary style reading. .p 133
" Lessons and, Elemen-
tary style writing., p 171
Reporting 591
" style read-
ing p. 443
style writ-
ing page 463
F
Feet and inches 562
Figures, etc 528-532
Foreign consonants 25
" vowels, 56
Fourth position, 504
H
Half lengths not written or join-
ed in certain cases, 267-269
Halved curved letters without
angles, Junctions of. . . 265
Mp 251
Ng 252
" T or D not joined to VV,
Fr, T or Y 273
Halved, W and Y . 253
Halving, Final syllable Ed. . . .270-274
" Present and past tenses
usually written with
the same form in cer-
tain cases 274
" principle 244 280
" S halved after a hook
on a halved curve 277
" St and Nst loops
added 275, 276
" T or D added indis-
criminately by 244 247
Homographs, 389, 391, 411
Lists of 393,394, 412
Hook F 206-208
Large W 172-177
" N, 199-205
" Shun 214 216
" Ss and St prefixed to R
hook on straight stems. . 194
487
488
INDEX.
SECTION.
Hook Ss prefixed to L hook on
final upward R 195
" Ter 209-213
Hooks Downward R and L final.
etc 221
" generally written medi-
ally when possible 228
" H ticks joined to initial
hook stems 196, 197
Imperfect initial, etc 183
on tick logographs 4rt8, 469
RandL 151-170
" " hooks on M. .161, 170
" " " " " Mp and
Ng 157, 158, 169", 170
S prefixed to initial... 184. 187
Small Wand Y 178-183
Hours 565
Ington 323
Initials of proper names 134, 135
Italics 137, 144
Itself 477, a
L. Downward and up-
ward 12. 15, 16, 229, 235-239
" Final or medial, halved 260-262
" Lone or initial, halved .. 257 -259, 262
" Upward, after final hooks 240
Legibility of print, script, and
phonography page 30
Lengthened W and Y 285
Lengthening, Present and past
tenses usu ally
written with
the same forms . 287
principle 282-292
Words ending in
Ntr or Ndr 286
Lesson, 1, 29; 2, 30; 3. 32; 4, 34; 5,
39; 6, 48; 7,58; 8,60; 9,64; 10,67;
11,68; 12,79; 13, 87; 14. 91; 15, 93;
16, 9*; 17, 98; 18, 100; 19, 102; 20,
106:21, 107; 22, 112; 23, 116; 24,
121; 25, 124; 26, 125; 27, 1:29; 28,
207; 29, 222; 30, 230; 31, 236; 32,
238; 33, 241; 31, 265; 35, 281; 36,
296; 37, 304; 38, 319; 39. 334; 40,
344; 41,354; 42, 359; 4:{, 363; 44,
369; 45, 376; 46, 3*2; 47, 385; 48,
3U2: 49, 401; 50, 410; 51, 419; 52,
425; 53, 429; 54, 431; 55, 434; 56, 437
Lessons and exercises page 23
" " " Directions
for learning. . . page 25
" and exercises, Element-
ary style reading p 133
" and exercises, Element-
ary style writing 171
Logographs 362-380, 41 1
" General 379
Lists of 381, 412
Special 517-519
Long and short outlines 292
SECTION.
Loop, Final or medial
St 125-129, 275. 279
" Final or medial Sir. ..130-133
" Initial St 122-124.194
" NstorNstr..203,204,276, 278, 279
' St written alone 355
Ly, Termination in certain art-
verbs .... 367, 390
M
Materials for writing page 24
Method of holding the pen or
pencil page 25
Mp halved 251
" Double length 2*3
" not followed by R or L 171
Minutes 563, 565
N
Negatives 345
Nghalved 252
" Double length 283, a
" Single " 53
Numbers before other words than
hundreds, etc., and
money 542
" before the words hun-
dreds, etc., and
money 534-541
" Cardinal and ordi-
nal 546-553
" Common fractions and
mixed 556-561
" Decimal fractions and
mixed 554
" One, three, six and
twelve occurring
alone 533
" Ten, twenty, thirty,
etc 543-545
Numerical and other denomina-
tions 571
O
Omissions, 60, b, 293, d, 320,
344,a. 348. 350.485-489, 497
of medial T. K or
G, Nand W 348
" of vowels and diph-
thongs 350
Or space and position 512
Ought 483
Outlines, Best 108, 292
Phonetic Spelling. p 27, 97, pp 482. 483
Phraseography % . . 419-527
can and come 5U3
Caution in re-
gard to 511, 516
' Colloquials, "did
n't," etc 476
" Cm, Cn, Km or
Kn 496-502
" defined 420. b
INDEX.
489
SECTION.
Phraseography Fourth position. 504
From to 491
Halving 470-477
Hooks and cir-
cles attached to
tick 1 o g o -
graphs. ...468. 469
" Hooks, etc ... .45.1-469
' Ing 492-495
" Intersect ed
phrases 520
" Irregular phra-
ses 479
" Joined and con-
structed phra-
ses 526
" Joined and con-
structed phra-
ses. List of 527
" Juxtaposi-
tion 490-503
" Lengthening 478
" Of the 490
Omissions . .485-489
Or space and
position, 484
Ought 483
" Phraseo-
graph8 521, 522
" Phraseographs
List of 523
8 circle 445, 446
Special phrases,
log ogr aphs
and brevi-
graphs 517-519
Ss circle 447,448
" St loop 449-451
8tr " 452-454
Techniphrases
and techni-
graphs 517-519
"Than" after
circles on
right curves. . . 467
Ticks, semicir-
cles, etc.... 421-444
" To or too 490
" Well 488
"What" distin-
guished 482
Words distin-
guished by vo-
calization or
variation ..480, 481
" Zero posi-
tion 508, 509
Phraseographs, Small 524
" List of.... 525
Stem 521, 522
" List of 683
Phrases, General 517
" Intersected 520
" Joined and constructed 526
List of 527
Special 517-619
SECTION.
Plurals 814, 368, 546-553
PoBition ...4,7,44,284,351-359, 384-3S8
" Caution in regard to
writing in 359. 51 1
Possessive 368
Prefixes 293-3H
Prependages 226
Punctuation and other
marks 136-150
R
R, Downward and up-
ward 12, 17, 229-234
" Final or medial, halved... .260-262
" Lone or inital, halved, 257-259, 262
" Upward, after final hooks 233
" " joined to a follow-
ing M 22
Reporting trials, hearings,
etc 581-587
S
S halved and written upward 254
' When to use the stem 118-120
Seconds 563, 565
Self or selves, 304-306, 341, 464,
465 468, g,h
Semigraphs 383
Sh, Downward and up-
ward 18, 229, 240-243
Sh, Downward and upward,
halved 263-264
Significant marks, etc 572-579
Size of the phonographic let-
ters page 26, 31, 136
Sound of o in odd 54, a
Speed, Directions for attain-
ing 693-595
Spirit! page 1 1
Stems joined without angles 21
" standing alone or joined.. 4
" written on the line 4
Stenoscript and steuotypy. .p. 23, 97
Stenotypic connected mat-
ter , 596-601
Straight and curved stems joined
at right angles 20
Superiors 46, 149, 357
T, Stem used after two vowels. . . 249
Table of punctuation and other
marks .- 137
Techniphrases and techni-
graphs 517 519
Tenses, Present and past usually
written with same form in cer-
tain cases 274. 287, 365, 390
Ticks, Breath 27, 28, 76-81, 196-198
" in phrases 421-444
Tive or lively, Words ending in.. 280
Tl and Dl, Words ending in 281
To space between figures 514
Transcribing trials, hearings,
etc 588-590
4JMI
INDEX.
SECTION.
Transcription of a speech, etc., 580
Type, Heavy face page 23, 144, a
Variaerraphs, 389, 395, 39, 41 1
Lists of 397,398, 412
Various expedients 478-571
Vocabulary .. 418
" Prefatory remarks
on the 413-417
Vocagraphs 389, 399-402, 41 1
403,404, 412
Vocalization 45
' of stems having S
circle 98-102
" of the large cir-
cle, 103, .1 109
" of the R and L
hooked stems 164-167
Vowel, protean 166
scale 351
Vowels, alternati ve forms 32
" and consonants, Nature
of 5i
Vowels, Joined 41
" Rough 36
" Smooth 30
" Written in position 355
" " on the line ... 44, 355
SECTION.
W halved 253
' lengthened 285
" Nature of 29
" Semivowel or semiconsonant, 57
Small alternative form
for 60-62, 360
' used f or K 11-14
" "Well" 488
' "What" distinguished 482
Y and upward L 15
" halved ... 253
" lengi hened 25
" Nature of 29
Semivowel or semioonsonant, 5"
" Small alternative form
for 60-62, 360
" used for L 11-14
" before u employed only after
labials and back linguals 63
Z. When louse the stem 121
" Initial circle employed In Z
double consonants 82, 90, a, 93
Zero position 508, 50V
"Phonetic spelling when it comes will coine like the deluge." Anonymous.
A SYSTEM: OK
PHONOSCRIPT AND PHONOTYPY.
BY CHARLES MORRELL,.
Contains (in addition to the explanatory text in common print) tne
pbonoscript and phonotypic alphabets and 14 pages of phonoscript and
phonotypic examples, by means of which any one can, in a few hours, learn
to write and read phonetically with the same facility as in the ordinary
orthography.
The spelling is the same as in phonography. Every phonographer and
spelling reformer, therefore, should be acquainted with this work. Fourth
edition, 108 pages. Paper. Price, .25; postpaid. .28.
who are already acquainted with the above pamphlet may,
if they prefer, write all communications to the Ve on any subject in phono-
script including the address on the envelope. If, however, the address of
the sender is very peculiar it should be in the ordinary spelling.
"To satisfy myself how easy the system is to write I have, as you see,
written this letter in 'it. What impresses me most favorably is that it is so
practical." A. B. Lennox, a superior stenographer.
THE PHONOGRAPHIC MANUAL
BY CHARLES IVLORRELL.
Comprises both the Elementary and Reporting Styles with many im-
provements. Also solves the Aspirate Problem. Adapted to the use of
schools and to self-instruction. 490 pages including an extensive vocabu-
lary and numerous engraved exercises with key. Elegantly bound in cloth
wuh gilt side-title. Price, $2.00; postpaid, &J.10.
Liberal discount to teachers and schools. Circulars free.
Address, THE /WORRELL VE,
CHICAGO, ILL.
TVNews
OpenLibrary